Alcatel BTS Hardware Description

Alcatel GSM

Evolium BTS A9100 Hardware

Description

BTS Document

Sub-System Description

Release B9 from MR4

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

Status RELEASED

Short title EVOL. BTS A9100 HW Desc.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, useand communication of its contents not permitted without writtenauthorization from Alcatel.

BLANK PAGE BREAK

2 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

Contents

Contents

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211.1 Modularity and Common Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221.2 Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

1.2.1 Cabinet Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241.2.2 Cabinet Dimensions and Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

1.3 Subracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281.3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281.3.2 Subrack Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

1.4 Cabinet-Mounted Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291.4.1 Overview of Cabinet-Mounted Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291.4.2 Dimensions and Weight of Cabinet-Mounted Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

1.5 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

2 Configurations - Rack Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372.1 Naming Conventions for the BTS Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382.2 Indoor Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

2.2.1 Indoor Configurations - Standard BTS GSM 900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382.2.2 Indoor Configurations - Low Losses GSM 900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482.2.3 Indoor Configurations - High Power GSM 1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522.2.4 Indoor Configurations - Extended Cell GSM 900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572.2.5 Indoor Configurations - Multiband BTS GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602.2.6 Indoor Configurations - Multiband Cells GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712.2.7 AC Indoor Configurations GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

2.3 A9100 BTS Indoor (G3) Extension with Twin TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812.3.1 G3 MINI - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812.3.2 G3 MINI - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822.3.3 G3 MINI - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822.3.4 G3 MEDI - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832.3.5 G3 MEDI - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842.3.6 G3 MEDI - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

2.4 A9100 BTS Indoor (G4) Extension with Twin TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862.4.1 G4 MINI - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862.4.2 G4 MINI - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872.4.3 G4 MINI - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872.4.4 G4 MEDI - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882.4.5 G4 MEDI - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902.4.6 G4 MEDI - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

2.5 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with Single TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952.5.1 MBI Configurations - Standard BTS GSM 850/900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952.5.2 MBI Configurations - Low Losses GSM 900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1082.5.3 MBI Configurations - High Power GSM 1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122.5.4 MBI Configurations - Extended Cell GSM 900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172.5.5 MBI Configurations - Multiband BTS GSM 900/1800 and GSM 900/1900 . . . 1202.5.6 MBI Configurations - Multiband Cells GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

2.6 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with Twin TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382.6.1 Capacity Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382.6.2 Capacity Mode Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1472.6.3 Multiband & MB Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1532.6.4 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1572.6.5 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div. Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1632.6.6 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 4Rx Div. Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1682.6.7 Extended Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1722.6.8 Extended Cell TxDiv, 4RX Div for outer cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 3 / 910

Contents

2.7 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Mixed Configurations Based on Extension with TwinTRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1772.7.1 MBI3 - 1 sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1782.7.2 MBI3 - 2 sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1792.7.3 MBI3 - 3 sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1802.7.4 MBI5 - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1812.7.5 MBI5 - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1822.7.6 MBI5 - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

2.8 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Mixed Configurations Based on Extension with Twin TRX(Only in MBI5 Cabinet Variant AB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1852.8.1 MBI5 AB variant - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . 1862.8.2 MBI5 AB variant - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . 1872.8.3 MBI5 AB variant - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . 188

2.9 Outdoor Configurations with Single TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1902.9.1 Outdoor Configurations - Standard BTS GSM 900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1902.9.2 Outdoor Configurations - Low Losses GSM 900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2062.9.3 Outdoor Configurations - High Power GSM 1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2102.9.4 Outdoor Configurations - Multiband BTS GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2172.9.5 Outdoor Configurations - Multiband Cells GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

2.10 Outdoor Configurations with Twin TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2362.10.1 Capacity Mode Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2372.10.2 Capacity Mode Low Loss Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2382.10.3 Multiband Configurations - CBO - Multiband 1 + 1 Sector with Twin-TRX . . . . 2392.10.4 Coverage Mode TX Diversity Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2402.10.5 Coverage Mode with TX Diversity Low Loss Configurations - CBO - 1 Sector TX

Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2412.10.6 Coverage Mode TX-Diversity 4 RX Configurations - CBO - 1 Sector TX Diversity

4RX with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2422.11 Outdoor Configurations Based on Extension with Twin TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

2.11.1 CBO 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2442.11.2 CBO 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2452.11.3 CBO DC 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2452.11.4 CBO DC 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

2.12 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2472.12.1 MBO Standard Configurations - GSM 850/900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2472.12.2 MBO Low Losses Configurations - GSM 900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2542.12.3 MBO High Power Configurations - GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2572.12.4 MBO Multiband BTS Configurations - GSM 900/1800 and GSM 900/1900 . . 2612.12.5 MBO Multiband Cells Configurations - GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2682.12.6 MBO Multiband BTS, Multiband Cells Configurations - GSM 850/1800/1900 273

2.13 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Configurations Based on Extension with Twin TRX . 2752.13.1 MBO1 - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2752.13.2 MBO1 - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2762.13.3 MBO1 - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2772.13.4 MBO2 - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2782.13.5 MBO2 - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2792.13.6 MBO2 - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

2.14 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Evolution Configurations with Single TRX . . . . . . . . . 2812.14.1 A9100 MBO1E 1 Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2812.14.2 A9100 MBO1E 2 Sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2812.14.3 A9100 MBO2E 3 Sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2822.14.4 A9100 MBO2E 2 Sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2832.14.5 A9100 MBO2E 3 Sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2832.14.6 A9100 MBO2 4 Sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2842.14.7 A9100 MBO2 6 Sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

2.15 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Evolution Mixed Configurations Based on Extension withTwin TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

4 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

Contents

2.15.1 MBO1E - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2852.15.2 MBO1E - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2862.15.3 MBO1E - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2872.15.4 MBO2E - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2882.15.5 MBO2E - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

2.16 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Evolution Configurations with Twin TRX . . . . . . . . . . . 2902.16.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2902.16.2 Transceiver Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2912.16.3 Cabling Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2922.16.4 Capacity Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2982.16.5 Capacity Mode Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3072.16.6 Multiband & Multiband Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3122.16.7 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3172.16.8 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div. Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3212.16.9 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 4Rx Div. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3262.16.10 Extended Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3312.16.11 Extended Cell TxDiv, 4RX Div for outer cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

3 Indoor Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3353.1 CIMI/CIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

3.1.1 CIMI/CIDI Cabinet Access and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3373.1.2 CIMI/CIDI Cabinet Interconnection Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3403.1.3 CIMI/CIDI Signal Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3413.1.4 CIMI/CIDI DC Supplies Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3463.1.5 CIMI/CIDI Power Supply and Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3473.1.6 CIMI/CIDI Cables and Cable Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3493.1.7 CIMI/CIDI Data and Control Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

3.2 CIMA/CIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3543.2.1 DC Power Supply Variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3553.2.2 AC Power Supply Variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3553.2.3 CIMA/CIDE Cabinet Access and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3563.2.4 CIMA/CIDE Cabinet Interconnection Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3593.2.5 CIMA/CIDE Signal Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3603.2.6 CIMA/CIDE External Power Supply Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3613.2.7 CIMA/CIDE Power Supply and Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3633.2.8 CIMA/CIDE Cables and Cable Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3683.2.9 CIMA/CIDE Data and Control Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

3.3 Multistandard Base Station Indoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3743.3.1 DC Power Supply Variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3753.3.2 AC Power Supply Variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3753.3.3 MBI Cabinet Access and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3763.3.4 MBI3/MBI5 Cabinet Interconnection Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3803.3.5 MBI Signal Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3823.3.6 MBI External Power Supply Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3863.3.7 MBI Power Supply and Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3873.3.8 MBI Cables and Cable Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3933.3.9 MBI Data and Control Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

4 Outdoor Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

4.1 Outdoor Cabinets General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4004.1.1 COME/COMI/COEP with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4014.1.2 CODE/CODI/COEP with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4024.1.3 CPT2 with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4034.1.4 MBO1 with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4044.1.5 MBO1DC with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4054.1.6 MBO1E with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4064.1.7 MBO1EDC with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4074.1.8 MBO1T with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 5 / 910

Contents

4.1.9 MBO2 with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4094.1.10 MBO2E with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4104.1.11 MBO2DC with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4114.1.12 MBO2EDC with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4124.1.13 COBO with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4134.1.14 Side Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4134.1.15 BTS Compartment 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4154.1.16 BTS Compartment 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4164.1.17 MBO1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4174.1.18 MBO1DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4184.1.19 MBO1T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4184.1.20 MBO1E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4194.1.21 MBO1EDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4204.1.22 MBOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4214.1.23 MBOEDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4224.1.24 MBOEE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4224.1.25 MBOEEDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4224.1.26 CBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

4.2 Outdoor Cabinet Access and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4254.2.1 COME/COMI/CODI/CODE Cabinet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4254.2.2 CPT2 Cabinet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4264.2.3 MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO1E Cabinet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4274.2.4 MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E Cabinet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4284.2.5 CBO Cabinet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4304.2.6 Outdoor Cabinet Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

4.3 Outdoor Cabinet Interconnection Panel COMI/COME/CODI/CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4344.3.1 Interconnection Panel - COME/COMI COAR Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4354.3.2 Interconnection Panel - CODE/CODI COAR Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4364.3.3 Interconnection Panel - BTS A9100 Outdoor Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

4.4 Outdoor Cabinet Signal Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4384.4.1 XIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4384.4.2 External Clock Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4414.4.3 Abis Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4414.4.4 Miscellaneous Connections Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

4.5 Outdoor Control Board CPT2/MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E/CBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4424.5.1 Connection Area (COAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4444.5.2 BTSRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4464.5.3 XIOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4474.5.4 RIBAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

4.6 Outdoor Cabinet Power Supply and Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4504.6.1 COME/COMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4504.6.2 CODE/CODI/CPT2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4534.6.3 MBO1/MBO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4554.6.4 MBO1DC/MBO2DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4564.6.5 MBO1T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4574.6.6 MBO1E/MBO2E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4584.6.7 MBO1EDC/MBO2EDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4594.6.8 CBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4604.6.9 Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

4.7 Outdoor Cabinet Lightning Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4634.8 Outdoor Cabinet Cables and Cable Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

4.8.1 Internal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4644.8.2 External Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

4.9 Outdoor Cabinet Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4824.9.1 Outdoor Cabinet DC Power and Alarm Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4824.9.2 Outdoor Cabinet Data and Control Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

6 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

Contents

5 External Battery Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4955.1 External Indoor Battery Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

5.1.1 Mechanical Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4985.1.2 External Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5005.1.3 Battery Cabinet External Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500

5.2 External Battery Cabinet Outdoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5015.2.1 Mechanical Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5025.2.2 External Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5055.2.3 Auxiliary Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5065.2.4 External Battery Cabinet Outdoor Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

6 Standard Telecommunications Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5136.1 STASR General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5146.2 STASR Mechanical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5146.3 STASR Electrical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515

6.3.1 Power Supplies and Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5156.3.2 Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5156.3.3 Connectors and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

7 AC Power Subracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5177.1 SRACDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518

7.1.1 SRACDC Mechanical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5187.1.2 SRACDC Subrack Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5197.1.3 SRACDC Electrical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519

7.2 ACSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5217.2.1 ACSR Mechanical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5217.2.2 ACSR Subrack Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5227.2.3 ACSR Electrical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522

7.3 ASIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5257.3.1 ASIB Mechanical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5257.3.2 ASIB Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5267.3.3 ASIB Electrical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526

8 Station Unit Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

8.1 Introduction to Station Unit Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5308.2 Transmission and Clock Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

8.2.1 Abis Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5348.2.2 Transmission and Clock Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5358.2.3 Station Unit Module Clock Generation Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5358.2.4 Q1 Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

8.3 Base Station Internal Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5378.4 Operations and Maintenance Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538

8.4.1 BTS Control Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5398.4.2 OMU Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5398.4.3 Glue Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539

8.5 Remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5408.6 Station Unit Module Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5418.7 Station Unit Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5428.8 Station Unit Module Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544

9 Transceiver Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5479.1 Single Transceiver Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548

9.1.1 Introduction to Transceiver Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5489.1.2 Digital Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5499.1.3 Analog Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5619.1.4 TRE Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5679.1.5 Transceiver Equipment LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5699.1.6 Transceiver Equipment Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571

9.2 TWIN Transceiver Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 7 / 910

Contents

9.2.1 Introduction to TWIN TRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5739.2.2 Digital Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5749.2.3 Analog Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5779.2.4 TWIN TRA Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5799.2.5 Transceiver Equipments Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5819.2.6 Transceiver Equipments LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5829.2.7 Transceiver Equipments Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

10 Antenna Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58510.1 ANX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586

10.1.1 AN Downlink Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58710.1.2 AN Uplink Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58810.1.3 BTS Control Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58910.1.4 Antenna Network Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59010.1.5 AN Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59210.1.6 ANX LEDs and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59410.1.7 ANX Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59610.1.8 ANX Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597

10.2 ANY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59910.2.1 ANY Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60010.2.2 ANY Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60210.2.3 ANY Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604

10.3 ANC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60610.3.1 ANC Basic Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60610.3.2 ANC Detailed Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60710.3.3 ANC Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60810.3.4 ANC LEDs and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60910.3.5 ANC Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61010.3.6 ANC Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611

10.4 AGC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61510.4.1 AGC Basic Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61510.4.2 AGC Detailed Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61610.4.3 AGC Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61710.4.4 Antenna Network Geran Combiner Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61810.4.5 AGC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62310.4.6 AGC LEDs and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62510.4.7 AGC Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62610.4.8 AGC Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629

10.5 ANB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63210.5.1 ANB Basic Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63210.5.2 ANB Detailed Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63310.5.3 ANB Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63410.5.4 ANB LEDs and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63510.5.5 ANB Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63510.5.6 ANB Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636

10.6 GSM/UMTS Co-Siting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63910.6.1 Diplexer Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64010.6.2 Diplexer Mechanical Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64110.6.3 Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64210.6.4 EMC Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642

11 Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643

11.1 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64411.1.1 Fan Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64511.1.2 Fan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64711.1.3 Top Fan Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650

11.2 HEX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65111.2.1 LED(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652

8 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

Contents

11.2.2 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65211.2.3 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65311.2.4 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653

11.3 HEX3/HEX4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65411.3.1 Blower Rotation Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65511.3.2 Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65511.3.3 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65511.3.4 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65511.3.5 Test Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65511.3.6 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65611.3.7 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65611.3.8 Mechanical Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657

11.4 HEX5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65811.4.1 Blower Rotation Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65911.4.2 Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65911.4.3 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65911.4.4 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65911.4.5 Test Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65911.4.6 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66011.4.7 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66011.4.8 Mechanical Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661

11.5 HEX8/HEX9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66211.5.1 Blower Rotation Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66311.5.2 Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66311.5.3 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66311.5.4 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66311.5.5 Test Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66311.5.6 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66411.5.7 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66411.5.8 Mechanical Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665

11.6 DAC8/DAC9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66611.6.1 Blower Rotation Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66711.6.2 Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66711.6.3 Filter Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66711.6.4 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66711.6.5 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66711.6.6 Test Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66711.6.7 RS232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66811.6.8 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66811.6.9 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66911.6.10 Mechanical Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669

11.7 HEAT2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67011.7.1 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67111.7.2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672



11.10 HEATDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67711.10.1 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67811.10.2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678

12 Power Supplies and Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679

12.1 ACIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68012.1.1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68112.1.2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 9 / 910

Contents

12.2 LPFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68212.3 LPFMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68312.4 LPFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68412.5 LPFU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68612.6 ACDUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687

12.6.1 Technical Charateristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68712.6.2 ACDUE Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688

12.7 ACMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68812.8 ACMUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69012.9 ACSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69012.10 ACUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69112.11 APOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693

12.11.1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69412.11.2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694

12.12 PM08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69512.12.1 PM08 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69512.12.2 PM08 Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69612.12.3 PM08 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698

12.13 PM11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69912.13.1 PM11 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69912.13.2 PM11 Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70012.13.3 PM11 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70212.13.4 PM11 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702

12.14 PM12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70312.14.1 PM12 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70312.14.2 PM12 Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70512.14.3 PM12 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70712.14.4 PM12 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707

12.15 PM18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70812.15.1 Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70812.15.2 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70912.15.3 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71112.15.4 Protection and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71112.15.5 PM18 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71212.15.6 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713

12.16 BCU1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71412.16.1 BCU1 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71412.16.2 BCU1 LEDs, LCD, Alarms and Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71612.16.3 BCU1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718

12.17 BCU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71812.17.1 BCU2 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71812.17.2 BCU2 LEDs, LCD, Alarms and Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72112.17.3 BCU2 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72412.17.4 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724

12.18 BACO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72512.18.1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72612.18.2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726

12.19 BAC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72712.19.1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72812.19.2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728

12.20 ABAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72912.20.1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73012.20.2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730

12.21 ADAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73112.21.1 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73212.21.2 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73312.21.3 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733

10 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

Contents

12.22 ADAM2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73412.22.1 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73512.22.2 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73612.22.3 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736

12.23 ADAM4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73712.23.1 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73812.23.2 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73912.23.3 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739

12.24 BU41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74012.24.1 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74112.24.2 Discharging and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74112.24.3 Front and Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74212.24.4 BU41 Mounted in MBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743

12.25 BU100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74412.25.1 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74512.25.2 Discharging and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74612.25.3 Front and Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746



12.28 BATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75212.28.1 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75212.28.2 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75312.28.3 Discharging and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75312.28.4 RIBATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75412.28.5 Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75412.28.6 Battery Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75412.28.7 Front and Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754

12.29 RIBAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75512.29.1 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75512.29.2 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75612.29.3 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75712.29.4 XBCB Bus Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757

12.30 DCDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75812.30.1 Front and Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75912.30.2 Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76012.30.3 Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760

12.31 DCDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76112.31.1 Front and Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76212.31.2 Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763

12.32 DCDUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76412.33 DCMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76512.34 DCUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

12.34.1 Front and Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76912.34.2 Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770

13 ACRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77113.1 ACRI Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77213.2 ACRI LEDs and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77313.3 ACRI Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

14 Antenna Connector Lightning Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775

14.1 Lightning Protector Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 11 / 910

Contents

14.1.1 Operating Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77614.1.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77614.1.3 Lightning Power Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77714.1.4 Quarter-Wave Stub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778

14.2 Lightning Protector Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77914.3 Lightning Protector Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779

15 Range Extension Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78115.1 Introduction to REK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78215.2 Overall Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783

15.2.1 Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78315.2.2 Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784

15.3 Masthead Amplification Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79015.3.1 Transmit Power Amplifier and Required Attenuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79115.3.2 Receive Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79215.3.3 Output Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79215.3.4 Input Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79215.3.5 RF Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79315.3.6 Supervision Circuits and Alarm Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79415.3.7 Bias Circuit and Lightning Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79415.3.8 Mechanical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795

15.4 Power Distribution Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79615.4.1 Supervision and Alarm Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79715.4.2 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79815.4.3 Reset Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79815.4.4 Bias Circuit and Lightning Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79815.4.5 Mechanical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799

15.5 REK Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80115.5.1 Masthead Amplification Box Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80115.5.2 Power Distribution Unit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802

15.6 REK Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80315.6.1 Cabling Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80315.6.2 Masthead Amplification Box Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80515.6.3 PDU Cabling in Indoor BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80615.6.4 PDU Cabling in Outdoor BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807

15.7 REK Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81015.7.1 Ground Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81015.7.2 Alarm Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81115.7.3 DC Power Supply Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81215.7.4 Jumper Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813

16 Tower-Mounted Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81516.1 Introduction to TMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81616.2 Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818

16.2.1 Tower Mounted Amplifier with External Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81816.2.2 Tower Mounted Amplifier with AGC Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819

16.3 Tower-Mounted Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82016.3.1 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82116.3.2 Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82216.3.3 Mechanical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823

16.4 Power Distribution Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82416.4.1 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82416.4.2 Switches and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82616.4.3 Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82616.4.4 Switching On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82616.4.5 PDU LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826

16.5 Bias T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82716.6 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829

12 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

Contents

16.6.1 Indoor Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82916.6.2 Outdoor Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830

16.7 TMA Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83216.7.1 Indoor/Outdoor BTS Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83216.7.2 Indoor BTS Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83316.7.3 Outdoor BTS Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834

17 Cable Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83517.1 Internal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836

17.1.1 ANCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83617.1.2 ANIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83617.1.3 ANLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83717.1.4 ANOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83717.1.5 BOBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83817.1.6 BOMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84317.1.7 BOMUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84517.1.8 BOMUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84717.1.9 BOSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84917.1.10 BTSRI3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85317.1.11 BTSRI5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85317.1.12 BTSRIMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85417.1.13 BTSRIMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85417.1.14 BTSRIOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85517.1.15 BUMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85617.1.16 BUMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85717.1.17 CA12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85817.1.18 CA-2MMC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85817.1.19 CA-ABIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85917.1.20 CA-ACB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85917.1.21 CA-ACSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86017.1.22 CA-ADABM, CA-ADABP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86017.1.23 CA-ADACM, CA-ADACP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86117.1.24 CA-ADCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86117.1.25 CA-ALPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86217.1.26 CA-APC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86317.1.27 CA-ASMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86417.1.28 CA-BABRM, CA-BABRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86417.1.29 CA-BRCM, CA-BRCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86417.1.30 CA-BTSCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86517.1.31 CA-CSTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86517.1.32 CA-DFUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86617.1.33 CA-GCMW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86717.1.34 CA-Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86717.1.35 CA-Ground1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86717.1.36 CA-Ground2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86817.1.37 CA-H2PC1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86817.1.38 CA-H2PC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86917.1.39 CA-H2PC3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87017.1.40 CA-HOAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87017.1.41 CA-MLBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87117.1.42 CA-MXBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87117.1.43 CA-OHAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87217.1.44 CA-ONCCx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87317.1.45 CA-OSCP1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87617.1.46 CA-OSCP2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87717.1.47 CA-OSCP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87717.1.48 CA-OSPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87817.1.49 CA-PCAN, CA-PCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 13 / 910

Contents

17.1.50 CA-PCOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87817.1.51 CA-PDCM, CA-PDCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87917.1.52 CA-RFMW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87917.1.53 CA-RIBCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87917.1.54 CA-RICPT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88017.1.55 CA-RICPT2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88017.1.56 CA-RIMO1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88117.1.57 CA-RIMO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88117.1.58 CA-SENSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88217.1.59 CA-XBCBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88217.1.60 CA-XIOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88317.1.61 CA-XIOPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88317.1.62 CIMA Bus Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88417.1.63 CIMI Bus Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88517.1.64 RXRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88617.1.65 TXRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886

17.2 External Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88717.2.1 CA01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88717.2.2 CA02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88817.2.3 CA03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88817.2.4 CA04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88917.2.5 CA-CBTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88917.2.6 CA-GC35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89017.2.7 CA-GND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89017.2.8 CA-PC2W16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89017.2.9 CA-PC35BK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89117.2.10 CA-PC35BL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89117.2.11 CA-PCEBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89117.2.12 CA-PCEBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89217.2.13 CA-RIBEB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89217.2.14 CA-RIBEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89317.2.15 OCC23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89417.2.16 OCC33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89517.2.17 SCG2/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89617.2.18 SCG3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89717.2.19 SCM1/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89817.2.20 SCM2/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899

18 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901

18.1 Indoor Climatic and Mechanical Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90218.1.1 Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90218.1.2 Operational Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90218.1.3 Transportation Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90318.1.4 Storage Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904

18.2 Outdoor Climatic and Mechanical Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90518.2.1 Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90518.2.2 Operational Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90518.2.3 Transportation Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90618.2.4 Storage Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907

18.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90818.3.1 EMC Immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90818.3.2 Transient Bursts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90918.3.3 Spurious Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909

18.4 Acoustic Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91018.5 Safety Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 910

14 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

Preface

Preface

Purpose The Evolium BTS A9100 Hardware Description describes the cabinets,subracks, modules and cables of the Evolium BTS A9100.

All equipment, features and functions described in this document may not beavailable on your system.

What’s New In Edition 13Section Tower Mounted Amplifier with AGC Support (Section 16.2.2) wasadded.

Description improvement in Transceiver Equipments LEDs (Section 9.2.6).

In Edition 12The following sections were added:

Performance Characteristics with AGC GSM 900P Module Functional

Variant ’B’ (Section 10.4.7.2)

Performance Characteristics with AGC GSM 900P Module FunctionalVariant ’C’ (Section 10.4.7.3).

Description improvement for filter attenuation in:

ANC Performance Characteristics (Section 10.3.5)

General Performance Characteristics (Section 10.4.7.1).

Information about AGX module was removed.

In Edition 11Section DAC8/DAC9 (Section 11.6) was added.

In Edition 10Description improvement in:

Indoor Cabinets (Section 3)

Outdoor Cabinet Interconnection Panel COMI/COME/CODI/CODE (Section

4.3)

Outdoor Cabinet Signal Interfaces (Section 4.4).

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 15 / 910

Preface

In Edition 09The following sections were added:

A9100 BTS Indoor (G3) Extension with Twin TRX (Section 2.3)

A9100 BTS Indoor (G4) Extension with Twin TRX (Section 2.4)

Multistandard Base Station Indoor Mixed Configurations Based onExtension with Twin TRX (Section 2.7)

Multistandard Base Station Indoor Mixed Configurations Based onExtension with Twin TRX (Only in MBI5 Cabinet Variant AB) (Section 2.8)

Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Configurations Based on Extension

with Twin TRX (Section 2.13)

Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Evolution Mixed Configurations Basedon Extension with Twin TRX (Section 2.15)

Outdoor Configurations Based on Extension with Twin TRX (Section 2.11).

In Edition 08Insertion loss in transmit pass band parameter was corrected in AGCPerformance Characteristics (Section 10.4.7).

Section External Battery Cabinet Outdoor Interfaces (Section 5.2.4) was added.Description improvement in:

LEDs (Section 12.15.2)

PM18 Front View (Section 12.15.5).

In Edition 07Section TWIN Transceiver Equipment (Section 9.2) was added.Description improvement in:

LEDs (Section 12.17.2.1)

BCU2 Front Panel (Section 12.17.3).

In Edition 06Description improvement in:

LEDs (Section 12.17.2.1)

BCU2 Front Panel (Section 12.17.3).

In Edition 05Section DCDUE (Section 12.32) was added.The following sections were updated for MBOxEDC cabinet variant:

Outdoor Cabinets (Section 1.2.1.2)

Available Cabinets and Subracks (Section 1.4.1.1)

Available Cabinet-Mounted Equipment / Modules (Section 1.4.1.2)

Dimensions and Weight of Cabinet-Mounted Equipment (Section 1.4.2)

Outdoor Cabinets General Information (Section 4.1)

16 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

Preface

Outdoor Cabinet Access and Features (Section 4.2)

Outdoor Cabinet Power Supply and Grounding (Section 4.6)

MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO2/MBO2DC Internal Cables (Section 4.8.1.4)

MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO2/MBO2DC (Section 4.9.1.3)

Description improvement in Output Power Parameters (Section 12.15.1.3).

Title formatting for Outdoor Control BoardCPT2/MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2DC/ MBO2E/CBO(Section 4.5)

In Edition 04The document was updated for A9100 MBS Evolution Outdoor.The following sections are added:

HEX8/HEX9 (Section 11.5)

ACDUE (Section 12.6)

BOMUE (Section 17.1.7)

PM18 (Section 12.15)The following sections were updated for MBOxE cabinet variant:


Available Cabinets and Subracks (Section 1.4.1.1)



Outdoor Cabinets General Information (Section 4.1)


Outdoor Cabinet Power Supply and Grounding (Section 4.6)


MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO2/MBO2DC (Section 4.9.1.3)

In Edition 03The following sections were added for Geran Antenna Network:

AGC (Section 10.4)

AGX.

Section ANC (Section 10.3) was updated for ANCGP.

In Edition 02The document was updated with remark that XBCB connector is used forinventory of powered off BTSs at factory level.

Section Transceiver Equipment (Section 9) was updated for new poweramplifier TEPADHE on TADHE.The following sections were added for MBO1T cabinet variant:

ACMUT (Section 12.8)

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 17 / 910

Preface

LPFMT (Section 12.3)

BOMUT (Section 17.1.8)The following sections were updated for MBO1T cabinet variant:




MBO1T (Section 4.1.19)


MBO1T (Section 4.6.5)


MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO2/MBO2DC (Section 4.9.1.3)The following sections were updated for CBO cabinet with permanent DCconnection:




CBO (Section 4.1.26)

CBO (Section 4.6.8)

CBO (Section 4.9.1.5)The following sections were added:

Outdoor CBO - 2x2 (Section 2.9.1.5)

Outdoor CBO - 3x1 (Section 2.9.1.9)

HEAT4 (Section 11.9)

DCDU (Section 12.31).

Section External Battery Cabinet Outdoor (Section 5.2) was updated for newEBCO Design on KNUERR TECORAS basis.

In Edition 01Improvement of Abis interface description in Abis Interface (Section 3.1.3.4).

Introduction of TRX EDGE+ with RF High Power for GSM 900/1800,Transceiver Equipment (Section 9) has been updated due to introduction ofTRX EDGE+ with RF High Power for GSM 900/1800.

Update for widen the AC voltage range of PM12 AC/DC converter from230V+/-15% to 150~280V AC.

Audience This manual is for:

Commissioning personnel

System support engineers

Training department (for reference use)

Any other personnel interested in the Evolium BTS A9100 hardware.

18 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

Preface

Assumed Knowledge The reader must have a general knowledge of telecommunications systems,terminology and BTS functions.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 19 / 910

Preface

20 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

1 Overview

1 Overview

This Overview gives information needed for project managers and foremen, forthe presentation to the customer and site planning.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 21 / 910

1 Overview

1.1 Modularity and Common InformationThe BTS A9100’s modular design allows for omni-directional, sectorizedand multiband configurations. Configurations are built from a small rangeof primary components. This allows BTS installations to be tailored to suitdifferent situations and applications.

The basic building blocks of a BTS A9100 installation are:

Cabinets for indoor and outdoor installations

Four types of subrack. SRACDC, ACSR, and ASIB house the AC/DCpower modules; STASR houses the telecommunications modules and

AC/DC power modules

A number of telecommunications modules

Power supply modules

Modules for temperature control.

Additional cabinet equipment is required, such as fans, power supplies, heatexchangers, optional batteries and cables.

The arrangement of the subracks in the cabinets takes into account therequirements for:

Thermal cooling, achieved with forced-air cooling

Minimization of floor space, achieved with back-to-back, back-to-wall or

side-to-side cabinet installations

Ease of access and maintenance, from the front of the cabinets

Future system expansion.

22 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

1 Overview

Configurations Based on those building blocks all possible BTS A9100 configurations areassembled, see Configurations - Rack Layouts (Section 2).

OperatingTemperatures

All BTS A9100 equipment operates in a temperature-controlled environment. Theinternal temperature of enclosures is regulated with a combination of heaters,heat exchangers and cooling fans, depending on the type of installation required.Environmental conditions, such as the availability of an indoor or outdoor site andclimate, are taken into consideration when planning an installation.

Grounding Grounding of BTS A9100 equipment installations is maintained throughout, via adistributed earthing system which interconnects all metallic parts with the cabinetground. A cabinet bus bar (or a cableform equivalent) is an important part of thisearthing system. The bus bar complies with European standard EN60950 V2.Equipment cabinets must be connected to a suitable external system groundat the installation site.

Units ofMeasurement

Standard TEP units of measurement are used for BTS A9100 equipment. Metricand imperial equivalents for the TEP units are as follows:

1 HU = 44.45 mm (1.75 inches)

1 WU = 5.08 mm (0.20 inches).

Standards All BTS A9100 equipment complies with the following ETSs:

ETS 300 342-2 EMC for European Digital Cellular Telecommunications Systems

GSM Recommendation for Base Station Equipment 11.21, prETS300.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 23 / 910

1 Overview

1.2 Cabinets

1.2.1 Cabinet Overview

The type of cabinet used depends on a number of different items required for aparticular installation. Cabinet types and requirements are described below for:

Indoor cabinets

Outdoor cabinets

Configurations

Indoor power requirements

Outdoor power requirements

Cabling.

1.2.1.1 Indoor CabinetsThe available indoor cabinets, and the number of subracks they can contain,are:

CIMI - two STASRs

CIDI - two STASRs

CIMA - five STASRs, or three STASRs and one ASIB

CIDE - five STASRs, or four STASRs and a battery area for BU41s or

BU100s

MBI3 - three STASRs, or two STASRs and a battery area for BU101s

MBI5 - five STASRs, or four STASRs and a battery area for BU101s.

24 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

1 Overview

1.2.1.2 Outdoor CabinetsThe available outdoor cabinets, and the number of subracks they can contain,are:

COMI - two STASRs and one SRACDC or ACSR and a battery area forBU41s or BU100s and MV area

COME - five STASRs and one SRACDC or ACSR and a battery area for

BU41s or BU100s and MV area

CODI - four STASRs and a battery area for BU41s or BU100s and MV area

CODE - seven STASRs and a battery area for BU41s or BU100s and

MV area

CPT2 - five STASRs and a battery area for BU41s or BU100s

MBO1 - four STASRs and a battery area for BU41s or BU101s

MBO1DC - three STASRs and an MW area

MBO1T - three STASRs and an MW area

MBO1E - three STASRs, power supplies subrack and an optional areafor batteries or microwave

MBO1EDC - three STASRs and an optional area for microwave

MBO2 - eight STASRs and a battery area for BU41s or BU101s

MBO2DC - six STASRs and a MW area

MBO2E - six STASRs, power supplies subrack and an optional area forbatteries or microwave

MBO2EDC - six STASRs and an optional area for microwave

CBO - two STASRs with a MW area and optional BATS for the AC variant.

An additional cabinet, COEP, is required when upgrading a COMI to thefunctionality of a COME, or when upgrading a CODI to the functionality ofa CODE.

1.2.1.3 Indoor Power RequirementsThe CIMI/CIDI, CIMA/CIDE, and MBI3/MBI5 cabinets are designed to operatefrom the following external supply voltages:

CIMI and CIMA DC external supply variant:

0/ -48 VDC

0/ -60 VDC.

CIMA/CIDE and MBI3/MBI5 AC external supply variant, 230 VAC 1 ØThe AC input is converted to 0/ -48 VDC nom. for use within the cabinets.In the event of a mains failure, an optional battery backup unit BU41 orBU100 can be used to provide the DC supply voltage.

For more information about the CIMI/CIDI and CIMA/CIDE, refer to CIMI/CIDI(Section 3.1) and CIMA/CIDE (Section 3.2), respectively. For more informationabout the BU41 and BU100, refer to BU41 (Section 12.24) and BU100 (Section12.25) respectively.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 25 / 910

1 Overview

1.2.1.4 Outdoor Power RequirementsThe COMI/CODI, COME/CODE, CPT2, and MBO1/MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2Ecabinets are designed to operate from external AC mains supplies:

230 VAC 1Ø

400 VAC 3Ø.

The CBO and MBO1T cabinet are designed to operate from external ACmains supplies 230 VAC 1Ø.

The AC input is converted to 0/ -48 VDC nom. for use within the cabinets.

In the event of a mains failure, an optional battery backup unit, BU41 or BU100,can be used to provide the DC supply voltage.

The CBO DC and MBO1DC/MBO2DC cabinets are designed to operate fromexternal DC mains supplies. The 0/ -48 VDC nom. input is distributed for usewithin the cabinets.

For more information about the COMI/CODI, COME/CODE, CPT2, CBO andMBO1/MBO2, refer to Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4). For more informationabout the BU41, BU100 and BU101, refer to BU41 (Section 12.24), BU100(Section 12.25) and BU101 (Section 12.26) respectively.

1.2.1.5 CablingThe cable sets supplied with the BTS A9100 fall into the following categories:

Power

Abis links

Internal interconnection.

26 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

1 Overview

1.2.2 Cabinet Dimensions and Weight

The following table shows the overall dimensions and the weight of all cabinets.

CabinetHeight Overall/Usable

Width Overall/Usable Depth Weight

CIMI/CIDI 920 mm/ 16 HU 600 mm/ 84 WU 450mm

115 kg fully equipped

CIMA/CIDE 1940 mm/ 38 HU 600 mm/ 84 WU 450mm

270 kg fully equipped(AC and DC)

COMI/CODI

(side compartment)

1500 mm/ 24 HU

24 HU = 17 HU forequipment + 7 HUfor battery

1200 mm/ 2 x 84 WU 700mm

200 kg empty (exceptfor HEX2 and HEAT2)

COME/CODE(compartment 1 and 2)

(side compartment)

1500 mm/ 24 HU

24 HU = 17 HU forequipment + 7 HUfor batteries

1800 mm/ 3 x 84 WU 700mm

295 kg empty (exceptfor HEX2 and HEAT2)

COEP 1500 mm/ 24 HU 600 mm/ 84 WU 700mm

95 kg empty (except forHEX2 and HEAT2)

CPT2 1500 mm/ 24 HU 1200 mm/ 2 x 84 WU 700mm

380 kg fully equipped w/o battery

MBI3 1300 mm/ 23 HU 600 mm/ 84 WU 450mm


MBI5 1940 mm/ 38 HU 600 mm/ 84 WU 450mm


MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T 1500 mm/ 24 HU 825 mm/ 162 WU 750mm

95 kg not equipped w/ obattery

MBO1E 1610 mm/26 HU 940 mm/ 185 WU 750mm

90 kg for empty cabinet

MBO2/MBO2DC 1500 mm/ 24 HU 1500 mm/ 295 WU 750mm

175 kg not equipped w/o battery

MBO2E 1610 mm/26 HU 1550 mm/ 305 WU 750mm

150 kg for empty cabinet

CBO/CBO DC 900 mm/ 18 HU 720 mm/ 84 WU 700mm

150 kg fully equipped

Table 1: Cabinets, Dimensions and Weight

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 27 / 910

1 Overview

1.3 Subracks

1.3.1 Overview

The subracks are constructed from two steel-chromate side plates and fivemetal extrusions which form a frame box. Attached to the frame box are thebackplane module and FANU guide rails, and other components such as aground connector. The subrack is equipped with six integral lugs which enableit to be fixed to the equipment rack with self-tapping screws.

The subracks conform to ETSI standard IEC297-3 for 19 inchtelecommunications equipment practice.

The subrack plug-in modules are electrically connected by inserting them intothe backplane connectors along plastic guide rails. The connectors haveguide-pins which ensure the module and subrack connectors mate together,without risk of bending the connector pins.

The plug-in modules are secured in the subrack with Camloc quarter-turnfasteners.

There are four types of subrack:

STASRThe STASR is the basic subrack used for all indoor and outdoor applications.It can contain a mixture of telecommunications and power supply plug-inmodules. When the subrack contains TREs additional components, theFANU and FACB, are attached to the subrack.For more information about the STASR, refer to StandardTelecommunications Subrack (Section 6).

SRACDCThe SRACDC is an AC power supply subrack for BTS A9100 outdoorconfigurations. For more information about the SRACDC, refer to SRACDC(Section 7.1).

ACSRThe ACSR is an AC power supply subrack used for BTS A9100 outdoorconfigurations. For more information about the ACSR, refer to ACSR(Section 7.2).

ASIBThe ASIB is only used for indoor applications. For more information aboutthe ASIB, refer to ASIB (Section 7.3).

1.3.2 Subrack Dimensions

The following table shows the overall dimensions of all the subracks. They arethe same for STASR, SRACDC, ACSR and ASIB.

Height (TEP/ mm) Width (TEP/ mm) Depth (mm)

7 HU/ 311.5

(= 6 HU for modules + 1 HU for fans)

84 WU/ 431.8 304.4

Table 2: Subracks, Dimensions

28 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

1 Overview

1.4 Cabinet-Mounted Equipment

1.4.1 Overview of Cabinet-Mounted Equipment

The cabinet-mounted equipment and modules available for the BTS A9100are listed in the following tables. The tables also provide a reference to thesections that describe each item.

1.4.1.1 Available Cabinets and SubracksThe cabinet and subracks available for the BTS A9100 are listed below.

Mnemonic Description Part No. For More Information...

ACSR AC Subrack for PM11 3BK 08712 ACSR (Section 7.2)

ASIB AC/DC Subrack Individual Battery 3BK 08676 ASIB (Section 7.3)

CIDE Cabinet Indoor Medi 3BK 25098 CIMA/CIDE (Section 3.2)

CIDI Cabinet Indoor Mini 3BK 25099 CIMI/CIDI (Section 3.1)

CIMA Cabinet Indoor Medi 3BK 07181 CIMA/CIDE (Section 3.2)

CIMI Cabinet Indoor Mini 3BK 07605 CIMI/CIDI (Section 3.1)

CODE Cabinet Outdoor Medi 3BK 25100 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)

CODI Cabinet Outdoor Mini 3BK 25101 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)

COEP Cabinet Outdoor Expanding Part 3BK 07979 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)

COME Cabinet Outdoor Medi 3BK 07606 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)

COMI Cabinet Outdoor Mini 3BK 07607 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)

CPT2 Compact Outdoor, 2 Doors 3BK 25468 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)

MBI3 Multistandard BTS Indoor, 1 Door 3BK 25964 Multistandard Base StationIndoor (Section 3.3)

MBI5 Multistandard BTS Indoor, 2 Doors 3BK 25965 Multistandard Base StationIndoor (Section 3.3)

MBO1 Multistandard BTS Outdoor, 1 Door 3BK 25673 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)

MBO1E/MBO1EDCMultistandard BTS Evolution Outdoor, 1Door

3BK 27263 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)

MBO2 Multistandard BTS Outdoor, 2 Doors 3BK 25675 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)

MBO2E/MBO2EDCMultistandard BTS Evolution Outdoor, 2Doors


MBOE Extension Outdoor Cabinet Multistandard 3BK 25677 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)

MBOEE/MBOEEDCExtension Outdoor Evolution CabinetMultistandard


MBO1DC Multistandard BTS DC Outdoor, 1 Door 3BK 26612 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)

MBO2DC Multistandard BTS DC Outdoor, 2 Doors 3BK 26614 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)

MBOEDC Extension Outdoor DC CabinetMultistandard


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 29 / 910

1 Overview


MBO1T Multistandard BTS Outdoor Tropical, 1Door


SRACDC AC/DC Subrack Outdoor 3BK 07987 SRACDC (Section 7.1)

STASR Standard Communications Subrack 3BK 07193 Standard TelecommunicationsSubrack (Section 6)

CBO Compact BTS Outdoor 3BK 26320 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)

CBO DC Compact BTS Outdoor DC powered 3BK 27013 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)

Table 3: Cabinet and Subrack Part Numbers

1.4.1.2 Available Cabinet-Mounted Equipment / ModulesThe cabinet-mounted equipment and modules available for the BTS A9100 arelisted in the following table.


ABAC AC Indoor Battery Control Unit 3BK 08673 ABAC (Section 12.20)

ACDUE AC Distribution Unit Evolution 3BK 27266 ACDUE (Section 12.6)

ACIB AC Interface Box 3BK 07989 ACIB (Section 12.1)

ACRI AC Remote Inventory 3BK 07941 ACRI (Section 13)

ACMU AC Switch Unit Multistandard 3BK 25785 ACMU (Section 12.7)

ACMUT AC Distribution Unit Tropical 3BK 27140 ACMUT (Section 12.8)

ACSU AC Switch Unit 3BK 25126 ACSU (Section 12.9)

ACUC AC Connection Unit Compact 3BK 26323 ACUC (Section 12.10)

ADAM Adapter Module 3BK 25025 ADAM (Section 12.21)

ADAM2 Adapter Module 2 3BK 25475 ADAM2 (Section 12.22)

ADAM4 Adapter Module 4 3BK 25997 ADAM4 (Section 12.23)

AFIP AC Indoor Filter Panel 3BK 08674 CIMA/CIDE Power Supply andGrounding (Section 3.2.7)

ANCD Antenna Network Combined GSM 1800Module

3BK 08995 ANC (Section 10.3)

ANCG Antenna Network Combined GSM 900Module


ANCL Antenna Network Combined GSM 850Module


30 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

1 Overview


ANCP Antenna Network Combined GSM 1900Module


ANXD Antenna Network X GSM 1800 Module 3BK 07241 ANX (Section 10.1)

ANXG Antenna Network X GSM 900 Module 3BK 07232 ANX (Section 10.1)

ANXP Antenna Network GSM 1900 Module 3BK 08459 ANX (Section 10.1)

ANYD Antenna Network Y GSM 1800 Module 3BK 07245 ANY (Section 10.2)

ANYG Antenna Network Y GSM 900 Module 3BK 07237 ANY (Section 10.2)

ANYL Antenna Network Y GSM 850 Module 3BK 25903 ANY (Section 10.2)

ANYP Antenna Network Y GSM 1900 Module 3BK 08465 ANY (Section 10.2)

APOD AC Indoor Power Distribution Panel 3BK 08675 APOD (Section 12.11)

BACO Battery Connection Box 3BK 07988AA

BACO (Section 12.18)

BAC2 Battery Connection Box 3BK 07988AB

BAC2 (Section 12.19)

BATS Small Battery Unit 3BK 25848 BATS (Section 12.28)

BCU1 Battery Control Unit 1 3BK 06784 BCU1 (Section 12.16)

BCU2 Battery Control Unit 2 3BK 08714 BCU2 (Section 12.17)

BU41 Battery Unit 40 Ah 3BK 08035 BU41 (Section 12.24)

BU100 Battery Unit 100 Ah 3BK 08932 BU100 (Section 12.25)

BU101 Battery Unit 100 Ah for using in MBO 3BK 25854 BU101 (Section 12.26)

DAC8 Direct Air Cooling 8 used in MBOEE 3BK 27794 DAC8/DAC9 (Section 11.6)

DAC9 Direct Air Cooling 9 used in MBO1E 3BK 27795 DAC8/DAC9 (Section 11.6)

DCDP DC Distribution Panel 3BK 07990 DCDP (Section 12.30)

DCDU DC Distribution Unit 3BK 27015 DCDU (Section 12.31)

DCDUE DC Distribution Unit Evolution 3BK 27267 DCDUE (Section 12.32)

DCMU DC Connection Unit Multistandard 3BK 26618 DCMU (Section 12.33)

DCUC DC Distribution Unit Compact 3BK 26324 DCUC (Section 12.34)

FACB Fan Control Board 3BK 07202 Cooling System (Section 11.1)

FANU Fan Unit 3BK 07205 Cooling System (Section 11.1)

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 31 / 910

1 Overview


HEAT2 Heating Unit 2 3BK 08075 HEAT2 (Section 11.7)

HEAT3 Heating Unit 3 3BK 26343 HEAT3 (Section 11.8)

HEATDC Heating Unit DC 3BK 26619 HEATDC (Section 11.10)

HEX2 Heat Exchanger 2 3BK 07978 HEX2 (Section 11.2)

HEX3 Heat Exchanger 3 for using in MBOE 3BK 25659 HEX3/HEX4 (Section 11.3)

HEX4 Heat Exchanger 4 for using in MBO1 3BK 25660 HEX3/HEX4 (Section 11.3)

HEX5 Heat Exchanger 5 for using in CBO 3BK 26325 HEX5 (Section 11.4)

HEX8 Heat Exchanger 8 for using in MBOEE 3BK 27148 HEX8/HEX9 (Section 11.5)

HEX9 Heat Exchanger 9 for using in MBO1E 3BK 27149 HEX8/HEX9 (Section 11.5)

LPFC Lightning Protection and Filter UnitCompact

3BK 26322 LPFC (Section 12.2)

LPFMT Lightning Protection and Filter Unit Tropical 3BK 27141 LPFMT (Section 12.3)

LPFM Lightning Protection and Filter UnitMultistandard

3BK 25786 LPFM (Section 12.4)

LPFU Lightning Protection and Filter Unit 3BK 25157 LPFU (Section 12.5)

PM08 Power Module 800 W 3BK 06783 PM08 (Section 12.12)




RIBAT Remote Inventory Battery 3BK 25134 RIBAT (Section 12.29)

SUMA Station Unit Module Advanced 3BK 08925 Station Unit Modules (Section8)

SUMP Station Unit Module PCM 3BK 07224 Station Unit Modules (Section8)

TADH Transceiver Module GSM 1800 High Power 3BK 25373 Transceiver Equipment(Section 9)

TAGH Transceiver Module GSM 900 High Power 3BK 26154 Transceiver Equipment(Section 9)

TRAD Transceiver Module GSM 1800 MediumPower

3BK 08980 Transceiver Equipment(Section 9)

TRADE Transceiver Module GSM 1800 MediumPower Enhanced 8-PSK power


32 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

1 Overview


TRAG Transceiver Module GSM 900 MediumPower


TRAGE Transceiver Module GSM 900 MediumPower Enhanced 8-PSK power


TRAL Transceiver Module GSM 850 MediumPower


TRAP Transceiver Module GSM 1900 MediumPower


TRDH Transceiver Module GSM 1800 High Power 3BK 07723 Transceiver Equipment(Section 9)

TRDM Transceiver Module GSM 1800 MediumPower


TRGM Transceiver Module GSM 900 MediumPower


TRPM Transceiver Module GSM 1900 3BK 08556 Transceiver Equipment(Section 9)

Table 4: Equipment and Module Part Numbers

1.4.1.3 Module ReplacementFor detailed information on how to replace modules in the BTS A9100, see theEvolium BTS A9100/A9110 Corrective Maintenance Handbook.

1.4.2 Dimensions and Weight of Cabinet-Mounted Equipment

The following table shows the overall dimensions and weight of heavycabinet-mounted equipment.

Module

Height

TEP/ mm

Width

TEP/ mm

Depth

mm Weight

ABAC 3 HU/ 128 44 WU/ 223 285 -

ACIB 3 HU/ 128 28 WU/ 141.6 285 -

ACMU -/172 -/237 127 -

ACMUT -/172 -/217 125 -

ACRI 3 HU/ 128 6 WU/ 30 285 -

ACUC -/ 135 -/ 150 146 -

ADAM -/ 39 42 WU/ 213 280 -

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 33 / 910

1 Overview

Module

Height

TEP/ mm

Width

TEP/ mm

Depth

mm Weight

ADAM2 -/ 39 28 WU/ 142 280 -

ADAM4 -/ 39 56 WU/ 284 280 -

ANC 6 HU/ 265 28 WU/ 142 298 -

ANX 6 HU/ 265 31 WU/ 160 298 -

ANY 6 HU/ 265 10 WU/ 52 298 -

APOD 3 HU/ 128 34 WU/ 172 285 -

BACO 3 HU/ 128 50 WU/ 253 285 -

BAC2 6 HU/ 265 14 WU/ 71 285 -

BATS 6 HU/ 265 28 WU/ 142 280 15 kg

BCU1 3 HU/ 128 9 WU/ 45.7 280 -

BCU2 6 HU/ 265 10 WU/ 51 280 -

BU41 -/ 200 -/ 250 200 50 kg

BU100 -/ 234 -/ 250 400 120 kg

BU101 -/ 234 -/ 250 400 120 kg

DCDP 2 HU/ 89 95 WU/ 482.6 152.5 -

DCDU -/227 -/120 147 -

DCDUE -

DCMU -/ 172 -/ 237 125 -

DCUC -/ 135 -/ 150 146 -

FACB -/ 95 -/ 55 - -

FANU 1 HU/ 44 26 WU/ 133 298 -

HEAT -/ 80 -/ 234.5 140 -

HEAT3 1 HU/ 44 19 WU/ 482 350 -

HEAT4 -/60 -/445 350 -

HEATDC -/ 101 -/ 170 -/ 145 -

HEX2 -/ 1045 -/ 440 152 24 kg

HEX3 -/ 1150 -/ 450 150 24 kg

34 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

1 Overview

Module

Height

TEP/ mm

Width

TEP/ mm

Depth

mm Weight

HEX4 -/ 1150 -/ 600 150 28 kg

HEX5 -/ 770 -/ 450 130 16 kg

LPFM -/261 -/181 75 -

LPFMT -/261 -/181 75 -

LPQD n/a n/a n/a -

LPQG n/a n/a n/a -

LPQM n/a n/a n/a -

LPQP n/a n/a n/a -

PM08 3 HU/ 128 15 WU/ 76 280 -

PM11 6 HU/ 265 15 WU/ 76 280 -

PM12 -/ 240 14 WU/ 71 280 -

SUMP 6 HU/ 265 10 WU/ 52 298 -

SUMA 6 HU/ 265 10 WU/ 52 298 -

TRE 6 HU/ 265 21 WU/ 106 298 -

6 HU/ 265 28 WU/ 142 298 -

Table 5: Cabinet-Mounted Equipment, Dimensions and Weight

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 35 / 910

1 Overview

1.5 CablesMost BTS A9100 cables are common to both the mini and medi cabinets.The number of standard RF cables that are used varies according to theconfiguration.

The cabling consists of both:

Discrete cables, which have the designation CA

Cable sets, which have the designation CS.

The grouping of certain cables into cable sets can provide advantages in termsof ease of installation or manufacturing.

The BTS A9100 cables are categorized as internal and external cables.

Internal CablesThese are the cables and cable sets that are internal to the BTS. Theyinterconnect the various modules and are necessary for all configurations.

External Cables

These are the cables that connect the BTS A9100 to:

The customer’s 2 Mbit/s PCM distribution board

The customer’s 0/ -48 V DC power source and ground point (indoor

BTS A9100s)

The BTS Terminal

Another BTS for clock synchronization.

36 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

2 Configurations - Rack Layouts


This chapter shows all possible configurations of the rack layouts for thefollowing BTS types.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 37 / 910


2.1 Naming Conventions for the BTS ConfigurationsIn the following sections all possible configurations are listed in figures, sortedby the different types of BTSs.

The naming conventions used for the BTS configurations are listed in thefollowing table.

1x1...4 Means 1 sector with up to 4 TREs

3x1...2 Means 3 sectors with up to 2 TRXs per sector

1x1...2/ 1x1...2 Means Multiband configuration, with 1 sector andup to 2 TREs in Band 1, and 1 sector and up to2 TREs in Band 2

1x(...2/ ...2) Means Multiband configuration, with 1 sector andup to 2 TREs in each band

Table 6: Naming Conventions Used for the BTS Configurations

2.2 Indoor Configurations

2.2.1 Indoor Configurations - Standard BTS GSM 900/1800/1900

The following configurations are valid for GSM 900/1800/1900 unless otherwisestated.

2.2.1.1 Indoor MINI - 1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MINI - 1x1...4configuration.

FANU

FANU FANU

TRE4

SUM ANY ANX

TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

Stage 1

Top Stage

Dummy Panels

− The BTS has n TREs

− If no ANY (2 TREs max.): TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX

FANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

ANC 1

Stage 1

Empty space

IDU 2

Microwave IDU(Optional)

Connection Area

ANC 1

TRE 1 2 3 4

a b( Sector 1 )

The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs

SUMA

IDU 1

FANU

FANU FANU

Figure 1: Indoor MINI - 1x1...4 Configuration

38 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.2.1.2 Indoor MINI - 2x1...2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MINI - 2x1...2configuration.

FANU FANU FANU

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

Stage 1

Dummy Panels

ANXSUM − Sector 1 has n TREs

− Sector 2 has p TREs

ANX

( Sector 2 ) ( Sector 1 )

FANU FANU FANUTop Stage

FANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

ANC 1

Stage 1Empty space

IDU 1


Connection Area

ANC 1

TRE 1 2

a b

ANC 2

( Sector 1 )( Sector 2 )

ANC 2

a b

TRE 1 2

The BTS has 2 sectors with respectively n and p TREs

SUMA

On each ANC:The two bridges will be removedat installation time (On site)

Figure 2: Indoor MINI - 2x1...2 Configuration

2.2.1.3 Indoor MINI - 1x1...3 + 1x1The following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MINI - 1x1...3 + 1x1configuration.

FANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE1

ANC 1

Stage 1

Empty space

IDU 1


Connection Area

ANC 1

TRE 1 2 3

a bANC 2

( Sector 1 )( Sector 2 )ANC 2

a b

TRE 1

The BTS has 2 sectors withrespectively n and p TREs (p=1)

SUMA


Figure 3: Indoor MINI - 1x1...3 + 1x1 Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 39 / 910


2.2.1.4 Indoor MINI - 3x1The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MINI - 3x1configuration.

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

FANU FANU FANU

TRE

TRE

TRE

ANX( Sector 1 )

ANX

ANX( Sector 3 )

( Sector 2 )SUM

The BTS has 3 TREs,one per sector

FANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE1TRE1

ANC 1

Empty space

Connection Area

ANC 1

TRE 1

a bANC 2


a b

TRE 1

The BTS has 3 sectors with1 TRE each

ANC 3

( Sector 3 )ANC 3

a b

TRE 1

SUMA


Figure 4: Indoor MINI - 3x1 Configuration

40 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.2.1.5 Indoor MEDI - 1x1...8The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI - 1x1...8configuration. (The ANX version is only valid for GSM 900/1800).Top Stage

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

FANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8

ANXANYANYANYSUM

FANU FANU

1 23

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3


− If no ANY (2 TREs max.),TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX

− If ANY2 only:ANY2 is connected to ANX

− ANY filling order:ANY2

then ANY1then ANY3

− If the BTS has 6 TREs max.,

(TRE6) (TRE5)

the numbering scheme isa little bit different for:TRE5 and TRE6.

Dummy Panels

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

TRE7TRE8TRE5TRE6

ANCANYANY2 1

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

The BTS has n TREs

If no ANY (4 TREs maximum),TRE1 to TRE4 are connected to ANC

Empty space

Connection Area

IDU 1 IDU 2

ANCa b

ANY 1 ANY 2

TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


SUMA

Figure 5: Indoor MEDI - 1x1...8 Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 41 / 910


2.2.1.6 Indoor MEDI - 1x2...8 (GSM 1900; ANX version)The following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MEDI - 1x2...8configuration (GSM 1900; ANX version).

The BTS has n TRE

a b

ANY1

ANX

ANY2 ANY3

TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Connection Area

Stage 3

IDU 1 IDU2

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

TRE6 TRE5 TRE8 TRE7

Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU


ANXANY2

ANY1

ANY3

SUMA

− ANY filling order:

then ANY3then ANY1

ANY2

− If ANY2 only:ANY2 connected to ANX

− If no ANY (2 TREs max.):TRE1 and 2 connected to ANX

Empty space


Figure 6: Indoor MEDI - 1x2...8 Configuration (GSM 1900; ANX version)

42 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.2.1.7 Indoor MEDI - 1x9...12This configuration is the logical extension of the 1x2...8 configuration with aminimum of nine TREs. The following figure shows the rack layouts of theIndoor MEDI - 1x9...12 configuration.

Note: Restrictions

For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 1x11...12 with 45 W at + 40� C or with 28 W at + 45� C.

Configurations up to 1x10 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45� C.

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

FANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8

ANXANYANYANYSUM

FANU FANU

1 23

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Top Stage


(TRE6) (TRE5)

Dummy Panels

ANX

TRE9TRE10TRE11TRE12

ANYANY

1

24 5

− Both ANXs are set to thesame sector number

FANU FANU FANU

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8

ANC 1ANYANY2 1

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

The BTS has n TREs

Empty space

Connection Area

IDU 1 IDU 2

ANC 1a b

ANY 1 ANY 2

TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


ANC 2

TRE9TRE10TRE11TRE12

FANU FANU FANU

ANC 2a b

TRE 9 10 11 12SUMA


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 43 / 910


2.2.1.8 Indoor MEDI - 2x1...6The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI - 2x1...6configuration.

Note: Restrictions

For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 2x6 with 45 W at + 40� C or with 28 W at + 45� C.

Configurations up to 2x1...5 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45� C.

FANUFANUFANU

FANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

TRE5TRE6

ANXANY2ANY1ANY3SUM

FANU FANU

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Top Stage

ANX

TRE5TRE6

(Sector 1)

(Sector 2)

TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

− If no ANY (2 TREs max.):TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX


then ANY1then ANY3

For each sector:

Sector 1 has n TREsSector 2 has p TREs

Dummy PanelsFANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

TRE5TRE6

Stage 2

Stage 3

ANX

TRE5TRE6

(Sector 2)

TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

TRE1TRE2

TRE5TRE6

ANC 1ANY1

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

The BTS has 2 sectors with

Empty space

Connection Area

IDU 1

ANC 1a b

ANY1

TRE 1 2 3 4


( Sector 1 )

ANC 2( Sector 2 )

ANY3

TRE3TRE4TRE5TRE6

FANU FANU FANU

respectively n and p TREs

SUMA

ANY4

ANY2

ANY2

5 6

ANC 2a b

ANY3

TRE 1 2 3 4

ANY4

5 6

ANY2ANY1ANY3


44 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.2.1.9 Indoor MEDI - 1x1...8 + 1x1...4 (GSM 900/1800)The following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MEDI - 1x1...8 +1x1...4 configuration.

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8

ANC 1(Sector 1)

ANYANY2 1

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3


Empty space

Connection Area

IDU 1 IDU 2

ANC 1a b

ANY 1 ANY 2

TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


ANC 2(Sector 2)

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

FANU FANU FANU

ANC 2a b

TRE 1 2 3 4SUMA

Figure 9: Indoor MEDI - 1x1...8 + 1x1...4 Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 45 / 910


2.2.1.10 Indoor MEDI - 3x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI - 3x1...4. (TheANX version is only valid for GSM 900/1800).

Note: Restrictions



FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

FANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

ANXANYSUM

FANU FANU

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Top Stage

ANXANY

(Sector 1)

(Sector 2)

TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

For each sector:TRE1 and TRE2 are connected

ANX(Sector 3)

ANY

TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4


Sector 3 has q TREs

Dummy Panels

to ANX if 2 TREs only (no ANY)

IDU 1 IDU 2

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

ANC 1

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3


Empty space

Connection Area

ANC 1a b


( Sector 1 )

ANC 2( Sector 2 )

TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4

FANU FANU FANU

respectively n, p and q TREs

ANC 3( Sector 3 ) TRE 1 2 3 4

ANC 2a b

TRE 1 2 3 4

ANC 3a b

TRE 1 2 3 4

SUMA


46 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.2.1.11 Indoor MEDI - 3x1...4 (GSM 1900; ANX version)The following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MEDI - 3x1...4configuration.

Note: Restrictions



The BTS has 3 sectors with respectively n, p and q TREs

a b

ANY2

ANX1

TRE 1 2 3 4

a b

ANY2

ANX2

TRE 1 2 3 4

a b

ANY3

ANX3

TRE 1 2 3 4

Connection Area

Stage 3

IDU1 IDU2

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3



FANU FANU FANU

ANX1 (Sector 1)

ANX2 (Sector 2)

ANX3 (Sector 3)

ANY1

ANY2ANY3

SUMA

Empty space

Microwave IDU (Optional)

TRE1 and 2 connected to ANX if 2 TREs only (no ANY)

For each sector,

Figure 11: Indoor MEDI - 3x1...4 Configuration (GSM 1900; ANX version)

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 47 / 910


2.2.2 Indoor Configurations - Low Losses GSM 900/1800/1900

2.2.2.1 Indoor MEDI - 1x3...8 - Low LossesThe following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI - 1x3...8 -Low Losses configuration.

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

FANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

TRE5TRE6

TRE7TRE8

ANX2

ANY1

ANY2

SUM

FANU FANU

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Top Stage


Dummy Panels

ANX1

and one sector

− ANX1 and ANX2 are set tothe same sector number

Extension from1x6 to 1x8

− ANY1 only present if n>6or if ANY Pre−equipment

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE7TRE8

TRE3TRE4

ANC1

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3


Empty space

Connection Area

IDU1 IDU2

ANC1a b

TRE 1 2 7 8


ANC2

ANC2a b

Both ANCs are set to thesame sector number

SUMA

FANUFANUFANU

TRE5TRE6

TRE 3 4 5 6


In case of 1x3...4,on each ANC,The bridges will be removedat installation (on site)if no more than 2 TREs are onnected to them

Figure 12: Indoor MEDI - 1x3...8 - Low Losses Configuration

48 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.2.2.2 Indoor MEDI - 1x9...12 - Low LossesThe following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MEDI - 1x9...12 -Low Losses configuration.

Note: Restrictions



IDU 1 IDU 2

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE7TRE8

TRE3TRE4TRE9TRE10

ANC 1

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3


Empty space

Connection Area

ANC 1a b


ANC 2

TRE5TRE6TRE11TRE12

FANU FANU FANU

ANC 3TRE 1 2 7 8

ANC 2a b

TRE 3 4 5 6

ANC 3a b

TRE 9 10

SUMA

The 3 ANCs are set to thesame sector number


11 12


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 49 / 910



Note: Restrictions



When no ANY, TREs 3 and 4

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

FANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

ANX1SUM

FANU FANU

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Top Stage

(Sector 1)

TRE3TRE4

In each sector,

Sector 1 has n TREs

Sector 2 has p TREs

Dummy Panels

ANX4(Sector 2)

ANX2(Sector 1)

ANX3(Sector 2)

TRE3TRE4

both ANXs are set tothe same sector number.

ANYANY

TRE5TRE6TRE6 TRE5

are directly connected to ANX


FANUFANUFANU


50 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



Note: Restrictions



SUMA

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4

ANC1

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3


Empty space

Connection Area

IDU1 IDU2

ANC1a b

TRE 1 2


ANC2


ANC2a b

Both ANCs are set to thesame sector number

ANC3

ANC4

Sector 1:

ANC3a b

ANC4a b

Sector 2:

In each sector:

TRE 1 2

(Sector 2) (Sector 1)


3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

FANUFANU FANU

TRE5TRE6TRE5TRE6


In case of 2x3...4:

On each ANC:The two bridges will be removedat installation time (On site),if no more than 2 TREs areconnected to them


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 51 / 910


2.2.3 Indoor Configurations - High Power GSM 1800

2.2.3.1 Indoor MINI - 2x1The following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MINI- 2x1- High PowerGSM 1800 configuration.

FANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE1

ANC1

Stage 1

Empty space

IDU1


Connection Area

ANC1

TRE 1

a bANC2

( Sector 1 )( Sector 2 )ANC2

a b

TRE 1

The BTS has 2 sectorswith 1 TRE each

SUMA

On each ANC:the two bridges will be removedat installation time (On site)

FANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE1

ANC1

Stage 1

IDU 1

Connection Area

ANC2

( Sector 1 )( Sector 2 )

SUMA

Rack Layout with classical HP TREs:

Rack Layout with EDGE HP TREs:

Figure 16: Indoor MINI - 2x1 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration

52 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.2.3.2 Indoor MEDI - 1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI- 1x1...4 -High Power GSM 1800 configuration.

Connection Area

Stage 3 FANU

IDU1 IDU2

TRE4

SUMA

ANC1(Sector 1)

TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

Stage 2

Stage 1

Empty space


FANU FANU

FANU FANU FANU

FANU FANU FANU


a b

ANC1

TRE 1 2 3 4

On site, on the ANC:Bridges can be removed if only2 TREs connected to the ANC

Connection Area

FANU

IDU1 IDU2

TRE4

SUMA

ANC1(Sector 1)

TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

FANU FANU

FANU FANU FANU

FANU FANU FANU

With classical HP TRE:

Figure 17: Indoor MEDI - 1x1...4 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration

2.2.3.3 Indoor MEDI - 2x1...2This configuration must be considered as a sub-equipment of the 3x1...2 -High Power configuration.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 53 / 910


2.2.3.4 Indoor MEDI - 2x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MED I- 2x1...4 -High Power GSM 1800 configuration.

Connection Area

Stage 3 FANU

IDU1 IDU2

TRE4

SUMA

ANC1(Sector 1)

TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

Stage 2

Stage 1

FANU FANU

FANU FANU FANU

FANU FANU FANU

The BTS has 2 sectors withrespectively n and p TREs

TRE4 TRE3

ANC2(Sector 2)

TRE2 TRE1

Empty space


a b

ANC1

TRE 1 2 3 4

On site, on each ANC:the two bridges can be removedif only 2 TREs connected

With classical HP TRE:

a b

ANC2

TRE 1 2 3 4

Connection Area

FANU

IDU1 IDU2

TRE4

SUMA

ANC1(Sector 1)

TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

FANU FANU

FANU FANU FANU

FANU FANU FANU

TRE4 TRE3

ANC2(Sector 2)

TRE2 TRE1

TRDH


54 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.2.3.5 Indoor MEDI - 3x1...2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI - 3x1...2 -High Power GSM 1800 configuration.

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

FANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2

TRE1TRE2

ANX2

SUM

FANU FANU

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Top Stage

ANX1

ANX3

TRE1

TRE2

(Sector 2)(Sector 3)

(Sector 1)

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2

TRE1TRE2TRE1

ANC1

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3


Empty space

Connection Area

IDU2

ANC1a b

TRE 1 2


ANC2


ANC2a b

SUMA

ANC3

ANC3a b

TRE 1 2

TRE2

FANU FANU FANU


(Sector 1)

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2

TRE1TRE2TRE1

ANC1

Connection Area

IDU1 IDU2ANC2

SUMA

ANC3

TRE2

FANU FANU FANU


(Sector 1)

IDU1

With classical HP TREs:

TRE 1 2

On each ANC, the two bridges are removed at installation (on site).


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 55 / 910


2.2.3.6 Indoor MEDI - 3x1...3The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI - 3x1...3 -High Power GSM 1800 configuration.

Stage 3

Stage 2

Stage 1

Empty space


Connection Area

FANU

IDU1 IDU2

TRE1

SUMA

ANC1(Sector 1)

TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

FANU FANU

FANU FANU FANU

FANU FANU FANU

ANC2(Sector 2)

TRE2 TRE1

ANC3(Sector 3)

(HP) (HP) (HP)

(MP) (HP) (HP)

TRE3 TRE2 TRE3(MP) (HP) (MP)

With classical HP TRE:Connection Area

FANU

IDU1 IDU2

TRE1

SUMA

ANC1(Sector 1)

TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

FANU FANU

FANU FANU FANU

FANU FANU FANU

ANC2(Sector 2)

TRE2 TRE1

ANC3(Sector 3)

TRE3 TRE2 TRE3TRDM TRDH TRDM

TRDH TRDH TRDH

TRDM TRDH TRDM

The BTS has 3 sectors withrespectively n, p and q TREs

1 2

a b

ANC1 ANC2 ANC3

a b a b

3nc

HP MP

1 2 3nc

HP MP

1 2 3nc

HP MP

For 3x1...2:

On each ANC:The two bridges will be removedat installation time. (On site)One HP TRE transmitting per antenna

For 3x3:On each ANC:The bridge where the MP TREis connected is removed on site


56 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.2.4 Indoor Configurations - Extended Cell GSM 900

Extended cell configurations are based either on REK or on RX TMA useas shown in the following figures.

A B

ANC

Sector 1

TRE 3TRE 1TRE 4TRE 2

A B

ANC

PDU 1

Sector 2

TRE 2TRE 1ncnc

MAB MAB

A B

ANC

PDU 2

Sector 2

TRE 4TRE 3ncnc

MAB MAB

OUTER CELL

In the Outer Cell, the br idges are removed on each ANC

INNER CELL

Figure 21: Extended Cell Configuration Based on REK Use

A B

ANCSector 2


A B

ANC

PDU 1

Sector 1


TMA TMA

OUTER CELLINNER CELL

Figure 22: Extended Cell Configuration Based on RX TMA Use

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 57 / 910


2.2.4.1 Indoor MEDI - Extended Cell Configuration Based on REKThe following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MEDI extended cellconfiguration based on REK use.

a b

ANC1

ANC2

TRE 1 2 3 4

Connection Area

Stage 3

IDU1 IDU2

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1



ANC1Outer cell

(Sector 1)

ANC2

Inner Cell(Sector 2)

ANC3Outer cell

(Sector 1)

SUMA

Empty space


The BTS has 2 sectors with respectively n and p TREs:

− n TREs in the Outer cell

− p TREs in the Inner cell

The configuration is based on1x4 Low Losses configuration,extended with a 1x4 sector

Inner Cell:

Outer Cell:

− ANC1 and ANC3 are set to the same sector number

− The bridges are removedon ANC1 and ANC3

TRE 1 2ncnc

a b

a b

ANC3

TRE 3 4ncnc

Figure 23: Indoor MEDI - Extended Cell Configuration Based on REK Use

58 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.2.4.2 Indoor MEDI - Extended Cell Configuration Based on RX TMA UseThe following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MEDI extended cellconfiguration based on RX TMA use.

ANC2

TRE 1 2 3 4

Connection Area

Stage 3

IDU1 IDU2

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1



ANC1Outer Cell

(Sector 1)

ANC2Inner Cell

(Sector 2)

SUMA

Empty space


The BTS has 2 sectors with respectively n and p TREs: − n TREs in the Outer Cell

− p TREs in the Inner Cell

Inner Cell:

Outer Cell:

a b

ANC1

TRE 1 2 3 4

a b

Figure 24: Indoor MEDI - Extended Cell Configuration Based on RX TMA Use

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 59 / 910


2.2.5 Indoor Configurations - Multiband BTS GSM 900/1800

2.2.5.1 Indoor MINI - 1x1...2/ 1x1...2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MINI - 1x1...2/ 1x1...2- Multiband BTS configuration.

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

ANXSUM

Stage 1

Top Stage

− Sector 1 has n TREs

ANX


GSM 1800

Dummy Panels


FANU FANUFANUTRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

ANC 1

Stage 1

Empty space

IDU 1


Connection Area

ANC 1

TRE 1 2

a bANC 2


a b

TRE 1 2


SUMA

GSM 1800


Figure 25: Indoor MINI - 1x1...2/ 1x1...2 - Multiband BTS Configuration

60 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.2.5.2 Indoor MEDI - 1x1...6/1x1...6The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI - 1x1...6/1x1...6- Multiband BTS configuration.

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

FANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

TRE5TRE6

ANXANY2ANY1ANY3SUM

FANU FANU

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Top Stage

ANXANY2ANY1ANY3

TRE5TRE6

(Sector 1)

(Sector 2)

TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4



then ANY1then ANY3

For each sector:

GSM 1800

Dummy Panels

− Sector 1 has n TREs


FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

TRE5TRE6

TRE5TRE6

ANC1ANY1

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Empty space

Connection Area

IDU1

ANC1a b

ANY1

TRE 1 2 3 4


(Sector 1)

ANC2(Sector 2)

ANY3

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

FANU FANU FANU

SUMA

ANY4

ANY2

ANY2

5 6

ANC2a b

ANY3

TRE 1 2 5 6

ANY4

3 4

GSM 1800


Figure 26: Indoor MEDI - 1x1...6/1x1...6 - Multiband BTS Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 61 / 910



TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1


Top Stage FANU FANU FANU



ANX1

(Sector 1)

ANX2(Sector 2)

ANY4

ANY2ANY1ANY3SUM

GSM 1800

Dumm y panels

Connection Area

Stage 3

IDU1 IDU2

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

TRE6 TRE5 TRE8 TRE7

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

ANY2



FANU FANU FANU

ANC1(Sector 1)

ANC2(Sector 2)

GSM 1800

Empty space


The BTS has 2 sectors: − One with n TREs in GSM 900− One with p TREs in GSM 1800

The configur ation is based on 1x8 configur ation, andextended with a 1x4 sector

a b

ANC1

a b

ANC2

ANY1 ANY2

TRE 1 2 3 4

TRE 1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

If no ANY (4 TREs maxim um),TRE1 to 4 are connected to ANC

SUMA ANY1

The configur ation is based on1x8 configur ation, andextended with a 1x4 sector

The BTS has 2 sectors with respectiv ely n and p TREs


62 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.2.5.4 Indoor MEDI - 1x1...4/1x1...8The following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MEDI - 1x1...4/1x1...8 -Multiband BTS configuration.

Connection Area

Stage 3

IDU1 IDU2

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

TRE6 TRE5 TRE8 TRE7

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

ANY2



FANU FANU FANU

ANC1(Sector 1)

ANC2(Sector 2)

GSM 1800

Empty space


a b

ANC1

a b

ANC2

ANY1 ANY2

TRE 1 2 3 4

TRE 1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

SUMA ANY1

If no ANY (4 TREs maximum),TRE1 to 4 are connected to ANC

The configuration is basedon 1x8 configuration, andextended with a 1x4 sector



3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 63 / 910


2.2.5.5 Indoor MEDI - 1x3...8LL/1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI -1x3...8LL/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS configuration.

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3


Top Stage FANU FANU FANU



ANX1(Sector 1)

ANX2(Sector 1)

ANX3(Sector 2)

ANY

ANY

ANY

SUM

Dummy panels

GSM 1800

Connection Area

Stage 3

IDU1 IDU2

TRE8 TRE7 TRE2 TRE1

TRE2 TRE1 TRE4 TRE3

TRE4 TRE3 TRE6 TRE5



FANU FANU FANU

ANC1(Sector 1)

ANC2(Sector 1)

ANC3(Sector 2)

GSM 1800

Empty space


The BTS has 2 sectors: One with n TREs in GSM 900 One with p TREs in GSM 1800

extended with a 1x4 sector

a bANC1

a bANC3

TRE 1 2 7 8

a bANC2

TRE 3 4 5 6

TRE 1 23 4

ANC1 and ANC2 are set tothe same sector number

SUMA

extended with a 1x4 sector


Minimum TREs in sector 1 is 5

ANX1 and ANX2 are set

The configuration is based on1x8 Low Loss configuration,

to the same sector number

The configuration is based on1x8 Low Loss configuration,

In case of 1x3...4LL/1x1...4On ANC1 and ANC2:The bridges will be removedat installation time (on site),if no more than 2 TREs areconnected to them

Figure 29: Indoor MEDI - 1x3...8LL/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration

64 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

FANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

ANXANYSUM

FANU FANU

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Top Stage

ANXANY

(Sector 1)

(Sector 2)

TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

For each sector,TRE1 and TRE2 are connected

ANX(Sector 3)

ANY

TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

to ANX if 2 TREs max. in the sector


Sector 3 has q TREs

GSM 1800

Dummy Panels

IDU1 IDU 2

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

ANC1

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3


Empty space

Connection Area

ANC1a b


( Sector 1 )

ANC2( Sector 2 )

TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4

FANU FANU FANU


ANC3( Sector 3 )

TRE 1 2 3 4

ANC2a b

TRE 1 2 3 4

ANC3a b

TRE 1 2 3 4

SUMA

GSM 1800


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 65 / 910



FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

FANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

ANXANYSUM

FANU FANU

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Top Stage

ANXANY

(Sector 1)

(Sector 2)

TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

For each sector,

TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX

ANX(Sector 3)

ANY

TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

if 2 TREs max. in the sector

Sector 1 has n TREs

Sector 2 has p TREs

Sector 3 has q TREs

GSM 1800

Dummy Panels

IDU1 IDU2

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

ANC1

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3


Empty space

Connection Area

ANC1a b


( Sector 1 )

ANC2( Sector 2 )

TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4

FANU FANU FANU


ANC3( Sector 3 )

TRE 1 2 3 4

ANC2a b

TRE 1 2 3 4

ANC3a b

TRE 1 2 3 4

SUMA

GSM 1800


66 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.2.5.8 Indoor MEDI - 1x1...4/...4,...2,...2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI -1x1...4/...4,...2,...2 - Multiband BTS configuration.

TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANXif 2 TREs max. in the sector

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

FANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

ANXSUM

FANU FANU

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Top Stage

ANXANY

(Sector 1)

(Sector 2)

TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

In sectors 2 and 3,

ANX(Sector 3)

TRE1TRE2

ANX(Sector 4)

TRE3TRE4

ANY

Sector 1 has n TREs

Sector 2 has p TREs

Sector 3 has q TREs

Sector 4 has r TREs

GSM 1800

Dummy Panels

IDU1 IDU2

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

ANC1

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3


Empty space

Connection Area

ANC1a b


( Sector 1 )

ANC2(Sector 2)

TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4

FANU FANU FANU

respectively n, p, q and r TREs

ANC3(Sector 3)

TRE 1 2

ANC2a b

TRE 1 2 3 4

ANC3a b

TRE 1 2 3 4

SUMA

GSM 1800

ANC4( Sector 4 )

ANC4a b

TRE 1 2

Figure 32: Indoor MEDI - 1x1...4/...4,...2,...2 - Multiband BTS Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 67 / 910


2.2.5.9 Indoor MEDI - ...4,...2,...2/1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI -...4,...2,...2/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS configuration.


In sectors 2 and 3:

Sector 1 has n TREs

Sector 2 has p TREs

Sector 3 has q TREs

Sector 4 has r TREs

GSM 1800

Dummy Panels

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

FANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

ANXSUM

FANU FANU

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Top Stage

ANXANY

(Sector 1)

(Sector 2)

TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

ANX(Sector 3)

TRE1TRE2

ANX(Sector 4)

TRE3TRE4

ANY

IDU1 IDU2

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

ANC1

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3


Empty space

Connection Area

ANC1a b


(Sector 1)

ANC2(Sector 2)

TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4

FANU FANU FANU

respectively n, p, q and r TREs

ANC3(Sector 3)

TRE 1 2

ANC2a b

TRE 1 2 3 4

ANC3a b

TRE 1 2 3 4

SUMA

GSM 1800

ANC4(Sector 4)

ANC4a b

TRE 1 2

Figure 33: Indoor MEDI - ...4,...2,...2/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration

68 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANXif 2 TREs max. in the sector.

In sectors 2 and 3:

Sector 1 has n TREs

Sector 2 has p TREs

Sector 3 has q TREs

Sector 4 has r TREs

GSM 1800

Dummy Panels

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

FANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

ANX1SUM

FANU FANU

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Top Stage

ANX2ANY

(Sector 1)

(Sector 2)

TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

ANX3(Sector 3)

TRE1TRE2

ANX4(Sector 4)

TRE3TRE4

ANY

SUMA

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4

ANC1

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Empty space

Connection Area

IDU1 IDU2

ANC1a b

TRE 1 2 3 4


ANC2ANC4

a b

ANC3

ANC4

Sectors GSM 900:

ANC2a b

ANC3a b

Sectors GSM 1800:

TRE 1 2



FANUFANU FANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

GSM 1800

TRE 1 2

The BTS has 4 sectors with:n+r TREs in GSM 900p+q TREs in GSM 1800

STASR 3

TRE 1 2 3 4


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 69 / 910




In sectors 2 and 3:

Sector 1 has n TREs

Sector 2 has p TREs

Sector 3 has q TREs

Sector 4 has r TREs

GSM 1800

Dummy Panels

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

FANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

ANX1SUM

FANU FANU

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Top Stage

ANX2ANY

(Sector 1)

(Sector 2)

TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

ANX3(Sector 3)

TRE1TRE2

ANX4(Sector 4)

TRE3TRE4

ANY

SUMA

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4

ANC1

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Empty space

Connection Area

IDU1 IDU2

ANC1a b

TRE 1 2


ANC2ANC4

a b

ANC3

ANC4

Sectors GSM 900:

ANC2a b

ANC3

a b

Sectors GSM 1800:

TRE 1 2 3 4



FANUFANU FANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

GSM 1800

TRE 1 2 3 4

The BTS has 4 sectors with:n+r TREs in GSM 900p+q TREs in GSM 1800

STASR 3

TRE 1 2


70 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.2.6 Indoor Configurations - Multiband Cells GSM 900/1800

2.2.6.1 Indoor MINI - 1x(...2/...2)The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MINI - 1x(...2/...2) -Multiband Cells configuration.

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

ANX1SUM

Stage 1

Top Stage

ANX2

The single sector has:− n TREs in the GSM 900 band− p TREs in the GSM 1800 band

ANX1 and ANX2 are set to the same sector number

GSM 1800

Dummy Panels

FANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

ANC1

Stage 1

Empty space


Connection Area

ANC1

TRE 1 2

a b

ANC2ANC2

a b

TRE 1 2

ANC1 and ANC2 are setto the same sector number

SUMA

GSM 1800

IDU1


Figure 36: Indoor MINI - 1x(...2/...2) - Multiband Cells Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 71 / 910


2.2.6.2 Indoor MEDI - 1x(...6/...6)The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI - 1x(...6/...6) -Multiband Cells configuration.

The single sector has:n TREs in the GSM 900 bandp TREs in the GSM 1800 band

ANX 1 and ANX 2 are set to the same sector number

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

FANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

TRE5TRE6

ANX1ANY2ANY1ANY3SUM

FANU FANU

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Top Stage

ANX2ANY2ANY1ANY3

TRE5TRE6 TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

If no ANY (2 TREs max.),TRE1 and TRE2 are connected

ANY filling order:ANY2

then ANY1then ANY3

For each frequency band:

GSM 1800

Dummy Panels

to ANX

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

TRE5TRE6TRE5TRE6

ANC1ANY1

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Empty space

Connection Area

IDU1

ANC1

a b

ANY1

TRE 1 2 3 4


ANC2ANY3

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

FANU FANU FANU

The BTS has one sector with:

SUMA

ANY4

ANY2

ANY2

5 6

ANC2

a b

ANY3

TRE 1 2 5 6

ANY4

3 4

GSM 1800

p TREs in GSM 900n TREs in GSM 1800

Both ANCs are set to the samesector number

Figure 37: Indoor MEDI - 1x(...6/...6) - Multiband Cells Configuration

72 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

FANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

ANX1SUM

FANU FANU

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Top Stage

ANX2ANY

(Sector 1)

(Sector 1)

TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

In the upper part of the BTS,TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX

ANX3(Sector 2)

TRE1TRE2


Sector 1 has:

ANX4(Sector 2)

TRE3TRE4

ANY

− n TREs in the GSM 1800 band− p TREs in the GSM 900 band

Sector 2 has:− q TREs in the GSM 900 band− r TREs in the GSM 1800 band

ANX1 and ANX2 are set tothe same sector number (1)


GSM 1800

Dummy Panels

ANC1a b

TRE 1 2 3 4

ANC2a b

TRE 1 2

ANC3a b

TRE 1 2

ANC4a b

TRE 1 2 3 4

ANC 1 and ANC 2 are set tothe same sector number (1)

ANC3 and ANC4 are set tothe same sector number (2)

Sector 1 has:

− p TREs in the GSM 1800 band− n TREs in the GSM 900 band

Sector 2 has:− r TREs in the GSM 900 band− q TREs in the GSM 1800 band

SUMA

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4

ANC1

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Empty space

Connection Area

IDU1 IDU2


ANC2ANC3

ANC4



FANUFANU FANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

GSM 1800

STASR 3


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 73 / 910



FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

FANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

ANX1SUM

FANU FANU

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Top Stage

ANX2ANY

(Sector 1)

(Sector 1)

TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

In the upper part of the BTS,


ANX3(Sector 2)

TRE1TRE2

Sector 1 has:

ANX4(Sector 2)

TRE3TRE4

ANY





GSM 1800

Dummy Panels


ANC1a b

TRE 1 2

ANC2a b

TRE 1 2 3 4

ANC3a b

TRE 1 2 3 4

ANC4a b

TRE 1 2



Sector 1 has:− n TREs in the GSM 900 band− p TREs in the GSM 1800 band


SUMA

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4

ANC1

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Empty space

Connection Area

IDU1 IDU2


ANC2ANC3

ANC4



FANUFANU FANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

GSM 1800

STASR 3


74 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.2.6.5 Indoor MEDI - 1x(...2/...2), 1x(...4/...4)The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI - 1x(...2/...2),1x(...4/...4) - Multiband Cells configuration.

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

FANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

ANX1SUM

FANU FANU

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Top Stage

ANX2ANY

(Sector 1)

(Sector 2)

TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

In the upper part of the BTS,


ANX3(Sector 2)

TRE1TRE2


Sector 1 has:

ANX4(Sector 1)

TRE3TRE4

ANY

− n TREs in the GSM 900 band− r TREs in the GSM 1800 band

Sector 2 has:− p TREs in the GSM 900 band− q TREs in the GSM 1800 band



GSM 1800

Dummy Panels

ANC1a b

TRE 1 2

ANC3a b

TRE 1 2

ANC2a b

TRE 1 2 3 4

ANC4a b

TRE 1 2 3 4



Sector 1 has:− n TREs in the GSM 900 band− q TREs in the GSM 1800 band

Sector 2 has:− r TREs in the GSM 900 band− p TREs in the GSM 1800 band

SUMA

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

TRE3TRE4

ANC1

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Empty space

Connection Area

IDU1 IDU2


ANC2ANC3

ANC4



FANUFANU FANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

GSM 1800

STASR 3

Figure 40: Indoor MEDI - 1x(...2/...2), 1x(...4/...4) - Multiband Cells Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 75 / 910


2.2.7 AC Indoor Configurations GSM 900/1800

2.2.7.1 AC Indoor MEDI - 1x1...8The following figure shows the rack layouts of the AC Indoor MEDI - 1x1...8configuration.

FANU FANU FANU

FANU FANU FANU

FANU FANU FANU

ANX

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

TRE5TRE6

ANY2ANY1ANY3SUM

BBU

PMO8 PMO8 PMO8 PMO8 PMO8 BCU112345

ABAC APODACRI

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3(*)

(*)

BTS−CA AFIP

TRE7TRE8

ANX

ANY1

ANY2 ANY3

TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6

a b

Dummy Panels

Options dependingof the configuration

Options if GSM 1800

(*) Fan stage always present


− If ANY2 only,ANY2 is connected to ANX

− ANY filling order:ANY2 then ANY1 + ANY3

7 8

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8

ANCANY1ANY2

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

The BTS has n TREs

If no ANY (4 TREs maximum),TRE1 to TRE4 are connected to ANC

Empty space

Connection Area

ANCa b

ANY1 ANY2

TRE 1 2 3 4

BATS or Microwave IDU (Optional)

SUMA

FANU FANU FANU

ADAM

BBU (Option)

Pre−equipment of ANY possible

PM12 PM12 PM12

BATSor

2 x IDU

5 6 7 8

Figure 41: AC Indoor MEDI - 1x1...8 Configuration

76 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.2.7.2 AC Indoor MEDI - 2x1...2This configuration must be considered as a sub-equipment of the 3x1...2configuration (sector 3 is not equipped).

2.2.7.3 AC Indoor MEDI - 3x1...2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the AC Indoor MEDI - 3x1...2configuration.

FANU FANU FANU

FANU FANU FANU

FANU FANU FANU

ANX

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

TRE1TRE2

SUM

PMO8 PMO8 PMO8 PMO8 PMO8 BCU112345

ABAC APOD

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

ANX

TRE 1 2

a b

Dummy Panels

Options dependingon the configuration

Options if GSM 1800

(Sector 1)ANX

(Sector 2)

ANX(Sector 3)

ANXa b

ANXa b

1 12 2Sector 1 2 3

BTS−CA AFIP

BBU

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2

TRE1TRE2 TRE1TRE2

ANC1

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3


Empty space

Connection Area

IDU2IDU1

ANC1a b

TRE 1 2

BATS or Microwave IDU (Optional)

SUMA

FANU FANU

ADAM

BBU

ANC2ANC3

(Sector 1)



ANC2a b

TRE 1 2

ANC3a b

TRE 1 2

FANU

PM12 PM12 PM12

BATS

ACR I


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 77 / 910


2.2.7.4 AC Indoor MEDI - 2x1...6The following figure shows the rack layout of the AC Indoor MEDI - 2x1...6configuration.

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANU

TRE3TRE4TRE5TRE6

TRE1TRE2

TRE5TRE6

ANC1

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3


Empty space

Connection Area

ANC1a b

(Sector 1)

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

FANU FANU FANU


TRE 1 2

SUMA

ADAM

PM12 PM12 PM12

3 4 5 6

ANY1

ANC2a b

TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6

ANY2

ANY1

FANU

BATS or Microwave IDU (optional)

ANC2(Sector 2)

BATSor

2 x IDUANY2


2.2.7.5 AC Indoor MEDI - 3x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the AC Indoor MEDI - 3x1...4configuration.

BATSor

2 x IDU

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

ANC 1

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3


Empty space

Connection Area

ANC 1a b

BATS or Microwave IDU(Optional)

( Sector 1 )

ANC 2( Sector 2 )

TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4

FANU FANU FANU


ANC 3( Sector 3 )

TRE 1 2 3 4

ANC 2a b

TRE 1 2 3 4

ANC 3a b

TRE 1 2 3 4

SUMA

ADAM

PM12

PM12

PM12


78 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.2.7.6 AC Indoor MEDI - 1x1...8/1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the AC Indoor MEDI -1x1...8/1x1...4 Multiband BTS configuration.

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

ANC 1

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

The BTS has 2 sectors withConnection Area

ANC 1a b

( Sector 1 )

ANC 2( Sector 2 )

TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8

FANU FANU FANU


TRE 1 2 3 4

ANY 2

5 6 7 8

ANY 1

TRE 1 2 3 4

SUMA

ADAM

PM12

PM12

PM12

IDU ANY 2 ANY 1

GSM 1800

Empty space


ANC 2a b

If no ANY (4 TREs maximum),TRE1 to TRE4 are connectedto ANC

Figure 45: AC Indoor MEDI - 1x1...8/1x1...4 Multiband BTS Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 79 / 910


2.2.7.7 DC Power Distribution from an AC Indoor CabinetTo extend on site the capacities in terms of TREs per sector, the coupling of aDC Indoor cabinet to an AC Indoor cabinet can be envisaged.

A typical case is a 3x6 sectored site with the following hardware: 1x6 ACIndoor MEDI + 2x6 DC Indoor MEDI.

This configuration requires the following actions:

Add additional AC/DC converters in the AC Indoor cabinet, (3 x AC/DC

converters in the case of a standalone AC Indoor cabinet)

Use of a DC power cable between the two cabinets.

BU41

AFIP

ASIB

BTS−CADC

Power Cable

AC Cabinet DC Cabinet

Subrack AC/DC

Figure 46: Interconnection between an AC Cabinet and a DC Cabinet

Maximum number of TREs depending on DC Consumption:

GSM 900: 3 x PM08 up to eight TREs, 5 x PM08 if more than eight TREs;

maximum TREs: 18 (a 3x6 site configuration is possible)

GSM 1800: 3 x PM08 up to six TREs, 4 x PM08 up to eight TREs, 5 x PM08if more than eight TREs; maximum TREs: 12 (a 3x6 site configuration is

not possible).

80 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.3 A9100 BTS Indoor (G3) Extension with Twin TRXThe following table gives the possible configuration extension based on TwinTRX modules.

AC

Carriesrs persector

DC

Carriesrs persector

Cabinet Number ofsectors

Single TRX -> TwinTRX


1 n.a. 4 -> 8

2 n.a. 2/2 -> 4/4

Mini

3 n.a. 1/1/1 -> 2/2/2

1 n.a. 12 -> 16

2 n.a. 6/6 -> 8/8

Medi

3 n.a. 4/4/4 -> 6/6/6

2.3.1 G3 MINI - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 81 / 910


2.3.2 G3 MINI - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX


82 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.3.4 G3 MEDI - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 83 / 910


2.3.5 G3 MEDI - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX

84 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 85 / 910


2.4 A9100 BTS Indoor (G4) Extension with Twin TRXThe following table gives the possible configuration extension based on TwinTRX modules.

AC

Carriesrs persector

DC

Carriesrs persector

Cabinet Number ofsectiors



1 n.a. 4 -> 8

2 n.a. 2/2 -> 4/4

Mini

3 n.a. 1/1/1 -> 2/2/2

1 n.a. 12 -> 16

2 2/2 -> 4/4 6/6 -> 8/8

Medi

3 2/2/2 (4/4/4) ->4/6/6(6/6/6)

4/4/4 -> 6/6/6

* : Change of SUMA location

2.4.1 G4 MINI - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX

86 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13




3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 87 / 910


2.4.4 G4 MEDI - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX

88 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 89 / 910



90 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 91 / 910



92 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 93 / 910


94 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.5 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations withSingle TRX

2.5.1 MBI Configurations - Standard BTS GSM 850/900/1800/1900

The following configurations are valid for GSM 850/900/1800/1900 unlessotherwise indicated.

2.5.1.1 MBI3 - 1x1...8 - DCThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 - 1x1...8 - DCconfiguration.

Note: Restrictions

None. for GSM 850.



FANU FANUFANU

TRE1

Air InletSTAND

Empty space

Connection Area

Air Inlet


ANC1a b

ANY1 ANY2

TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8

If more than 4 TREs, 2 ANYs arerequired. Pre−equipment possible

Up to 4 TREs, and if no ANY pre−equipped,TRE1 to TRE4 are directly connected to the ANC

FANU FANU FANU

TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5

TRE2TRE3TRE4

SUMA ANY2 ANY1 ANC1

Dummy Panel The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case fewer than 3TREs

Figure 47: MBI3 - 1x1...8 - DC Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 95 / 910


2.5.1.2 MBI3 - 1x1...4 - ACThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 - 1x1...4 - ACconfiguration.

Note: Restrictions

None. for GSM 850.

FANU FANUFANU

TRE1

Air InletSTAND

Empty space

Air Inlet


ANC1a b

TRE 1 3 2 4

TRE2TRE3TRE4

SUMA

12345671234567123456712345671234567123456712345671234567

ADAM

PM1 2PM1 2

ANC1

Dummy Panel

FANU FANU FANU

BATS(Option)

The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3TREs

Connection Area

Figure 48: MBI3 - 1x1...4 - AC Configuration

96 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



Note: Restrictions

None. for GSM 850.



FANU FANUFANU

TRE1

Air InletSTAND

Empty space

Connection Area

Air Inlet

The BTS has 2 sectors:Sector 1 with n TREs,Sector 2 with p TREs

FANU FANU FANU

TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3

TRE2TRE1TRE2

SUMA

Dummy Panel

ANC1a b

TRE 1 3 2 4

ANC2(Sector 2)

ANC1(Sector 1)

ANC2a b

TRE 1 3 2 4

Sector 1 Sector 2

The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3TREs


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 97 / 910


2.5.1.4 MBI3 - 2x1...2 - ACThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 - 2x1...2 - ACconfiguration.

Note: Restrictions

None. for GSM 850.

FANU FANUFANU

TRE1

Air InletSTAND

Empty space

Connection Area

Air Inlet


ANC1a b

TRE 1 2

TRE2TRE1TRE2

1234567123456712345671234567123456712345671234567ADAM

PM1 2PM1 2

ANC1(Sector 1)

FANU FANU FANU

BATS(Option)

ANC2a b

TRE 1 2

Sector 1 Sector 2SUMAANC2

(Sector 2)

Dummy Panel

The ANC can be replacedby the ANB also

Figure 50: MBI3 - 2x1...2 - AC Configuration

98 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



Note: Restrictions

None. for GSM 850.

FANU FANUFANU

TRE1

Air InletSTAND

Empty space

Connection Area

Air Inlet

The BTS has 3 sectors:Sector 1 with n TREs,Sector 2 with p TREs,Sector 3 with q TREs

FANU FANU FANU

TRE2 TRE1

TRE2TRE1TRE2

SUMA

Dummy Panel

ANC1a b

TRE 1 2

ANC2(Sector 2)

ANC1(Sector 1)

ANC2a b

TRE 1 2

Sector 1 Sector 2

ANC3(Sector 3)

ANC3a b

TRE 1 2

Sector 3



3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 99 / 910


2.5.1.6 MBI3 - 3x1 - ACThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 - 3x1 - AC configuration.

Note: Restrictions

None. for GSM 850.

FANU FANUFANUAir InletSTAND

Empty space

Connection Area

Air Inlet

The BTS has 3 sectors,one TRE per sector

TRE1TRE1TRE1

1234567123456712345671234567123456712345671234567ADAM

PM1 2PM1 2

ANC1(Sector 1)

FANU FANU FANU

BATS(Option)

ANC3(Sector 3)

Dummy Panel

ANC1a b

TRE 1

ANC2a b

TRE 1

Sector 1 Sector 2

ANC3a b

TRE 1

Sector 3

SUMA

ANC2(Sector 2)


Figure 52: MBI3 - 3x1 - AC Configuration

100 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.5.1.7 MBI5 - 1x1...8 - AC or DCThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 1x1...8 - AC or DCconfiguration.

Connection Area

ANC1

Air InletFANU FANU FANU

Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1

123456789012345612345678901234561234567890123456123456789012345612345678901234561234567890123456

STAND

BBU or STASR(Option)

1234567123456712345671234567123456712345671234567

BATS(Option)

12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678

ADAM

PM1 2PM1 2 PM1 2

123456123456

12345671234567FANU

123456123456FANUFANU

SUMA

TRE2TRE3TRE4

Dummy Panel

ANY1ANY2

TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8


ANC1a b

ANY1 ANY2

TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8

If more than 4 TREs, 2 ANYs arerequired. Pre−equipment possible

Up to 4 TREs, and if no ANY pre−equipped,TRE1 to TRE4 are directly connectedto the ANC

Modules present onlyin AC configuration

Empty space

123

The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs

Figure 53: MBI5 - 1x1...8 - AC or DC configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 101 / 910


2.5.1.8 MBI5 - 1x9...12 (Low Loss) - AC or DCThis configuration is the logical extension of the 1x1...8 configuration with aminimum of nine TREs. The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 -1x9...12 (Low Loss) - AC or DC configuration.

Note: Restrictions

None. for GSM 850.



Connection Area

ANC1


123456123456123456123456123456123456123456

Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1

STAND

ANC2

12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678

ADAM

PM1 2PM1 2 PM1 2SUMA

TRE2TRE3TRE4

Dummy Panel

ANY1ANY2

TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8


ANC1a b

ANY1 ANY2

TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8

Both ANCs are set to the same sector number


Empty space123123


TRE9TRE10TRE11TRE12

ANC2

TRE9

11 1012

a b

Dummy Panel

BATS(Option)

Figure 54: MBI5 - 1x9...12 (Low Loss) - AC or DC Configuration

102 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.5.1.9 MBI5 - 2x1...4 - ACThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 2x1...4 - ACconfiguration with BU101.

Note: Restrictions

None. for GSM 850.

Connection Area

STAND

BBU(BU101)

FANUFANUFANU

TRE3TRE4

Empty space

PM12

ADAM


ANC1a b

TRE 1 2

ANC2a b

TRE 1 2

Sector 1 Sector 2

Air Inlet

TRE3TRE4

3 4 3 4

Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

ANC1(Sector 1)


ANC2(Sector 2)

Dummy Panel


PM12 PM12SUMA

Figure 55: MBI5 - 2x1...4 - AC Configuration with BU101

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 103 / 910



Note: Restrictions



123456123456123456123456123456123456123456

Connection Area

ANC2(Sector 2)

ANY2

TRE3TRE4TRE5TRE6

The BTS has 2 sectors:− Sector 1 with n TREs,− Sector 2 with p TREs

In each sector, If no more than 4 TREs, no ANY is required. TRE1 to 4 are then cabled on ANC.


Empty space123123


Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1

STAND

ANC1(Sector 1)

12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678

ADAM

PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2

SUMA

TRE2

TRE5TRE6

Dummy Panel


TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

BATS(Option)

ANY1

ANC1

a b

ANY1

TRE 1 3 2 4 5 6

Sector 1

ANC2a b

ANY2

TRE 1 3 2 4 5 6

Sector 2

Dummy Panel


Figure 56: MBI5 - 2x1...6 - AC or DC Configuration

104 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.5.1.11 MBI5 - 1x1...8 + 1x1...4 - AC or DCThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 1x1...8 + 1x1...4- AC or DC configuration.

Note: Restrictions

None. for GSM 850 and GSM 1900.

123456123456123456123456123456123456123456

ANY2 BATS(Option)

Connection Area

ANC2(Sector 2)

ANY1

TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8



Empty space123123


Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1

STAND

ANC1(Sector 1)

12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678

ADAM

PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2SUMA

TRE2TRE3TRE4

Dummy Panel


TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

Sector 1

Sector 2

Dummy Panel

ANC2a b

ANY1 ANY2

TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8

ANC1

TRE

a b

1 3 2 4

Figure 57: MBI5 - 1x1...8 + 1x1...4 - AC or DC Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 105 / 910


2.5.1.12 MBI5 - 3x1...2 - ACThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 3x1...2 - ACconfiguration with BU101.

Note: Restrictions

None. for GSM 850.

Connection Area

ANC1(Sector 1)


Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1

STAND

BBU(BU101)

FANUFANUFANU

SUMA

TRE2TRE1TRE2

TRE1TRE2

Empty space

PM12

PM12

PM12

ADAM

ANC2(Sector 2)

ANC3(Sector 3)

The BTS has 3 sectors:− Sector 1 with n TREs,− Sector 2 with p TREs,− Sector 3 with q TREs

ANC1a b

TRE 1 2

ANC2a b

TRE 1 2

Sector 1 Sector 2

ANC3a b

TRE 1 2

Sector 3

Air Inlet


Figure 58: MBI5 - 3x1...2 - AC Configuration with BU101

106 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



Note: Restrictions



Connection Area

123456123456123456123456123456123456123456

ANC2(Sector 2)

TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4



Empty space1212

Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1

STAND

ANC1(Sector 1)

12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678ADAM

PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2SUMA

TRE2TRE1TRE2

Dummy Panel


TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

Dummy Panel

TRE

ANC1a b

1 3 2 4

ANC2

a b

1 3 2 4

ANC3

a b

1 3 2 4

ANC3(Sector 3)

BATS(Option)


Figure 59: MBI5 - 3x1...4 - AC or DC Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 107 / 910


2.5.2 MBI Configurations - Low Losses GSM 900/1800/1900

2.5.2.1 MBI3 - 1x3...4 - Low Losses - AC or DCThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 - 1x3...4 - Low Losses- AC or DC configuration.

FANU FANUFANU

TRE1

Air InletSTAND

Empty space

Connection Area

Air Inlet


ANC1a b

TRE 1 2

TRE2TRE3TRE4

1234567123456712345671234567123456712345671234567

123456789123456789123456789123456789123456789123456789123456789

ADAM

PM1 2

ANC1

FANU FANU FANU

BATS(Option)

ANC2a b

3 4

SUMAANC2

Dummy Panel


On each ANC:The two bridges will be removedat installation time (on site)


1212

PM1 2 PM1 2

Figure 60: MBI3 - 1x3...4 - Low Losses - AC or DC Configuration

108 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



Connection Area

ANC1


Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1

123456789012345612345678901234561234567890123456123456789012345612345678901234561234567890123456

STAND


1234567123456712345671234567123456712345671234567

BATS(Option)

12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678

123456123456

12345671234567FANU


SUMA

TRE2TRE3TRE4

TRE7TRE8


Empty space123123

PM12

ADAM

ANC2


ANC1a b

TRE 1 2

ANC2a b

TRE 3 4

TRE5TRE6

5 6 7 8


In case of 1x3...4

On each ANC:The two bridges will be removedat installation time (on site),if no more than 2 TREs areconnected to them.

Dummy Panel

PM12 PM12


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 109 / 910



Note: Restrictions



Connection Area

1234567123456712345671234567123456712345671234567

ANC1

TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8



Empty space123123

Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU


TRE1

STAND

ANC3

123456789123456789123456789123456789123456789123456789123456789

ADAM

PM1 2SUMA

TRE2TRE3TRE4

Dummy Panel


TRE9TRE10TRE11TRE12

Dummy Panel

TRE

ANC1a b

1 5 2 6

ANC2

a b

3 7 4 8

ANC3

a b

9 1110 12

ANC2BATS

(Option)

TRE

The 3 ANCs are set to thesame sector number

PM1 2 PM1 2


110 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.5.2.4 MBI5 - 2x3...6 - Low Losses - DCThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 2x3...6 - Low Losses- DC configuration.

Note: Restrictions



Connection Area

ANC2(Sector 1)

TRE5TRE6TRE5TRE6


Empty space

Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU


TRE3

ANC1(Sector 1)

SUMA

TRE4TRE3TRE4

Dummy Panel

ANC3(Sector 2)

STANDAir Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1TRE1TRE2

ANC4(Sector 2)

TRE

ANC1

a b

1 2

ANC2

a b

3 5 4 6

Sector 1:

TRE

ANC3

a b

1 2

ANC4

a b

3 5 4 6

Sector 2:

In each sector:Both ANCs are set to the samesector number

In case of 2x3...4

On each ANC:The two bridges will be removedat installation time (on site),if no more than 2 TREs areconnected to them.

TRE2

Dummy Panel


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 111 / 910


2.5.3 MBI Configurations - High Power GSM 1800

2.5.3.1 MBI3 - 2x1 - High Power - AC or DCThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 - 2x1- High Power- AC or DC configuration.

123456123456123456123456123456123456123456

BATS(Option)

Empty space

Connection Area

Air Inlet

The BTS has 2 sectorswith 1 TRE each

SUMA

ANC1a b

TRE 1

ANC2(Sector 2)

ANC1(Sector 1)

ANC2a b

TRE 1

On each ANC:The two bridges will be removedat installation time (on site)

FANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE1

Air InletSTAND

Dummy Panel

12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678

PM12

ADAM

FANU FANU FANU


123123

The ANC can be replaced by the ANB also

PM12

Figure 64: MBI3 - 2x1 - High Power - AC or DC Configuration

112 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.5.3.2 MBI5 - 1x1...4 - High Power - AC or DCThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 1x1...4 - High Power- AC or DC configuration.

Connection Area


Empty space

TRE4

TRE

ANC1a b

1 2

TRE1TRE2

On site, on the ANC:The two bridges can be removedif only 2 TREs are connected

TRE3

STANDAir Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

3 4

ANC1

12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678ADAM

PM1 2SUMA

Dummy Panel


Modules present onlyin AC configuration123

123

123456123456123456123456123456123456123456

BATS(Option)

Dummy Panel



PM1 2 PM1 2

Figure 65: MBI5 - 1x1...4 - High Power - AC or DC Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 113 / 910



Connection Area

ANC2(Sector 2)


TRE

ANC1

a b

1 2

ANC2

a b

TRE1TRE2

On site, on each ANC:The two bridges can be removedif only 2 TREs are connected

TRE3

STANDAir Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE3TRE4

3 4 1 23 4

12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678

ADAM

PM1 2 ANC1(Sector 1)

SUMA

123456123456123456123456123456123456123456

BATS(Option)


Dummy Panel

TRE1TRE2

TRE4

Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

Dummy Panel

Empty space


1212


PM1 2 PM1 2


114 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



Connection Area

ANC2(Sector 2)

The BTS has 3 sectors withrespectively n, p and q TREs

Empty space

TRE1TRE2

On each ANC:The two bridges can be removedif only 2 TREs are connected (on site). One HP TRE transmitting per antenna.

TRE3

STANDAir Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE3

TRE

ANC1

a b

1 23

ANC3(Sector 3)

TRE3 TRE2

ANC2

a b

1 23

ANC3

a b

1 23

12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678ADAM

PM1 2 ANC1(Sector 1)

SUMA

Modules present onlyin AC configuration12

12

123456123456123456123456123456123456123456123456

BATS(Option)

Air InletFANU FANU

Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1

Dummy Panel

FANU

Dummy Panel

In case of 3x1...2:


PM1 2PM1 2


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 115 / 910


2.5.3.5 MBI5 - 3x4 - High Power - DCThe MBI5 - 3x4 - High Power - DC configuration is an extension of the 3x2configuration described earlier. The extension is realized by adding a secondBTS cabinet with the following TRE split:

Cabinet 1: 2x4 HP TREs (the MBI5 3x1...2 is reconfigured to MBI5 2x1...4)

Cabinet 2: 1x4 HP TREs build on an MBI5 cabinet basis.

2.5.3.6 MBI5 - 3x6 - High Power - DCThe MBI5 - 3x6 - High Power - DC configuration is based on two cabinetswith the following TRE split:

Cabinet 1: 1x6 TREs + 1x3 TREs

Cabinet 2: 1x6 TREs + 1x3 TREs

These configurations use a mixture of high-power and medium-power TREs.

116 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.5.4 MBI Configurations - Extended Cell GSM 900

Extended cell configurations are based either on REK or on RX TMA useas shown in the following figures.

A B

ANC

Sector 1


A B

ANC

PDU 1

Sector 2

TRE 2TRE 1ncnc

MAB MAB

A B

ANC

PDU 2

Sector 2

TRE 4TRE 3ncnc

MAB MAB

OUTER CELL

In the Outer Cell, the br idges are removed on each ANC

INNER CELL

Figure 68: Extended Cell Configuration Based on REK Use

A B

ANCSector 2


A B

ANC

PD

U 1

Sector 1


TMA TMA

OUTER CELLINNER CELL

Bias T

Bias T

DC

DC

Figure 69: Extended Cell Configuration Based on RX TMA Use

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 117 / 910


2.5.4.1 MBI5 - Extended Cell Configuration Based on REKThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - Extended CellConfiguration Based on REK Use.

Connection Area

ANC2Outer Cell(Sector 2)

Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

123456789012345612345678901234561234567890123456123456789012345612345678901234561234567890123456

STAND


TRE3TRE4


Empty space123123

The BTS has 2 sectors withrespectively n and p TREs:− n TREs in the Inner cell,− p TREs in the Outer cell

ANC2a b

TRE

ANC3a b

TRE

Inner Cell:

ANC1a b

TRE 1 2

123456123456123456123456123456123456123456

Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1

12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678

123456123456

123456123456FANU


SUMA

TRE2TRE3TRE4

PM12

ADAM

ANC1Inner Cell(Sector 1)

BATS(Option)

Dummy Panel


TRE1TRE2

Outer Cell:

3 4

1 23 4 1 23 4

ANC2 and ANC3 are set to thesame sector number

The bridges are removed on ANC2 and ANC3 at installation time (on site)

PM12 PM12

Figure 70: MBI5 - Extended Cell Configuration Based on REK Use

118 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.5.4.2 MBI5 - Extended Cell Configuration Based on RX TMA UseThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - Extended CellConfiguration Based on RX TMA Use.

Connection Area



123456789012345612345678901234561234567890123456123456789012345612345678901234561234567890123456

STAND


TRE3TRE4


Empty space

1212

The BTS has 2 sectors withrespectively n and p TREs:− n TREs in the Inner cell,− p TREs in the Outer cell

Inner Cell:

123456123456123456123456123456123456123456

TRE1

12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678

123456123456

12345671234567FANU


SUMA

TRE2TRE3TRE4

PM12

PM12

PM12

Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

ADAM

ANC1Inner Cell(Sector 1)

BATS(Option)

Dummy Panel

TRE1TRE2

Outer Cell:

ANC1a b

TRE 1 23 4

ANC2a b

TRE 1 23 4

Figure 71: MBI5 - Extended Cell Configuration Based on RX TMA Use

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 119 / 910


2.5.5 MBI Configurations - Multiband BTS GSM 900/1800 and GSM900/1900

2.5.5.1 MBI3 - 1x1...4/1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 - 1x1...4/1x1...4 -Multiband BTS configuration.

FANU FANUFANU

TRE1

Air InletSTAND

Empty space

Connection Area

Air Inlet


FANU FANU FANU

TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3

TRE2TRE1TRE2

SUMA

Dummy Panel

ANC1a b

TRE 1 3 2 4

ANC2(Sector 2)

ANC1(Sector 1)

ANC2a b

TRE 1 3 2 4

Sector 1 Sector 2

GSM 1800 / GSM 1900


Figure 72: MBI3 - 1x1...4/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration

120 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



Connection Area

123456123456123456123456123456123456123456123456

ANC2(Sector 2)

ANY2

TRE3TRE4TRE5TRE6


In each sector, if no more than 4 TREs, no ANY is required. TRE1 to 4 are then cabled on ANC.


1212


Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1

STAND

ANC1(Sector 1)

12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678ADAM

PM1 2

SUMA

TRE2

TRE5TRE6

Dummy Panel


TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

BATS(Option)

ANY 1

ANC1a b

ANY1

TRE 1 3 2 4 5 6

Sector 1

ANC2a b

ANY2

TRE 1 3 2 4 5 6

Sector 2

Dummy Panel

Empty space


GSM 1800 / GSM 1900

PM1 2 PM1 2


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 121 / 910



ANY2

123456123456123456123456123456123456123456

BATS(Option)

Connection Area

ANC2(Sector 2)


Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1

STAND

ANC1(Sector 1)

12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678

PM1 2 SUMA

TRE2TRE3TRE4

Dummy Panel

ANY1

TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8


ANC2a b

ANY1 ANY2

TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8


Empty space

123123


TRE1TRE2

ANC1

TRE 1 3 4

a b

TRE3TRE4

Dummy Panel

ADAM

2

In sector 2, if no more than 4 TREs, no ANY is required.TRE1 to 4 are then cabled on ANC.

Sector 1

Sector 2


GSM 1800 / GSM 1900

PM1 2 PM1 2


122 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



ANY2

123456123456123456123456123456123456123456

BATS(Option)

Connection Area

ANC2(Sector 2)


Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1

STAND

ANC1(Sector 1)

12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678

PM1 2SUMA

TRE2TRE3TRE4

Dummy Panel

TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8


ANC2a b

ANY1 ANY2

TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8


Empty space

123123


TRE1TRE2

ANC1

TRE 1 3 4

a b

TRE3TRE4

Dummy Panel

ADAM

2

In sector 2, if no more than 4 TREs, no ANY is required. TRE1 to 4 are then cabled on ANC.

Sector 1

Sector 2ANY1


GSM 1800 / GSM 1900PM1 2 PM1 2


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 123 / 910


2.5.5.5 MBI5 - 1x3...8LL/1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 1x3...8LL/1x1...4 -Multiband BTS configuration.

Connection Area

1234567123456712345671234567123456712345671234567

ANC2(Sector 1)

TRE5TRE6TRE3TRE4



Empty space123123



TRE3

STAND

ANC1(Sector 1)

12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678

ADAM

PM1 2SUMA

TRE4TRE1TRE2

Dummy Panel


TRE1TRE2TRE7TRE8

Dummy Panel

TRE

ANC1

a b

1 2 7 8

ANC2

a b

3 4 5 6

ANC3

a b

1 3 2 4

ANC3(Sector 2)

BATS(Option)

TRE

The configuration is based on1x3...8 Low Loss configurationextended with a 1x4 sector.

In case of 1x3...4 LL/1x1...4

On ANC1 and ANC2:The two bridges will be removedat installation time (on site), if nomore than 2 TREs are connectedto them.

Sector 1

Sector 2

GSM 1800 / GSM 1900

PM1 2 PM1 2

Figure 76: MBI5 - 1x3...8LL/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration

124 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.5.5.6 MBI5 - 1x1...4/2x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MBI5 - 1x1...4/2x1...4 -Multiband BTS configuration.

Connection Area

1234567123456712345671234567123456712345671234567

ANC2(Sector 2)

TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4



Empty space123123

Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU


TRE1

STAND

ANC1(Sector 1)

12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678

TRE2TRE1TRE2

Dummy Panel


TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

Dummy Panel

ANC3

a b

1 3 2 4ANC3

(Sector 3)

BATS(Option)

TRE

ANC1

a b

1 3 2 4

ANC2

a b

1 3 2 4

Sector 1 Sector 2 Sector 3


GSM 1800 / GSM 1900

ADAM

PM1 2SUMA

PM1 2 PM1 2


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 125 / 910



Connection Area

1234567123456712345671234567123456712345671234567

ANC2(Sector 2)

TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4



Empty space123123



TRE1

STAND

ANC1(Sector 1)

12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678

TRE2TRE1TRE2

Dummy Panel


TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

Dummy Panel

ANC3

a b

1 3 2 4ANC3

(Sector 3)

BATS(Option)

TRE

ANC1

a b

1 3 2 4

ANC2

a b

1 3 2 4



GSM 1800 / GSM 1900

ADAM

PM1 2SUMA

PM1 2 PM1 2


126 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.5.5.8 MBI5 - 1x1...4/...4,...2,...2The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 1x1...4/...4,...2,...2 -Multiband BTS configuration.

Connection Area

ANC2(Sector 2)

TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4

The BTS has 4 sectors withrespectively n, p, q and r TREs

Empty space

Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1

ANC1(Sector 1)

SUMA

TRE2TRE1TRE2

Dummy Panel

ANC3(Sector 3)

STANDAir Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1TRE1TRE2

ANC4(Sector 4)

TRE

ANC1

a b

1 2

TRE2

Dummy Panel

TRE1

FANU

ANC2

a b

3 4TRE 1 2

ANC3

a b

3 4TRE 1 2 TRE

ANC4

a b

1 2

Sector 1 Sector 2

Sector 3 Sector 4


GSM 1800 / GSM 1900

Figure 79: MBI5 - 1x1...4/...4,...2,...2 - Multiband BTS Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 127 / 910


2.5.5.9 MBI5 - ...4,...2,...2/1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - ...4,...2,...2/1x1...4 -Multiband BTS configuration.

Connection Area

ANC2(Sector 2)

TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4


Empty space

Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU


TRE1

ANC1(Sector 1)

SUMA

TRE2TRE1TRE2

Dummy Panel

ANC3(Sector 3)

STANDAir Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1TRE2

ANC4(Sector 4)

TRE

ANC1

a b

1 2

TRE2

Dummy Panel

TRE1

FANU

ANC2

a b

3 4TRE 1 2

ANC3

a b

3 4TRE 1 2 TRE

ANC4

a b

1 2

Sector 3 Sector 4

Sector 1 Sector 2

GSM 1800 / GSM 1900

Figure 80: MBI5 - ...4,...2,...2/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration

128 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



Connection Area

ANC2(Sector 2)

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2


Empty space

Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE3

ANC1(Sector 1)

SUMA

TRE4TRE3TRE4

Dummy Panel

ANC3(Sector 3)

STANDAir Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1TRE1TRE2

ANC4(Sector 4)

TRE

ANC2

a b

1 2

TRE2

Dummy Panel

TRE1

FANU

ANC1

a b

3 4TRE 1 2

ANC4

a b

3 4TRE 1 2TRE

ANC3

a b

1 2

Sector 3 Sector 4

Sector 1 Sector 2


GSM 1800 / GSM 1900


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 129 / 910



Connection Area

ANC2(Sector 2)

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2The BTS has 4 sectors withrespectively n, p, q and r TREs

Empty space


Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE3

ANC1(Sector 1)

SUMA

TRE4TRE3TRE4

Dummy Panel

ANC3(Sector 3)

STANDAir Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1TRE2

ANC4(Sector 4)

TRE

ANC1

a b

1 2

TRE2

Dummy Panel

TRE1

FANU

ANC2

a b

3 4TRE 1 2

ANC3

a b

3 4TRE 1 2 TRE

ANC4

a b

1 2

Sector 3 Sector 4

Sector 1 Sector 2


GSM 1800 / GSM 1900


130 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.5.6 MBI Configurations - Multiband Cells GSM 900/1800

2.5.6.1 MBI3 - 1x(...4/...4)The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 - 1x(...4/...4) - MultibandCells - DC configuration.

FANU FANUFANU

TRE1

Air InletSTAND

Empty space

Connection Area

Air Inlet

The BTS has 1 sector with:− n TREs in GSM 900 band,− p TREs in GSM 1800 band

ANC1 and ANC2 are set tothe same sector number

FANU FANU FANU

TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3

TRE2TRE1TRE2

SUMA

Dummy Panel

ANC1a b

TRE 1 3 2 4

ANC2 ANC1

ANC2a b

TRE 1 3 2 4

GSM 1800


Figure 83: MBI3 - 1x(...4/...4) - Multiband Cells - DC Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 131 / 910


2.5.6.2 MBI5 - 1x(...6/...6)The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 1x(...6/...6) - MultibandCells - AC or DC configuration.

Connection Area

123456123456123456123456123456123456123456

ANC2ANY2

TRE3TRE4TRE5TRE6

The BTS has 1 sector with:− p TREs in GSM 900 band,− n TREs in GSM 1800 band

If no more than 4 TREs, no ANY is required. TRE1 to TRE4 are then cabled on ANC.


GSM 1800

1212


Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1

STAND

ANC1

12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678

ADAM

PM1 2

SUMA

TRE2

TRE5TRE6

Dummy Panel


TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

BATS(Option)

ANY 1

ANC1a b

ANY1

TRE 1 3 2 4 5 6

ANC2a b

ANY2

TRE 1 3 2 4 5 6

Dummy Panel

Empty space

ANC1 and ANC2 are set to thesame sector number.


PM1 2 PM1 2

Figure 84: MBI5 - 1x(...6/...6) - Multiband Cells - AC or DC Configuration

132 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.5.6.3 MBI5 - 1x(...8/...4)The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 1x(...8/...4) - MultibandCells - AC or DC configuration.

ANY2

123456123456123456123456123456123456123456

BATS(Option)

Connection Area

ANC2

FANUAir Inlet

FANU FANU

Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1

STAND

ANC1

12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678

SUMA

TRE2TRE3TRE4

Dummy Panel

ANY 1

TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8


ANC2a b

ANY1 ANY2

TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8


Empty space

123123


TRE1TRE2

ANC1

TRE 1 3 4

a b

TRE3TRE4

Dummy Panel

2

GSM 1800

ANC1 and ANC2 are set to the same sector number.

ANC2, If no more than 4 TREs, no ANY is required. TRE1 to TRE4 are then cabled on ANC.

The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREsADAM

PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 133 / 910


2.5.6.4 MBI5 - 1x(...4/...8)The following figure shows the rack layouts of the MBI5 - 1x(...4/...8) - MultibandCells - AC or DC configuration.

ANY2

123456123456123456123456123456123456123456

BATS(Option)

Connection Area

ANC2


Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1

STAND

ANC1

12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678

TRE2TRE3TRE4

Dummy Panel

ANY1

TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8


ANC2a b

ANY1 ANY2

TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8


Empty space

123


TRE1TRE2

ANC1

TRE 1 3 4

a b

TRE3TRE4

Dummy Panel

2

GSM 1800

ANC 2, if no more than 4 TREs, no ANY is required.TRE1 to TRE4 are then cabled on ANC.

ANC1 and ANC2 are set to the same sector number.

The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs.

SUMA

ADAM

PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2


134 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



Connection Area

ANC2(Sector 1)

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2 The BTS has 2 sectors.

Sector 1:− n TREs in GSM 900 band,− p TREs in GSM 1800 band

ANC1 and ANC2 are set tothe same sector number.

Empty space

Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE3

ANC1(Sector 1)SUMA

TRE4TRE3TRE4

Dummy Panel

ANC3(Sector 2)

STANDAir Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1TRE2

ANC4(Sector 2)

TRE2

Dummy Panel

TRE1

FANU

GSM 1800

TRE

ANC2

a b

1 2

ANC1

a b

3 4TRE 1 2

ANC4

a b

3 4TRE 1 2TRE

ANC3

a b

1 2

Sector 2:− q TREs in GSM 1800 band,− r TREs in GSM 900 band




3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 135 / 910



Connection Area

ANC2(Sector 1)

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

Empty space

Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

Air Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE3

ANC1(Sector 1)SUMA

TRE4TRE3TRE4

Dummy Panel

ANC3(Sector 2)

STANDAir Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1TRE2

ANC4(Sector 2)

TRE2

Dummy Panel

TRE1

FANU

GSM 1800

TRE

ANC1

a b

1 2

ANC2

a b

3 4TRE 1 2

ANC3

a b

3 4TRE 1 2 TRE

ANC4

a b

1 2

The BTS has 2 sectors.

Sector 1:− n TREs in GSM 900 band,− p TREs in GSM 1800 band


Sector 2:− q TREs in GSM 1800 band,− r TREs in GSM 900 band




136 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.5.6.7 MBI5 - 1x(...2/...2), 1x(...4/...4)The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 1x(...2/...2), 1x(...4/...4)- Multiband Cells - DC configuration.

Connection Area

ANC2(Sector 2)

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2


Sector 1:− n TREs in GSM 900 band,− q TREs in GSM 1800 band


Empty space


TRE3

ANC1(Sector 1)

SUMA

TRE4

TRE3TRE4

Dummy Panel

ANC3(Sector 1)

STANDAir Inlet

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1TRE2

ANC4(Sector 2)

TRE

ANC1

a b

1 2

TRE2

Dummy Panel

TRE1

FANU

GSM 1800

ANC2

a b

3 4TRE 1 2

ANC4

a b

3 4TRE 1 2


Sector 2:− p TREs in GSM 1800 band,− r TREs in GSM 900 band


TRE

ANC3

a b

1 2


Figure 89: MBI5 - 1x(...2/...2), 1x(...4/...4) - Multiband Cells - DC Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 137 / 910


2.6 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with TwinTRX

2.6.1 Capacity Mode

2.6.1.1 MBI3 - 1 Sector with Twin-TRX

138 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.6.1.2 MBI5 - 1 Sector with Twin-TRX

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 139 / 910


2.6.1.3 MBI3 - 2 Sectors with Twin-TRX

140 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 141 / 910



142 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.6.1.6 MBI5 - 3 Sectors with Twin-TRXConfigurations with maximum 4/4/4 TRX.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 143 / 910


Configurations with intended, respective more than 4/4/4 TRX.

144 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 145 / 910



146 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.6.2 Capacity Mode Low Loss

2.6.2.1 MBI3 - 1 Sector Low Loss with Twin-TRX

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 147 / 910


2.6.2.2 MBI5 - 1 Sector Low Loss with Twin-TRX

148 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 149 / 910


2.6.2.3 MBI3 - 2 Sectors Low Loss with Twin-TRX

150 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 151 / 910



152 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.6.3 Multiband & MB Cell

2.6.3.1 MBI3 - Multiband 1 + 1 Sector with Twin-TRX

Multiband BTS: The BTS has 2 sectors with n and p TRX.

Multiband cell: The BTS has one sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRXin 1800 MHz.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 153 / 910


2.6.3.2 MBI5 - Multiband 1 + 1 Sectors with Twin-TRX

Multiband BTS: The BTS has 2 sectors with n and p TRX.

Multiband cell: The BTS has one sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRXin 1800 MHz.

154 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



Multiband BTS: The BTS has 4 sectors with n and q TRX in 900 MHz plusp and r TRX in 1800 TRX.

Multiband cell: The BTS has 1 sector with n TRX in 900MHz and p TRX in1800 MHz and 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 TRX.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 155 / 910



Multiband BTS: The BTS has 6 sectors with n, q, s TRX in 900 MHz and p, r, tTRX in 1800 MHz.

Multiband cell: The BTS has 1 sector withn TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in 1800 MHzplus 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 MHzplus 1 sector with s TRX in 900 MHz and t TRX in 1800 MHz.

156 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.6.4 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div.

2.6.4.1 MBI3 - 1 Sector TX Diversity 2 RX with Twin-TRX

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 157 / 910


2.6.4.2 MBI5 - 1 Sectors TX Diversity 2 RX with Twin-TRX

158 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 159 / 910



160 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.6.4.5 MBI3 - 3 Sector TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 161 / 910


2.6.4.6 MBI5 - 3 Sector TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX

162 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.6.5 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div. Low Loss

2.6.5.1 MBI3 - 1 Sector TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 163 / 910


2.6.5.2 MBI5 - 1 Sector TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX

164 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.6.5.3 MBI3 - 2 Sectors TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 165 / 910



166 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 167 / 910




168 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 169 / 910



170 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 171 / 910



2.6.7 Extended Cell

2.6.7.1 MBI3 - Extended Cell with Twin-TRXAC or DC configuration, with up to 4 + 4 TRX.

172 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 173 / 910


2.6.7.2 MBI5 - Extended Cell with Twin-TRX

174 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.6.8 Extended Cell TxDiv, 4RX Div for outer cell

2.6.8.1 MBI3 - Extended Cell TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 175 / 910


2.6.8.2 MBI5 - Extended Cell TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX

176 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.7 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Mixed ConfigurationsBased on Extension with Twin TRX

The following table gives the possible configuration extension based on TwinTRX modules.

AC

Carriesrs persector

DC

Carriesrs persector




1 4 -> 8 8 -> 12

2 2/2 -> 4/4 4/4 -> 4/6(6/6*)

MBI3

3 1/1/1 -> 2/2/2 2/2/2 -> 4/4/4

1 n.a. 12 -> 16

2 n.a. 6/6 -> 8/8

MBI5

3 4/4/4 -> 4/6/6(6/6/6*)

4/4/4 -> 6/6/6

1 n.a. 4 -> 8

2 n.a. 2/2 -> 4/4

Mini

3 n.a. 1/1/1 -> 2/2/2

1 n.a. 12 -> 16

2 2/2 -> 4/4 6/6 -> 8/8

Medi

3 2/2/2 (4/4/4) ->4/6/6(6/6/6)

4/4/4 -> 6/6/6


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 177 / 910


2.7.1 MBI3 - 1 sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX

178 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.7.2 MBI3 - 2 sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 179 / 910


2.7.3 MBI3 - 3 sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX

180 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.7.4 MBI5 - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 181 / 910


2.7.5 MBI5 - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX

182 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.7.6 MBI5 - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 183 / 910


184 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.8 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Mixed ConfigurationsBased on Extension with Twin TRX (Only in MBI5 CabinetVariant AB)


AC

Carriesrs persector

DC

Carriesrs persector




1 n.a. 12 -> 16

2 n.a. 6/6 -> 12/12

MBI5 (AB)

3 4/4/4 -> 4/6/6(6/6/6) 4/4/4 -> 6/6/6


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 185 / 910


2.8.1 MBI5 AB variant - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX

186 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.8.2 MBI5 AB variant - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 187 / 910


2.8.3 MBI5 AB variant - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX

188 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 189 / 910


2.9 Outdoor Configurations with Single TRX

2.9.1 Outdoor Configurations - Standard BTS GSM 900/1800/1900

2.9.1.1 Outdoor CBO - 1x1...2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor CBO - 1x1...2configuration.

Figure 90: Outdoor CBO - 1x1...2 Configuration

190 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.9.1.2 Outdoor MINI - 1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MINI - 1x1...4configuration.

FANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

ANXANYSUM

AIR

AIR

OPTIONS

The BTS has n TREs

TRE1 and TRE2 are directly connected to ANXIf ANY not equipped (2 TREs max.),

Empty space, no dummy panels needed

FANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

ANC1

AIR

AIR


AIR

AIR

a bANC1

TRE 1 2 3 4SUMA

Empty space

Figure 91: Outdoor MINI - 1x1...4 Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 191 / 910


2.9.1.3 Outdoor MINI - 1x1...8The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MINI - 1x1...8configuration.


a b

ANC1

ANY1 ANY2

TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

If more than 4 TREs, 2 ANY are required pre−equipment possible.

Up to 4 TREs, and if no ANY pre−equipment,TRE1 to TRE4 are directly connected to the ANC.

Empty space

AIR

TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5

FANU

SUMA ANY2 ANY1

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

FANU FANU

AIR

ANC1

FANU FANU FANU

AIR

AIR


192 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.9.1.4 Outdoor CBO - 2x1The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor CBO - 2x1configuration.

FANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE1

ANC1

HEAT3

The BTS has 2 sector with 1 TRE123456789012345612345678901234561234567890123456

a bANC1

TRE 1

SUMA

Empty space

BATS

PM12

ADAM2

1212 Options

ANC2 a bANC2

TRE 1

PM12

Figure 93: Outdoor CBO - 2x1 Configuration

2.9.1.5 Outdoor CBO - 2x2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor CBO - 2x2configuration.

This configuration is available only on CBO DC variant.

Figure 94: Outdoor CBO - 2x2 Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 193 / 910


2.9.1.6 Outdoor MINI - 2x1...2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MINI - 2x1...2configuration.

FANU FANUFANUTRE1TRE2

ANXSUM

AIR

AIR

OPTIONS

ANX

TRE1TRE2


Empty space, no dummy panels needed


ANC1

AIR

AIR

The BTS has 2 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs

Empty space

AIR

AIR

a b

ANC1

TRE 1 2

ANC2(Sector 2) (Sector 1)

a b

ANC2

TRE 1 2Sector 1 Sector 2

SUMA



194 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.9.1.7 Outdoor MINI - 2x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor Mini - 2x1...4configuration.

AIR

TRE4 TRE3

TRE2 TRE1

FANU

ANC2(Sector 2)

SUMA ANC1(Sector 1)

TRE4 TRE3

FANUFANU

AIR

AIR

TRE2 TRE1

FANU FANUFANU

AIR

The BTS has 2 sectors:− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs

a b

ANC1

TRE 1 2 3 4

Sector 1

Empty space

a b

ANC2

TRE 1 2 3 4

Sector 2


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 195 / 910


2.9.1.8 Outdoor MINI - 3x1The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MINI - 3x1configuration.

ANX

SUM

AIR

OPTIONS

ANX

TRE 1

(Sector 2)

(Sector 1)

The BTS has 3 TREs, one per sectorTRE 2TRE 3

ANX

(Sector 3)

FANU FANU FANU Empty space, no dummy panels needed

Figure 97: Outdoor MINI - 3x1 Configuration

2.9.1.9 Outdoor CBO - 3x1The following figure shows the rack layout of the CBO - 3x1 configuration.

This configuration is available only on CBO DC variant.

Figure 98: CBO 3x1 Configuration

196 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.9.1.10 Outdoor MINI - 3x1...2The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MINI - 3x1...2configuration.

FANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE2

ANC1

AIR

AIR

The BTS has 3 sectors :

Empty space

AIR

AIR

a b

ANC1

TRE 1 2

ANC2


a b

ANC2

TRE 1 2

Sector 1 Sector 2

SUMA

ANC3(Sector 3)

TRE1TRE2

FANU FANU FANUa b

ANC3

TRE 1 2

Sector 3

− Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs

TRE1TRE2

On each ANC, the bridges can be removed at installation (on site), if maximum power is required.


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 197 / 910


2.9.1.11 Outdoor MINI - 3x1...2 - GSM 1900 (ANX version)The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MINI - 3x1...2 - GSM1900 configuration (ANX version).

FANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE2

ANX 1

AIR

AIR


Empty space

AIR

AIR

a bANX 1

TRE 1 2

ANX 2


a bANX 2


SUMA

ANX 3

( Sector 3 )

TRE1TRE2

FANU FANU FANU

a bANX 3

TRE 1 2Sector 3


TRE1TRE2

Figure 100: Outdoor MINI - 3x1...2 - GSM 1900 Configuration (ANX version)

198 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.9.1.12 Outdoor MEDI - 1x1...8The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI - 1x1...8configuration for GSM 900/1800.

SUM

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

ANX1ANY2ANY1ANY3

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

OPTIONS

The BTS has n TREs

If no ANY (2 TREs max.), TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX

If ANY 2 only, ANY2 is connected to ANX1

ANY filling order:ANY2

then ANY1then ANY3

Empty space,no dummy panels needed

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

ANC1ANY1ANY2

TRE5TRE6

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

TRE7TRE8


Empty Space

AIR

AIR

ANC1

a b

ANY1 ANY2

TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

If more than 4 TREs, 2 ANYs are required Pre−equipment possible

SUMA

TRE5TRE6TRE8 TRE7

Figure 101: Outdoor MEDI - 1x1...8 Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 199 / 910


2.9.1.13 Outdoor MEDI - 1x9...12The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI - 1x9...12configuration.

Note: Restrictions

For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 1x11...12 with 28 W at + 40� C.



ANXSUM 1

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2

TRE7TRE8

ANX

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

OPTIONS

2

TRE5TRE6

TRE3TRE4

ANY1

ANY2

ANY3

ANY1

ANY2

ANX1 and ANX2 are set tothe same sector number


FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

ANC 1ANYANY2 1

TRE5TRE6

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

TRE7TRE8The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs

Empty Space

AIR

AIR

ANC 1a b

ANY 1 ANY 2

TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ANC 2

FANU FANU FANU

ANC 2a b

TRE


SUMA

TRE9TRE10TRE11TRE12

910 11 12


200 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.9.1.14 Outdoor CPT2 - 2x1...6The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor CPT2 - 2x1...6configuration for GSM 900 and GSM 1800.

Note: Restrictions

For the GSM 1800 configuration using TRAD/TRADE TREs, the followingrestriction has to be considered: 2x5...6 with 45 W at + 40� C.


In each sector, if no more than 4 TREs, no ANY is required. TRE 1 to 4 are then cabled on ANC

ACSU

ADAM

AIR

TRE5 TRE6

FANU

SUMA

ANY1 ANC1(Sector 1)

AIR

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

BBU

LPFU

PM1 2

FANU FANU FANU

TRE6 TRE5

FANU FANU

AIR

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

AIR

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

ANC2(Sector 2)

IDU1 IDU2 ANY2

− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs

a b

ANC1

ANY1

TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6

a bANC2

ANY2

TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6

Microwave IDU locations

Empty space

The BTS has 2 sectors:

PM1 2PM1 2

Figure 103: Outdoor CPT2 - 2x1...6 Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 201 / 910


2.9.1.15 Outdoor MEDI - 2x1...6The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI - 2x1...6configuration.

Note: Restrictions

For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 2x6 with 28 W at + 40� C.


FANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

ANXSUM(Sector 1)

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2

TRE5TRE6

ANX

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

OPTIONS

(Sector 2)

TRE5TRE6

TRE3TRE4

For each sector, TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX if 2 TREs max. in the sector (No ANY)

ANY1 ANY2ANY3ANY3 ANY1 ANY2

Empty space,

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

ANC2(Sector 2)ANY3ANY4

TRE5TRE6

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR


Empty Space

AIR

AIR

ANC1a b

ANY1 ANY2

TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6

ANC1(Sector 1)

FANU FANU FANU

ANY1ANY2

AIR

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

TRE5TRE6

ANC2a b

ANY3 ANY4

TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6

SUMA

FANU FANU FANU

In each sector, if no more than 4 TREs, no ANY is required. TRE1 to TRE4 are then cabled on ANC


no dummy panels needed


202 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.9.1.16 Outdoor CPT2 - 3x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor CPT2 - 3x1...4configuration.

Note: Restrictions

For the GSM 1800 configuration using TRAD/TRADE TREs, the followingrestrictions have to be considered: 3x4 with 45 W at + 40� C.




ACSU

ADAM

PM1 2

ANC1(Sector 1)

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

BBU

LPFU

FANU FANU FANU

AIR

TRE4 TRE3

FANU

SUMA

AIR

TRE4 TRE3

FANU FANU

AIR

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

AIR

TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

ANC2(Sector 2)

IDU1

IDU2

The BTS has 3 sectors:− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs− Sector 3 with q TREs

a b

ANC1

1 2 3 4


Empty space

ANC3(Sector 3)

ANC2 ANC3

a b a b

TRE 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

PM1 2 PM1 2

Figure 105: Outdoor CPT2 - 3x1...4 Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 203 / 910


2.9.1.17 Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...4configuration. (The ANX version is only valid for GSM 900/1800).

Note: Restrictions



FANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

ANXANY1SUM (Sector 1)

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

ANXANY2

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

OPTIONS

TRE3TRE4

ANXANY3

TRE1TRE2

For each sector, TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX if 2 TREs max. (no ANY)

(Sector 3) (Sector 2)Empty space,no dummy panels needed

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR


Empty Space

AIR

ANC1a b

TRE 1 2

ANC1

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

FANUFANUAIR

(Sector 1)ANC2

(Sector 2)ANC3

(Sector 3)

TRE3TRE4

3 4

ANC2a b

1 2 3 4

ANC3a b

1 2 3 4

SUMA

− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs− Sector 3 with q TREs

FANU


204 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.9.1.18 Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...4 GSM 1900The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...4GSM 1900 configuration.

Note: Restrictions

For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 3x4 with 28 W at + 40� C


FANU FANU

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

FANU

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

ANY1 ANX1SUMA(Sector 1)

FANU FANU

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

FANU

FANU FANU FANU

TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3

ANY2ANX2

ANY3 (Sector 2)ANX3

(Sector 3)

ANX2

ANY2

a b

1 2 3 4

ANX3

ANY3

a b

1 2 3 4TRE1 2 3 4

ANX1

ANY1

a b

Empty space

For each sector:ANY is required if more than 2 TREs

Pre−equipment possible

The BTS has 3 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs

− Sector 2 with p TREs

− Sector 3 with q TREs

Figure 107: Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...4 GSM 1900 Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 205 / 910


2.9.2 Outdoor Configurations - Low Losses GSM 900/1800/1900

2.9.2.1 Outdoor MEDI - 1x3...8 Low LossesThe following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI - 1x3...8 -Low Losses configuration.

SUM

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE3TRE4

ANX2ANY2

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

OPTIONS

The BTS has one sector with n TREs

TRE1TRE2TRE7TRE8

ANX1ANY1

FANUFANUFANU

ANX1 and ANX2 are set to the same sector number

TRE5TRE6



FANU FANUFANU

TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8

ANC2

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR


Empty Space

AIR

ANC1a b

TRE 1 2

ANC1

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

AIR

AIR

3 4

ANC2a b

TRE 5 6 7 8

Both ANCs are set to the same sector number (Remote Inventory)

SUMA

In case of 1x3...4:

On each ANC, the two bridges will be removed at installation (on site), if no more than 2 TREs are connected to them

Figure 108: Outdoor MEDI - 1x3...8 - Low Losses Configuration

206 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.9.2.2 Outdoor MEDI - 1x9...12 Low LossesThe following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MEDI - 1x9...12 -Low Losses configuration.

Note: Restrictions

For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 1x11...12 with 28 W at + 40� C.


FANU FANU

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

FANU

FANU FANU FANU

TRE2 TRE1

TRE4 TRE3

ANC1SUMA

FANU FANU

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

FANU

FANU FANU FANU

TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5

TRE12 TRE11 TRE10 TRE9

ANC2ANC3

ANC2

a b

5 6 9 10

ANC3

a b

7 8 11 12TRE1 2 3 4

ANC1

a b

Empty space

The 3 ANCs are set to the same sector number



3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 207 / 910


2.9.2.3 Outdoor MEDI - 2x3...6 Low LossesThe following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI - 2x3...6 -Low Losses configuration.

Note: Restrictions



FANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

ANX1SUM (Sector 1)

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE3TRE4

ANX2

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

OPTIONS

(Sector 1)

TRE3TRE4

In each sector:− Both ANXs are set to the same sector number

ANX4(Sector 2)

ANX3

(Sector 2)


ANYANY

TRE5TRE5 TRE6TRE6

− When no ANY, TREs 3 and 4 are directly connected to ANX

Extension from 2x4 to 2x6


FANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR


Empty Space

AIR

ANC1a b

TRE 1 2

ANC1

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1TRE2

AIR

ANC2ANC3

ANC4a b

3 4

SUMA


TRE3TRE4

ANC4

(Sector 1) (Sector 2) ANC2a b

TRE 1 2

ANC3a b

3 4

In each sector, both ANCs are set to the same sector number

TRE4

5 6

5 6

Extension from 2x4 to 2x6

FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU

TRE5TRE5 TRE6TRE6

On each ANC, the two bridges will be removed at installation (on site), if no more than 2 TREs are connected to them



208 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.9.2.4 Outdoor MEDI - 3x3...4 Low LossesThe following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MEDI - 3x3...4 -Low Losses configuration.

Note: Restrictions


Configuration 3x3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45� C.

FANU FANUFANUTRE1TRE2TRE3

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR


Empty Space

AIR

ANC1a b

TRE 1 2

ANC1

FANU FANU FANUTRE1TRE2

AIR

ANC2ANC3(Sector 2)

SUMA


TRE3TRE4

ANC4ANC4

a b

Per sector, both ANCs are setto the same sector numberTRE4


On each ANC, bridges are removed at installation (on site), if no more than 2 TREs are connected to them


TRE 3 4

Sector 1

ANC2a b

1 2

ANC3

a b

3 4

Sector 2

ANC5

a b

1 2

ANC6

a b

3 4

Sector 3

(Sector 2)(Sector 1) (Sector 1)

TRE3TRE4ANC6

(Sector 3)

TRE1TRE2ANC5

(Sector 3)


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 209 / 910


2.9.3 Outdoor Configurations - High Power GSM 1800

2.9.3.1 Outdoor MINI - 1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MINI - 1x1...4 -High Power GSM 1800 configuration.

TRE4

TRE3

SUMA

FANU FANU FANU

AIR

TRE2 TRE1

The BTS has 1 sector

ANC1

Empty space

TRE 1 2 3 4

ANC1

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

AIR

AIR

a b

TRE4

TRE3

SUMA

FANU FANU FANUAIR

TRE2 TRE1

ANC1

AIR

FANU FANU FANUAIR

AIR

With classical HP TREs

On each ANC, bridges are removed at installation (on site), if no more than 2 TREs are connected to them

Figure 112: Outdoor MINI - 1x1...4 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration

210 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.9.3.2 Outdoor MINI - 2x1The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MINI - 2x1 - HighPower GSM 1800 configuration.

FANU FANUFANUTRE1

ANX1SUM

AIR

AIR

OPTIONS

ANX2

TRE1


Sector 1 with 1 TRESector 2 with 1 TRE

TRDH TRDH



ANC1

AIR

AIR

The BTS has 2 sectors with 1 TRE each

Empty space

AIR

AIR

a bANC1

TRE 1ANC2


a bANC2

TRE 1Sector 1 Sector 2SUMA

On each ANC, the two bridges are removed at installation (on site), if no more than 2 TREs are connected to them


Figure 113: Outdoor MINI - 2x1 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 211 / 910


2.9.3.3 Outdoor MINI - 2x1...2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MINI - 2x1...2 -High Power GSM 1800 configuration.

TRE1

FANU

SUMA

FANU

FANU FANU

ANC1(Sector 1)

a b

ANC1

Empty space

ANC2(Sector 2)

TRE 1 2

AIR

FANUAIR

FANUAIR

TRE2 TRE1

a b

ANC2

TRE 1 2

The BTS has 2 sectors with up to 2 TREs each

AIR

TRE2

Sector 1 Sector 2

TRE1

FANU

SUMA

FANU

FANU FANU

ANC1(Sector 1)

ANC2(Sector 2)

AIR

FANU

AIR

FANU

AIR

TRE2 TRE1

AIR

TRE2


On each ANC, bridges will be removed at installation (on site).

Figure 114: Outdoor MINI - 2x1...2 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration

212 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.9.3.4 Outdoor MEDI - 2x1...2This configuration must be considered as a sub-equipment of the OutdoorMEDI - 3x1...2 - High Power GSM 1800 configuration. Configuration replacedby MINI configuration.

2.9.3.5 Outdoor MEDI - 2x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI - 2x1...4 -High Power GSM 1800 configuration.

Note: Restrictions

For the GSM 1800 configuration using TADH TREs, the ambient temperatureis + 38� C.



ANC1

Empty slotsNo Dummy Panels

1 2 3 4

a b

TRE4

TRE3

SUMA

FANU FANU FANU

AIR

TRE2 TRE1

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

AIR

ANC1(Sector 1)

ANC2

1 2 3 4

a b

TRE4

TRE3

FANU FANU FANU

AIR

TRE2 TRE1

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

AIR

ANC2(Sector 2)

AIR AIR

TRE4

TRE3

SUMA

FANU FANU FANUAIR

TRE2 TRE1

AIR

FANU FANU FANUAIR

ANC1(Sector 1)

TRE4

TRE3

FANU FANU FANUAIR

TRE2 TRE1

AIR

FANU FANU FANUAIR

ANC2(Sector 2)

AIR AIR

On each ANC, the two bridges are removed at installation (on site), if no more than 2 TREs are connected to them

Figure 115: Outdoor MEDI- 2x1...4 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 213 / 910


2.9.3.6 Outdoor CPT2 - 3x1...2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor CPT2 - 3x1...2 -High Power GSM 1800 configuration.

Note: Restrictions

For the GSM 1800 configuration using TADH TREs, the ambient temperatureis + 40� C.

ACSU

ADAM

PM12

ANC 1(Sector 1)

BBU

LPFU

PM12

PM12

FANU FANU FANU

AIR

TRE2

FANU

SUMA

AIR

FANU FANU

AIR

AIR

FANU FANU FANUAIR

TRE1 TRE2

ANC 2(Sector 2)IDU 1

IDU 2


1 2


Empty space

ANC 3(Sector 3)

1 21 2

a b

ANC 1 ANC 2 ANC 3

a b a b

On each ANC:Bridges will be removed atinstallation time, on site

ACSU

ADAM

PM12

ANC 1(Sector 1)

TRE2 TRE1

BBU

LPFU

PM12

PM12

FANU FANU FANU

AIR

TRE2

FANU

SUMA

AIR

FANU FANUAIR

AIR

FANU FANU FANUAIR

TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 2(Sector 2)

IDU 1

IDU 2

ANC 3(Sector 3)


TRE1

TRE1TRE2

Figure 116: Outdoor CPT2 - 3x1...2 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration

214 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.9.3.7 Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...2 -High Power GSM 1800 configuration.


FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

ANC 2

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

( Sector 2 )

TRE2

ANC 3

( Sector 3 )

ANC 1

( Sector 1 )

TRE1

FANU FANU FANU

AIR

AIR

SUMA


ANC 1a b

1 2

ANC 2a b

1 2

ANC 3a b

1 2




SUM

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2

ANX 2

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

OPTIONS

(Sector 2)

TRE2

TRE1

ANX 3

(Sector 3)

ANX 1

(Sector 1)

TRE1TRE2

FANU FANU FANU FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2

ANC 2

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

( Sector 2 )

TRE2

TRE1

ANC 3

( Sector 3 )

ANC 1

( Sector 1 )

TRE1TRE2

FANU FANU FANU

AIR

AIR

SUMA

a

1

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2


Figure 117: Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...2 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 215 / 910


2.9.3.8 Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...3The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...3 - HighPower GSM 1800 configuration. The configuration is based on the 3x1...2 -High Power GSM 1800 configuration, extended with Medium Power TREs.

AIR

TRE2

FANU FANU FANU

AIR

AIR

FANU FANU FANUAIR

TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 2(Sector 2)

The BTS has 3 sectors− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs− Sector 3 with q TREs

Empty slots.No Dummy Panels

ANC 3(Sector 3)

1 2

(HP)

a bANC 1 ANC 2 ANC 3

a b a b

On each ANC:"The bridge, where the TRE MPis connected, is removed on site"

(HP) (HP) (HP)

TRE3(MP)

TRE3(MP)

AIR

AIR

AIR

FANU FANU FANUAIR

TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 1(Sector 1)

(MP) (HP) (HP)

SUMA

3nc

HP MP1 2 3

nc

HP MP1 2 3

nc

HP MP

AIR

TRE2

FANU FANU FANUAIR

AIR

FANU FANU FANUAIR

TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 2(Sector 2)

ANC 3(Sector 3)

(HP)

(HP) (HP) (HP)

TRE3(MP)

AIR

AIR

AIR

FANU FANU FANUAIR

TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 1(Sector 1)

(MP) (HP) (HP)

SUMA


TRE3(MP)

Figure 118: Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...3 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration

216 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.9.4 Outdoor Configurations - Multiband BTS GSM 900/1800

2.9.4.1 Outdoor MINI - 1x1...2/1x1...2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MINI - 1x1...2/1x1...2- Multiband BTS configuration.

FANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE2

ANXSUM

AIR

AIR

OPTIONS

ANX

TRE1TRE2

(Sector 2)


GSM 1800

(Sector 1)



ANC 1

AIR

AIR


Empty space

AIR

AIR

a bANC 1

TRE 1 2ANC 2


a bANC 2

TRE 1 2Sector 1 Sector 2S

UMA

− Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs

GSM 1800

On the 2 ANCs the bridges can be removed to get more powerat antenna output (Low Losses)(Operation to be performed during installation phase)

Figure 119: Outdoor MINI - 1x1...2/1x1...2 - Multiband BTS Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 217 / 910


2.9.4.2 Outdoor MINI - 1x1...4/1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MINI - 1x1...4/1x1...4- Multiband BTS configuration.

FANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

ANC 1

AIR

AIR


Empty space

AIR

AIR

a bANC 1

TRE 1 2 3 4ANC 2


a bANC 2

Sector 1 Sector 2SUMA


GSM 1800

FANU FANUFANU

TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4

TRE 1 2 3 4

Figure 120: Outdoor MINI - 1x1...4/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration

218 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.9.4.3 Outdoor MEDI - 1x1...6/1x1...6The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI -1x1...6/1x1...6 - Multiband BTS configuration.

FANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

ANXSUM (Sector 1)

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2

TRE5TRE6

ANX

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

OPTIONS

TRE5TRE6

TRE3TRE4

For each sector :

TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANXif 2 TREs max. in the sector (no ANY)

ANY1

ANY2

ANY3

ANY ANY3 1

ANY2 (Sector 2)

GSM 1800


FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

ANC 2ANYANY

4 3

TRE5TRE6

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR


Empty

AIR

AIR

ANC 1a b

ANY 1 ANY 2

TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6

ANC 1

FANU FANU FANU

ANYANY2 1

AIR

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4


TRE5TRE6

ANC 2a b

ANY 3 ANY 4

TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6

SUMA

FANU FANU FANU

In each sector :If no more than 4 TREs, no ANY is


Space

GSM 1800

required, TRE1 to TRE4 are thencabled on ANC

Figure 121: Outdoor MEDI - 1x1...6/1x1...6 - Multiband BTS Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 219 / 910



FANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

ANXANYSUM (Sector 1)

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

ANXANY2

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

OPTIONS

1

TRE3TRE4

ANXANY3

TRE1TRE2

For each sector :



GSM 1800


FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR


GSM 1800

AIR

ANC 1a b

TRE 1 2

ANC

FANU FANU FANU

1

TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

FANUFANUFANU

AIR

( Sector 1 )ANC

2

( Sector 2 )ANC

3

( Sector 3 )

TRE3TRE4

3 4

ANC 2a b

1 2 3 4

ANC 3a b

1 2 3 4

SUMA


Empty Space


220 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



For each sector:


FANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

ANXANYSUM (Sector 1)

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

ANXANY2

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

OPTIONS

1

TRE3TRE4

ANXANY3

TRE1TRE2

(Sector 3) (Sector 2) GSM 1800


FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR


GSM 1800

AIR

ANC 1a b

TRE 1 2

ANC

FANU FANU FANU

1

TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

FANUFANUFANU

AIR

( Sector 1 )ANC

2

( Sector 2 )ANC

3

( Sector 3 )

TRE3TRE4

3 4

ANC 2a b

1 2 3 4

ANC 3a b

1 2 3 4

SUMA


Empty Space


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 221 / 910


2.9.4.6 Outdoor CPT2 - 2x1...2/2x1...2The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor CPT2 - 2x1...2/2x1...2- Multiband BTS configuration.

ACSUADAM

PM12

ANC 1(Sector 1)

TRE2 TRE1

PM12

PM12

FANU FANU FANU

AIR

TRE2

FANU

SUMA

AIR

FANU FANUAIR

AIR

FANU FANU FANUAIR

TRE2 TRE1

ANC 2(Sector 2)

IDU 1

IDU 2

Legend

The BTS has 4 sectors:− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs− Sector 3 with q TREs− Sector 4 with r TREs

1 2


Empty space

ANC 3(Sector 3)

1 21 2


a b a b

BBU

LPFU

TRE2 TRE1

ANC 4(Sector 4)

GSM 1800

TRE

1 2

ANC 4a b

TRE1

Figure 124: Outdoor CPT2 - 2x1...2/2x1...2 - Multiband BTS Configuration

222 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.9.4.7 Outdoor MEDI - 1x1...4/...4,...2,...2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI -1x1...4/...4,...2,...2 - Multiband BTS configuration.


ANXSUM (Sector 1)

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2

ANX

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

OPTIONS

ANX

TRE1TRE2

ANX(Sector 4)

ANY

TRE3TRE4 TRE3TRE4

ANY(Sector 3) (Sector 2)

GSM 1800


FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR


GSM 1800

AIR

ANC 1a b

TRE 1 2

ANC

FANU FANU FANU

1

TRE1TRE2

AIR

( Sector 1 )ANC

2

( Sector 2 )ANC

3

( Sector 3 )

TRE3TRE4

ANC 2a b

1 2 3 4

ANC 3a b

1 2 3 4

SUMA


Empty Space

( Sector 4 )ANC

4

TRE1TRE2

− Sector 4 with r TREs

ANC 4a b

1 2

Figure 125: Outdoor MEDI - 1x1...4/...4,...2,...2 - Multiband BTS Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 223 / 910


2.9.4.8 Outdoor MEDI - ...4,...2,...2/1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI -...4,...2,...2/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS configuration.

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR


GSM 1800

AIR

ANC 1a b

TRE 1 2

ANC

FANU FANU FANU

1

TRE1TRE2

AIR

( Sector 1 )ANC

2

( Sector 2 )ANC

3

( Sector 3 )

TRE3TRE4

ANC 2a b

1 2 3 4

ANC 3a b

1 2 3 4

SUMA


Empty Space

( Sector 4 )ANC

4

TRE1TRE2


ANC 4a b

1 2


ANXSUM (Sector 1)

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2

ANX

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

OPTIONS

ANX

TRE1TRE2

ANX(Sector 4)

ANY

TRE3TRE4 TRE3TRE4


GSM 1800

Empty slotsno dummy panels needed

Figure 126: Outdoor MEDI - ...4,...2,...2/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration

224 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



FANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

ANX

SUM (Sector 1)

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2

ANX

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

OPTIONS

ANX

TRE1TRE2

ANX(Sector 4)

ANY

TRE3TRE4 TRE3TRE4

ANY


GSM 1800


FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR


GSM 1800

AIR

ANC 1a b

TRE 1 2

ANC

FANU FANU FANU

1

TRE1TRE2

AIR

( Sector 1 )ANC

2

( Sector 2 )ANC

3

( Sector 3 )

TRE3TRE4

ANC 2a b

1 2 3 4

ANC 3a b

1 2 3 4

SUMA


Empty Space

( Sector 4 )ANC

4

TRE1TRE2


ANC 4a b

1 2


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 225 / 910



FANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

ANXSUM (Sector 1)

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2

ANX

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

OPTIONS

ANX

TRE1TRE2

ANX(Sector 4)

ANY

TRE3TRE4 TRE3TRE4


GSM 1800


FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR


GSM 1800

AIR

ANC 1a b

TRE 1 2

ANC

FANU FANU FANU

1

TRE1TRE2

AIR

( Sector 1 )ANC

2

( Sector 2 )ANC

3

( Sector 3 )

TRE3TRE4

ANC 2a b

1 2 3 4

ANC 3a b

1 2 3 4

SUMA


Empty Space

( Sector 4 )ANC

4

TRE1TRE2


ANC 4a b

1 2


226 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.9.4.11 Outdoor MEDI - 2x1...3/2x1...3The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MEDI - 2x1...3/2x1...3- Multiband BTS configuration.

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

TRE3

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR


GSM 1800

AIR

ANC 1a b

TRE 1 2ANC

FANU FANU FANU

1

TRE1TRE2

AIR

( Sector 1 )ANC

2

( Sector 2 )ANC

3

( Sector 3 )

TRE3

ANC 2a b

1 2 3

ANC 3a b

1 2 3SUMA


Empty Space

( Sector 4 )ANC

4

TRE1TRE2


ANC 4a b

1 2

FANUFANU FANU

TRE3TRE3

3

3


2.9.4.12 Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...2/3x1...2The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...2/3x1...2- Multiband BTS configuration.


ANC 1

AIR

AIR


Empty space

AIR

AIR

a bANC 1

1 2ANC 4


a bANC 2

1 2SUMA

ANC 6

( Sector 6 )

TRE1TRE2

FANU FANU

a bANC 3

1 2


a bANC 4

1 2

a bANC 5

1 2

a bANC 6

1 2

GSM 1800

GSM 900

− Sector 4 with r TREs − Sector 5 with s TREs − Sector 6 with t TREs

FANU


ANC 2

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

ANC 3


ANC 5

( Sector 5 )

TRE1TRE2

FANU FANU FANU


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 227 / 910


2.9.5 Outdoor Configurations - Multiband Cells GSM 900/1800

2.9.5.1 Outdoor MINI - 1x(...2/...2)The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MINI - 1x(...2/...2) -Multiband Cells configuration.

FANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE2

ANXSUM

AIR

AIR

OPTIONS

ANX

TRE1TRE2

2 1

The single sector has :n TREs in the GSM 900 bandp TREs in the GSM 1800 band

ANX 1 and ANX 2 are set to the same sector number

GSM 1800



ANC 1

AIR

AIR

Empty space

AIR

AIR

a bANC 1

TRE 1 2

ANC 2

a bANC 2

TRE 1 2SUMA

GSM 1800

On the 2 ANCs the bridges can be removed to get more powerat the antenna output (Low Loss)(Operation to be performed during installation phase)


Figure 131: Outdoor MINI - 1x(...2/...2) - Multiband Cells Configuration

228 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.9.5.2 Outdoor MINI - 1x(...4/...4)The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MINI - 1x(...4/...4) -Multiband Cells configuration.


ANC 1

AIR

AIR

Empty space

AIRa bANC 1

TRE 1 2 3 4

ANC 2

a bANC 2

SUMA

GSM 1800


TRE3TRE4TRE4

AIR

TRE3

FANU FANUFANU

TRE 1 2 3 4

Figure 132: Outdoor MINI - 1x(...4/...4) - Multiband Cells Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 229 / 910


2.9.5.3 Outdoor MEDI - 1x(...6/...6)The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI - 1x(...6/...6) -Multiband Cells configuration.


ANXSUM 1

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2

TRE5TRE6

ANX

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

OPTIONS

2

TRE5TRE6

TRE3TRE4

For each frequency band :TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANXif 2 TREs max. in the sector

ANY1

ANY2

ANY3

ANY ANY3 1

ANY2

(No ANY)


ANX 1 and ANX 2 are setto the same sector number

GSM 1800

Empty spaceno dummy panels needed

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

ANC 2ANYANY4 3

TRE5TRE6

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

The BTS has 1 sector with :

Empty

AIR

AIR

ANC 1a b

ANY 1 ANY 2

TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6

ANC 1

FANU FANU FANU

ANYANY2 1

AIR

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

TRE5TRE6

ANC 2a b

ANY 3 ANY 4

TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6

SUMA

FANU FANU FANU



Space

GSM 1800


Figure 133: Outdoor MEDI - 1x(...6/...6) - Multiband Cells Configuration

230 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.9.5.4 Outdoor CPT2 - 2x(...2/...2)The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor CPT2 - 2x(...2/...2) -Multiband Cells configuration.

ACSUADAM

PM12

ANC 1(Sector 1)

TRE2 TRE1

PM12

PM12

FANU FANU FANU

AIR

TRE2

FANU

SUMA

AIR

FANU FANUAIR

AIR

FANU FANU FANUAIR

TRE2 TRE1

ANC 2(Sector 2)

IDU 1

IDU 2

Legend

The BTS has 2 sectors:− Sector 1 with n TREs in GSM 900 and r TREs in GSM 1800− Sector 2 with p TREs in GSM 900 and q TREs in GSM 1800

1 2


Empty space

ANC 3(Sector 1)

1 21 2


a b a b

BBU

LPFU

TRE2 TRE1

ANC 4(Sector 2)

GSM 1800

TRE

1 2

ANC 4a b

TRE1

Figure 134: Outdoor CPT2 - 2x(...2/...2) - Multiband Cells Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 231 / 910



Sector 1 has:n TREs in the GSM 1800 bandp TREs in the GSM 900 band

ANX 3 and ANX4 are set toto the same sector number (2)

Sector 2 has:q TREs in the GSM 900 bandr TREs in the GSM 1800 band

ANX 1 and ANX 2 are setto the same sector number (1)

FANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

ANX

SUM(Sector 1)

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2

ANX

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

OPTIONS

ANX

TRE1TRE2

ANX

(Sector 2)

ANY

TRE3TRE4 TRE3TRE4

ANY4 1 23


GSM 1800


FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

GSM 1800

AIR

ANC

FANU FANU FANU

1

TRE1TRE2

AIR

( Sector 1 )ANC

2

( Sector 1 )ANC

3

( Sector 2 )

TRE3TRE4

SUMA

Empty Space

( Sector 2 )ANC

4

TRE1TRE2


ANC 1a b

TRE 1 2

ANC 2a b

1 2 3 4

Sector 1

ANC 3a b

1 2 3 4

ANC 4a b

1 2

Sector 2


232 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



Sector 1 has:n TREs in the GSM 900 bandp TREs in the GSM 1800 band

ANX 3 and ANX4 are set toto the same sector number (2)

Sector 2 has:q TREs in the GSM 1800 bandr TREs in the GSM 900 band



ANX

SUM(Sector 1)

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2

ANX

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

OPTIONS

ANX

TRE1TRE2

ANX

(Sector 2)

ANY

TRE3TRE4 TRE3TRE4

ANY4 1 23


GSM 1800


FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

ANC

FANU FANU FANU

1

TRE1TRE2

AIR

( Sector 1 )ANC

2

( Sector 1 )ANC

3

( Sector 2 )

TRE3TRE4

SUMA

( Sector 2 )ANC

4

TRE1TRE2GSM 1800

Empty Space

The BTS has 2 sectors

ANC 1a b

TRE 1 2

ANC 2a b

1 2 3 4

ANC 3a b

1 2 3 4

ANC 4a b

1 2

Sector 1

Sector 2


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 233 / 910


2.9.5.7 Outdoor MEDI - 1x(...2/...2),1x(...4/...4)The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI -1x(...2/...2),1x(...4/...4) - Multiband Cells configuration.

Setor 1 has:n TREs in the GSM 900 band

p TREs in the GSM 900 band

ANX 2 and ANX3 are setto the same sector number (2)

Setor 2 has:

q TREs in the GSM 1800 band

r TREs in the GSM 1800 band


FANU FANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

ANX

SUM(Sector 1)

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2

ANX

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

OPTIONS

ANX

TRE1TRE2

ANX

(Sector 1)

ANY

TRE3TRE4 TRE3TRE4

ANY4 1 23


GSM 1800


FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2

TRE3TRE4

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

GSM 1800

AIR

ANC

FANU FANU FANU

1

TRE1TRE2

AIR

( Sector 1 )ANC

2

( Sector 2 )ANC

3

( Sector 2 )

TRE3TRE4

SUMA

Empty Space

( Sector 1 )ANC

4

TRE1TRE2

The BTS has 2 sectors

ANC 1a b

TRE 1 2

ANC 2a b

1 2 3 4

Sector 1

ANC 3a b

1 2 3 4

ANC 4a b

1 2

Sector 2

Figure 137: Outdoor MEDI - 1x(...2/...2),1x(...4/...4) - Multiband CellsConfiguration

234 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.9.5.8 Outdoor MEDI - 3x(...2/...2)The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MEDI - 3x(...2/...2) -Multiband Cells configuration.


ANC 1

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

ANC 4

( Sector 2 ) ( Sector 1 )SUMA

ANC 6

( Sector 3 )

TRE1TRE2

FANU FANU FANU


ANC 2

AIR

AIR

AIR

AIR

ANC 3


ANC 5

( Sector 3 )

TRE1TRE2

FANU FANU FANU


Empty space

a bANC 1

1 2

a bANC 2

1 2

GSM 1800

GSM 900

Sector 1 :

a bANC 3

1 2

a bANC 4

1 2

Sector 2 :

a bANC 5

1 2

a bANC 6

1 2

Sector 3 :


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 235 / 910


2.10 Outdoor Configurations with Twin TRXThe following table gives the A9100 Compact BTS Outdoor TWIN TRXconfigurations.

TWIN Mode Number ofsectors

AC with BU5

carriers per sector

AC w/o BU5

carriers per sector

DC

carriers per sector

Capacity Mode 1 4 4 6

2 2/2 2/2 3/3 or 4/2

3 - 2/1/1 2/2/2

Capacity Mode LowLoss

1 4 4 6

2 - - 3/3

Multiband & MBCell

1 2 +2 2 +2 4 + 2

Coverage ModeTxDiv. 2Rx Div.

1 2 2 2

2 1/1 1/1 1/1

3 - - 1/1/1

Coverage ModeTxDiv. 2Rx Div LowLoss

1 2 2 2

Coverage ModeTxDiv. 4Rx Div LowLoss

1 2 2 2

236 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.10.1 Capacity Mode Configurations

2.10.1.1 CBO - 1 sector with Twin-TRX

2.10.1.2 CBO - 2 sectors with Twin-TRX

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 237 / 910


2.10.1.3 CBO - 3 sectors with Twin-TRX

2.10.2 Capacity Mode Low Loss Configurations

2.10.2.1 CBO - 1 Sector Low Loss with Twin-TRX

238 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.10.2.2 CBO - 2 Sectors Low Loss with Twin-TRX

2.10.3 Multiband Configurations - CBO - Multiband 1 + 1 Sector withTwin-TRX

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 239 / 910


2.10.4 Coverage Mode TX Diversity Configurations

2.10.4.1 CBO - 1 Sector TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX

2.10.4.2 CBO - 2 Sectors TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX

240 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.10.4.3 CBO - 3 Sectors TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX

2.10.5 Coverage Mode with TX Diversity Low Loss Configurations - CBO- 1 Sector TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 241 / 910


2.10.6 Coverage Mode TX-Diversity 4 RX Configurations - CBO - 1 SectorTX Diversity 4RX with Twin-TRX

242 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


243 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.11 Outdoor Configurations Based on Extension with Twin TRXThe following table gives the possible configuration extension based on TwinTRX modules.

Carriesrs per sectorCabinet Number of sectors

Single TRX -> Twin TRX

1 2 -> 4CBO

2 1/1 -> 2/2

1 n.a.

2 2/2 -> 3/3

CBO DC

3 1/1/1 -> 2/2/2

2.11.1 CBO 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX

244 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.11.2 CBO 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX

2.11.3 CBO DC 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 245 / 910


2.11.4 CBO DC 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX

246 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.12 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Configurations

2.12.1 MBO Standard Configurations - GSM 850/900/1800/1900

GSM 850 is not supported by all BSS software releases. If you are in doubt,contact Alcatel support.

2.12.1.1 MBO1 - 1x1...8The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO1 - 1x1...8 configuration.

Note: Restrictions

For GSM 1900, the configuration is limited to six TREs.


a b

ANC 1

ANY 1 ANY 2

TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8

If more than 4 TREs, 2 ANY are requiredPre−equipment possible

Up to 4 TREs, and if no ANY pre−equipment,the TRE1 to TRE4 are directly connected to the ANC

Empty space

TRE8 TRE5

FANU

SUMA

ANY2

ANY1

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

FANU FANU

AIR

ANC 1

FANU FANU FANU

TRE7 TRE6

PM12 equipped if GSM 1900, or if n>6,otherwise: dummy panel is installed

123123123123123123

123

Dummy panels if no modules installed

PM12

ADAM4

PM12

PM12

The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s

Available only on AC configuration

Figure 139: MBO1 - 1x1...8 Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 247 / 910



Note: Restrictions

None. for GSM 850.

For GSM 1900, the configuration is limited to six TREs over the two sectors.

TRE4 TRE3

TRE2 TRE1

FANU

ANC 2(Sector 2)

SUMA

ANC 1(Sector 1)

TRE4 TRE3

FANUFANU

AIR

TRE2 TRE1

FANU FANUFANU


a b

ANC 1

TRE 1 3 2 4

Sector 1

a b

ANC 2

TRE 1 3 2 4

Sector 2

1234123412341234123412341234

Empty space

PM12 equipped if GSM 1900, or if (n+p)>6,otherwise: dummy panel is installed

123123



ADAM4

PM12

PM12

PM12



248 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



Note: Restrictions

None. for GSM 850.


ANC 1


AIR

a b

ANC 1

TRE 1 2

ANC 2


a b

ANC 2


SUMA

ANC 3

( Sector 3 )

TRE1TRE2

FANU FANU FANU

a b

ANC 3

TRE 1 2Sector 3


TRE1TRE2

On each ANC:The bridges can be removed at installationtime (on site), if maximum power is required

123123123123123123

Empty space

PM12 equipped if GSM 1900,otherwise: dummy panel is installed12




PM12

PM12

PM12

ADAM4


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 249 / 910



Note: Restrictions

None. for GSM 850.


ANC 1a b

ANY 1 ANY 2

TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8

ANC 2a b

TRE


AIR

ANC 2

FANU FANU FANUTRE9TRE10TRE11TRE12

911 10 12

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

ANC 1ANYANY2 1

TRE5TRE6

AIR

TRE7TRE8

SUMA

123123123123123123ADAM4

PM12

PM12

PM12

Empty space

PM12 equipped if GSM 1900and if n>6. Otherwise:dummy panel is installed

123123

Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled

PM12


250 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.12.1.5 MBO2 - 2x1...6The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO - 2x1...6 configuration.

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

ANC 2ANY

2

TRE5TRE6

AIR

AIR


AIR

ANC 1a b

ANY 1

TRE 1 3 2 4 5 6

ANC 1

FANU FANU FANU

ANY1

AIR

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4


TRE5TRE6

SUMA

FANU FANU FANU

In each sector :If no more than 4 TREs, no ANY isrequired. TREs 1 to TRE4 are then cabledon ANC


ANC 2a b

ANY 2

TRE 1 3 2 4 5 6

123412341234123412341234

Empty space

PM12 equipped if GSM 1900and if (n+p)>6. Otherwise:dummy panel is installed123

123




ADAM4

PM12

PM12

PM12

PM12


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 251 / 910


2.12.1.6 MBO2 - 1x1...8 + 1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 1x1...8 + 1x1...4configuration.

Note: Restrictions

None. for GSM 850.


ANC 1a b

ANY 1 ANY 2

TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8

ANC 2a b

TREAIR


911 10 12

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

ANC 1(Sector 1)ANYANY

2 1

TRE5TRE6

AIR

TRE7TRE8

SUMA

ANC 2(Sector 2)

123123123123123123

ADAM4

PM12

PM12

PM12

PM12

Empty space

PM12 equipped if GSM 1900and if (n+p)>6. Otherwise:dummy panel is installed12

12


Figure 144: MBO2 - 1x1...8 + 1x1...4 Configuration

252 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13




a bANC 1

1 3 2 4

TRE2 TRE1

FANU

SUMA

FANU FANUAIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 1(Sector 1)

ANC 3(Sector 3) ANC 2 ANC 3

a b a b

TRE 1 3 2 4 1 3 2 4AIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 2(Sector 2)

TRE4 TRE3

123123123123123

Empty space

PM12 equipped if GSM 1900and if (n+p+q)>6. Otherwise:dummy panel is installed

123123




PM12

PM12

PM12

PM12

ADAM4


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 253 / 910


2.12.2 MBO Low Losses Configurations - GSM 900/1800/1900

2.12.2.1 MBO1 - 1x5...8 Low LossesThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO1 - 1x5...8 - Low Lossesconfiguration.

Note: Restrictions

For GSM 1900, the configuration is limited to six TREs.


ANC 1a b

TRE 1 3 2 4

ANC 2a b

TRE 5 7 6 8


TRE8 TRE7

FANU

SUMA

TRE4 TRE3

FANU FANU

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE6 TRE5 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 1ANC 2

1234123412341234123412341234

PM12

PM12

PM12

ADAM4

Empty space

PM12 equipped if GSM 1900and if n>6. Otherwise:dummy panel is installed

1212


Figure 146: MBO1 - 1x5...8 - Low Losses Configuration

254 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13




ANC 1a b

TRE 1 5

ANC 4a b

3 4


ANC 2a b

TRE 1 5

ANC 3a b

3 4

In each sector :Both ANCs are set to the samesector number

2 6

2 6

On each ANC:The two bridges will be removedat installation time (On site),if no more than 2 TREs areconnected to them, and keptotherwise.

FANU

SUMA

TRE6 TRE5

FANU FANUAIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 1(Sector 1)

ANC 4(Sector 1)

FANU

TRE6 TRE5

FANUAIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 2(Sector 2)

ANC 3(Sector 2)

FANU

123412341234123412341234

PM12

PM12

PM12

PM12

ADAM4

Empty space

PM12 equipped if GSM 1900and if (n+p)>6. Otherwise:dummy panel is installed

12



3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 255 / 910




AIR


ANC 1

a b

TRE 1 2

ANC 1


AIR

ANC 2ANC 3(Sector 2)

SUMA


TRE3TRE4

ANC 4

ANC 4

a b

Per sector, both ANCs are setto the same sector number

TRE4


On each ANC:Bridges will be removedat installation time (on site)


TRE 3 4

Sector 1

ANC 2

a b

1 2

ANC 3

a b

3 4

Sector 2

ANC 5

a b

1 2

ANC 6

a b

3 4

Sector 3


TRE3TRE4ANC 6

(Sector 3)

TRE1TRE2ANC 5

(Sector 3)

123412341234123412341234

ADAM4

PM12

PM12

PM12

PM12

Empty space

PM12 equipped if GSM 1900and if (n+p+q)>6. Otherwise:dummy panel is installed123

123



256 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.12.3 MBO High Power Configurations - GSM 900/1800

2.12.3.1 MBO1 - 1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO1 - 1x1...4 - High PowerGSM 900/1800 configuration.

The BTS has 1 sector

ANC 1

TRE 1 3 2 4

On site: on the ANC:Bridges can be removed if only2 TREs connected to the ANC

a b

ANC 1

FANU FANU FANU

TRE1TRE2

AIR

SUMA

TRE3

FANU FANU FANU

TRE4

Empty space




PM12

PM12

PM12

ADAM4

Figure 149: MBO1 - 1x1...4 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 257 / 910



a bANC 1

TRE 1 2

a bANC 2

TRE 1 2

The BTS has 2 sectors with up to 2 TREs each

On each ANC:Bridges will be removed atinstallation time, on site

Sector 1 Sector 2

TRE2

SUMA

FANU FANU

ANC 1(Sector 1)

ANC 2(Sector 2)

AIR

FANU

TRE2 TRE1

AIR

TRE1

Empty space


FANU FANUFANU



PM12

PM12

PM12

ADAM4


258 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.12.3.3 MBO1 - 3x2The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO1 - 3x2 - High PowerGSM 900/1800 configuration.

TRE1

TRE1

FANU

ANC 2(Sector 2)

SUMA

ANC 1(Sector 1)

FANUFANU

AIR

TRE1

FANU FANUFANU

The BTS has 3 sectors with 2 TREs each

a b

ANC 1

TRE 1

Sector 1

a b

ANC 2

TRE 1

Sector 2

ANC 3(Sector 3)

a b

ANC 3

TRE 1

Sector 3

On each ANC:Bridges will be removed at installation time,on site

TRE2 TRE2

TRE2

2 2 2

Empty space




ADAM4

PM12

PM12

PM12

Figure 151: MBO1 - 3x2 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 259 / 910




ANC 1

1 23 4

On site, and on each ANC:Bridges can be removed ifonly 2 TREs connected

a bANC 2

1 23 4

a b

SUMA

FANU FANU

ANC 1(Sector 1)

AIR

TRE2 TRE1

AIR

TRE4

FANU FANU

ANC 2(Sector 2)

AIR

FANU

TRE2 TRE1

AIR

TRE4TRE3

FANU

TRE3

Empty space

PM12 equipped if (n+p)>6,otherwise: dummy panel is installed123

123


FANU FANU FANU



12341234123412341234

ADAM4

PM12

PM12

PM12

PM12





a b a b

FANU

SUMA

FANU

FANU FANU

ANC 1(Sector 1)

FANUAIR

FANU FANU FANU

ANC 2(Sector 2)

AIR

FANU

TRE1TRE2TRE2 TRE4 TRE3TRE1TRE4 TRE3

FANU FANU FANU

ANC 3(Sector 3)

TRE4 TRE3TRE2 TRE1

TRE 1 3 2 4 1 3 2 4 1 3 2 4

123123123123123

Empty space

PM12 equipped if (n+p+q)>6,otherwise: dummy panel is installed123

123




PM12

PM12

PM12

PM12

ADAM4


260 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.12.4 MBO Multiband BTS Configurations - GSM 900/1800 and GSM900/1900

2.12.4.1 MBO1 - 1x1...4/1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO1 - 1x1...4/1x1...4 -Multiband BTS configuration.

Multiband BTS:


a bANC 1

TRE 1 3 2 4

a bANC 2

Sector 1 Sector 2


TRE 1 3 2 4

TRE4 TRE3

TRE2 TRE1

FANU

ANC 2(Sector 2)

SUMA

ANC 1(Sector 1)

TRE4 TRE3

FANUFANU

AIR

TRE2 TRE1

FANU FANUFANU

Empty space

PM12 equipped if (n+p)>6,otherwise: dummy panel is installed

123123


1234123412341234123412341234

ADAM4

PM12

PM12

PM12

GSM 1800 / GSM 1900



Figure 154: MBO1 - 1x1...4/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 261 / 910



Multiband BTS:


ANC 1a b

ANY 1

TRE 1 23 4 5 6




FANU

SUMA

TRE6 TRE5

FANU FANUAIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 1(Sector 1)

ANY1

FANU

TRE6 TRE5

FANU FANUAIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 2(Sector 2)

ANY2

ANC 2a b

ANY 2

TRE 1 23 4 5 6

PM12

PM12

PM12

ADAM4

Empty space




GSM 1800 / GSM 1900




ANC 1a b

ANY 1 ANY 2

TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8

ANC 2a b

TREAIR


1 3 2 4

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4


2 1

TRE5TRE6

AIR

TRE7TRE8

SUMA

ANC 2(Sector 2)

Multiband BTS:

In sector 1:If no more than 4 TREs, no ANYis required. TRE1 to 4 are thencabled on ANC

PM12

PM12

PM12

ADAM4

Empty space




GSM 1800 / GSM 1900


262 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13




ANC 1a b

ANY 1 ANY 2

TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8

ANC 2a b

TREAIR


1 3 2 4

FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4


2 1

TRE5TRE6

AIR

TRE7TRE8

SUMA

ANC 2(Sector 2)

Multiband BTS:

In sector 1:If no more than 4 TREs, no ANYis required. TRE1 to 4 are thencabled on ANC

PM12

PM12

PM12

ADAM4

Empty space




GSM 1800 / GSM 1900




ANC 1a b

TRE 1 23 4

ANC 2a b

1 23 4

ANC 3a b

1 23 4


FANU

SUMA

TRE4 TRE3

FANU FANU

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 1(Sector 1)

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 2(Sector 2)

TRE4 TRE3

ANC 3(Sector 3)


PM12

PM12

PM12

ADAM4

Empty space


Multiband BTS:



GSM 1800 / GSM 1900


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 263 / 910




ANC 1a b

TRE 1 23 4

ANC 2a b

1 23 4

ANC 3a b

1 23 4


FANU

SUMA

TRE4 TRE3

FANU FANU

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 1(Sector 1)

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 2(Sector 2)

Multiband BTS :

TRE4 TRE3

ANC 3(Sector 3)

PM12

PM12

PM12

ADAM4

Empty space




GSM 1800 / GSM 1900


2.12.4.7 MBO2 - 1x1...4/...4,...2,...2The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 1x1...4/...4,...2,...2 -Multiband BTS configuration.


ANC 1a b

TRE 1 23 4

ANC 2a b

1 2

ANC 3a b

TRE 1 23 4


FANU

SUMA

TRE4 TRE3

FANU FANU

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 1(Sector 1)

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 2(Sector 2)

Multiband BTS :

TRE4 TRE3

ANC 3(Sector 3)


ANC 4a b

1 2ANC 4

(Sector 4)

PM12

PM12

PM12

ADAM4

Empty space




GSM 1800 / GSM 1900

Figure 160: MBO2 - 1x1...4/...4,...2,...2 - Multiband BTS Configuration

264 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.12.4.8 MBO2 - ...4,...2,...2/1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - ...4,...2,...2/1x1...4 -Multiband BTS configuration.


ANC 1a b

TRE 1 23 4

ANC 2a b

1 2

ANC 3a b

TRE 1 23 4


FANU

SUMA

TRE4 TRE3

FANU FANU

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 1(Sector 1)

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 2(Sector 2)

Multiband BTS :

TRE4 TRE3

ANC 3(Sector 3)


ANC 4a b

1 2ANC 4(Sector 4)

PM12

PM12

PM12

ADAM4

Empty space


GSM 1800

Figure 161: MBO2 - ...4,...2,...2/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration



ANC 1a b

TRE 1 23 4

ANC 2a b

1 2

ANC 3a b

TRE 1 23 4


FANU

SUMA

TRE4 TRE3

FANU FANU

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 1(Sector 1)

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 2(Sector 2)

Multiband BTS :

TRE4 TRE3

ANC 3(Sector 3)


ANC 4a b

1 2ANC 4(Sector 4)

PM12

PM12

PM12

ADAM4

Empty space




GSM 1800 / GSM 1900


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 265 / 910




ANC 1a b

TRE 1 23 4

ANC 2a b

1 2

ANC 3a b

TRE 1 23 4


FANU

SUMA

TRE4 TRE3

FANU FANU

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 1(Sector 1)

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 2(Sector 2)

Multiband BTS :

TRE4 TRE3

ANC 3(Sector 3)


ANC 4a b

1 2ANC 4(Sector 4)

PM12

PM12

PM12

ADAM4

Empty space




GSM 1800 / GSM 1900




ANC 1a b

TRE 1 23

ANC 2a b

1 2

ANC 3a b

TRE 1 23


FANU

SUMA

TRE3

FANU FANU

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 1(Sector 1)

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 2(Sector 2)

Multiband BTS :

TRE3

ANC 3(Sector 3)


ANC 4(Sector 4)

TRE3TRE3

3

ANC 4a b

1 23

FANU FANUFANU

ADAM4

PM12

PM12

PM12

Empty space




GSM 1800 / GSM 1900


266 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13




AIR


ANC 1


AIR


SUMA

TRE1TRE2

ANC 3

TRE2



ANC 1a b

TRE 1 2

Sector 1

ANC 2a b

1 2

Sector 2

ANC 3

a b

1 2

Sector 3


TRE3TRE4ANC 6

(Sector 6)

TRE1TRE2ANC 5

(Sector 5)

ANC 4a b

TRE 1 2

Sector 4

ANC 5a b

1 2

Sector 5

ANC 6

a b

1 2

Sector 6

Multiband BTS:ADAM4

PM12

PM12

PM12

Empty space




GSM 1800 / GSM 1900


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 267 / 910


2.12.5 MBO Multiband Cells Configurations - GSM 900/1800

2.12.5.1 MBO1 - 1x(...4/...4)The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO1 - 1x(...4/...4) - MultibandCells configuration.

a bANC 1

TRE 1 3 2 4

a bANC 2

TRE 1 3 2 4

Multiband Cell:

The BTS has only 1 sector with:− n TREs in GSM 900 band− p TREs in GSM 1800 band

ANC1 and ANC2 are set to the same sector number

TRE4 TRE3

TRE2 TRE1

FANU

ANC 2SUMA

ANC 1

TRE4 TRE3

FANUFANU

AIR

TRE2 TRE1

FANU FANUFANU

Empty space

PM12 equipped if (n+p)>6,otherwise: dummy panel is installed

123123


GSM 1800

123412341234123412341234

ADAM4

PM12

PM12

PM12



Figure 166: MBO1 - 1x(...4/...4) - Multiband Cells Configuration

268 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



ANC 1a b

ANY 1

TRE 1 23 4 5 6On each ANC:If no more than 4 TREs, no ANY isrequired, TRE1 to TRE4 are thencabled on ANC

ANC 2a b

ANY 2

TRE 1 23 4 5 6

Multiband Cell:

The BTS has only 1 sector with:− p TREs in GSM 900 band− n TREs in GSM 1800 band


FANU

SUMA

TRE6 TRE5

FANU FANUAIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 1ANY1

FANU

TRE6 TRE5

FANU FANUAIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 2ANY2

PM12

PM12

PM12

ADAM4

Empty space


GSM 1800





ANC 1a b

ANY 1 ANY 2

TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8

ANC 2a b

TRE

On ANC1:If no more than 4 TREs, no ANYis required. TRE1 to 4 are thencabled on ANC

The BTS has only 1 sector with− n TREs in GSM 900 band− p TREs in GSM 1800 band

Multiband Cell:


AIR


FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

ANC1ANYANY2 1

TRE5TRE6

AIR

TRE7TRE8

SUMA

ANC 2

PM12

PM12

PM12

ADAM4

Empty space


GSM 1800

1 3 2 4




3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 269 / 910



ANC 1a b

ANY 1 ANY 2

TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8

ANC 2a b

TRE 1 3 2 4On ANC1:If no more than 4 TREs, no ANYis required. TRE1 to 4 are thencabled on ANC

The BTS has only 1 sector with− p TREs in GSM 900 band− n TREs in GSM 1800 band

Multiband Cell:


AIR


FANU FANUFANU

FANUFANUFANU

TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4

ANC1ANYANY2 1

TRE5TRE6

AIR

TRE7TRE8

SUMA

ANC 2

PM12

PM12

PM12

ADAM4

Empty space


GSM 1800





ANC 1a b

TRE 1 23 4

ANC 2a b

1 2

ANC 3a b

TRE 1 23 4

ANC 4a b

1 2


Sector 1:− n TREs in GSM 1800 band− p TREs in GSM 900 band

Sector 2:− q TREs in GSM 1800 band− r TREs in GSM 900 band

Multiband Cell:

FANU

SUMA

TRE4 TRE3

FANU FANUAIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 1(Sector 1)

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 2(Sector 1)

TRE4 TRE3

ANC 3(Sector 2) ANC 4

(Sector 2)

PM12

PM12

PM12

ADAM4

Empty space


GSM 1800




270 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



ANC 1a b

TRE 1 23 4

ANC 2a b

1 2

ANC 3a b

TRE 1 23 4

ANC 4a b

1 2




Multiband Cell:

FANU

SUMA

TRE4 TRE3

FANU FANU

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 1(Sector 1)

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 2(Sector 1)

TRE4 TRE3


(Sector 2)

PM12

PM12

PM12

ADAM4

Empty space


GSM 1800





ANC 1a b

TRE1 23

ANC 2a b

1 2

ANC 3a b

TRE 1 23

3

ANC 4a b

1 23




Multiband Cell:

FANU

SUMA

TRE3

FANU FANU

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 1(Sector 1)

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 2(Sector 1)

TRE3

ANC 3(Sector 2)

ANC 4(Sector 2)

TRE3TRE3

FANU FANUFANU

ADAM4

PM12

PM12

PM12

Empty space


GSM 1800




3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 271 / 910


2.12.5.8 MBO2 - 1x(...2/...2),1x(...4/...4)The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 1x(...2/...2),1x(...4/...4)- Multiband Cells configuration.

ANC 1a b

TRE 1 23 4

ANC 2a b

TRE 1 2

ANC 3a b

1 23 4

FANU

SUMA

TRE4 TRE3

FANU FANU

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 1(Sector 1)

AIR

FANU FANU FANU

TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1

ANC 2(Sector 2)

TRE4 TRE3


(Sector 2)




Multiband Cell:

ANC 4a b

1 2

ADAM4

PM12

PM12

PM12

Empty space


GSM 1800



Figure 173: MBO2 - 1x(...2/...2),1x(...4/...4) - Multiband Cells Configuration



ANC 1a b

TRE 1 2

Sector 1

ANC 2a b

1 2

ANC 3

a b

1 2Sector 3

ANC 4a b

TRE 1 2

Sector 2

ANC 5a b

1 2

ANC 6

a b

1 2

Multiband Cell:

The BTS has 3 sectors :Sector 1: ANC1 + ANC2Sector 2: ANC3 + ANC4Sector 3: ANC5 + ANC6

Sector 2


AIR

ANC 1


AIR


SUMA

TRE1TRE2

ANC 3

TRE2



TRE3TRE4ANC 6

(Sector 3)

TRE1TRE2ANC 5

(Sector 3)

ADAM4

PM12

PM12

PM12

Empty space


GSM 1800




272 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.12.6 MBO Multiband BTS, Multiband Cells Configurations - GSM850/1800/1900


2.12.6.1 MBO2 - 3x1/3x1...3The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 3x1/3x1...3 MultibandBTS configuration.


AIR


ANC 1

a b

TRE 1 3 2

ANC 1


AIR


SUMA

TRE3TRE1

ANC 3

TRE1



Sector 1

ANC 2

a b

1 3 2

Sector 2

ANC 6

a b

1 3 2

Sector 3


TRE1TRE2ANC 6

(Sector 6)

TRE1TRE3ANC 5

(Sector 5)

123412341234123412341234

ADAM4

PM12

PM12

PM12

PM12

Empty space

PM12 equipped if GSM 1900,and if TREs (n+p+t)>3. Otherwise:dummy panel is installed123

123


ANC 3

a b

TRE 1

Sector 4

ANC 4

a b

1

Sector 5

ANC 5

a b

1

Sector 6

GSM 850



Figure 175: MBO2 - 3x1/3x1...3 Multiband BTS Configuration

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 273 / 910


2.12.6.2 MBO2 - 3x(1/...3)The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 3x(1/...3) MultibandCells configuration.


AIR


ANC 1

a b

TRE 1 3 2

ANC 1


AIR


SUMA

TRE3TRE1

ANC 3

TRE1



Sector 1

ANC 2

a b

1 3 2

Sector 2

ANC 6

a b

1 3 2

Sector 3


TRE1TRE2ANC 6

(Sector 3)

TRE1TRE3ANC 5

(Sector 3)

123412341234123412341234

ADAM4

PM12

PM12

PM12

PM12

Empty space

123


ANC 3

a b

TRE 1

ANC 4

a b

1

ANC 5

a b

1

GSM 850

PM12 equipped if GSM 1900,and if TREs (n+p+t)>3. Otherwise:dummy panel is installed



Figure 176: MBO2 - 3x(1/...3) Multiband Cells Configuration

274 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.13 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Configurations Basedon Extension with Twin TRX




1 8 -> 12

2 4/4 ->4/6(6/6*)

MBO1

MBO1T

3 2/2/2 -> 4/4/4

1 12 -> 16

2 6/6 -> 8/8

MBO2

3 4/4/4 -> 6/6/6

2.13.1 MBO1 - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 275 / 910


2.13.2 MBO1 - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX

276 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 277 / 910


2.13.4 MBO2 - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX

278 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 279 / 910



280 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.14 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor EvolutionConfigurations with Single TRX

2.14.1 A9100 MBO1E 1 Sector

2.14.2 A9100 MBO1E 2 Sectors

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 281 / 910



The following figure shows the MBO1E - 3 sectors with 3 TRE in one sector.

282 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13




3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 283 / 910


2.14.6 A9100 MBO2 4 Sectors

2.14.7 A9100 MBO2 6 Sectors

284 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.15 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Evolution MixedConfigurations Based on Extension with Twin TRX




1 8 -> 12

2 4/4 ->4/6(6/6*)

MBO1E

3 2/2/2 -> 4/4/4

1 n.a.

2 8/6 -> 12/12

MBO2E

3 4/4/4 -> 8/8/8

2.15.1 MBO1E - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 285 / 910


2.15.2 MBO1E - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX

286 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 287 / 910



288 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 289 / 910


2.16 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor EvolutionConfigurations with Twin TRX

2.16.1 Introduction

The following table gives the Twin TRX configurations.

Twin Mode Number of sectors MBO1E

Carriers per sector

MBO2E

Carriers per sector

Capacity Mode 1 8 8

2 6/6 8/8

3 4/4/4 8/8/8

4 2/2/2/2 6/6/6/6

1 12 16

2 6/6 12/12

Capacity Mode Low Loss

3 - 8/8/8

1 6 + 6 12 + 12

2 2/2 + 2/2 6/6 + 6/6

Multiband & MultibandCell

3 - 4/4/4 + 4/4/4

1 4 4

2 2/2 4/4

Coverage Mode TxDiv.2Rx Div.

3 2/2/2 4/4/4

1 2 2

2 2/2 2/2

Coverage Mode TxDiv.2Rx Div. Low Loss

3 - 2/2/2

1 2 2

2 2/2 2/2

Coverage Mode TxDiv.4Rx Div.

3 - 2/2/2

290 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


Twin Mode Number of sectors MBO1E

Carriers per sector

MBO2E

Carriers per sector

Extended Cell 1 In, 1 Out 4+4 8+8

Extended Cell TxDiv,4RX Div for outer cell

1 In, 1 Out 4+2 8+2

Table 7: Twin TRX Configurations

2.16.2 Transceiver Module

TRM stands for TRansceiver Module and it can be:

Twin module (TGT09 TGT18), or

Single module (TRAG TAGH TRAD TRAP TRAL TADH)

The twin module can operate as:

One TRM for two TRE, and two TRX in capacity mode

One TRM for one TRE, and one TRX in Tx Div mode.

TRX 1a

TRX 1b

TRM TRX 1

Capacity Mode Tx Div Mode

Figure 177: Twin Module Modes

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 291 / 910


2.16.3 Cabling Information

2.16.3.1 Standard ConfigurationThe following symbol

is equivalent with

Figure 178: Up to 4 TREs

or

292 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 293 / 910


The following symbol

is equivalent with


294 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


The following symbol

is equivalent with


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 295 / 910


2.16.3.2 Tx Div 2Rx Div ConfigurationsThe following symbol

is equivalent with

296 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.16.3.3 Tx Div 4Rx Div ConfigurationsThe following symbol

is equivalent with

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 297 / 910


2.16.4 Capacity Mode

2.16.4.1 MBO1E - 1 Sector with Twin-TRX

298 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.16.4.2 MBO1E - 2 Sectors with Twin-TRX

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 299 / 910



300 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.16.4.4 MBO1 - 4 Sectors with Twin-TRX

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 301 / 910


2.16.4.5 MBO2E - 1 Sector with Twin-TRX

302 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 303 / 910



304 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 305 / 910



306 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.16.5 Capacity Mode Low Loss

2.16.5.1 MBO1 - 1 Sector Low Loss with Twin-TRX

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 307 / 910


2.16.5.2 MBO2E - 1 Sector Low Loss with Twin-TRX

308 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.16.5.3 MBO1E - 2 Sectors Low Loss with Twin-TRX

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 309 / 910



310 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 311 / 910


2.16.6 Multiband & Multiband Cell

2.16.6.1 MBO1E - Multiband 1 + 1 Sector with Twin-TRX

Multiband BTS: The BTS has 2 sectors with n and p TRX

Multiband Cell: The BTS has 1 sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in1800 MHz

312 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.16.6.2 MBO1E - Multiband 2 + 2 Sectors with Twin-TRX

Multiband BTS: The BTS has 4 sectors with n and q TRX in 900 MHz plusp and r TRX in 1800 MHz

Multiband Cell: The BTS has 1 sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in1800 MHz and 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 MHz

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 313 / 910


2.16.6.3 MBO2E - Multiband 1 + 1 Sector with Twin-TRX

Multiband BTS: The BTS has 2 sectors with n and p TRX

Multiband Cell: The BTS has 1 sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in1800 MHz

314 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



Multiband BTS: The BTS has 4 sectors with n and q TRX in 900 MHz plusp and r TRX in 1800 MHz

Multiband Cell: The BTS has 1 sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in1800 MHz and 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 MHz

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 315 / 910



Multiband BTS: The BTS has 6 sectors with n,q,s TRX in 900 MHz plus p,r,tTRX in 1800 MHz

Multiband Cell: The BTS has 1sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in1800 MHz plus 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 MHz plus 1sector with s TRX in 900 MHz and t TRX in 1800 MHz

316 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



2.16.7.1 MBO1E - 1 Sector TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 317 / 910



2.16.7.3 MBO1E - 3 Sectors TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX

318 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13




3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 319 / 910



320 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



2.16.8.1 MBO1E - 1 Sector TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 321 / 910


2.16.8.2 MBO2E - 1 Sector TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX

322 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.16.8.3 MBO1E - 2 Sectors TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 323 / 910



324 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 325 / 910




326 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 327 / 910



328 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 329 / 910



330 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.16.10 Extended Cell

2.16.10.1 MBO1E - Extended Cell with Twin-TRX

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 331 / 910



332 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


2.16.11 Extended Cell TxDiv, 4RX Div for outer cell

2.16.11.1 MBO1E - Extended Cell TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 333 / 910


334 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3 Indoor Cabinets

This chapter describes the indoor cabinets used in BTS A9100 configurations.

The descriptions are supported with diagrams and illustrations, wherenecessary.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 335 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.1 CIMI/CIDIThe CIMI and CIDI are indoor cabinets that support both omnidirectionaland sectorized configurations. The following figure shows the position ofthe main modules.

Air Inlet

Dummy Panel

FANUs

Interconnection Panel

Top FANUs

Air Inlet

Dummy Panel

FANUs


CIMI CIDI

STASR 2

STASR 1

STASR 2

STASR 1

Figure 182: CIMI/CIDI Module Positions

Both cabinets are designed to house two STASRs.

In the CIMI, the upper subrack (STASR2) contains the SUM and may containTRE and/or AN modules. The lower subrack (STASR1) can contain TREand/or AN modules.

In the CIDI, the upper subrack (STASR2) can contain the SUM, the microwaveequipment and/or AN modules. The lower subrack (STASR1) can contain theSUM and/or TRE modules.

336 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.1.1 CIMI/CIDI Cabinet Access and Features

The following figure shows the CIMI/CIDI equipped with the interconnectionpanel and two empty subracks.

Perforated Door Strips

Subrack

EMC Gasket (CIMI only)

Interconnection Area

Adjustable Feet

Perforated Cover contains FANUs (CIMI only).

RF Interface

Equipment Label

Dust Filter (CIDI only)

Figure 183: CIMI/CIDI Equipped with Empty Subracks

3.1.1.1 ConstructionThe CIMI/CIDI is a steel box construction with four adjustable feet, on itsunderside, to compensate for any unevenness in the floor. The cabinet hasno side access; all cable interfaces are accessible from the front or the topof the cabinet.

The structure and dimensions of the mechanical rack and equipment complywith IEC 297 standards.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 337 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.1.1.2 DoorThe CIMI/CIDI can be installed in back-to-back or back-to-wall configurations.Access to the subracks and the interconnection panel is via a door at the frontof the cabinet. The door is the full height of the cabinet. In the CIMI, the door isfitted with a copper-beryllium gasket to ensure EMC integrity when closed. Anoptional dust filter can be fitted to the CIDI door. The filter is removable forcleaning.

3.1.1.3 CablesAll external cables, except for the antenna, are connected to the interconnectionpanel. The external cables include the DC supply and Abis connections. Theantenna cabling is connected at the top of the cabinet.

A ribbon cable is used in the cabinet to link the subracks together; see thefollowing figure. In the CIMI, the top end of the cable terminates on the TFBP(refer to Top Fan Unit (Section 11.1.3)) for more information). In the CIDI, thecable terminates at the rear connector of the top subrack. The bottom endterminates on the BTSRI board (refer to Remote Inventory (Section 8.5) formore information).

Rear Front

Ribbon Cable

TFBP (CIMI only)

BTSRI

Subrack

Subrack

Figure 184: CIMI/CIDI Subracks Interconnection Cable

338 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.1.1.4 Cabinet TopThe following figure is a top view of the CIMI, showing antenna connectorsand the fan cover. The cover is cut away to reveal extractor fans. The fans areinstalled and removed via the front of the cabinet.

The CIDI cabinet differs in that it requires no top fans and no Top FanBackplane. The cabinet has a perforated top cover.

Antenna Connectors

Top Fan BackplaneTop Fans (x6)


Fan Cover

Front

Ground Bolt

DC Filter Connectors

Antenna Connectors

Sector n/A

Sector n/B

Sector p/A

Sector p/B

Sector q/A

Sector q/B

Sector n/p/q/r means the sector with n/p/q/r TREs.A and B are numbering conventions of the antennas.

Note:

Sector r/A

Sector r/B

Antenna connectors are not necessary completely equipped.

Figure 185: CIMI/CIDI Top View

The antennas are connected to RF connectors in a recess at the top of thecabinet. An M8 bolt is also located on the top for connecting the cabinet toground. Any unequipped holes are fitted with a blanking plate.

3.1.1.5 CoolingThe CIMI is air cooled by fans, both inside the cabinet and at the top. Cool air isdrawn-in through perforations on the door and is then forced up, through thesubracks, by the internal fans. The warm air is expelled through perforations atthe top of the cabinet.

The CIDI is cooled by fans inside the cabinet only, it does not require top fans.Refer to Temperature Control (Section 11) for details of the cooling systemhardware.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 339 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.1.2 CIMI/CIDI Cabinet Interconnection Panel

All the external electrical interfaces are located on a panel at the top of thecabinet; see the following figure.

Abis Interface Group

External Input/Output Interface Group

External Clock Interface Group

Abis 4 Abis 3 Abis 2 Abis 1

Abis Relays

XB

CB

XG

PS

XC

LK1

In

XC

LK2

In/O

ut

XC

LK1

Out

XIO Interface Connectors

Krone Strip


Equipment Labels

XR

T

XGND GND

Power Supply and Circuit Breaker Area(DCBREAK)

Interconnection Area (BTSCA)

For details see below

CIMI DC Variant CIDI DC Variant

ConnectorsDC Filter

0V−48V

0

I

0

I

0

I

SR1 SR2INT

Circuit Breakers

Abis 4 I Abis 3 I Abis 2 I Abis1

Equipment Labels

Circuit Breakers

0V−48V

0

I

0

I

SR1

BTSINT

0

I

SR2

Figure 186: CIMI/CIDI Interconnection Panel

On the left-hand side (see the previous figure) is the interconnection area(BTSCA); the shaded areas identify separate groups of connectors. The powersupply input-connectors and circuit breakers are located on the right-hand side.All interfaces are overvoltage protected.

Located behind the interconnection area is an External Input/Output Board.The XIOB is connected to the interconnection area and contains a 24 V DC/DCconverter and interface circuitry for external alarms.

The interconnection panel provides interfaces for the:

XIO, external clock, and Abis signals

DC supplies.

340 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.1.3 CIMI/CIDI Signal Interfaces

The CIMI/CIDI have XIO, external clock and Abis signal interfaces. Theconnectors and functions for each of these interfaces are described, as well asthe external alarm inputs.

3.1.3.1 XIO InterfaceThe XIO connectors allow various external alarm devices to be connectedto the BTS A9100. These include smoke and flood detectors, as well aselectro-mechanical switches. Crimped or clamp strip contacts can be usedon the XIO connectors. The positions of the XIO connectors are shownin Figure 186.

A detailed view of the XIO connectors is given in the following figure.

XI1

GN

DX

I2G

ND

XI3

GN

DX

I4G

ND

XI5

GN

DX

I6G

ND

XI7

GN

DX

I8G

ND

XI9

GN

DX

I10

GN

DXI

11G

ND

XI1

2G

ND

XI1

3G

ND

XI1

4G

ND

XI1

5G

ND

XI1

6G

ND

XI1

7G

ND

XI1

8G

ND

XI1

9G

ND

XI2

0G

ND

XI21

GN

DX

I22

GN

DX

I23

GN

DX

I24

GN

D

+2

4V

+2

4V

+2

4V

+2

4V

X01

X02

X03

X04

X05

X06

X07

X08

X G

ND

X G

ND

X G

ND

X G

ND

External Alarm Inputs

ExternalAlarm Outputs

XIO 1

XIO 2

XIO 3

XIO 4

Figure 187: BTS A9100 Indoor XIO Interface Connectors

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 341 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

The XIO connectors are described in functional groups in the following table.

External Alarm Inputs Connectors XIO 1 to XIO 3 provide an interfacefor connecting 24 external alarm inputs. Eachinput alarm is reported to the OMC-R where itis mapped to customer-defined ASCII text. TheASCII text describes the particular alarm.

Each alarm input has two adjacent pinsassociated with it on the XIO connector. If thesepins are open-circuit (open loop), an alarm isgenerated.

External Alarm Outputs Connector XIO 4 provides an interface for theSUM to control eight external alarm devices.This feature is for future use. The SUM isdescribed in Station Unit Modules (Section 8).

+ 24 VDC Supply Connector XIO 4 provides a + 24 VDC powersource for external alarm devices that require apower supply.

XGND The XGND connector is used when attachingthe external alarm 24 VDC ground to theBTS A9100 ground. If the connector pins arenot short-circuited (open loop), the input andoutput alarms are isolated from the BTS A9100ground.

Table 8: BTS A9100 Indoor XIO Interface Connectors (Functional Groups)

342 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.1.3.2 External Alarm InputsThe following table gives a detailed view of the external alarm inputs.

Alarm Description Alarm Connection Alarm Generation

Alarm number XIO Input Alarm Class

1 1 9 No Outside

2 2 9 Yes Outside

3 3 9 No Outside

4 4 9 No Outside

5 5 9 No Outside

6 6 9 No Outside

7 7 9 No Outside

8 8 9 Yes Outside

9 9 9 Yes Outside

10 10 9 Yes Outside

11 11 9 Yes Outside

12 12 9 Yes Outside

13 13 9 Yes Outside

14 14 9 Yes Outside

15 15 9 Yes Outside

16 16 9 Yes Outside

17 17 9 Yes Outside

18 18 9 Yes Outside

19 19 9 Yes Outside

20 20 9 Yes Outside

21 21 9 Yes Outside

22 22 9 Yes Outside

23 23 9 Yes Outside

24 24 9 Yes Outside

Table 9: BTS A9100 Indoor External Alarm Inputs

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 343 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.1.3.3 External Clock InterfaceThe external clock interface provides connectors for a variety of functions (seeFigure 186). The connectors are described in the following table.

XBCB The XBCB connector provides an external interface to the BCB.Certain external control functions can be implemented via theXBCB connector:

RI

Power supply status

Battery status

Additional Input/Output signals.

The BTS A9100 does not have to be powered up whenaccessing the Remote Inventory function.

XRT The XRT connector provides access to the BTS A9100 via anasynchronous serial interface. The signal levels conform toCCITT V.24. This allows a standard terminal to be used forradio supervision and loop-test purposes. The data rate isprogrammable between 1200 and 115,000 baud. The XRTInterface is controlled by the SUM.

XGPS The XGPS connector provides an asynchronous serial interface.This controls and supervises an external GPS receiver.The signal levels conform to CCITT V.24. The data rate isprogrammable between 1200 and 115,000 baud. This interfacecan also be used to synchronize the BTS A9100 to the GPSreceiver. The synchronizing signal conforms to RS-422. TheXGPS Interface is controlled by the SUM.

XCLK The XCLK connectors are used to synchronize the BTS A9100to another BTS, which can be a G1 BTS, a G2 BTS or a BTSA9100. The signaling interface conforms to RS-422. The XCLK1In and XCLK1 Out are connected together, pin-to-pin. TheXCLK2 In/Out connector provides a bi-directional clock interface.The XCLK Interface is controlled by the SUM.

Table 10: BTS A9100 External Clock Interface Connectors

344 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.1.3.4 Abis InterfaceThe Abis Interface provides components for a variety of functions (see Figure186). The interface consists of the connectors described in the following table.

Abis Connectors The Abis Interface connects the BTS A9100 tothe BSC. There are four connectors, these areAbis 1, 2, 3 and 4. All the connectors provide120 and 75 impedances. The impedance isselected by the type of cable connector pluggedinto the interface. For 120 cable connectionthe CA01 cable should be used, for 75 cableconnection the CA02 cable should be used.

Note: Only Abis 1 and 2 are currently used;Abis 3 and 4 are provided for future use.

Krone Strip Connector When the Krone connector is used for Abisconnection, depending on the cable impedance,the following remarks must be taken intoaccount:

If 120 cables are used the SP2M

connector must be removed from the Abisconnectors

If 75 cables are used the SP2M connector

must be plugged into the Abis connectors.

The Krone strip supports an overvoltageprotection device and an Abis monitoringdevice. The overvoltage protection device is a’make-before-break’ type. This means there isno interruption of service during insertion andremoval.

Abis Relays Four relays, one for each Abis Interface, arecontrolled by the SUM. The relays can be usedto:

Perform loop-back tests on the individual

Abis Interfaces.

Provide transparent routing of the Abis trafficwhen the BTS A9100 is powered down or

faulty. This ensures that the Abis connectionis not broken in multidrop configurations.

Table 11: BTS A9100 Abis Interface Connectors

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 345 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.1.4 CIMI/CIDI DC Supplies Interface

The external power supply inputs to the CIMI/CIDI are located at the top of thecabinet (see Figure 186). The components are listed in the following table.

DC Filters In CIMI there are two DC filter connectors; onefor the 0 V input and one for the -48/-60 VDCinput.

CIDI requires only a single filter in the -48/-60VDC line. The 0 V input connector consists ofan M8 bolt.

Circuit Breakers Three hydraulic-magnet type DC circuitbreakers protect the CIMI/CIDI equipmentfrom overload. Each subrack power supply isprotected by a separate circuit breaker. TheXIOB (which includes the interconnection area)and the top fan backplane share the thirdbreaker (see CIMI/CIDI Power Supply andGrounding (Section 3.1.5)).

Table 12: CIMI/CIDI, DC Supplies Interface

346 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.1.5 CIMI/CIDI Power Supply and Grounding

The CIMI/CIDI is powered from a -48/-60 VDC external power source. Power isdistributed to the cabinet via:

One filtered and one unfiltered input connector for CIDI

Two filtered input connectors for CIMI.

As shown in the figure below.

Top Fan Backplane

XIOB

STASR1

STASR2

0 VDC Filter −48/−60 VDC Filter

Circuit Breakers

2 1

25 A

25 A

5 A

Ground DC Supply Part of Interconnection Panel(M8 Bolt)

(CIMI only)

Figure 188: CIMI/CIDI DC Power Interconnections

Each subrack has:

A filtered input of -48/-60 VDC

A filtered 0 V return

A ground connector

A circuit breaker.

The XIOB and TFBP have the same inputs as the subracks.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 347 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

The following table shows the rated values for the power components.

Item Component/Rating

0 and -48/-60 VDC Filters 4 µF capacitors, rated at 75 A.

Circuit Breakers 1 and 2 25 A

Circuit Breaker 3 5 A

Table 13: CIMI/CIDI Power Component Ratings

The CIMI/CIDI is EMC protected at both cabinet and module level. At cabinetlevel, the CIMI/CIDI is connected to ground via a cable terminated on top ofthe cabinet with an M8 bolt. At module level, ground continuity is carried tothe subracks via the cabinet bus bar. A functionally identical alternative to thecabinet bus bar is used in later models of CIMI. This is a branched cableform.The CIDI uses a bus bar for this purpose.

The bus bar (or cableform) also distributes the DC voltages to the subracks andother CIMI/CIDI equipment.

348 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.1.6 CIMI/CIDI Cables and Cable Sets

This section lists the cables and cable sets for all BTS A9100 CIMI/CIDIconfigurations.

For the physical and electrical descriptions of the discrete cables see CableDescriptions (Section 17).

For some of the cables and cable sets there exist different variants. For thevariants used in a specific cabinet refer to its parts list.

3.1.6.1 Internal CablesThe CIMI/CIDI internal cables consist of the discrete cables and cable setslisted in the following table.

Table 15 lists and describes the cables that comprise the cable sets.

Mnemonic Description Part Number

BTSRIMI The BTSRIMI is a flat cable and Printed Circuit Board. It interconnectsthe subrack backplanes (and the TFBP in case of CIMI). A BTSRIboard is permanently attached to one end of the cable.

3BK 07720

BUMI The BUMI is a branched cableform. It contains cables for the DCpower connections to the subracks, XIOB, and top fans.

3BK 07763

CA-ADCO Cable Assembly - Alarm Disable Connector disables eight alarminputs. It connects to an XIO connector on the Interconnection Panel.

3BK 07953

CIMI bus bar The CIMI bus bar is a hardware module used for the DC powerconnections to the subracks, XIOB, and top fans.

3BK 07763

CS02 Cable Set 02 is an Antenna Network cable set. It connects an ANY toanother ANY or to an ANX/ANC.

3BK 07598

CS03 Cable Set 03 is a TRE cable set which connects a TRE to anANX/ANC or ANY.

3BK 07599

CS04 Cable Set 04 is an Antenna cable set. It connects an ANX/ANC totwo antenna cabinet connectors.

3BK 07600

CS05 Cable Set 05 is the BTS Connection Area to SUM cable set. Ina CIMI it interconnects the SUM and the Interconnection Panel.The cable set carries the Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces, and clock andcontrol signals to and from the SUM.

3BK 07199

Table 14: CIMI/CIDI Internal Cables

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 349 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.1.6.2 Cable SetsThe cable sets used in the CIMI/CIDE cabinets are described in the table below.

Cable Set Cable Description Part Number Quantity

RXRC The Receiver Radio Frequency Cableconnects an ANY RX connector to an ANX oranother ANY RX connector.

3BK 07920 2CS02

TXRC The Transmitter Radio Frequency Cableconnects an ANY TX connector to an ANX oranother ANY TX connector.

3BK 07919 1

RXRC RXRC connects a TRE RX connector to anANY, ANX or ANC RX connector.

3BK 07920 2CS03

TXRC TXRC connects a TRE TX connector to anANY, ANX or ANC TX connector.

3BK 07919 1

CS04 ANIC The Antenna Indoor Cable provides a duplexconnection between the ANX/ANC and acabinet antenna connector.

3BK 07921 2

CA-ABIS The Cable Assembly - Abis BTSCA-SUMCable carries the Abis1 /2 Interfaces from theInterconnection Panel to the SUM.

3BK 07922 1CS05

CA-BTSCA The Cable Assembly - BTSCA-SUM FlatCable carries clock and control signalsbetween the Interconnection Panel and theSUM.

3BK 07923 1

Table 15: CIMI/CIDI Cable Sets

350 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.1.6.3 External CablesThe CIMI/CIDI external cables consist of discrete cables that are listed anddescribed in the following table.


Antenna Jumper Antenna jumpers, 1 m/ 2 m/ 3 m / 5 m length, HCF1/ 2, 2 x 7/ 16straight male connectors. They connect the BTS to the main antennacables.

3BK 05360

CA01 Cable Assembly 01 is a 120 PCM cable. It provides the Abis1 andAbis2 connections between the BTS A9100 Interconnection Paneland the customer’s 2 Mbit/s PCM distribution board.

3BK 07594

This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desiredlength. The cable used is L907, an 8 pair, shielded, 2 Mbit/s, 120

PCM cable.

1AC 013280004

CA02 Cable Assembly 02 is a 75 PCM cable. It provides the Abis1 andAbis2 connections between the BTS A9100 Interconnection Paneland the customer’s 2 Mbit/s PCM distribution board.

3BK 07595

This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length.The cable used is Flex3, a multi-coaxial, 2 Mbit/s, 75 PCM cable.

1AC 001100011

A shorting plug, SP2M is used with Flex3, for impedance matching. 3BK 08949

CA-CBTE The Cable Assembly - Cable BTS Terminal is the BTS Terminalcable. It connects the BTS Terminal to the BTS Terminal connectoron the SUM.

3BK 07951

CA-GC35 The Cable Assembly - Ground Cable 35 mm sq. is the cabinet groundcable. It connects to the M8 ground bolt on the cabinet, and to thecustomer’s ground point.

3BK 08031

This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length.The cable used is a 35 mm sq., yellow/green power cable.

1AC 017230003

CA-PC2W16 Cable Assembly - Power Cable Two Wires 16 mm sq. is a -48/ 0VDC cabinet power cable. It connects to the DC connectors on theInterconnection Panel, and to the customer’s DC power source.

3BK 08029

This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length.The cables used are a 16 mm sq. blue power cable and a 16 mm sq.black power cable.

1AC 001470001 (Blue)

1AC 001470002 (Black)

CA-PC35BK Cable Assembly - Power Cable 35 mm sq. Black is a 0 VDCcabinet power cable. It connects to the 0 VDC connector on theInterconnection Panel, and to the customer’s 0 VDC power source.

3BK 08030

This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length.The cable used is a 35 mm sq. black power cable.

1AC 017230001

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 351 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets


Cable Assembly - Power Cable 35 mm sq. Blue is a -48 VDCcabinet power cable. It connects to the -48 VDC connector on theInterconnection Panel, and to the customer’s -48 VDC power source.

3BK 08032CA- PC35BL

This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length.The cable used is a 35 mm sq. blue power cable.

1AC 017230002

External Alarms This cable can be made on-site to the desired length. The cable usedis L907, an 8-pair, shielded, 2 Mbit/s, 120 PCM cable.

1AC 013280001

SCG2/3 Synchronization Cable Generation 2/3 is a clock synchronizationcable. It connects a G2 BTS to the BTS A9100.

3BK 08101

SCG3 Synchronization Cable Generation 3 is a clock synchronization cable.It connects a BTS A9100 to another BTS A9100.

3BK 07950

SCM1/3 Synchronization Cable Mark 1/3 is a clock synchronization cable. Itconnects a G1 BTS Mark1 to the BTS A9100.

3BK 08102

SCM2/3 Synchronization Cable Mark 2/3 is a clock synchronization cable. Itconnects a G1 BTS Mark2 to the BTS A9100.

3BK 08103

Table 16: CIMI/CIDI External Cables

352 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.1.7 CIMI/CIDI Data and Control Cabling

The following figure shows the logical interconnections provided by the dataand control cables.

TFBP

STASR 2 Backplane

STASR 1 Backplane

BTSRI

BTSRIMI

CA01/02

BTSCA

CS05

SUM

SCG2/3, SCG3, SCM1/3, SCM2/3

CA−ADCO

DC

CA GC35, CA PC2W16, CA PC35BK, CA PC35BL

CA−CBTE

(CIMI only)

Figure 189: CIMI/CIDI Data and Control Cabling

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 353 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.2 CIMA/CIDEThe CIMA/CIDE are indoor cabinets that support both omnidirectionaland sectorized configurations. There are two variants, where the allowedconfigurations are determined by the type of external power supply usedby the cabinet:

DC power supply variant

AC power supply variant.

The following figure shows the position of the main modules for both variants.

Air Inlet

Dummy Panel

FANUs

Dummy Panel

Air Inlet

FANUs

Air Inlet

FANUs

Up to 4 TREs

ANs

SUM and ANs

Connector AreaTop FANUs

Dummy Panel

Dummy Panel

FANUs

Air Inlet

FANUs

Air Inlet

FANUs

Power control modules

SUM and ANs

Connector Area

Top FANUs

Air Inlet

Batteries Fitted into special Battery Tray

DC variant AC variant

STASR 5

STASR 4

STASR 3

STASR 2

STASR 1

ASIB

STASR 3

STASR 2

STASR 1

CIDE CIDE

Up to 4 TREs

Up to 4 TREs

CIMA CIMA

Air Inlet

Dummy Panel

FANUs

Dummy Panel

Air Inlet

FANUs

Air Inlet

FANUs

Up to 4 TREs

Up to 2 ANCs and up to 2 Microwave

Modules

SUM, ANYs and ANCs

Connector Area

STASR 5

STASR 4

STASR 3

STASR 2

STASR 1

Up to 4 TREs

Up to 4 TREs

Up to 4 TREs or ANs

Up to 4 TREs

Dummy Panel

Air Inlet

FANUs

Connector Area

Batteries Fitted into special Battery Tray or another STASR fitted

with TREs *)

STASR 4

STASR 3

STASR 2

Up to 4 TREs

Dummy Panel

Up to 4 TREs

Air Inlet

FANUs

ADAM, 3 PM12s, SUM, ANC

STASR 1

FANUs

Air Inlet

Up to 2 ANCs and up to 2 Microwave

Modules

* ) If TREs are installed FANUs are installed under this STASR instead of over it.

Figure 190: CIMA/CIDE Module Positions

354 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.2.1 DC Power Supply Variant

The DC variant of the cabinet is designed to house up to five STASRs. Theodd-numbered subrack positions (1, 3 and 5) each contain up to four TREs.STASR2 contains the SUM and a mixture of ANX, ANY or ANC modules, asrequired. STASR4 can contain only a mixture of ANX, ANY or ANC modules,as well as microwave communications modules.

Cooling is provided by FANUs situated at the base of each of the odd-numberedsubracks and, in the CIMA, also at the top of the cabinet.

3.2.2 AC Power Supply Variant

The AC variant of the CIMA is designed to house up to three STASRs and anASIB subrack. The odd-numbered subrack positions (1 and 3) each containup to four TREs. STASR2 contains the SUM and a mixture of ANX and ANYmodules, as required.

The battery tray in the bottom of the cabinet can contain a BU41 or a BU100,in the CIMA, Subrack 4 is an ASIB subrack containing the AC power controlmodules.

The AC variant of the CIDE uses a backup battery which can be housedinternally or externally:

If an internal battery is used, the CIDE holds four STASRs. STASR1

contains the SUM, three PM12s and the ADAM. STASR2 and 4 eachcontain up to four TREs. STASR3 contains up to two ANCs, and optionally,

up to two microwave communications modules

If an external battery is used, the CIDE holds five STASRs. The battery tray

at the bottom of CIDE is replaced by a STASR which contains up to four

additional TREs. In this case FANUs are installed under this STASR.

Cooling is provided by FANUs situated at the base of each of the subrackscontaining TREs and the power control subrack.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 355 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.2.3 CIMA/CIDE Cabinet Access and Features

The following figure shows the CIMA/CIDE equipped with the interconnectionpanel and five empty subracks.

Top Cover


STASR

EMC Gasket (CIMA only)


Adjustable Feet

RF InterfaceRF Interface

Equipment Label

Note that the AC variant may replace the bottom STASR with a battery tray containing BU41 or BU100.

Note that the AC variant uses an ASIB to replace the top STASR.

Figure 191: CIMA/CIDE Equipped with Empty Subracks

356 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.2.3.1 ConstructionThe CIMA/CIDE is a steel box construction with four adjustable feet, on itsunderside, to compensate for any unevenness in the floor. The cabinet hasno side access; all cable interfaces are accessible from the front or the topof the cabinet.


3.2.3.2 DoorThe CIMA/CIDE can be installed in back-to-back or back-to-wall configurations.Access to the subracks and the interconnection panel is via a door at the frontof the cabinet. The door is the full height of the cabinet and, in the CIMA, isfitted with a copper-beryllium gasket to ensure EMC integrity when closed.

3.2.3.3 CablesAll external cables, except for the antenna, are connected to the interconnectionpanel. The external cables include the AC or DC supply and Abis connections.The antenna cabling is connected at the top of the cabinet.

A ribbon cable is used within the cabinet to link the subracks together; seethe following figure. The top end of the cable terminates on the TFBP (CIMAonly - refer to Top Fan Unit (Section 11.1.3) for more information). The bottomend terminates on the BTSRI board (refer to Remote Inventory (Section 8.5)for more information). If an internal battery is used in the AC Variant, theribbon cable also connects to the RIBAT (refer to RIBAT (Section 12.29) formore information).

Rear Front

Ribbon Cable

TFBP

BTSRI

Subrack

Subrack

Subrack

Subrack

Subrack

Rear Front

Ribbon Cable

TFBP Subrack

Subrack

Subrack

Subrack


Subrack or Battery Tray

(CIMA only) (CIMA only)

BTSRI

RIBAT in Case of Battery (CIDE only)

Figure 192: CIMA/CIDE Subracks Interconnection Cable

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 357 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.2.3.4 Cabinet TopThe following figure is a top view of the CIMA, showing antenna connectorsand the fan cover. The cover is cut away to reveal extractor fans. The fans areinstalled and removed via the front of the cabinet.

Antenna Connectors



Fan Cover

Front

Ground Bolt

AC or DC Filter Connectors, depending on CIMA variant

Antenna Connectors

Sector n/A

Sector n/B

Sector p/A

Sector p/B

Sector q/A

Sector q/B

Sector r/A

Sector r/B


Note:


Figure 193: CIMA Top View

The following figure is a top view of the CIDE. The CIDE has no top fans,just a perforated top cover.


Top Cover

Front

Ground Bolt


Antenna Connectors Antenna

Connectors

Sector n/A

Sector n/B

Sector p/A

Sector p/B

Sector q/A

Sector q/B

Sector r/A

Sector r/B

AC MainsFilterTerminals

DC Output Connector


Note:


Figure 194: CIDE Top View

The antennae are connected to RF connectors at the top of the cabinet. AnM8 bolt is also located on the top for connecting the cabinet to ground. Anyunequipped holes are fitted with a blanking plate.

The CIDE AC variant has an AC filter set in the roof plate next to the antennaconnectors on the left side. The filter has terminals for connection to a 230VAC 1Ø supply.

358 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.2.3.5 CoolingThe CIMA/CIDE is air cooled by fans, inside the cabinet and, in the CIMA,additionally at the top. Cool air is drawn in through perforations on the door andis then forced up, through the subracks, by the internal fans. The warm air isexpelled through perforations at the top of the cabinet by the top fans. Refer toTemperature Control (Section 11) for details of the cooling system hardware.

3.2.4 CIMA/CIDE Cabinet Interconnection Panel

All the external electrical interfaces are located on a front-facing panel at thetop of the cabinet. The following figure shows the details of the CIMA/CIDEDC and AC variants.

The exception is the CIDE AC mains input, which is located in the cabinet roof.AC mains input terminals are part of the AC mains filter. The filter is locatednext to the antenna connectors, see Figure 194.


External Input/Output Interface Group

External Clock Interface Group

Abis 4 Abis 3 Abis 2 Abis 1

Abis Relays

XB

CB

XG

PS

XC

LK1

In

XC

LK2

In/O

ut

XC

LK1

Out

XIO Interface Connectors

Krone Strip


Equipment LabelsX

RT

XGND GND

External Battery

AC Input

−48V

0VL

External DC

DC Output

N

+EXT.BATTERY_

Power Supply and Circuit Breaker Area(DCBREAK)

Interconnection Area (BTSCA)

For details see below

CIMA DC Variant CIMA AC Variant CIDE DC & AC Variant

DC Output (−48 V) ConnectorsDC Filter

0V−48V DC OUT 200 W max

0

I

0

I

0

I

0

I

0

I

0

I

SR1 SR2 SR3 SR4 SR5INT &DC OUT

Circuit Breakers


I

0V−48V

0

I

0

I

0

I

0

I

0

I

SR1

BTSINT

Equipment Labels

Circuit Breakers

0

I

SR2

SR3

SR4

SR5

EXTERN DC

DC OUT−48 V/200 W max

Figure 195: CIMA/CIDE Interconnection Panel, DC and AC Variants

On the left-hand side of the Interconnection Panel (see the previous figure)is the interconnection area; the shaded areas identify separate groups ofconnectors. The power supply input-connectors and circuit breakers arelocated on the right-hand side.

Located behind the interconnection area is an XIOB. The XIOB is connected tothe interconnection area and contains a 24 V DC/DC converter and interfacecircuitry for external alarms.

The interconnection panel provides interfaces for:

XIO, external clock and Abis signals

External power supplies for both DC and AC variants.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 359 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.2.5 CIMA/CIDE Signal Interfaces

The three CIMA/CIDE signal interfaces are described below.

XIO Interface The XIO connectors allow various external alarm devices to beconnected to the BTS A9100. These include smoke and flooddetectors, as well as electro-mechanical switches. Crimped orclamp strip contacts can be used on the XIO connectors. Thepositions of the XIO connectors are shown in Figure 195.

A detailed view of the XIO connectors is given in Figure 187.

The XIO connectors are described in functional groups in Table 8.

Table 9 gives a detailed view of the eternal alarm inputs.

External Clock Interface The external clock interface provides connectors for a variety offunctions; see Figure 195. The connectors are described in Table10.

Abis Interface The Abis Interface provides components for a variety of functions;see Figure 195. The interface consists of the connectors describedin Table 11.

360 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.2.6 CIMA/CIDE External Power Supply Interfaces

The external power supply interfaces for the CIMA/CIDE AC and DC variantsare described below.

3.2.6.1 CIMA DC Variant InterfaceThe external power supply inputs to the CIMA are located on a panel to theright of the interconnection area; see Figure 195. The components are listed inthe following table.

DC Filters There are two DC filter connectors; one for the 0 Vinput and one for the -48/-60 VDC input.

Circuit Breakers Six hydraulic-magnet type DC circuit breakers protectthe CIMA equipment from overload. Each subrackpower supply is protected by a separate circuit breaker.The XIOB (which includes the interconnection area)and the top fan backplane share the sixth breaker (seeFigure 196).

Table 17: CIMA, DC Power Supply Interface

3.2.6.2 CIMA AC Variant InterfaceThe external power supply inputs to the CIMA are located on a panel to theright of the interconnection area; see Figure 195. The components are listed inthe following table.

AC Filter There is one AC filter connector, for the 230 VAC 1Øinput.

DC Filter There is one DC filter connector, for the -48/-60 VDCoutput.

Circuit Breaker One hydraulic-magnet type DC circuit breaker protectsthe CIMA equipment from overload.

The CIMA power supply system for the AC variant isdescribed in Figure 197.

DC Output A 9-pin D-type connector provides -48 VDC supply at200 W max.

Table 18: CIMA, AC Power Supply Interface

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 361 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.2.6.3 CIDE DC and AC Variant InterfaceThe external power supply inputs to the CIDE are located on top of an ACmains filter fitted in the roof of the cabinet; see Figure 194. The componentsare listed in the following table.


DC Filters There are two DC filter connectors; one for the 0 Vinput and one for the -48/-60 VDC input.

Circuit Breakers Six hydraulic-magnet type DC circuit breakers protectthe CIDE equipment from overload. Each subrackpower supply is protected by a separate circuit breaker.See Figures 196 and 198.

DC Output A 9-pin D-type connector provides -48 VDC supply at200 W max. to two optional Microwave CommunicationModules.

Table 19: CIDE, DC and AC Power Supply Interface

362 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.2.7 CIMA/CIDE Power Supply and Grounding

3.2.7.1 CIMA/CIDE DC VariantThe CIMA/CIDE is powered from a -48/-60 VDC external power source.Power is distributed to the cabinet via two filtered input connectors; see thefollowing figure.

Top Fan Backplane

XIOB

STASR 3

STASR 2

STASR 1

STASR 4

STASR 5

0 VDC Filter −48/−60 VDC Filter

Circuit Breakers

6 5 4 3 2 1

25 A

25 A

25 A

25 A

25 A

5 A

Ground DC Supply Part of Interconnection Panel(M8 Bolt)

(CIMA only)

DC Output−48 V / 200 Wmax (CIDE only)

Figure 196: CIMA/CIDE DC Power Interconnections

Each subrack has:

A filtered input of -48/-60 VDC


A ground connector

A circuit breaker.

The XIOB and TFBP (CIMA only) have the same inputs as the subracks.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 363 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets


Item Component/Rating

0 and -48/-60 VDC Filters 4 µF capacitors, rated at 75 A.

Circuit Breakers 1 - 5 25 A

Circuit Breaker 6 5 A

Table 20: CIMA/CIDE Power Component Ratings

The CIMA/CIDE is EMC-protected at both cabinet and module level. At cabinetlevel, the CIMA/CIDE is connected to ground via a cable terminated on topof the cabinet with an M8 bolt. At module level, ground continuity is carriedto the subracks via the cabinet bus bar. In the CIMA, a functionally identicalalternative to the cabinet bus bar is used in the AC variant and the later DCvariant of CIMA. This is a branched cableform.

The bus bar (or cableform) also distributes the DC voltages to the subracksand other CIMA/CIDE equipment.

364 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.2.7.2 CIMA AC VariantThe following figure shows the power supply distribution for the CIMA ACvariant.

ASIB

AFIP

APOD

AC Input

PM08/5 PM08/4 PM08/3 PM08/2 PM08/1 BCU1

ACRI

DC Bus

AlarmsControl

BCB

To/From FANUs

* BU41 or BU100

Top Fan Backplane

XIOB

STASR 2

STASR 1

STASR 3

STASR 4

Circuit Breakers

6 5 4 3 2 1

25 A

25 A

25 A

25 A

5 A 5 A

APODGround(M8 Bolt)

ABAC

Shunt

External −48 VDC 200 W

AFIP

* External Battery

−48 VDC

0 VDC

* Only one battery possible

0 VDC −48 VDC

0 VDC (M6 Bolt)

GND

Shunt

Figure 197: CIMA AC Variant Power Supply System

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 365 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

The AC input is 230 VAC 1Ø. The AC input is connected to the AFIP, whereit is filtered and passed to the APOD. The APOD is located in the ASIB andcontains an AC circuit breaker used to isolate the AC input supply.

The ASIB contains the modules that:

Convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC. Refer to APOD (Section 12.11) and

PM08 (Section 12.12) for detailed descriptions of the APOD and the

PM08s, respectively. Up to five PM08s are used in the CIMA; these arePM08/5 to PM08/1

Control the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. Referto BCU1 (Section 12.16), ABAC (Section 12.20), BU41 (Section 12.24),

BU100 (Section 12.25) for detailed descriptions of BCU1 and the ABAC, and

the optional items BU41 and BU100, respectively.

The DC supply produced in the ASIB is connected to the remaining modules inthe CIMA via the circuit breakers located on the APOD.

The CIMA is EMC-protected at both cabinet and module level. At cabinetlevel, the CIMA is connected to ground via a cable terminated on top of thecabinet with an M8 bolt. At module level, ground continuity is carried to thesubracks via a branched cableform. The cables are terminated with FASTON,Mate-N-Lock and spade connectors.

366 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.2.7.3 CIDE AC VariantThe following figure shows the power supply distribution for the AC variant. Thepresence of the battery depends on the power supply option selected:

CIDE without backup battery

CIDE with an internal backup battery

CIDE with an external backup battery.

AC Filter

AC Input

PM12/3 PM12/2 PM12/1

OMU

XIOB

STASR 2

STASR 1

STASR 3

STASR 4

Circuit Breakers

6 5 4 3 2 1

25 A

25 A

25 A

25 A

10 A

DCBREAK

Ground(M8 Bolt)

0 VDC −48 VDC

0 VDC (M6 Bolt)

25 A

BU100BU41 or

RIBAT

ADAM

Optional internal or external Battery Unit

STASR 5

DC Output 200 W max

Figure 198: CIDE AC Variant Power Supply System

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 367 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

The AC input is 230 VAC 1Ø. The AC input is connected to the AC Filter, whereit is filtered and passed to three PM12s. The mains power connection toeach PM12 is via a flying socket.

The three PM12s convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC. Refer to PM12 (Section12.14) for a description of the PM12. Up to three PM12s are used in a CIDE;these are PM12/3 to PM12/1.

Control of the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing isprovided by the OMU via the BCB. Charge/discharge current is monitored via ashunt in the ADAM. The ADAM acts as an interface between the PM12s, thebatteries and the power distribution inside the BTS. Refer to ADAM (Section12.21) for a detailed description of the ADAM and for a functional description ofthe power supply system.

DC power is distributed in the BTS via DCBREAK and the bus bar. DCBREAKcontains six circuit breakers, five for STASRs 1 - 5, and one for the XIOB.

The CIDE is EMC-protected at both cabinet and module level. At cabinetlevel, the CIDE is connected to ground via a cable terminated on top of thecabinet with an M8 bolt. At module level, ground continuity is carried to thesubracks via a bus bar system. The cables are terminated with FASTON,Mate-N-Lock and spade connectors.

3.2.8 CIMA/CIDE Cables and Cable Sets

This section lists the cables and cable sets for all BTS A9100 CIMA/CIDEconfigurations.

For the physical and electrical descriptions of the discrete cables, see CableDescriptions (Section 17).

For some of the cables and cable sets, there exist different variants. For thevariants used in a specific cabinet, refer to its parts list.

368 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.2.8.1 Internal CablesThe CIMA/CIDE internal cables consist of the discrete cables and cable sets.

The following table lists the cables and cable sets, Table 22 lists and describesthe cables that comprise the cable sets.


ADABA ADABA connects the battery via breakers to ADAM. It includes a cablefor the battery temperature sensor.

3BK 25146

ADABM ADABM connects the -48 VDC filter to ADAM or the interconnection area. 3BK 25139

BTSRIMA The CIMA BTS Remote Inventory Board with Cable for MEDI is a flatcable and a PCB. It interconnects the subrack backplanes and the TFBP.A BTSRI board is permanently attached to one end of the flat cable.

3BK 07720

BUMA The Cable Assembly Maxi as used in the later variant of CIMA is abranched cableform. It contains cables for the DC power connections tothe subracks, XIOB, and top fans.

3BK 07762

CA-ADCO The CA-ADCO disables eight alarm inputs. It connects to an XIOconnector on the Interconnection Panel.

3BK 07953

CIMA bus bar The CIMA bus bar is a hardware module used for the DC powerconnections to the subracks, XIOB, and top fans.

3BK 07762

CS02 CS02 is an AN cable set. It connects an ANY to another ANY or toan ANX or ANC.

3BK 07598

CS03 CS03 is a TRE cable set.

In a CIMA, it connects a TRE to an ANX or ANY.

In a CIDE, it connects a TRE to an ANC.

3BK 07599

CS04 CS04 is an ANT cable set. It connects an ANX or ANC to two antennacabinet connectors.

3BK 07600

CS05 CS05 is the BTSCA-to-SUM cable set. In a CIMA, it interconnects theSUM and the Interconnection Panel. The cable set carries the Abis1 andAbis2 Interfaces, and clock and control signals to and from the SUM.

3BK 07199

CA-PCAN CA-PCAN connects the -48 VDC filter (on DCBREAK) to ADAM or tothe interconnection area.

3BK 25115

CA-PCAP CA-PCAP connects the 0 VDC filter (on DCBREAK) to ADAM or to theinterconnection area.

3BK 25114

Table 21: CIMA/CIDE Internal Cables

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 369 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.2.8.2 Cable SetsThe cable sets used in the CIMA/CIDE cabinets are described in the tablebelow.

Cable Sets Mnemonic Description Part Number Qty

CA-ADABM CA-ADABM connects -48 VDC from ADAMto the battery breaker.

3BK 25139 1

CA-ADABP CA-ADABP connects 0 VDC from ADAM tothe battery breaker.

3BK 25138 1

CA-BABRM CA-BABRM connects -48 VDC from thebattery breaker to the battery interconnectionarea.

3BK 25141 1

CA-BABRP CA-BABRP connects 0 VDC from the batterybreaker to the battery interconnection area.

3BK 25140 1

ADABA

CA-BSENS CA-BSENS connects the battery temperaturesensor to RIBAT.

3BK 08119 1

CS02 RXRC The RXRC connects an ANY RX connectorto an ANX, ANC or another ANY RXconnector.

3BK 07920 2

TXRC The TXRC connects an ANY TX connector toan ANX, ANC or another ANY TX connector.

3BK 07919 1

CS03 RXRC The RXRC connects a TRE RX connector toan ANY, ANX or ANC RX connector.

3BK 07920 2

TXRC The TXRC connects a TRE TX connector toan ANY, ANX or ANC TX connector.

3BK 07919 1

CS04 ANIC The ANIC provides a duplex connectionbetween the ANX or ANC and a cabinetantenna connector.

3BK 07921 2

CS05 CA-ABIS The CA-ABIS carries the Abis1 /2 Interfacesfrom the Interconnection Panel to the SUM.

3BK 07922 1

CA-BTSCA The CA-BTSCA carries clock and controlsignals between the Interconnection Paneland the SUM.

3BK 07923 1

Table 22: CIMA/CIDE Cable Sets

370 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.2.8.3 External CablesThe CIMA/CIDE external cables consist of discrete cables that are listedand described in the following table.


AC Supply This AC power supply cable can be made on-site to the desired length.The cable used is a single pair, 4 mm sq. power cable.

1AC 001700012

AntennaJumper

Antenna jumpers, 1 m/ 2 m/ 3 m/ 5 m length, HCF1/ 2, 2 x 7/ 16 straightmale connectors. They connect the BTS to the main antenna cables.

3BK 05360

CA01 CA01 is a 120 PCM cable. It provides the Abis1 and Abis2connections between the BTS A9100 Interconnection Panel and thecustomer’s 2 Mbit/s PCM distribution board.

3BK 07594

This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length.The cable used is L907, an 8-pair, shielded, 2 Mbit/s, 120 PCM cable.

1AC 013280004

CA02 CA02 is a 75 PCM cable. It provides the Abis1 and Abis2 connectionsbetween the BTS A9100 Interconnection Panel and the customer’s2 Mbit/s PCM distribution board.

3BK 07595

This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length.The cable used is Flex3, a multicoaxial, 2 Mbit/s, 75 PCM cable.

1AC 001100011


CA-CBTE CA-CBTE is the BTS Terminal cable. It connects the BTS Terminal tothe BTS Terminal connector on the SUM.

3BK 07951

CA-GC35 CA-GC35 is the cabinet ground cable. It connects to the M8 groundbolt on the cabinet, and to the customer’s ground point.

3BK 08031

This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length.The cable used is a 35 mm sq. yellow/green power cable.

1AC 017230003

CA-PC2W16 CA PC2W16 is a -48/ 0 VDC cabinet power cable. It connects to theDC connectors on the Interconnection Panel, and to the customer’s DCpower source.

3BK 08029

This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length.The cables used are a 16 mm sq. blue power cable and a 16 mm sq.black power cable.

1AC 001470001 (Blue)

1AC 001470002 (Black)

CA PC35BK is a 0 VDC cabinet power cable. It connects to the 0 VDCconnector on the Interconnection Panel, and to the customer’s 0 VDCpower source.

3BK 08030CA-PC35BK

This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length.The cable used is a 35 mm sq. black power cable.

1AC 017230001

CA -PC35BL CA PC35BL is a -48 VDC cabinet power cable. It connects to the -48VDC connector on the Interconnection Panel, and to the customer’s -48VDC power source.

3BK 08032

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 371 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets


This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length.The cable used is a 35 mm sq. blue power cable.

1AC 017230002

ExternalAlarms

This cable can be made on-site to the desired length. The cable usedis L907, an 8-pair, shielded, 2 Mbit/s, 120 PCM cable.

1AC 013280001

SCG2/3 SCG2/3 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a G2 BTS to theBTS A9100.

3BK 08101

SCG3 SCG3 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a BTS A9100 toanother BTS A9100.

3BK 07950

SCM1/3 SCM1/3 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a G1 BTS Mark 1to the BTS A9100.

3BK 08102

SCM2/3 SCM2/3 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a G1 BTS Mark 2to the BTS A9100.

3BK 08103

Table 23: CIMA/CIDE External Cables

372 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.2.9 CIMA/CIDE Data and Control Cabling

The following figure shows the logical interconnections provided by the dataand control cables.

TFBP

STASR 2 Backplane

STASR 1 Backplane

BTSRI

BTSCA

BTSRIMA

CS05

SUM

STASR 3 Backplane

STASR 4 Backplane

STASR 5 Backplane

CA01/02


CA−ADCO


CA−CBTE

DC

(CIMA only)

Figure 199: CIMA/CIDE Data and Control Cabling

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 373 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.3 Multistandard Base Station IndoorThe MBI3/MBI5 are indoor cabinets that support both omnidirectionaland sectorized configurations. There are two variants, where the allowedconfigurations are determined by the type of external power supply usedby the cabinet:

DC power supply variant

AC power supply variant.

The following figure shows the position of the main modules for both variants.

MBI5 − DC Variant

Top FANUs

Dummy Panel

Air Inlet

FANUs

Dummy Panel

Air Inlet

FANUs

Air Inlet

FANUs

Up to 4 TREs

SUM, ANYs and ANCs

Connector Area

STASR 5

STASR 4

STASR 3

STASR 2

STASR 1

Up to 4 TREs

Up to 4 TREs

SUM, ANYs and ANCs

MBI5 − AC Variant with or w/o BATS

Top FANUs

Dummy Panel

Air Inlet

FANUs

Air Inlet

FANUs

Connector Area

STASR 5

Up to 4 TREs

STASR 4

STASR 3

Up to 4 TREs


BATS (option)

STASR 2

Air Inlet

FANUs

STASR 1

Dummy Panel

SUM, ANYs and ANCs,

BATS (option)

Up to 4 TREs

Top FANUs

Air Inlet

Dummy Panel

FANUs

Air Inlet

FANUs

DC: SUM, ANYs, ANCs

Connector Area

STASR 3

STASR 2

STASR 1

DC: TREs, ANC

DC: Up to 4 TREs

AC: ADAM, 2 or 3PM12s,BATS (Option)

AC: SUM, ANCs

MBI3 − AC or DC Variant

AC: SUM, TREs

Top FANUs

Dummy Panel

Air Inlet

FANUs

Air Inlet

FANUs

Connector Area

STASR 5

Up to 4 TREs

STASR 4

STASR 3

Up to 4 TREs


STASR 2

Large batteries fitted into special battery tray

SUM, ANYs and ANCs

FANUs

MBI5 − AC Variant with large BBU

Empty Space

Figure 200: MBI3/MBI5 Module Positions

374 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.3.1 DC Power Supply Variant

The DC variant of the cabinets is designed to house up to three or five STASRs.The odd-numbered subrack positions each contain up to four TREs. STASR2contains the SUM and a mixture of ANY and ANC modules, as required.STASR4 can contain only a mixture of ANY or ANC modules, as well asmicrowave communications modules.

Cooling is provided by FANUs situated at the base of each of the odd-numberedsubracks and also at the top of the cabinets.

3.3.2 AC Power Supply Variant

The AC variant of the MBIs uses a backup battery which can be housedinternally or externally:

If an internal battery is used, the MBI3 holds two and the MBI5 holds four

STASRs. STASR1 contains the SUM, three PM12s and the ADAM. STASR2and 4 each contain up to four TREs. STASR3 contains up to two ANCs, and

optionally, up to two microwave communications modules

If an external battery is used, the MBI3 hold three and the MBI5 holdsfive STASRs. The battery tray at the bottom of the MBI is replaced by a

STASR which contains up to four additional TREs. In this case FANUsare installed under this STASR.

Cooling is provided by FANUs situated at the base of each of the subrackscontaining TREs and the power control subrack.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 375 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.3.3 MBI Cabinet Access and Features

The following figures show the MBI3/MBI5 equipped with the interconnectionpanel and three or five empty subracks.

3.3.3.1 MBI3 CabinetTop Fan Unit


STASR


Adjustable Feet


Equipment Label

AC Input

Figure 201: MBI3 Equipped with Empty Subracks

376 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.3.3.2 MBI5 CabinetTop Fan Unit


STASR

EMC Gasket


Adjustable Feet


Equipment Label

Note that the AC variant may replace the bottom STASR with a battery tray containing BU101

AC Input

Figure 202: MBI5 Equipped with Empty Subracks

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 377 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.3.3.3 ConstructionThe MBI3/MBI5 are steel box constructions with four adjustable feet on theunderside, to compensate for any unevenness in the floor. The cabinetshave no side access; all cable interfaces are accessible from the front or thetop of the cabinets.


3.3.3.4 DoorThe MBI3/MBI5 can be installed in back-to-back or back-to-wall configurations.Access to the subracks and the interconnection panel is via a door at the frontof the cabinet. The door is the full height of the cabinet.

3.3.3.5 CablesAll external cables, except for the antenna and AC supply, are connected tothe interconnection panel. The external cables include DC supply and Abisconnections. The antenna cabling and AC supply are connected at the topof the cabinet.

A ribbon cable is used within the cabinet to link the subracks together; see thefollowing figure. The top end of the cable terminates on the TFBP (refer to TopFan Unit (Section 11.1.3) for more information). The bottom end terminates onthe BTSRI board (refer to Remote Inventory (Section 8.5) for more information).If an internal battery is used in the AC variant, the ribbon cable also connects tothe RIBAT (refer to RIBAT (Section 12.29) for more information).

Subrack

Subrack

Subrack

Subrack

Subrack

DC variant

Rear Front

RibbonCable

TFBPSubrack

Subrack

Subrack

Subrack

Subrackor Battery Tray

BTSRI

RIBAT in case of battery

AC variant

Subrack

Subrack

Subrack

Subrack

Subrack


MBI3

MBI5

FANU in case of subrack

Subrack

Figure 203: MBI3/MBI5 Subracks Interconnection Cable

378 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.3.3.6 Cabinet TopThe following figure is a top view of the MBI3/MBI5, showing antennaconnectors, AC main filter terminal, fan cover and ground bolt. The cover iscut away to reveal extractor fans. The fans are installed and removed via thefront of the cabinet.

Antenna Connectors


External Input Board MultistandardXIBM

Fan Cover Ground Bolt M8

Power Supply and Circuit Breaker Area

Hole for SMAconnector GPS

AC Filter withnew Fixation Panel

BTS Connection AreaMSCA

BlindPlate

Note: Antenna connectors are not necessary completely equipped.

Q ANT A

Q ANT B

R ANT A

R ANT B

P ANT A

N ANT A

N ANT B

P ANT B

Antennalabelling

on the roof

Antennalabelling

on the roof

(*)

(*) Auxiliary 3 x 7/16 antenna blocks

Auxiliary3 x Nantenna blocks(microwave)

Figure 204: MBI3/MBI5 Top View

The antennas are connected to RF connectors at the top of the cabinet. AnM8 bolt is also located on the top for connecting the cabinet to ground. Anyunequipped holes are fitted with a blanking plate.

The MBI3/MBI5 AC variant has an AC filter set in the roof plate next to theantenna connectors on the left side. The filter has terminals for connectionto a 230 VAC 1Ø supply.

3.3.3.7 CoolingThe MBIs are air cooled by fans, inside the cabinet and additionally at the top.Cool air is drawn in through perforations on the door and is then forced up,through the subracks, by the internal fans. The warm air is expelled throughperforations at the top of the cabinet by the top fans. Refer to TemperatureControl (Section 11) for details of the cooling system hardware.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 379 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.3.4 MBI3/MBI5 Cabinet Interconnection Panels

All the external electrical interfaces are located on front-facing panels at thetop of the cabinet. The following figures show the details of the MBI3/MBI5interconnection panels.

The exception is the AC mains input, which is located in the cabinet roof. ACmains input terminals are part of the AC mains filter. The filter is located next tothe antenna connectors, see Figure 204.


External Alarm Input Board MultistandardXIBM

Abis Relays

External InterfaceConnectors

Krone Strip

Equipment LabelsConnectorsDC Filter

CircuitBreakers

Equipment Labels

0V−48V

0

I

0

I

0

I

SR1 SR2INT &DC OUT

Abis 4 Abis 2

XC

LK1

In

XC

LK2

In/O

ut

XC

LK1

Out


Abis 3 Abis 1

XRT RS232

External ClockInterface Group

Extension Area(Blind Plate)

Multistandard Connection AreaMSCA

Power Supply andCircuit Breaker Area

DCBR3

0

I

SR3

DC Output −48 V/500 W max

DC OUT 500 W max

DC Output

XB

CB

GND+12 V

Figure 205: MBI3 Interconnection Panels


External Alarm Input Board Multistandard XIBM

DC Output −48 V/500 W maxConnectors

DC Filter Equipment Labels

External ClockInterface Group

Extension Area(Blind Plate)

Multistandard Connection AreaMSCA

Power Supply andCircuit Breaker Area

DCBR5

External Interface Connectors

XB

CB

Abis 4 Abis 2

XC

LK1

In

XC

LK1

Out


Abis 3 Abis 1

Equipment Labels

GND+12 V

DC Output

Circuit Breakers

0V−48V DC OUT 500 W max

0

I

0

I

0

I

0

I

0

I

0

I

SR1 SR2 SR3 SR4 SR5INT &DC OUT

Abis RelaysKrone Strip

XC

LK2

In/O

ut

XRT RS232

Figure 206: MBI5 Interconnection Panels

380 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

On the left-hand side of the interconnection area (see figures above) is theExternal Alarm Input Board Multistandard XIBM, followed by the MultistandardInterconnection Area MSCA in the middle. An extension area is covered with ablind plate. The power supply input/output connectors and circuit breakers arelocated on DCBR3/DCBR5 on the right-hand side.

The XIBM contains a 12 V DC/DC converter and interface circuitry for externalalarms on the back side of the panel.

The interconnection panels provide interfaces for:

Signals

External alarms

External clock

Abis.

DC Power supplies.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 381 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.3.5 MBI Signal Interfaces

The MBI has XIBM, MSCA clock and MSCA Abis signal interfaces. Theconnectors and functions for each of these interfaces are described below.

3.3.5.1 XIBM Interface ConnectorsThe XIBM interface connectors are listed in the following table.

External Alarm Interface ’Mini Combicon’ connectors XI 1 and XI 2provide an interface for connecting 16 externalalarm inputs. Each input alarm is reported to theOMC-R where it is mapped to customer-definedASCII text. The ASCII text describes theparticular alarm.

Each alarm input has two adjacent pinsassociated with it on the XI connector. If thesepins are open-circuit (open loop), an alarm isgenerated. So every unconnected input alarmis bridged by a short circuit on the plug-inconnector. For test purpose, it is possible withsoftware to pull the alarm inputs on active orinactive level in order to check them.

DC Output The DC Output Connector provides a + 12 VDCpower source for external alarm devices thatrequire a power supply.

The GND connector is used when attachingthe external alarm 12 VDC ground to theBTS A9100 ground. If the connector pins arenot short-circuited (open loop), the input andoutput alarms are isolated from the BTS A9100ground.

XBCB The XBCB connector provides an externalinterface to the internal BCB:

If the BTS is powered, the XBCB can beused to control external devices (e.g.,

AC/DC power supply, batteries or to provideadditional I/O signals)

If the BTS is not powered, the XBCB can

be externally powered. Then the directionof the interface is reversed so that it can be

used for remote inventory of the whole BTS.This feature is used only at factory level.

The signal levels are according to RS-485. AnEEPROM is used to store the remote inventorydata of the XIBM.

Table 24: XIBM Interface Connectors

382 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

The XI connectors allow various external alarm devices to be connectedto the BTS A9100. These include smoke and flood detectors, as well aselectro-mechanical switches. Crimped or clamp strip contacts can be used onthe XI connectors. The positions of the XI connectors are shown in Figures205 and 206.

A detailed view of the XI connectors is given in the following figure.

XI1

GN

DX

I2G

ND

XI3

GN

DX

I4G

ND

XI5

GN

DX

I6G

ND

XI7

GN

DX

I8G

ND

XI9

GN

DX

I10

GN

DXI

11G

ND

XI1

2G

ND

XI1

3G

ND

XI1

4G

ND

XI1

5G

ND

XI1

6G

ND

XI 1

XI 2

Figure 207: MBI External Alarm Interface Connectors

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 383 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.3.5.2 MSCA Clock InterfaceThe MSCA external clock interface provides connectors for a variety offunctions; see Figures 205 and 206. The connectors are described in thefollowing table.

XRT The XRT connector provides access to the BTS A9100 viaan asynchronous serial interface. The signal levels conformto CCITT V.24. This allows a standard terminal to be usedfor radio supervision and loop-test purposes. The data rateis programmable between 1200 and 115,000 baud. Onlytransmit and receive lines are used. Hardware flow control isnot implemented. Drivers and control of the XRT interface arelocated on the SUMA.

RS-232 The RS-232 connector provides an asynchronous serialinterface to control and supervise an external GPS receiver or anantenna tilt signal. The signal levels conform to CCITT V.24. Thedata rate is programmable between 1200 and 115,000 baud.Only transmit and receive lines are used. Hardware flow is notimplemented. This interface can also be used to synchronizethe BTS A9100 to the GPS receiver or another external clockreference. These signal lines are according to RS-422 Driversand control of the RS-232 interface are located on the SUMA.

XCLK The XCLK connectors are used to synchronize the BTS A9100to another BTS (G1 BTS, G2 BTS, BTS A9100) in time andfrequency or vice versa. The signaling interface conforms toRS-422. There are three XCLK connectors:

XCLK1IN: input

XCLK1OUT: output

XCLK2IN/OUT: bi-directional interface.

The input XCLK1IN and the output XCLK1OUT are connectedtogether, pin-to-pin. The XCLK2IN/OUT connector provides abi-directional clock interface. Bus drivers and control logic arelocated on the SUMA.

Table 25: MSCA External Clock Interface Connectors

384 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.3.5.3 MSCA Abis InterfaceThe MSCA Abis Interface provides components for a variety of functions; seeFigures 205 and 206. The interface consists of the connectors described inthe following table.

Abis Connectors The Abis Interface connects the BTS A9100 tothe BSC. There are four connectors, these areAbis1 , 2, 3 and 4. All connectors provide 120

and 75 impedances. The impedance isselected by the type of cable connector pluggedinto the interface.

Note: Only Abis1 and 2 are currently used;Abis 3 and 4 are provided for future use.

Krone Strip Connector The Krone strip supports an overvoltageprotection device and an Abis monitoringdevice. The overvoltage protection device is a’make-before-break’ type. This means there isno interruption of service during insertion andremoval of the inserts.

Abis Relays Four relays, one for each Abis Interface, arecontrolled by the SUMA. The relays can beused to:

Perform loop-back tests on the individualAbis Interfaces

Provide transparent routing of the Abis trafficwhen the BTS A9100 is powered down or

faulty. This ensures that the Abis connection

is not broken in multidrop configurations.

Table 26: MSCA Abis Interface Connectors

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 385 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.3.6 MBI External Power Supply Interfaces

The external power supply inputs/outputs to/from the MBI3/MBI5 are locatedon top of the AC mains filter fitted in the roof of the cabinet or on the powersupply and circuit breaker area DCBR3/DCBR5, see Figures 201 and 202.The components are listed in the following table.


DC Filters There are two DC filter connectors; one for the 0 Vinput and one for the -48/ -60 VDC input.

Circuit Breakers Four (MBI3) or six (MBI5) hydraulic-magnet typeDC circuit breakers protect the MBI equipment fromoverload. Each subrack power supply is protected by aseparate circuit breaker. See Figures 205 and 206.

DC Output A 3-pin D-type connector provides -48 VDC supply at500 W max. to two optional Microwave CommunicationModules or external transmission equipment, pylonlightning, etc.

Table 27: MBI, DC and AC Power Supply Interface

386 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.3.7 MBI Power Supply and Grounding

3.3.7.1 MBI DC VariantThe MBI DC variants are powered from a -48/ -60 VDC external powersource. Power is distributed to the cabinet via two filtered input connectors;see the following figures.

Top Fan Backplane

XIBM

STASR2

STASR330 A

30 A

15 A

Ground(M8 Bolt)

STASR130 A

0 VDCFilter

−48/−60 VDCFilter

Circuit Breakers

SR1

DCBR3

DC Output−48 V / 500 W max

DC Input0 V

DC Input−48 V

SR3 SR2INT &DC OUT

BUS Bar BUS Bar

Clamp Panel(not onDCBR3)

Figure 208: MBI3 DC Power Interconnections

Top Fan Backplane

XIBM

STASR 3

STASR 2

STASR 1

STASR 4

STASR 5

0 VDCFilter

−48/−60 VDCFilter

CircuitBreakers

30 A

30 A

30 A

30 A

15 A

30 A

Ground(M8 Bolt)

DC Output−48 V / 500 W max

DC Input0 V

DC Input−48 V

SR1SR3 SR2INT &DC OUT

SR4SR5

DCBR5

BUS Bar BUS Bar

Clamp Panel(not on DCBR5)

Figure 209: MBI5 DC Power Interconnections

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 387 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

Each subrack has:

A filtered input of -48/ -60 VDC


A ground connector

A circuit breaker.

The XIBM and TFBP have the same inputs as the subracks.


Items Component/Rating

0 and -48/ -60 VDC Filters 4 µF capacitors, rated at 75 A

Circuit Breakers 1 - 3 (MBI3)

Circuit Breakers 1 - 5 (MBI5)

30 A

Circuit Breaker 4 (MBI3)

Circuit Breaker 6 (MBI5)

15 A

Table 28: MBI Power Component Ratings

The MBIs are EMC-protected at both cabinet and module level. At cabinetlevel, the MBIs are connected to ground via a cable terminated on top of thecabinet with an M8 bolt. At module level, ground continuity is carried to thesubracks via the cabinet bus bar.

The bus bar also distributes the DC voltages to the subracks and other MBIequipment.

388 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.3.7.2 MBI AC VariantThe following figures show the power supply distribution for the AC variant ofMBI5. MBI3 AC variants are similar (only fewer circuit breakers and STASRs),but it is not possible to install a large internal backup battery (no BU101possible, only BATS). The presence of the battery depends on the powersupply option selected:

MBI without backup battery

MBI with an internal backup battery

MBI with an external backup battery.

AC Filter

AC IInput

OMU

XIBM

STASR 2

STASR 1

STASR 3

STASR 4

Circuit Breakers

30 A

30 A

30 A

30 A

DCBR5

Ground(M8 Bolt)

0 VDC −48 VDC

ADAM

Top FanBackplane

0 VDCFilter

−48V/−60 VDCFilter

STASR 5 30 A

15 A

BUS BarBUS Bar

DC Output

PM12/3 PM12/2 PM12/1

Figure 210: MBI5 AC Variant Power Supply System w/o Battery

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 389 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

AC Filter

AC IInput

OMU

XIBM

STASR 2

STASR 1

STASR 3

STASR 4

Circuit Breakers

30 A

30 A

30 A

30 A

DCBR5

Ground(M8 Bolt)

0 VDC −48 VDC

ADAM

Top FanBackplane

0 VDCFilter


STASR 5 30 A

15 A

BUS BarBUS Bar

DC Output

Battery RIBAT

Optional internalBattery Unit

LOAD BATT

Battery Breakers

to BCB

+ −

−48 VDCFrontside

Backpanel

PM12/3 PM12/2 PM12/1

Figure 211: MBI5 AC Variant Power Supply System with Internal Battery

390 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

AC Filter

AC IInput

OMU

XIBM

STASR 2

STASR 1

STASR 3

STASR 4

Circuit Breakers

30 A

30 A

30 A

30 A

DCBR5

Ground(M8 Bolt)

0 VDC −48 VDC

ADAM

Top FanBackplane

0 VDCFilter


STASR 5 30 A

15 A

BUS BarBUS Bar

DC Output

Battery RIBAT

Optional externalBattery Unit

LOAD BATT

Battery Breakers

XBCB

+−

−48 VDCFrontside

Backpanel

GND

PM12/3 PM12/2 PM12/1

Figure 212: MBI5 AC Variant Power Supply System with External Battery

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 391 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

The AC input is 230 VAC 1Ø. The AC input is connected to the AC filter, whereit is filtered and passed to three PM12s. The mains power connection toeach PM12 is via a flying socket.

The three PM12s convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC. Refer to PM12 (Section12.14) for a description of the PM12. Up to three PM12s are used in a MBI;these are PM12/1 to PM12/3.

Control of the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing isprovided by the OMU via the BCB. Charge/discharge current is monitoredvia a shunt in the ADAM. The ADAM acts as an interface between PM12s,batteries and power distribution inside the BTS. Refer to ADAM (Section 12.21)for a detailed description of the ADAM and for a functional description ofthe power supply system.

In the MBI3, DC power is distributed in the BTS via the DCBR3 and the busbar. The DCBR3 contains four circuit breakers, three for STASRs 1 - 3 andone for the XIBM and top fan unit.

In the MBI5, DC power is distributed in the BTS via the DCBR5 and the busbar. The DCBR5 contains six circuit breakers, five for STASRs 1 - 5 andone for the XIBM and top fan unit.

The MBIs are EMC-protected at both cabinet and module level. At cabinetlevel, the MBIs are connected to ground via a cable terminated on top of thecabinet with an M8 bolt. At module level, ground continuity is carried to thesubracks via a bus bar system. The cables are terminated with FASTON,Mate-N-Lock and spade connectors.

392 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.3.8 MBI Cables and Cable Sets

This section lists the cables and cable sets for all BTS A9100 MBIconfigurations.

For the physical and electrical descriptions of the discrete cables see CableDescriptions (Section 17).

For some of the cables and cable sets, there exist different variants. For thevariants used in a specific cabinet, refer to its parts list.

3.3.8.1 Internal CablesThe MBI internal cables consist of the discrete cables and cable sets.

The following table lists the cables and cable sets, Table 30 lists and describesthe cables that comprise the cable sets.


ADABA ADABA connects the battery via breakers to ADAM. It includes a cablefor the battery temperature sensor.

3BK 25146

ADABM ADABM connects the -48 VDC filter to a clamp panel. In combinationwith CA-PCAN, it connects to the circuit breakers of DCBR3/DCBR5.

3BK 25139

BTSRI3 The BTS Remote Inventory Board with Cable for MBI3 is a flat cableand a PCB. It interconnects the subrack backplanes and the TFBP. ABTSRI board is permanently attached to one end of the flat cable.

3BK 025973

BTSRI5 The BTS Remote Inventory Board with Cable for MBI5 is a flat cableand a PCB. It interconnects the subrack backplanes and the TFBP. ABTSRI board is permanently attached to one end of the flat cable.

3BK 025974

CA-ADCO The CA-ADCO disables eight alarm inputs. It connects to an XIOconnector on the Interconnection Panel.

3BK 07953

CABATS CABATS connects the small battery unit BATS to ADAM. 3BK 25873

CA-PCAN CA-PCAN connects the ADAM or the -48 VDC filter (onDCBR3/DCBR5) to the DC breakers on DCBR3/DCBR5.

3BK 25115

CA-PCAP CA-PCAP connects the 0 VDC filter (on DCBR3/DCBR5) to ADAM. 3BK 25114

CS02 CS02 is an AN cable set. It connects an ANY to another ANY or toan ANC.

3BK 07598

CS03 CS03 is a TRE cable set.

It connects a TRE to an ANC.

3BK 07599

CS04 CS04 is an ANT cable set. It connects an ANC to two antenna cabinetconnectors.

3BK 07600

CS05 CS05 is the MSCA-to-SUM cable set. It interconnects the SUM andthe MSCA. The cable set carries the Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces, andclock and control signals to and from the SUM.

3BK 07199

Table 29: MBI Internal Cables

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 393 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.3.8.2 Cable SetsThe following table describes the cables contained in each MBI cable set.

Cable Sets Mnemonic Description Part Number Qty

CA-ADABM CA-ADABM connects -48 VDC from ADAMto the battery breaker.

3BK 25139 1

CA-ADABP CA-ADABP connects 0 VDC from ADAM tothe battery breaker.

3BK 25138 1

CA-BABRM CA-BABRM connects -48 VDC from thebattery breaker to the battery interconnectionarea.

3BK 25141 1

CA-BABRP CA-BABRP connects 0 VDC from the batterybreaker to the battery interconnection area.

3BK 25140 1

ADABA

CA-BSENS CA-BSENS connects the battery temperaturesensor to RIBAT.

3BK 08119 1

CS02 RXRC The RXRC connects an ANY RX connectorto an ANC or another ANY RX connector.

3BK 07920 2

TXRC The TXRC connects an ANY TX connectorto an ANC or another ANY TX connector.

3BK 07919 1

CS03 RXRC The RXRC connects a TRE RX connector toan ANY or ANC RX connector.

3BK 07920 2

TXRC The TXRC connects a TRE TX connector toan ANY or ANC TX connector.

3BK 07919 1

CS04 ANIC The ANIC provides a duplex connectionbetween the ANC and a cabinet antennaconnector.

3BK 07921 2

CS05 CA-ABIS The CA-ABIS carries the Abis1 /2 Interfacesfrom the MSCA to the SUM.

3BK 07922 1

CA-BTSCA The CA-BTSCA carries clock and controlsignals between the MSCA and the SUM.

3BK 07923 1

Table 30: MBI Cable Sets

394 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.3.8.3 External CablesThe MBI external cables consist of discrete cables that are listed and describedin the following table.


AC Supply This AC power supply cable can be made on-site to the desired length. Thecable used is a single-pair, 4 mm sq. power cable.

1AC 001700012

AntennaJumper

Antenna jumpers, 1 m/ 2 m/ 3 m/ 5 m length, HCF1/ 2, 2 x 7/ 16 straight maleconnectors. They connect the BTS to the main antenna cables.

3BK 05360

CA01 CA01 is a 120 PCM cable. It provides the Abis1 and Abis2 connectionsbetween the BTS A9100 Interconnection Panel MSCA and the customer’s 2Mbit/s PCM distribution board.

3BK 07594

This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length. Thecable used is L907, an 8-pair, shielded, 2 Mbit/s, 120 PCM cable.

1AC 013280004

CA02 CA02 is a 75 PCM cable. It provides the Abis1 and Abis2 connectionsbetween the BTS A9100 Interconnection Panel MSCA and the customer’s 2Mbit/s PCM distribution board.

3BK 07595

This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length. Thecable used is Flex3, a multicoaxial, 2 Mbit/s, 75 PCM cable.

1AC 001100011


CA-CBTE CA-CBTE is the BTS Terminal cable. It connects the BTS Terminal to theBTS Terminal connector on the SUM.

3BK 07951

CA-GC35 CA-GC35 is the cabinet ground cable. It connects to the M8 ground bolt onthe cabinet, and to the customer’s ground point.

3BK 08031

This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length. Thecable used is a 35 mm sq. yellow/green power cable.

1AC 017230003

CA-PC2W16

CA PC2W16 is a -48/ 0 VDC cabinet power cable. It connects the DCconnectors on the DCBR3/DCBR5 and the customer’s DC power source.

3BK 08029

This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length. Thecables used are a 16 mm sq. blue power cable and a 16 mm sq. blackpower cable.

1AC 001470001 (Blue)

1AC 001470002 (Black)

CA-PC35BK CA PC35BK is a 0 VDC cabinet power cable. It connects the 0 VDC connectoron the DCBR3/DCBR5 and the customer’s 0 VDC power source.

3BK 08030

This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length. Thecable used is a 35 mm sq. black power cable.

1AC 017230001

CA-PC35BL

CA PC35BL is a -48 VDC cabinet power cable. It connects the -48 VDCconnector on the DCBR3/DCBR5 and the customer’s -48 VDC power source.

3BK 08032

This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length. Thecable used is a 35 mm sq. blue power cable.

1AC 017230002

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 395 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets


ExternalAlarms

This cable can be made on-site to the desired length. The cable used is L907,an 8-pair, shielded, 2 Mbit/s, 120 PCM cable.

1AC 013280001

SCG2/3 SCG2/3 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a G2 BTS to the BTSA9100.

3BK 08101

SCG3 SCG3 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a BTS A9100 to anotherBTS A9100.

3BK 07950

SCM1/3 SCM1/3 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a G1 BTS Mark 1 tothe BTS A9100.

3BK 08102

SCM2/3 SCM2/3 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a G1 BTS Mark 2 tothe BTS A9100.

3BK 08103

Table 31: MBI External Cables

396 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.3.9 MBI Data and Control Cabling

The following figures show the logical interconnections provided by data andcontrol cables.

STASR 2 Backplane

STASR 1 Backplane

BTSRI

BTSRI3

CA01/02

XIBM/MSCA

CS05

SUM


CA−ADCO

DC


CA−CBTE

STASR 3 Backplane

TFBP

Figure 213: MBI3 Data and Control Cabling

TFBP

STASR 2 Backplane

STASR 1 Backplane

BTSRI

XIBM/MSCA

BTSRI5

CS05

SUMA

STASR 3 Backplane

STASR 4 Backplane

STASR 5 Backplane

CA01/02


CA−ADCO


CA−CBTE

DC

Figure 214: MBI5 Data and Control Cabling

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 397 / 910

3 Indoor Cabinets

398 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4 Outdoor Cabinets

This chapter describes the outdoor cabinets used in BTS A9100 configurations.

The sections are supported with diagrams and illustrations if necessary.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 399 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.1 Outdoor Cabinets General InformationThere are four classes of outdoor cabinets available to house the BTS A9100equipment:

COME/CODE - three-door outdoor cabinet

COMI/CODI/CPT2/MBO2/MBO2E/MBO2EDC - two-door outdoor cabinet

COEP/MBOE/MBOEDC/MBOEEDC - one-door outdoor extension cabinet

MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO1E/MBO1EDC - one-door outdoor cabinet

CBO - one-door outdoor cabinet.

The COEP is designed to allow the extension in the field of a COMI to aCOME and a CODI to a CODE. The MBOE/MBOEE is designed to extend anMBO1/MBO1E to an MBO2/MBO2E. The MBOEDC/MBOEEDC is designed toextend an MBO1DC/MBO2EDC to an MBO2DC/MBO2EDC.

All outdoor cabinets support both omnidirectional and sectorized configurations.The following figures show the possible positions of the main modules. Thepositions of the modules in the subracks are configuration dependent; for moreinformation, refer to Configurations - Rack Layouts (Section 2).

COME/COMI/CODE/CODI/CPT2 cabinets have two or three compartments:

Side compartment

BTS compartment 1

BTS compartment 2.

MBO1/MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2E cabinets have one or two compartments:

MBO1/MBO1E

MBOE/MBOEE.

MBO1DC/MBO1EDC/MBO2DC/MBO2EDC cabinets have one or twocompartments:

MBO1DC/MBO1EDC

MBOEDC/MBOEEDC.

The MBO1T and CBO cabinets have one compartment.

400 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.1.1 COME/COMI/COEP with Modules

Front View

Top View

Door Alarms Override Key Switch

Door Alarm Switch (installation on upper or lower position)

Flood Detector (installation on left or right position)

Document Holder

Smoke Detector

Equipment Labels

Service Light and AC Power Socket (not necessarily equipped)

Side Compartment BTS Compartment 1 BTS Compartment 2

SRACDC or ACSR

BTSRIOUT


COME

COMI COEP

STASR 5

STASR 4

STASR 3

STASR 2

Battery (2 BU41s or BU100)

STASR 1

Electricity Meter Option

ACSBOption

DCDP

HEAT2

HEX2

HEAT2 HEAT2 HEAT2 HEAT2

HEX2 HEX2

Service Light and AC Power Socket

Not necessarily equipped

Figure 215: COME/COMI/COEP Module Positions

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 401 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.1.2 CODE/CODI/COEP with Modules

HEX2

Front View

Top View


Door Alarm Switch

Flood Detector

Smoke Detector

Equipment Labels


Side Compartment BTS Compartment 1 BTS Compartment 2

STASR 4

BTSRIOUT


Document Holder

CODE

CODI COEP

ACSU

STASR 7

Options or 2nd Battery

STASR 3

STASR 2

Battery STASR 1

STASR 5

STASR 6

HEAT2

LPFU

HEAT2 HEAT2

HEX2HEX2

(Bus−bar)

Figure 216: CODE/CODI/COEP Module Positions

402 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.1.3 CPT2 with Modules

HEX2

Front View

Top View


Door Alarm Switch

Flood Detector

Smoke Detector

Equipment Labels


Side Compartment BTS Compartment 1

STASR 4

OUTC

Document Holder

ACSU

STASR 3

STASR 2

Battery

STASR 5

STASR 6

HEAT2

LPFU

HEAT2

HEX2

(Bus−bar)

Figure 217: CPT2 Module Positions

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 403 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.1.4 MBO1 with Modules

Front View

Top View


Flood Detector

Service Light

AC Switch Unit(ACMU)

LPFM

Document Holder

Batteries

Door AlarmSwitch

OUTC

Smoke Detektor

Options Area(e.g. Microwaves)

Batteries

Battery Cover

STASR 3

STASR 2

STASR 1

STASR 7

ADAM4

HEX Breaker

HEAT2

HEX4

Figure 218: MBO1 Module Positions

404 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.1.5 MBO1DC with Modules

Front View

Top View


Flood Detector

Service Light

DC Connection Unit(DCMU)

Door AlarmSwitch

OUTC

Smoke Detektor


STASR 3

STASR 2

STASR 1

HEX Breaker

HEATDC

HEX4

Figure 219: MBO1DC Module Positions

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 405 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.1.6 MBO1E with Modules

Front View

Top View


Flood Detector

Service Light

Document Holder

Batteries

Door AlarmSwitch

OUTC

Smoke Detektor


Battery Cover

STASR 3

STASR 2

STASR 1

HEX Breaker

HEAT2

HEX9

ACDUE

PM 18

Figure 220: MBO1E Module Positions

406 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.1.7 MBO1EDC with Modules

Front View

Top View


Flood Detector

Service Light

Document Holder

Door AlarmSwitch

OUTC

Smoke Detektor

Options Area(e.g. Microwaves) STASR 3

STASR 2

STASR 1

HEX Breaker

HEATDC

HEX9

DCDUE


Figure 221: MBO1EDC Module Positions

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 407 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.1.8 MBO1T with Modules

Front View

Top View

AC Switch Unit Tropical(ACMUT)

LPFMT

Document Holder

Batteries

Door AlarmSwitch

OUTC


Batteries

Battery Cover

STASR 3

STASR 2

STASR 1

STASR 7

ADAM 4

HEX Breaker

HEX4

Figure 222: MBO1T Module Positions

408 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.1.9 MBO2 with Modules

Front View

Top View


Flood Detector

Service Light

AC Switch Unit(ACMU)

LPFM

Document Holder

Batteries

Door AlarmSwitch

OUTC

MBO1 MBOE

Smoke Detektor

Batteries

Battery Cover

MBO2

STASR 3

STASR 2

STASR 1

STASR 6

STASR 5

STASR 4

STASR 0STASR 7

ADAM4

HEX Breaker

HEAT2

HEX4HEX3

HEAT2


Figure 223: MBO2 Module Positions

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 409 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.1.10 MBO2E with Modules

Front View

Top View


Flood Detector

Service Light

Document Holder

Batteries

Door AlarmSwitch

OUTC

MBO1E MBOEE

Smoke Detektor

Batteries

Battery Cover

MBO2E

STASR 3

STASR 2

STASR 1

STASR 6

STASR 5

STASR 4

HEX Breaker

HEAT2

HEX9HEX8

HEAT2


ACDUE

PM 18

Figure 224: MBO2E Module Positions

410 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.1.11 MBO2DC with Modules

Front View

Top View


Flood Detector

Service Light

DC Connection Unit(DCMU)

Door AlarmSwitch

OUTC

MBO1DC MBOEDC

Smoke Detektor

MBO2DC

STASR 3

STASR 2

STASR 1

STASR 6

STASR 5

STASR 4

HEX Breaker

HEATDC

HEX4HEX3

HEAT2


Figure 225: MBO2DC Module Positions

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 411 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.1.12 MBO2EDC with Modules

Front View

Top View


Flood Detector

Service Light

Document Holder

Door AlarmSwitch

OUTC

MBO1EDC MBOEEDC

Smoke Detektor

MBO2EDC

STASR 3

STASR 2

STASR 1

STASR 6

STASR 5

STASR 4

HEX Breaker

HEATDC

HEX9HEX8

HEATDC


DCDUE


Figure 226: MBO2EDC Module Positions

412 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.1.13 COBO with Modules

Front View

Door Switch

DCUC

ACUC

Cables Entry

LPFC

OUTC

CBO

STASR 2

STASR 1

ADAM 2

Top View

HEAT3

HEX5


External Batteries Breaker

Figure 227: CBO Module Positions

4.1.14 Side Compartment

The side compartment is designed to house AC/DC power equipment andprovide an external cables connection point. All external cables, except RFcables, enter the side compartment. The layout of the Side Compartmentdiffers for COME/COMI and CODE/CODI/CPT2 versions.

4.1.14.1 COME/COMIAt the top of the compartment is room for an optional electricity meter. AnACSB provides AC distribution and circuit breakers for the incoming AC mainssupply. The ACSB also provides lightning protection for the AC supply lines.

The SRACDC or ACSR houses the modules that convert the AC mains supplyinto a 0/-48 VDC supply.

Between the side compartment and BTS compartment 1 is the InterconnectionPanel. This provides connectors for DC supplies, and for the external Abis,alarm and clock cables.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 413 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.1.14.2 CODE/CODIAC mains power is applied to the LPFU located at the bottom of the sidecompartment. The LPFU provides lightning protection for the AC supply linesand HF filtering for the incoming AC supply. At the top of the side compartmentis the ACSU which provides AC distribution. The ACSU contains AC circuitbreakers and a thermostat with the associated power relays.

Directly underneath the ACSU a STASR contains the ADAM and three PM12s.There is also provision for optional microwave equipment.

Above the batteries on the floor, an additional BU41 or BU100 can be fitted.

Between the side compartment and BTS compartment 1 is the InterconnectionPanel. This provides connectors for DC supplies, and for the external Abis,alarm and clock cables.

4.1.14.3 CPT2AC mains power is applied to the LPFU located at the bottom of the sidecompartment. The LPFU provides lightning protection for the AC supply linesand HF filtering for the incoming AC supply. At the top of the side compartmentis the ACSU which provides AC distribution. The ACSU contains AC circuitbreakers and a thermostat with the associated power relays.

Directly underneath the ACSU a STASR contains the ADAM and three PM12s.

Directly above the batteries a STASR contains up to four TREs and threeFANUs.

At the right side of the compartment is the Outdoor Control Board (OUTC).It contains the XIOB, BTSRI, RIBAT and COAR functions and providesconnectors for DC supplies, temperature sensor, and for the external Abis,alarm and clock cables.

4.1.14.4 Common FeaturesOther equipment items include:

BOSU for power distribution. In the CODE, circuit breakers are provided

in the BOSU for isolating the DC supply from the XIOB, HEX2, STASR7and the Power Distribution Units

HEAT2 on the floor in the COME and on the lower left side panel in the

CODE/CPT2

Two optional BU41s or one BU100 on the floor in the COME. The CODE

has one BU41 or one BU100 on the floor; and an additional BU41 or BU100can be fitted above (as an option)

Document holder on the side panel

Equipment labels on the side panel

HEX2 on the inside of the door

Door alarm switch on the side frame

Door alarm override key switch on the side frame (COME/COMI) or on

the bus-bar (CODE/CODI/CPT2)

Service light, AC power socket at the top.

414 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.1.15 BTS Compartment 1

The equipment contained in compartment 1 in the COME/COMI andCODE/CODI/CPT2 cabinets is described below.

COME/COMI A COME/COMI BTS compartment 1 holds twoSTASRs. The lower subrack (STASR1) contains upto four TREs and three FANUs. The upper subrack(STASR2) holds the SUM and a mixture of ANX orANY modules, as required.

CODE/CODI/CPT2 A CODE/CODI/CPT2 BTS Compartment 1 holdsthree STASRs. The top and bottom subrackscontain up to four TREs and three FANUs each.The middle subrack holds the SUM and a mixtureof ANC and ANY modules as required.

In addition, all BTS compartment 1s have the following common equipment:

Up to two HEAT2s on the floor for COME/COMI, one HEAT2 forCODE/CODI/CPT2



Flood detector on the floor

RF lightning protectors in the floor

Smoke detector on the ceiling

Service light and an AC power socket at the top.

The method used for DC supply isolation depends on the compartment type:

For the COME/COMI, there are two possibilities:

The DCDP above the upper subrack. Circuit breakers are provided for

isolating the DC supply from the STASRs, HEX2s, XIOB and optionalmicrowave link equipment. The optional equipment is housed above

the DCDP

Circuit breakers are provided in the BOBU for isolating the DC supply

from the STASRs, HEX2s, XIOB and optional microwave link equipment.The optional equipment is housed above the upper subrack (STASR2).

In the CODE/CODI/CPT2, circuit breakers are provided in the BOBU for

isolating the DC supply from the STASRs and HEXxs.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 415 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.1.16 BTS Compartment 2

BTS compartment 2 holds three STASRs. The upper and lower subracks eachcontain up to four TREs and three FANUs. The middle subrack contains amixture of ANX, ANY or ANC modules, as required.

Other equipment includes:

For COME, up to two HEAT2s on the floor; one HEAT2 for CODE



RF lightning protectors in the floor

Service light and an AC power socket at the top (not necessarily equipped).

416 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.1.17 MBO1

MBO1 is designed to house AC/DC power equipment. All external cablesenter the MBO1 at roof top.

AC mains power is applied to the LPFM located at the left upper side of theMBO1 compartment. The LPFM provides lightning protection for the AC supplylines and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply. At the left upper back sideof the compartment is the ACMU which provides AC distribution. The ACMUcontains AC circuit breakers and a thermostat with the associated power relays.

Underneath the ACMU optional modules (e.g., microwaves) are installed.

The batteries (BU101) are located directly underneath these optional modules.There is a specific battery box which contains two batteries in an upper and twobatteries in a lower block. All batteries are connected in series.

To the right of the batteries and the optional modules, a rack frame is installedwhich contains four STASRs. The top STASR (STASR7) contains ADAM4 andtwo, three or four PM12s.

STASR1 (bottom) contains up to four TREs and three FANUs. STASR2 abovecontains a mixture of SUMA, ANY and ANC modules as required. STASR3above contains up to four TREs or a mixture of TREs and an ANC and threeFANUs each.



BOMU for power and alarm distribution in MBO1/MBOE. Circuit breakers

are provided in the BOMU for isolating the DC supply from the XIOB,

HEX3/HEX4, STASRs and the Power Distribution Units


HEAT2 at the back of the front door underneath HEX4

Document holder in the cover of the battery box



Door alarm override key switch (part of BOMU)

Service light, AC power socket, and smoke detector at the top

Flood detector on the floor.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 417 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.1.18 MBO1DC

MBO1DC is designed to house DC power equipment. All external cables enterthe MBO1DC at roof top.

DC mains power is applied to the DCMU located at the left upper side ofthe MBO1DC compartment. The DCMU provides DC distribution inside thecabinets. It contains DC circuit breakers and a thermostat with the associatedpower relays.

Underneath the DCMU optional modules (e.g., microwaves) are installed.

Directly underneath these optional modules is an empty area.

To the right of the empty area and the optional modules, a rack frame isinstalled which contains three STASRs.


At the right side of the compartment is the Outdoor Control Board (OUTC).It contains the XIOB, BTSRI and COAR functions and provides connectorsfor DC supplies, temperature sensor plug SENSP, and for the external Abis,alarm and clock cables.


BOMU for power and alarm distribution in MBO1DC/MBOEDC. Circuit

breakers are provided in the BOMU for isolating the DC supply from theXIOB, HEX3/HEX4, STASRs and the Power Distribution Units


HEATDC at the back of the front door underneath HEX4



Door alarm override key switch (part of BOMU)

Service light DC and smoke detector at the top


4.1.19 MBO1T

MBO1T is designed to house AC/DC power equipment. All external cablesenter the MBO1T at roof top.

AC mains power is applied to the LPFMT located at the left upper side of theMBO1T compartment. The LPFMT provides lightning protection for the ACsupply line and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply. At the left upper backside of the compartment is the ACMUT which provides AC distribution. TheACMUT contains an AC circuit breaker.

Underneath the ACMUT optional modules (e.g., microwaves) are installed.

The batteries (BU101) are located directly underneath these optional modules.There is a specific battery box which contains two batteries in an upper and twobatteries in a lower block. All batteries are connected in series.

418 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

To the right of the batteries and the optional modules, a rack frame is installedwhich contains four STASRs. The top STASR (STASR7) contains ADAM4and two or three PM12s.




BOMUT for power and alarm distribution in MBO1T. Circuit breakers are

provided in the BOMUT for isolating the DC supply from the XIOB, HEX4,STASRs and one Power Distribution Units




Door alarm switch on the right bottom side.

4.1.20 MBO1E

MBOE1 is designed to house AC/DC power equipment. All external cablesenter the MBO1E at bottom plate.

AC mains power is applied to the ACDUE located at the left lower side ofthe MBO1E compartment. The ACDUE provides lightning protection for theAC supply lines and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply. The ACDUEprovides also AC distribution, AC circuit breakers and a thermostat with theassociated power relays.

Behind the ACDUE optional modules (e.g., microwaves) or batteries areinstalled.

There is a specific battery box which contains two batteries in an upper andtwo batteries in a lower block. All batteries are connected in series. A secongbattery branch can be installed on top of the first one.

To the right of the batteries and the optional modules, a rack frame is installedwhich contains three STASRs and the power supply subrack.




3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 419 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

BOMUE for power and alarm distribution in MBO1E/MBOEE. Circuitbreakers are provided in the BOMUE for isolating the DC supply from the

XIOB, HEX8/HEX9 or DAC8/DAC9, STASRs and the Power Distribution Unit

HEX9/DAC9 on the inside of the door

HEAT2 on the bottom plate of MBO1E rack




Door alarm override key switch (part of BOMUE)

Service light, AC power socket, and smoke detector at the top


4.1.21 MBO1EDC

MBO1EDC is designed to house DC power equipment. All external cablesenter the MBO1EDC at bottom of the rack.

DC mains power is applied to the DCDUE located at the left lower side of theMBO1EDC compartment. The DCDUE provides DC distribution inside thecabinets. It contains DC circuit breakers and a thermostat with the associatedpower relays.

Behind DCDUE optional modules (e.g., microwaves) can be installed.

To the right of the empty area and the optional modules, a rack frame isinstalled which contains three STASRs.


At the right side of the compartment is the Outdoor Control Board (OUTC).It contains the XIOB, BTSRI and COAR functions and provides connectorsfor DC supplies, temperature sensor plug SENSP, and for the external Abis,alarm and clock cables.


BOMUE for power and alarm distribution in MBO1EDC/MBOEEDC. Circuitbreakers are provided in the BOMUE for isolating the DC supply from the

XIOB, HEX8/HEX9, STASRs and the Power Distribution Unit


HEATDC on the bottom plate of MBO1EDC rack



Door alarm override key switch (part of BOMUE)

Service light DC and smoke detector at the top


420 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.1.22 MBOE

An MBOE holds four STASRs. The top subrack (STASR0) can be used foroptional 19” units. The bottom subrack (STASR4) contains up to four TREsand three FANUs each. STASR5 above contains a mixture of ANC and ANYmodules as required. STASR6 above contains up to four TREs or a mixture ofTREs and an ANC and three FANUs each.



HEAT2 at the bottom on the right side frame


RF lightning protectors in the roof

Service light and an AC power socket at the top.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 421 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.1.23 MBOEDC

An MBOE holds three STASRs. STASR0 use was cancelled. In the freespace above STASR6, optional 19“ equipment can be fitted. The bottomsubrack (STASR4) contains up to four TREs and three FANUs each. STASR5above contains a mixture of ANC and ANY modules as required. STASR6above contains up to four TREs or a mixture of TREs and an ANC and threeFANUs each.



HEATDC at the bottom on the right side frame


RF lightning protectors in the roof

Service light at the top.

4.1.24 MBOEE

An MBOEE holds three STASRs and optional equipment. The bottom subrack(STASR4) contains up to four TREs and three FANUs each. STASR5 abovecontains a mixture of ANC and ANY modules as required. STASR6 abovecontains up to four TREs or a mixture of TREs and an ANC and three FANUseach.


HEX8/DAC8 on the inside of the door

HEAT2 on the bottom plate on MBOEE


RF lightning protectors in the bottom plate.

4.1.25 MBOEEDC

An MBOEE holds three STASRs and optional equipment. The bottom subrack(STASR4) contains up to four TREs and three FANUs each. STASR5 abovecontains a mixture of ANC and ANY modules as required. STASR6 abovecontains up to four TREs or a mixture of TREs and an ANC and three FANUseach.



HEATDC at the bottom on the right side frame


RF lightning protectors in the bottom plate

Service light at the top.

422 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.1.26 CBO

4.1.26.1 CBO AC VariantCBO is designed to house two TREs with up to two ANCs and an optionalBATS module. Above the STASRs, up to three 19” units can be installed.All external cables enter the CBO at the right side of the cabinet where thecables entry is located.

AC mains power is applied to the LPFC located above the cable entry of theCBO cabinet. The LPFC provides lightning protection for the AC supply linesand HF filtering for the incoming AC supply. Above the LPFC is the ACUCwhich provides AC distribution. The ACUC contains AC circuit breakers, athermostat and an AC power socket.

The DCUC, which provides DC distribution, is located above the ACUC.

At the top of the rack space is foreseen for options installation. A maximumof three MW units can be installed.

The bottom STASR (STASR1) contains the ADAM2, two PM12s, SUMA and upto two TREs and three FANUs. STASR2 above contains the BATS and up totwo ANC modules.

At the right side of the compartment is the Outdoor Control Board (OUTC). Itcontains the XIOB, BTSRI, RIBAT and COAR functions, temperature sensor,and for the external Abis, alarm and clock cables.



HEAT3 under the STASR1



Degasing filtered holes are foreseen at the top and the bottom of the cabinet

Two holes are foreseen at the bottom of the door for water outlet from HEX5.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 423 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.1.26.2 CBO DC VariantCBO is designed to house four TREs with up to three ANBs. When three ANBsare used only three TREs can be equipped. Above the STASRs, up to three19” units can be installed. All external cables enter the CBO at the right sideof the cabinet where the cables entry is located.

DC mains power is applied to the DC filter located at the cable entry of theCBO cabinet.

The DCUC, which provides DC distribution, is located above the cables entry.

At the top of the rack space is foreseen for options installation. A maximumof three MW units can be installed.

The bottom STASR (STASR1) contains the SUMA and up to three TREs, or upto four TREs and three FANUs. STASR2 above contains the SUMA and up totwo ANBs or up to three ANB modules.

At the right side of the compartment is the Outdoor Control Board (OUTC). Itcontains the XIOB, BTSRI, RIBAT and COAR functions, temperature sensor,and for the external Abis, alarm and clock cables.



HEAT4 under the STASR1



Two holes are foreseen at the bottom of the door for water outlet from HEX5.

424 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.2 Outdoor Cabinet Access and FeaturesThe following figures show the BTS A9100 outdoor cabinets without subracks.

4.2.1 COME/COMI/CODI/CODE Cabinet Access

Side Compartment

BTS Compartment 1

BTS Compartment 2

Cable Entry Plate

Removable Panel

Side Panel

Subrack Mounting Rail

Plinth

Cabinet Joining Brackets

Bolt and Washer

Hinged Outer Roof

Lifting Ring


Inner Roof (flat on CODE/CODI)

Antenna Connectors

COME/COMI: Perforated Panel, carries COAR CODE/CODI: Part of Panel, carries COAR and RIBATs

Alternative Door Style

Cabinets joined by four M8 Bolts. Guiding Channel used for tool access from side of cabinet

Guiding Channel

RIBAT (CODE/CODI only)

Figure 228: BTS A9100 Outdoor Cabinet Construction

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 425 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.2.2 CPT2 Cabinet Access

Outdoor Control Board (OUTC)Side panel

Hinged Outer Roof

Figure 229: BTS A9100 Outdoor Cabinet Construction CPT2

426 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.2.3 MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO1E Cabinet Access

Figure 230: Multistandard BTS Outdoor Cabinet ConstructionMBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T

Figure 231: Multistandard BTS Evolution Outdoor Cabinet Construction MBO1E

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 427 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.2.4 MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E Cabinet Access

Figure 232: Multistandard BTS Outdoor Cabinet Construction MBO2/MBO2DC

428 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

Figure 233: Multistandard BTS Evolution Outdoor Cabinet Construction MBO2E

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 429 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.2.5 CBO Cabinet Access

Figure 234: Compact BTS Outdoor Construction CBO

4.2.6 Outdoor Cabinet Features

The main design features of the outdoor cabinets are listed below:

Cabinet extensibility on site

Cabinet dismountable on site for easier manual transportation

Front access to BTS equipment only

Side walls removable - thus extended cabinet without partition wall inside

Easy removable roof, socle panels (except for MBO1/MBO2/CBO) and

heat exchanger

Double-skinned wall (except for CBO) and roof

Cooling by air/air heat exchanger (generic)

Environmental- and EMC-protected.

430 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.2.6.1 ConstructionEach BTS A9100 compartment consists of a box-shaped frame bolted to aplinth. Other components are added to this basic construction, asrequired. Two or three compartments are bolted together. Themethod of joining the cabinets is different for each variant. OneCOME/COMI variant uses joining brackets fixed to the sides andbottom of the cabinet frame. Another COME/COMI variant andCODE/CODI/CPT2/MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2Euse four M8 bolts in the corners of the cabinet with guiding channels at the rearof the cabinet to help locate the fixing tool and bolts.

The COME/COMI side compartment and BTS Compartment 1 are separatedby perforated panels which prevents RF interference from entering the sidecompartment. Similar panels are used in CODE/CODI/CPT2/MBO1/MBO2 butonly as a structural element and support for COAR and RIBATs (CODE/CODI)or OUTC (CPT2/MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E). Thespace between BTS Compartments 1 and 2 is open.

Each compartment has a separate rear panel. In the COME/CODE, theside compartment and BTS Compartment 2 each have a side panel. In theCOMI/CODI/CPT2, the side compartment and BTS Compartment 1 each havea side panel. In the MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T, the compartment has two sidepanels. In the MBO2/MBO2DC, MBO1/MBO1DC and MBOE/MBOEDC havea side panel each.

4.2.6.2 RoofThe outer roof of each compartment can be raised at the front andunhinged at the rear for removal. This reveals an inner roof (flat onCODE/CODI/CPT2/MBOx/MBOxDC/MBOxE) and four lifting rings. Each outerroof must be removed, in turn, from right to left.

On MBOx/MBOxDC roofs, a label warns to lift the top cover with care inwindy conditions.

4.2.6.3 DoorAll the BTS A9100 cabinets can be installed in back-to-back or back-to-wallconfigurations. Access to each compartment is via a door at the front. Thedoor provides both an environmental and EMC seal when closed. Mountedon the inside of the door is a HEXx. Above (COME/COMI/CBO) or under(CODE/CODI/CPT2/MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E) theHEXx is a latch mechanism for keeping the door open during maintenance.

Each door contains a door lock opened by a key. Each door presses anelectronic switch. All door switches are serially connected. In the sidecompartment or MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1E compartment, there is anothermounted electronic switch, the so-called door alarm override switch, which usesthe same key as the side compartment or MBO/MBODC compartment doorlock. It ensures that non-authorized opening of the doors leads to an alarm.

Not less than 0.8 m free space must be left in front of the cabinet doors, and0.1 or 0.2 m at the side and back.

4.2.6.4 SubracksThe subracks are secured to two vertical mounting rails. The rails arepositioned on the left and right sides of each compartment.

Refer to Standard Telecommunications Subrack (Section 6) and AC PowerSubracks (Section 7) for detailed information on STASR, SRACDC, andACSR, respectively.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 431 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.2.6.5 External Cable EntryAll external cables, including antenna cables, enter the cabinet via the cableentry plate or from below the plinth. The plate can be fitted to the front or leftside of the side compartment plinth. The outward-facing sides of the plinthsare covered by removable panels.

For the MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO2/MBO2DC, the side panel has avariable notch on the bottom or top so that all external cables can be passedthrough. If the external cables come directly from the BTS socket, the notch isnot needed and can be closed. There is a space between the side panel andinternal rack construction to take in the cables. The cables are fixed at the sideof the internal rack and led to the top where they enter the cabinet.

For the CBO, the cables entry has an adjustable cover plate that must beremoved so that the cables can be passed through it.

4.2.6.6 Internal InterconnectionsInternal power and signal connections between the side compartmentand BTS compartment 1 are made via the interconnection panel or theoutdoor control board (CPT2). Internal signal connections between MBO1and MBOE are made via the outdoor control board. The interconnectionpanel also contains a PCB. Refer to Outdoor Cabinet Interconnection PanelCOMI/COME/CODI/CODE (Section 4.3) for detailed information on theinterconnection panel. The outdoor control board performs the functions of fourboards: the COAR, XIOB, BTSRI, and RIBAT. Refer to Outdoor Cabinet SignalInterfaces (Section 4.4) for detailed information.

BTS compartments 1 and 2 have RF connectors fitted to the floor. These arefor antenna cabling.

4.2.6.7 STASR Ribbon CableIn the COME/CODE only, a ribbon cable is used in the cabinet to link theSTASRs together. The ribbon cable is in two parts, joined by the BTSRIOUTboard between them. One cable part connects to the subracks in BTScompartment 1, and the other to the subracks in BTS compartment 2. Referto Remote Inventory (Section 8.5) for information on the Remote Inventoryfunction.

4.2.6.8 Heating and CoolingHeating is provided by HEAT2/HEAT3/HEATDC if the internal air temperature isbelow 10� C. Above this temperature, module cooling is provided by FANUs.If the temperature increases above 20� C, the HEXxs switch on. As thetemperature rises further, the HEXx fan speed increases. HEXxs transfer heatfrom the cabinet interior to the outside air environment.

Refer to HEX2 (Section 11.2), HEX3/HEX4 (Section 11.3), HEX5 (Section11.4), HEX8/HEX9 (Section 11.5), HEAT2 (Section 11.7), HEAT3 (Section 11.8)and HEATDC (Section 11.10) for detailed information.

4.2.6.9 Cabinet InstallationAll the BTS A9100 cabinets can be installed in back-to-back or back-to-wallconfigurations. Access to the subracks and the interconnection panel is viaa door at the front of the cabinet.

Not less than 0.8 m free space must be left in front of the cabinet doors.

4.2.6.10 Additional Outdoor Cabinet FeaturesThe outdoor cabinets include the following additional features.

432 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.2.6.11 Adjustable FeetAdjustable feet are provided in each corner of the compartment(MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO2/MBO2DC) or compartment plinth for levelling thecabinet.

4.2.6.12 Wind LoadThe cabinet is designed to withstand a wind load of 180 km/h.

4.2.6.13 Smoke DetectorAn optical smoke detector is fitted to the inner roof plate of theMBO1, on the right side wall of MBO1E or BTS compartment 1(COME/COMI/CODE/CODI/CPT2). In case of smoke inside the BTS, analarm is raised.

4.2.6.14 Flood DetectorA flood detector is fitted to the bottom plate of the MBO1 or BTS compartment1 (COME/COMI/CODE/CODI/CPT2). If water enters the BTS above the bottomplate, an alarm is raised.

4.2.6.15 Service Light/AC Power SocketIn each compartment a service light with an integral 230 VAC power socket isfitted (not necessarily equipped in BTS compartment 2). If needed, the servicelight can be switched on by the service staff.

4.2.6.16 Document HolderAt the left side wall inside of the side compartment and MBO1E a documentbox is mounted to store A4 documents. In MBO1 the document holder isfitted on the cover of the battery box.

4.2.6.17 ExtensibilityThe BTS cabinet COMI can be extended on site to COME by adding anadditional BTS cabinet COEP at the right hand side. The same applies to extenda CODI to a CODE by adding a COEP. An MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1E/MBO1EDCcabinet can be extended on site to MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E/MBO2EDCby adding an MBOE/MBOEDC/MBOEE/MBOEEDC. MBO1T cabinet is notextendible.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 433 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.3 Outdoor Cabinet Interconnection PanelCOMI/COME/CODI/CODE

All the power and signal connections between the side compartmentand BTS compartment 1 are made via the interconnection panel forCOME/COMI/CODE/CODI (via OUTC for CPT2). The following figure showsthe details when viewed from the side compartment.

AC Connectors

COAR

Light

0 V (Red)−48 V (Blue)

Ground

(Viewed from Side Compartment)

DC Connectors

Heater

0 V (Black)−48 V (Blue)

(Viewed from Side Compartment)

COME/COMI CODE/CODI

RIBAT1

RIBAT2

COAR

Figure 235: BTS A9100 Outdoor, Interconnection Panel

The interconnection panel carries the components listed in the following table.

ComponentsCOME/COMI

CODE/CODI

Two filter connectors to provide 230 VAC power for HEAT2, service light and ACpower socket in BTS compartment 1.

X -

0/ -48 V power distribution Two filters with M6 bolt connectors forDC power distribution by the DCDP or

One filter with one M6 bolt connector(-48 VDC) and one M6 bolt (0 VDC) forDC power distribution by the BOBU.

X -

One Feed through terminal HDFKV25(-48 VDC) and one M6 bolt (0 VDC) forDC power distribution.

- X

M8 ground bolt. X -

Connectors for RIBAT1 and RIBAT2. - X

Status and control signals via the COAR. X X

Table 32: BTS A9100 Outdoor, Interconnection Panel Components

434 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.3.1 Interconnection Panel - COME/COMI COAR Front View

The following figure shows the COME/COMI COAR, viewed from the sidecompartment.

Abis Interface

Group

External Input/

Output Interface

Group

External Clock

Interface Group

Abis 4

Abis 3

Abis 2

Abis 1

Abis Relays

XBCB

XGPS

XCLK1 In

XCLK2 In/Out

XCLK1 Out

Ext−Alarms

AlarmsSide Comp

X303

Krone Strip

XRT

XGND

XI17−24

HEX Power

Equipment Labels

Surge Protectors

Figure 236: COME/COMI COAR Front View

The shaded areas in the above figure identify separate external interfacegroups. All these interfaces are overvoltage protected.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 435 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.3.2 Interconnection Panel - CODE/CODI COAR Front View

The following figure shows the front view of the CODE/CODI COAR.

Abis Interface

Group

External Input/

Output Interface

Group

External Clock

Interface Group Abis 4

Abis 3

Abis 2

Abis 1

Abis Relays

XBCB

XGPS

XCLK1 In

XCLK2 In/Out

XCLK1 Out

Ext−Alarms Alarms Side Comp

X303

Krone Strip

XRT

XGND

XI17−24

EBCB

Equipment Labels

Surge Protectors

Figure 237: CODE/CODI COAR Front View

436 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.3.3 Interconnection Panel - BTS A9100 Outdoor Rear View

The following figure shows the rear view of the COME/COMI and CODE/CODICOAR.

SUM

ALA

RM

BT

S2

HEX Power

COME/COMI only

ALA

RM

BTS

1

AB

IS1

AB

IS2

AB

IS 1

+2

AB

IS 3

+4

Figure 238: BTS A9100 Outdoor COAR Rear View

Located behind the COAR (BTS compartment 1 side) is the XIOB. The XIOB isconnected to the COAR and contains a 24 V DC/DC converter and interfacecircuitry for external alarms.

The COAR provides interfaces for:

XIO

External clock

Abis

Miscellaneous connections.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 437 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.4 Outdoor Cabinet Signal InterfacesThe outdoor cabinet has XIO, external clock and Abis signal interfaces. It alsohas a miscellaneous connections interface. The connectors and functions foreach of these interfaces are described below.

4.4.1 XIO

The XIO connectors allow various alarm devices to be connected to the BTSA9100. These include smoke and flood detectors, as well as electro-mechanicalswitches. Crimped or clamp strip contacts can be used on the XIO connectors.The positions of the XIO connectors are shown in Figures 236, 237 and 239.

The XIO interface connectors are described in the following table.

External AlarmInputs

The Ext-Alarms connector provides an interface forthree external alarms. These are alarms that areexternal to the cabinet (for example, an antennalamp failure alarm) and the inputs are protected bysurge arresters. The three external alarms are partof a group of 16 alarms which includes the pre-wiredsmoke detector, door switches, etc. The 16 alarms arereported to the OMC-R via the SUM. At the OMC-R, thealarms are mapped to predefined and customer-definedASCII text. The ASCII text describes the particularalarm. Each external alarm input has two adjacent pinsassociated with it on the Ext-Alarms connector. If thesepins are open-circuit (open loop), an alarm is generated.

Additional AlarmInputs

Connector XI17-24 provides an interface for connectingeight additional non-BTS alarm inputs. Each additionalalarm is reported to the OMC-R via the SUM. Atthe OMC-R, the additional alarms are mapped tocustomer-defined ASCII text. The ASCII text describesthe particular alarm. Each additional alarm input hastwo adjacent pins associated with it on the XI17-24connector. If these pins are open circuit (open loop), analarm is generated.

External AlarmOutputs

Connector X300 provides an interface for the SUM tocontrol eight external alarm devices. This feature isfor future use. The SUM is described in Station UnitModules (Section 8).

+ 24 VDC Supply Connector X303 provides a + 24 VDC power source forexternal alarm devices that require a power supply.

+ 5 VDC Supply Connector X112 provides a + 5 VDC power source forRIBAT.

XGND The XGND connector is used when referencing theexternal alarm 24 VDC ground to the BTS A9100ground. If the connector pins are not short-circuited(open loop), the input and output alarms are isolatedfrom the BTS A9100 ground.

Table 33: BTS A9100 Outdoor Interface Connectors

438 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.4.1.1 Pre-Wired Internal AlarmsThe following table shows a list of the pre-wired internal alarms. These alarmsare not configurable.

Pre-wiredInternal Alarm

SideCompartment

BTSCompartment1

BTSCompartment2

Door alarm* X X X

Door alarmover-ride

X - -

Smoke detectoralarm

X*** X -

Float detectoralarm

X*** X -

Heat exchange.alarm*

X ** X X

Table 34: BTS A9100 Outdoor Pre-wired Internal Alarms

* These alarms are serially linked and reported as only one alarm in caseof multi-failure.

** When equipped (more than six TREs).

*** For MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO2/MBO2DC only.

4.4.1.2 Ext-Alarms ConnectorThe following table shows the pin assignment of the Ext-Alarms connector.The inputs of the Ext-alarms connector are protected by surge arrestorsand are configurable.

Pin Description

1 GND (braid earthing clamp)

2 ALM 1 (GND)

3 ALM 1 (ext. alarm no 10)

4 ALM 2 (GND)


6 ALM 3 (GND)


8 GND (braid earthing clamp)

Table 35: BTS A9100 Outdoor Ext-Alarms Connector

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 439 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.4.1.3 External Alarm InputsTo enhance the capabilities of the BTS A9100 outdoor in terms of coverage,the REK feature may be used (not for CPT2). The REK is composed of twomodules, a Masthead Amplification Box and a Power Distribution Unit, but onlyPower Distribution Unit ensures the alarm interface with the BTS. Up to sevenalarms can be reported to the BTS (taking into account that the maximumconfiguration is six TREs, and that in an outdoor BTS only eight externalalarms are available for that purpose).

The BTS A9100 outdoor can handle up to 24 external alarms but 8 inputsare not realized so not usable. The remaining 16 external alarms are usedas follows:

5 external alarms are connected to internal sensors, not configurable

3 external alarms have protected inputs on dedicated connector and areconfigurable

8 external alarms on dedicated connector, configurable.

The following table gives detailed view of the external alarm inputs.

Alarm Description

AlarmNumber XIO Input Alarm Class Alarm Connection Alarm Generation

1 1 9 Not used -

2 2 9 Not used -

3 3 9 Yes Inside

4 4 9 Yes Inside

5 5 9 Yes Inside

6 6 9 Yes Inside

7 7 9 Yes Inside

8 8 9 Not used -

9 9 9 Not used -

10 10 9 Yes Outside

11 11 9 Not used -

12 12 9 Not used -

13 13 9 Yes Outside

14 14 9 Yes Outside

15 15 9 Not used -

16 16 9 Not used -

17 17 9 Yes Inside (*)

440 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

Alarm Description

AlarmNumber XIO Input Alarm Class Alarm Connection Alarm Generation







24 24 9 Yes Inside

Table 36: BTS A9100 Outdoor External Alarm Inputs

(*) Provisions for REK: Masthead Amplification Box and Power DistributionUnit alarms (not for CPT2).

4.4.2 External Clock Interface

The external clock interface provides connectors for a variety of functions; seeFigures 236, 237 and 239. The connectors are described in Table 10.

4.4.3 Abis Interface

The Abis Interface provides components for a variety of functions; see FiguresCOME/COMI COAR Front View (236), CODE/CODI COAR Front View (237)and OUTC, Front View (239). The interface consists of the connectorsdescribed in Table BTS A9100 Abis Interface Connectors (11).

4.4.4 Miscellaneous Connections Interface

Connectors are provided for the side compartment, see the following table.

Alarms This includes the door alarm switch and the HEXx alarm.

HEX2(COME/COMIonly)

This is the 0/ -48 VDC power supply from the DCDP or BOBU(depending on COME/COMI variant).

Table 37: BTS A9100 Outdoor Miscellaneous Connections Interface

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 441 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.5 Outdoor Control BoardCPT2/MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E/CBO

The Outdoor Control Board (OUTC) performs the functions of the followingfour separate boards:

COAR

XIOB

BTSRI

RIBAT

The figure below shows the front part of the OUTC.

TEMP. SENSOR

ABIS 2ABIS 1

RIBATPort

Abis

Interface

Group

External

Input/

Output

Interface

Group

External

Input/

Output

Interface

Group

External

Clock

Interface

Group

FLAT CABLE COMPARTMENT 1

FLAT CABLE SIDE COMPARTMENT

ABIS1

ABIS2

ABIS3

ABIS4

AB

IS 1

&2

KR

ON

E C

ON

NE

CT

AB

IS 3

&4

XGPS

XBCB

XRT

XCLK 1 OUT

XCLK 1 IN

XCLK 2 IN/ OUT

ALARMSCOMPARTMENT 1

ALARMSSIDE COMPARTMENT

Remote

Inventory

Part

Abis

Interface

Group

EXT − ALARMS

SU

N C

ON

NE

CT

ION

ALA

RM

OU

TP

UT

S

ALA

RM

INP

UT

S

DC IN

EBCB (optional)

Figure 239: OUTC, Front View

442 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

All the functions of these four boards are kept except for the following:

The output voltage provided on the external output connector is 12 V instead

of 24 V. The current per output is limited to 50 mA instead of 100 mA.

No galvanic isolation between external inputs/outputs and the BTS.

The ’Power Architecture’ of the OUTC is different from that of the earlier

boards (see the following figure). Each part of the board is powered by the

power supply of the OUTC, even the BTSRI, RIBAT and BCB parts ofthe XIOB. On the earlier boards, these parts are only supplied via the

BCB_VCC.

DC

DC

LinearRegulator

LinearRegulator

ExternalPower Supply

TempSensor

NGTSL

NGTSL

SUM

ALARMINPUTS

XBCB

ALARMOutputs

Driver

NGTSL1...2...3

XIOB Part

VCC

RIBAT Part

BTSRI Part

VCC_BRI

VCC_BRI

VCC5.5

VCC125V XBCB_VCC

−48/60V

BCB_VCC

BCB_VCC_BP

BCB_VCC

VDD

Figure 240: OUTC, Power Architecture

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 443 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.5.1 Connection Area (COAR)

The Connection Area is part of the OUTC. It provides external BTS interfaceswhich are grouped in three different functional parts:

Abis

External Clock Interface

External Inputs/Outputs.

4.5.1.1 AbisThe Abis part provides the external interfaces for four separate Abis links(Abis 1 ... Abis 4). The interface consists of the connectors described in BTSA9100 Abis Interface Connectors (11).

The KRONE Strip Connector also provides the possibility to monitor the Abislinks. Therefore the overvoltage insert has to be pulled out and has to bereplaced by a special monitor insert.

The interconnection between the SUMA and the OUTC consists of the followingcables:

Abis 1, 2cable

The Abis cable is a four pair, RF shielded cable. It is a 120cable which is used if the external Abis cables have 120or 75 .

The needed impedance conversion is realized on the OUTCitself.

Abis 3, 4cable

The Abis cable is a four pair, RF shielded cable. It is a 120cable which is used if the external Abis cables have 120or 75 .

The needed impedance conversion is realized on the OUTCitself.

OUTC-SUMcable

The OUTC-SUM cable is a flat cable with 37 wires. It isequipped on the SUMA side with a Sub-D connector of37-pins/male, on the OUTC side with a Sub-D connector of37-pins/female.

Table 38: Interconnection OUTC - SUMA

4.5.1.2 External Clock InterfaceThe external clock interface provides connectors for a variety of functions.The connectors are described in Table BTS A9100 External Clock InterfaceConnectors (10).

444 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.5.1.3 External Inputs/OutputsThe external Input/Output part of the OUTC provides the interfaces for 16 BTSalarm inputs and eight alarm outputs. ’Open’ alarm inputs are interpreted bythe BTS as ’alarm on’. Therefore any unconnected input alarm has to bebridged by a short circuit on the plug-in connector.

The following table described the external inputs/outputs.

On-boardConnectors

These are two ’Mini Combicon’ connectors, one Sub-D 9and one Sub-D 15 connector (to connect five internal BTSalarms, e.g., heat exchanger, door, fire, key, water) and oneconnector with screws for special protected alarm inputs(three alarms).

One of the two ’Mini Combicon’ connectors provides eightalarm inputs; the other one provides the alarm outputs and+ 12 VDC voltage.

Plug inConnectors

The insert in these connectors have either clamp stripcontacts or crimp contacts.

The version with a clamp strip is used for customer withno common interface where no pre-equipped cable canbe used. The version with crimp contacts is the solution ifthe customer has a common interface and pre-equippedcables can be used.

Every unconnected input alarm has to be bridged by ashort circuit on the plug-in connector.

Alarm DisableConnector

The alarm disable insert consists of a connector with crimpcontacts which provides the short circuits for eight alarminputs.

It is inserted in the alarm input connectors which are notconnected by an external alarm cable to suppress alarmsbased on open inputs.

OvervoltageProtection

The OUTC additionally provides surge arrestors for threealarms to protect the circuitry of these inputs. These are onthe ’EXT-ALARMS’ connector for external alarm numbers10, 13, and 14.

Alarms 17 to 24 are not protected by special transient orovervoltage components but these inputs have to withstanda 1.2/ 50 1500 V wave.

The alarm outputs are protected by bi-directionalsuppressor diodes.

Table 39: External Inputs/Outputs

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 445 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.5.2 BTSRI

The BTS Remote Inventory part of the OUTC is used to store basic informationabout a BTS in non-volatile memory.

Flat cables from compartment 1 and side compartment or MBO1/MBO2 areconnected to the BTSRI.

The mounting position of the flat cables are located on the bottom of theOUTC (see Figure 239).

The following figure shows the block diagram of the BTSRI.

BCB

plus

BCBDriver NGTSL EEPROM

Flat CableSide Compartment

or MBO1

BCB

plus

Overcurrent

Protection

ResetCircuit

BCB_VCC_BP

Flat CableBTS Compartment 1

or MBOE

Figure 241: Block Diagram of BTSRI

The heart of the BTSRI is an NGTSL-ASIC. An EEPROM is used as memory(256 x 16 bits). A reset circuit (MAX 811) is used to reset the ASIC at power on.

The BTSRI is either powered via the flat cable (BCB_VCC_BP, providedby the SUMA) or via the power supply of the OUTC board. An overcurrentprotection protects the BCB_VCC_BP line.

The access to this board can be established via the BCB bus. There are twopossibilities to establish a link to the BTSRI:

If the BTS is in traffic, the SUM can use the BCB bus as the interfaceto the BTSRI

If the BTS is unpowered, the BTSRI can be accessed by an external tool via

the XBCB- (and BCB-) bus. Then the external tool provides the necessarypower supply. This feature is used only at factory level.

The subrack number is coded on the flat cable with holes. Five wires arereserved on the cable for that purpose. Up to six subracks can be coded whichcorresponds to the large outdoor configuration.

446 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.5.3 XIOB

The External Alarm Input and Output Board (XIOB) is used as the interfacebetween the external environment and the BTS. The board provides 16 BTSalarm inputs and eight alarm outputs. These alarms are described in the tablesBTS A9100 Outdoor Interface Connectors (33) to BTS A9100 Outdoor ExternalAlarm Inputs (36). The XIOB functions are integrated in the OUTC.

The following figure shows the block diagram of the XIOB.

NGTSL 1

NGTSL 2

NGTSL 3

AlarmInputs

AlarmInputs

AlarmInputs

Outputs

12 VDC5 VDC

12 VDCEEPROM

OvercurrentProtection

Bus

Driver

BCB BUS

BCB VCC

TTL/RS485conversion

EBCB_VCC

EBCB_SP

XBCB_BUS

XBCB_VCC

GND

48V in 12V out

Figure 242: Block Diagram of the XIOB

Three NGTSLs are used; each NGTSL handles eight alarm inputs. The firstNGTSL also controls eight outputs and the EEPROM, which is used to storethe remote inventory data of the XIOB. The third NGTSL can be used to pull thealarm inputs to the active or inactive status for test purposes. It is possible topull the alarm inputs with software on active or inactive level in order to checkthem. Alarm test 0 pulls all inputs to the inactive status and alarm test 1pulls all inputs to the active status.

The alarm inputs use comparators to detect an alarm. Open alarm inputs areregarded as active. A current of approximately 1 mA flows from the alarm inputto ground if the alarm input is pulled to ground. An alarm line must stay longerthan 1 ms in the active status in order to be detected as active.

The alarm outputs use Darlington transistor arrays with open collectors.

No galvanic isolation is provided between inputs/outputs to the BTS. Onecommon ground (GND) is used within the BTS including inputs and outputs.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 447 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

The DC/DC converter is switched on if the BCB_VCC (powered by the SUMA)is available. An overcurrent protection protects the BCB_VCC line. A 12 VDCpower supply is used to supply input and output circuitry. This power supplycan be used to supply relays that can be switched with the outputs.

An XBCB interface provides access to the internal base station control bus(BCB):

If the BTS is powered, then the interface can be used to control externaldevices

If the BTS is unpowered, the XBCB can be powered externally. Then the

direction of the interface is changed so that it can be used for remoteinventory of the BTS. This feature is used only at factory level.

The signal levels are according to RS-485. An ABTE 16246 is used as theinternal BCB driver.

448 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.5.4 RIBAT

The RIBAT board is part of the battery, but physically integrated in the OUTC.Its task is to measure the battery temperature and to provide the OMU withthe temperature value and the battery Remote Inventory information whichincludes the information of the battery type. Knowledge of the temperaturevalue is necessary for charging. The board contains a BCB interface to transferthe information.

The RIBAT is supplied from the BTS not from the batteries. The powerconsumption is about 30 mA. The operating temperature range of the board is0� C to 70� C.

The connection and addressing differs for different configurations. The followingfigure shows the RIBAT block diagram.

Remote SupplyVoltage Input

BCB

NGTSL

Fixed address0000 0011 1100 0001(JC1 hqx )

D

A

TemperatureSensor

RIEEPROM

Figure 243: RIBAT Block Diagram

The board consists of an NGTSL which is the terminal for the ISL data link,the Remote Inventory EEPROM including the Remote Inventory information,and the analog part for temperature measuring.

The analog part includes signal conditioning and an ADC to digitize thetemperature value. An external PT100 temperature sensor is connectedto the analog part. The ADC outputs are connected directly to the NGTSLalarm inputs.

Power supply is provided remotely either via the BCB_VCC_BP or the internalpower supply of the OUTC.

The internal battery of the outdoor BTS is located inside a side compartment.The RIBAT is connected to the BCB via a flat band cable coming from thebackplane.

The battery temperature range which can be measured is between -10� C and70� C. This range is extended against the operating temperature range of thebatteries (0� C to 50� C) and the minimum operating temperature range of theRIBAT to submit high or low temperature alarms. The measurement resolutionis 0.5� C. Values below -10� C means a short cut at the temperature sensor.Values above 70� C means a not-connected or interrupted sensor.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 449 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.6 Outdoor Cabinet Power Supply and GroundingThere are different power supply systems for the COME/COMI,CODE/CODI/CPT2/MBO1/MBO2 and MBO1DC/MBO2DC. These aredescribed in the following sections.

4.6.1 COME/COMI

For the COME/COMI there exist two different power supply systems, one basedon PM08s with BCU1 and another one based on PM11s with BCU2.

Certain elements are common for both variants.

The AC input is connected to the ACSB via the optional electricity meter. TheACSB contains lightning overvoltage protectors, input supply fuses, and circuitbreakers for AC power distribution. The AC input can be 230 VAC 1Ø or 415VAC 3Ø. The switched outputs from the ACSB are 230 VAC 1Ø.

These are used for:

HEAT2s

Service light and AC power sockets

SRACDC or ACSR.

The COME/COMI is grounded by connecting an external ground cable to anM8 bolt fitted to the side compartment plinth. From there, separate groundstraps are used to ground the major equipment modules in each compartment.

450 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.6.1.1 COME/COMI Power Supply with PM08s and BCU1The COME/COMI power supply system with PM08s and BCU1 is shown inthe following figure.

SRACDC

ACSB

ACIB

AC Input

PM08/5 PM08/4 PM08/3 PM08/2 PM08/1 BCU1

ACRI

BACO

DC Bus

Shunt

AlarmsControl

Shunt

XBCB

To/From FANUs

BU41

−48 VDC

0 VDC

Electricity Meter

AC to Heaters, Service Light and AC Power Sockets

Figure 244: COME/COMI AC/DC Power Supply System with PM08s and BCU1

The SRACDC contains the modules that:

Convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC. Refer to ACIB (Section 12.1) and

PM08 (Section 12.12) for detailed descriptions of the ACIB and the PM08s,respectively. Three PM08s are used in the COMI; five PM08s are used

in the COME.

Control the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. Refer toBCU1 (Section 12.16), BACO (Section 12.18) and BU41 (Section 12.24)

for detailed descriptions of the BCU1, and the optional BACO and BU41,respectively.

The DC supply produced in the SRACDC is connected to the DCDP via theinterconnection panel. Refer to DCDP (Section 12.30) for a detailed descriptionof the DCDP.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 451 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.6.1.2 COME/COMI Power Supply with PM11s and BCU2The COME/COMI power supply system with PM11s and BCU2 is shown inthe following figure.

ACSR

ACSBAC Input

PM11/4 PM11/3 PM11/2 PM11/1 BCU2

BAC2

DC Bus

Shunt

AlarmsControl

Shunt

To/From FANUs

BU41 or BU100

−48 VDC

0 VDC

Electricity Meter


XBCB

Figure 245: COME/COMI AC/DC Power Supply System with PM11s and BCU2

The ACSR contains the modules that:

Convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC. Refer to PM11 (Section 12.13) for a

detailed description of the PM11s. Three PM11s are used in the COMI;four PM11s are used in the COME

Control the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. Refer

to BCU2 (Section 12.17), BAC2 (Section 12.19), BU41 (Section 12.24),and BU100 (Section 12.25) for detailed descriptions of the BCU2, and the

optional BAC2 and BU41 or BU100, respectively.

The DC supply produced in the ACSR is connected to the BOBU via theinterconnection panel.

The ACSB used in combination with PM11s is slightly different from theACSB used in combination with PM08s. In Figure 245 the ACSB distributesthe AC input directly to the PM11s and the ACSB executes the functionsnormally performed by the ACIB.

452 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.6.2 CODE/CODI/CPT2

The CODE/CODI/CPT2 power supply system differs from that of COME/COMIbecause it is completely integrated in the BTS. The system control functionsare performed by the OMU which is part of the SUMA.

The following figures show the power supply system for the CODE/CODI/CPT2.

AC mains power is applied to the LPFU located at the bottom of the sidecompartment. The LPFU provides overvoltage lightning protection for theAC supply lines and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply (for a detaileddescription of the LPFU, refer to LPFU (Section 12.5)). The AC input canbe 230 VAC 1Ø or 400 VAC 3 Ø.

AC power is then passed to the ACSU located at the top of the sidecompartment. The ACSU provides AC distribution via seven AC circuit breakers.

The switched outputs from the ACSU are used for:

Two or three PM12s

HEAT2s and optional air conditioning

Service Light and AC power sockets.

For a detailed description of the ACSU, refer to ACSU (Section 12.9).

The CODE/CODI/CPT2 are grounded by connecting an external ground cableto an M8 bolt fitted to the side compartment plinth. From there, separate groundstraps are used to ground the major equipment modules in each compartment.

STASR

ACSUAC Input

PM12/3 PM12/2 PM12/1

DC Bus

BU41 or BU100

−48 VDC

0 VDC

LPFU AC to Heaters, Service Light and AC Power Sockets

ADAM

OMU RIBAT

Figure 246: CODE/CODI/CPT2 AC/DC Power Supply System

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 453 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

The STASR contains the modules that:

Convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC. Refer to PM12 (Section 12.14)

for a detailed description of the PM12s. Three PM12s are used in theCODE/CODI/CPT2. The operation of the PM12s is controlled by software

running in the OMU

Sense the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. Thesense data is passed to the OMU. Refer to ADAM (Section 12.21), BU41

(Section 12.24) and BU100 (Section 12.25) for detailed descriptions ofADAM and the batteries BU41, BU100 and BU101.

The DC supply produced in the STASR is connected to the BOSU and BOBUvia the interconnection panel.

A specific installation set can be used to connect the DC power of the bus barvia external cable entry to external loads like transmission equipment, pylonlightning, etc...

454 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.6.3 MBO1/MBO2

The MBO1/MBO2 power supply system differs from that of COME/COMIbecause it is completely integrated in the BTS. The system control functionsare performed by the OMU which is part of the SUMA.

The following figure shows the power supply systems for MBO1 and MBO2.

AC mains power is applied to the LPFM located at the upper side of the MBO1compartment. The LPFM provides overvoltage lightning protection for theAC supply lines and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply (for a detaileddescription of the LPFM, refer to LPFM (Section 12.4)). The AC input canbe 230 VAC 1Ø or 400 VAC 3 Ø.

AC power is then passed to the ACMU located at the top of the MBO1compartment. The ACMU provides AC distribution via five AC circuit breakers.

The switched outputs from the ACMU are used for:

Two to four PM12s in combination with ADAM4

HEAT2s and optional air conditioning

Service Light and AC power sockets.

For a detailed description of the ACMU, refer to ACMU (Section 12.7).

The MBO1/MBOE are grounded by connecting an external ground cable toan M8 bolt fitted to the left upper side of the MBO1 (near LPFM). From there,separate ground straps are used to ground the major equipment modules ineach compartment.

STASR

AC Input

PM12/4* PM12/3*

DC Bus−48 VDC

0 VDC

LPFMAC to Heaters, Service Light and AC Power Sockets

ADAM4

OMUBU101

RIBAT

PM12/2 PM12/1

ACMU

* not necessarily equipped

Figure 247: MBO1/MBO2 AC/DC Power Supply System

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 455 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets



detailed description of the PM12s. Two or three PM12s are used in theMBO1; three or four PM12s are used in the MBO2. The operation of the

PM12s is controlled by software running in the OMU

Sense the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. Thesense data is passed to the OMU. Refer to ADAM4 (Section 12.23) and

BU101 (Section 12.26) for detailed descriptions of ADAM4 and the BU101battery.

The DC supply produced in the STASR is connected to the BOMU via ADAM4.


4.6.4 MBO1DC/MBO2DC

The MBO1DC/MBO2DC power supply system differs from that of COME/COMIbecause it is completely integrated in the BTS. The system control functionsare performed by the OMU which is part of the SUMA.

The following figure shows the power supply systems for MBO1 and MBO2.

DC mains power is applied to the DC In filters located at the upper side ofthe MBO1DC compartment.

DC power is then passed to the DCMU located at the top of the MBO1DCcompartment. The DCMU provides DC distribution via four DC circuit breakers.

The switched outputs from the DCMU are used for:

BTS compartments

HEATDCs and optional air conditioning

Service Light.

For a detailed description of the DCMU, refer to DCMU (Section 12.33).

The MBO1DC/MBOEDC are grounded by connecting an external groundcable to an M8 bolt fitted to the left upper side of the MBO1DC. From there,separate ground straps are used to ground the major equipment modules ineach compartment.

DC Input

DC Bus−48 VDC

0 VDC

DC FilterDC to Heaters andService Light DCMU

Figure 248: MBO1DC/MBO2DC Power Supply System

The DC supply is connected to the BOMU via the DCMU.


456 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.6.5 MBO1T

MBO1T is derived from MBO1 by reducing the used equipment.

The following figure shows the power supply systems for MBO1T.

AC mains power is applied to the LPFMT located at the upper side of theMBO1T compartment. The LPFMT provides overvoltage lightning protectionfor the AC supply line and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply (for adetailed description of the LPFMT, refer to LPFMT (Section 12.3)). The ACinput is 230 VAC 1Ø.

AC power is then passed to the ACMUT located at the top of the MBO1T1compartment. The ACMUT provides AC distribution via one AC circuit breaker.

The switched outputs from the ACMUT are used for two to three PM12s incombination with ADAM4.

For a detailed description of the ACMUT, refer to ACMUT (Section 12.8).

The MBO1T is grounded by connecting an external ground cable to an M8bolt fitted to the left upper side of the MBO1T (near LPFMT). From there,separate ground straps are used to ground the major equipment modules ineach compartment.

STASR

AC Input

PM12/3*

DC Bus−48 VDC

0 VDC

LPFCT

ADAM

OMUBU101

RIBAT

PM12/2 PM12/1

ACMUT

* not necessarily equipped

Figure 249: MBO1T AC/DC Power Supply System



detailed description of the PM12s. Two or three PM12s are used in theMBO1T. The operation of the PM12s is controlled by software running in

the OMU

Sense the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. Thesense data is passed to the OMU. Refer to ADAM (Section 12.21) and

BU101 (Section 12.26) for detailed descriptions of ADAM and the BU101battery.

The DC supply produced in the PM12 and is connected to the BOMUT viaADAM4.


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 457 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.6.6 MBO1E/MBO2E

The following figure shows the power supply systems for MBO1E and MBO2E.

AC mains power is applied to the ACDUE located at the lower side of theMBO1E compartment (for a detailed description of the ACDUE, refer to ACDUE(Section 12.6)). The AC input can be 230 VAC 1Ø or 400 VAC 3 Ø.

AC power is then passed to the switching block located at the middle partof ACDUE. The switching block provides AC distribution via five AC circuitbreakers.

The switched outputs are used for:

One to three PM18 rectifiers supervised by PM18 controller

HEAT2s

Service Light and AC power socket.

The MBO1E/MBOEE are grounded by connecting an external ground cable toan M8 bolt fitted to the left lower side of the MBO1E (near the front left fixingpoint). From there, separate ground straps are used to ground the majorequipment modules in each compartment.

AC Input

PM18/3

DC Bus−48 VDC

0 VDC

ACDUELP Filter


PM18SR

PM18CBU101

RIBAT

PM18/2 PM18/1

ACDUESwitching

Figure 250: MBO1E/MBO2E AC/DC Power Supply System

458 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

The PM18SR contains the modules that:


detailed description of the PM18s. One or two PM18s are used in theMBO1E; two or three PM18s are used in the MBO2E. The operation of the

PM18s is controlled by the PM18 controller

Sense the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. Thesense data is passed to the controller. Refer to PM18 (Section 12.15)

and BU101 (Section 12.26) for detailed descriptions of PM18 and theBU101 battery.

The DC supply produced in the PM18 power supply subrack and is connectedto the BOMUE.


4.6.7 MBO1EDC/MBO2EDC

The MBO1EDC/MBO2EDC power supply system is completely integrated inthe BTS. The system control functions are performed by the OMU which ispart of the SUMA.

The following figure shows the power supply systems for MBO1EDC andMBO2DC.

DC mains power is applied to the DC In clamps located in the DCDUE at thelower side of the MBO1EDC compartment.

DC power is then passed to the DC In filter located at the bottom of theMBO1EDC compartment. The DCDUE provides DC distribution via fourDC circuit breakers.

The switched outputs from the DCMU are used for:

BTS compartments

Service Light

HEATDCs and optional air conditioning.

For a detailed description of the DCDUE, refer to DCDUE (Section 12.32).

The MBO1EDC/MBOEEDC are grounded by connecting an external groundcable to an M8 bolt fitted to the left lower side of the MBO1EDC. From there,separate ground straps are used to ground the major equipment modules ineach compartment.

DC Input

DC Bus−48 VDC

0 VDC

DC FilterDC to Heaters andService Light DCDUE

Figure 251: MBO1EDC/MBO2EDC Power Supply System

The DC supply is connected to the BOMUE via the DCDUE.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 459 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets


4.6.8 CBO

4.6.8.1 CBO AC VariantThe CBO power supply system is completely integrated in the BTS. The systemcontrol functions are performed by the OMU which is part of the SUMA.

The following figure shows the power supply system for the CBO.

AC mains power is applied to the LPFC located above the cables entrycompartment. The LPFC provides overvoltage lightning protection for theAC supply lines and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply (for a detaileddescription of the LPFC, refer to LPFC (Section 12.2)). The AC input is 230VAC 1Ø.

AC power is then passed to the ACUC located above the LPFC. The ACUCprovides AC distribution via two AC circuit breakers.

The switched outputs from the ACUC are used for:

Two PM12s in combination with ADAM2

HEAT3

AC power socket.

For a detailed description of the ACUC, refer to ACUC (Section 12.10).

The CBO is grounded by connecting an external ground cable to an M8 socketfitted to the right upper side of the cables entry. From there, separate groundstraps are used to ground all equipment modules.

STASR

PM12/2

DC Bus −48 VDC0 VDCADAM2

OMU

BATS orExternalBatteries RIBAT

PM12/1

AC InputLPFC AC to Heater

and AC Power SocketsACUC

Figure 252: CBO AC Variant Power Supply System


Convert the AC input to 0/-48 VDC. Refer to PM12 (Section 12.14) for adetailed description of the PM12s. Two PM12s are used in the CBO. The

operation of the PM12s is controlled by software running in the OMU.

Sense the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. Thesense data is passed to the OMU. Refer to ADAM2 (Section 12.22) and

BATS (Section 12.28) for detailed descriptions of ADAM2 and the BATSbattery.

The DC supply produced in the PM12 is connected to the DCUC via ADAM2.Refer to DCUC (Section 12.34) for a detailed description of DCUC.

460 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.6.8.2 CBO DC VariantThe CBO DC variant DC power supply distribution differs from that of CBOAC variant.

The following figure shows the power supply distribution for CBO DC variant.

DC mains power is applied to the DC In filter located above the cables entrycompartment.

DC power is then passed to the DCDU located at the top of the CBO DCcompartment. The DCDU provides DC distribution via five DC circuit breakers.

The switched outputs from the DCDU are used for:

BTS compartments

Optional equipments

Heater HEAT4

Heat exchanger HEX5.

For a detailed description of the DCDU, refer to DCDU (Section 12.31).

The CBO DC varinat is grounded by connecting an external ground cable to anM8 bolt fitted to the left upper side of the MBO1DC. From there, separate groundstraps are used to ground the major equipment modules in each compartment.

DC Input

DC Bus−48 VDC

0 VDC

DC FilterDC to Heater andHeat Exchanger DCDU

Figure 253: CBO DC Variant Power Supply System

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 461 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.6.9 Temperature Control

How the temperature is controlled in the different cabinets is described in thefollowing sections.

4.6.9.1 COMI, COME, CODI, CODE, MBO, MBOxEThe ACSB/ACSU/ACMU contain a relay which is controlled by a thermostat.When the temperature is above -20� C, the AC supply is connected to theAC/DC converters.

If the temperature is below -20� C when the BTS A9100 is first switched on,there is no AC supply to the AC/DC converters. This means that the 0/ -48VDC supply is not available and the BTS A9100 cannot operate. AC power isavailable only on the HEAT2 to warm-up the cabinet.

When the HEAT2 raise the internal cabinet temperature above -20� C, the powerrelay is activated and the AC supplies are passed to the AC/DC converters. TheHEAT2 prevents the internal cabinet temperature from dropping below 0� C.

When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0� C, the SUM switches onthe telecommunications modules and the BTS A9100 becomes operational.

4.6.9.2 CBOFor CBO AC variant with the ACUC, a permanent connection is maintained upto -33� C. When switched on at minus temperature, both the HEAT3 and AC/DCare powered in time in order to warm up the cabinet to above 0� C.

When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0� C, the SUM switches onthe telecommunications modules and the BTS A9100 becomes operational.The HEAT3 prevents the internal cabinet temperature from dropping below 0� C.

4.6.9.3 CBO DCFor CBO DC variant with theDCUC, a permanent connection is maintained upto -33� C. When switched on at minus temperature, both the HEAT4 and DC arepowered in time in order to warm up the cabinet to above 0� C.

When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0� C, the SUM switches onthe telecommunications modules and the BTS A9100 becomes operational.The HEAT4 prevents the internal cabinet temperature from dropping below 0� C.

4.6.9.4 MBO1TAs MBO1T is designed to be used in tropical areas only cooling facilities areimplemented by HEX4 unit.

4.6.9.5 MBODC/MBOxEDCWith the DCMU/DCDUE, a permanent connection is maintained up to -33� C.When switched on at minus temperature, the HEATDC is powered in order towarm up the cabinet to above 0� C.

When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0� C, the SUM switches onthe telecommunications modules and the BTS A9100 becomes operational.The HEATDC prevents the internal cabinet temperature from dropping below0� C.

462 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.7 Outdoor Cabinet Lightning ProtectionProtection against the effects of lightning strikes is provided for external cables,see the following table.

External Cable Lightning Protection

AC Mains Supply Two types of lightning protectors can be fitted:

Medium stage protectors (DIN VDE 0675-6,

Class C) are installed in the ACSB for supplylines L1, L2, L3 and N

Coarse protectors (DIN VDE 0675-6, ClassB) are installed externally if the cabinet is

sited in exposed locations. Such locations

are, for example, building tops and openfields.

Abis Interface Medium-stage spark gap overvoltage protectionis provided by the Krone strip on the COAR orOUTC.

Three External Alarms Combined medium stage and fine overvoltageprotection is provided by the COAR or OUTCsurge protectors. Additional external coarseprotection is unnecessary.

Antenna Connectors Quarter wave (λ/4) lightning protectors are fittedat the bottom of BTS compartment 1 and 2. Fordetailed information on the lightning protectors,refer to Antenna Connector Lightning Protectors(Section 14).

Table 40: BTS A9100 Outdoor Lightning Protection

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 463 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.8 Outdoor Cabinet Cables and Cable SetsThis section lists the cables and cable sets for all BTS A9100 outdoorconfigurations.

4.8.1 Internal Cables

The BTS A9100 outdoor internal cables consist of the discrete cables and cablesets listed in the tables COMI/COME/COEP Outdoor Internal Cables (41) toCPT2 Outdoor Internal Cables (43).

Table BTS A9100 Outdoor Cable Sets (46) lists and describes the cablesthat comprise the cable sets.

For the physical and electrical descriptions of the discrete cables, see CableDescriptions (Section 17).

For some of the cables and cable sets there exist different variants. For thevariants used in a specific cabinet refer to its accompanying cable list.

4.8.1.1 COMI/COME/COEP Internal Cables

COME

Mnemonic Description Part Number COMI COEP

BTSRIOUT BTSRIOUT is a flat cable which ispermanently attached to a BTSRIboard. It interconnects the BTScompartment 1 STASR backplanesand the BTSRI.

3BK 08126 X -

CA-ACSC CA-ACSC gathers alarms from theside compartment. This consistsof the key switch, door switch andHEX2 alarms. The cable connectsto the Alarms Side Comp connectoron the COAR.

3BK 08078 X -

CA-ADCO CA-ADCO disables eight alarminputs. It connects to the XI17 - 24connector on the COAR.

3BK 07953 X -

CA-APC2 CA-APC2 gathers BTS compartment1 alarms from the door switch, smokedetector, flood detector and HEX2.

3BK 08215 X -

CA-ASMC CA-ASMC is an AC power cable. Itconnects 230 VAC from the ACSB tothe ACIB.

3BK 08807 X -

464 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

COME


CA-ONCCx CA-ONCCx carries:

0/ -48 VDC from the bus bar

TX/RX from the Connection Area

Abis 1/2 Interfaces from the SUM.

The cable connects to the customerequipment in BTS compartment 1.

- X -

CA-OSCP1 CA-OSCP1 short circuits the HEX2P1 connector of CA-ACSC. Thissuppresses the side compartmentHEX2 alarm. The side compartmentHEX2 is only fitted in the COMEwhen there are more than six TREs.

3BK 08095 X -

CA-OSCP2 CA-OSCP2 short circuits the AlarmsBTS2 connector on the COAR. Thissuppresses the BTS compartment 2HEX2 and door switch alarms. BTScompartment 2 is part of COME.

3BK 08096 X -

CS02 CS02 is an AN cable set. It connectsan ANY to another ANY or to anANX/ANC.

3BK 07598 X X

CS03 CS03 is a TRE cable set. It connectsa TRE to an ANX/ANC or an ANY.

3BK 07599 X X

CS07 CS07 is an ANT cable set. Itconnects an ANX/ANC to twoantenna cabinet connectors.

3BK 07964 X X

CS08 CS08 is the customer equipmentcable set. It connects a BTS to themicrowave equipment and othercustomer equipment.

3BK 08036 X -

CS09 CS09 is a BTS compartment 1 basiccable set. It contains cables for:

DC power connections to theSTASRs, HEX2 and XIOB

Signal connections to the SUM.

This includes the Abis1 andAbis2 Interfaces, clock, control

and alarm signals.

3BK 08037 X -

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 465 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

COME


CS10 CS10 is an optional cable set. Itprovides the 0/ -48 VDC supply forthe side compartment HEX2. Theside compartment HEX2 is onlyfitted in the COME when there aremore than six TREs.

3BK 08042 - X

CS11 CS11 is the BTS compartment 2basic cable set. It contains cablesfor:

DC power connections to theSTASRs and HEX2

Signal connections between the

STASRs.

3BK 08040 - X

CS12 CS12 is a TRE cable set. It connectsa TRE to ANY.

3BK 08041 X -

Table 41: COMI/COME/COEP Outdoor Internal Cables

466 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.8.1.2 CODI/CODE/COEP Internal Cables

CODE

Mnemonic Description Part Number CODI COEP

BATCO BATCO connects the battery viabreakers to the interconnection area.It includes a cable for the batterytemperature sensor.

3BK 25156 X -

BTSRIOUT BTSRIOUT is a flat cable which ispermanently attached to a BTSRIboard. It interconnects the BTScompartment 1 STASR backplanesand the BTSRI.

3BK 08126 X -

CA-ADCO CA-ADCO disables eight alarminputs. It connects to the XI17 - 24connector on the COAR.

3BK 07953 X -

CA-ONCCx CA-ONCCx carries:

0/ -48 VDC from the bus bar

TX/RX from the Connection Area

Abis 1/2 Interfaces from the SUM.

The cable connects to the customerequipment in BTS compartment 1.

- X -

CS03 CS03 is a TRE cable set. It connectsa TRE to an ANX/ANC or an ANY.

3BK 07599 X X

CS07 CS07 is an ANT cable set. It connectsan ANX/ANC to two antenna cabinetconnectors.

3BK 07964 X X

CS08 CS08 is the customer equipmentcable set. It connects a BTS to themicrowave equipment and othercustomer equipment.

3BK 08036 X -

CS11 CS11 is the BTS compartment 2basic cable set. It contains cables for:

DC power connections to the

STASRs and HEX2

Signal connections between theSTASRs.

3BK 08040 - X

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 467 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

CODE

Mnemonic Description Part Number CODI COEP

CS15 CS15 is a BTS compartment 1 basiccable set. It contains cables for:

DC power connections to theSTASRs, HEX2 and XIOB

Signal connections to the SUM.

This includes the Abis1 and Abis2Interfaces, clock, control and

alarm signals.

3BK 08719 X -

CS16 CS16 is a side compartment basiccable set. It contains cables for:

DC power connections to the

HEX2

Signal connections to the SUM.This includes control and alarm

signals.

3BK 08775 X -

Table 42: CODI/CODE/COEP Outdoor Internal Cables

468 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.8.1.3 CPT2 Internal Cables


BATCO Version AA BATCO AA connects the battery via breakers to theinterconnection area. It includes a cable for thebattery temperature sensor.

3BK 25156

CS03 CS03 is a TRE cable set. It connects a TRE to anANC or an ANY.

3BK 07599

CS07 CS07 is an ANT cable set. It connects an ANC totwo antenna cabinet connectors.

3BK 07964

CS15 CS15 is a BTS compartment 1 basic cable set. Itcontains cables for:

DC power connections to the STASRs, HEX2

and OUTC

Signal connections to the SUM. This includesthe Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces, clock, control

and alarm signals.

3BK 08719

CS16 CS16 is a side compartment basic cable set. Itcontains cables for:

DC power connections to the HEX2

Signal connections to the SUM. This includes

control and alarm signals.

3BK 08775

Table 43: CPT2 Outdoor Internal Cables

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 469 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.8.1.4 MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO2/MBO2DC Internal Cables

Mnemonic Description Part Number MBO1 MBO2

BATCO VersionBA

BATCO BA connects the battery via breakers tothe interconnection area. It includes a cable forthe battery temperature sensor.

3BK 25156 X X

CM01 CM01 is an MBO1 basic cable set. It containscables for:

DC power connections to the STASRs, HEX4and OUTC


the Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces, clock, controland alarm signals

Remote inventory data.

3BK 25818 X X

CMO1E CM01E is an MBO1E basic cable set. It containscables for:

DC power connections to the STASRs,

HEX9/DAC9 and OUTC

Signal connections to the SUM. This includesthe Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces, clock, control

and alarm signals


3BK 27268 X X

CM02 CM02 is an MBOE compartment basic cableset. It contains cables for:

DC power connections and alarms to the

HEX3

DC power connections to the STASRs


3BK 25819 - X

CM02E CM02E is an MBOEE compartment basic cableset. It contains cables for:

DC power connections and alarms to theHEX8/DAC8

DC power connections to the STASRs


3BK 27269 - X

470 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

Mnemonic Description Part Number MBO1 MBO2

CMO11* CM011 is an MBO1DC basic cable set. Itcontains cables for:

DC power connections to the STASRs, HEX4and OUTC


the Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces, clock, controland alarm signals

SENSP


3BK 26621 X X

CMO1T** CMO1T is an MBO1T basic cable set. Itcontains cables for:


and OUTC


the Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces, clock, control

and alarm signals


3BK 27142 X -

CS03 CS03 is a TRE cable set. It connects a TRE toan ANC or an ANY.

3BK 07599 X X

CS07 CS07 is an ANT cable set. It connects an ANCto two antenna cabinet connectors.

3BK 07964 X X

* : Available only for MBODC

** : Available only for MBO1T

Table 44: MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO2/MBO2DC Outdoor Internal Cables

4.8.1.5 CBO Internal Cables


CBOA CBOA is an CBO basic cable set. It contains cablesfor:


and OUTC


the Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces, clock, control

and alarm signals


3BK 26346

BATSC BATSC connects the battery to the ADAM boardand the 0 V bolt.

3BK 26354

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 471 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets


CS03 CS03 is a TRE cable set. It connects a TRE to anANC or an ANY.

3BK 07599

CS26 CS26 is an ANT cable set. It connects an ANC totwo antenna cabinet connectors.

3BK 26351

Table 45: CBO Outdoor Internal Cables

472 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.8.1.6 BTS A9100 Outdoor Internal Cable Sets

Cable Sets Mnemonic Description Part Number Quantity

CA-BABRM CA-BABRM connects -48 VDC from the batteryto the battery breaker.

3BK 25141 1

CA-BABRP CA-BABRP connects 0 VDC from the batteryto the battery breakers.

3BK 25140 1

CA-BRCM CA-BRCM connects -48 VDC from the batterybreaker to the battery interconnection area.

3BK 25246 1

CA-BRCP CA-BRCP connects 0 VDC from the batterybreaker to battery interconnection area.

3BK 25245 1

BATCOVersion AA

CA-BSENS CA-BSENS connects the battery temperaturesensor to RIBAT or OUTC.

3BK 08119 1

CA-CBRM CA-CBRM connects -48 VDC from the batteryto the battery breaker.

3BK 25868 1

CA-CBRP CA-CBRP connects 0 VDC from the battery tothe battery breakers.

3BK 25869 1

CA-BRCM CA-BRCM connects -48 VDC from the batterybreaker to the battery interconnection area.

3BK 25246 1


3BK 25245 1

BATCOVersion AB

CA-BSENS CA-BSENS connects the battery temperaturesensor to RIBAT or OUTC.

3BK 08119 1

BATSC CA-PDCP CA-PDCP connects the 0 VDC from the batteryto the ground bolt.

3BK 25231 1

CA-ADACM CA-ADACM connects the -48 VDC from thebattery to the ADAM2 board.

3BK 25248 1

CM01 BOMU Bus bar Outdoor Multistandard Unit.

Carries AC and DC power supplies to theSTASRs, XIOB, HEX3/ HEX4, HEAT2, servicelights, customer and microwave equipment.

Transfers alarms from the HEX3/ HEX4, smokedetector, flood detector, and door switches tothe OUTC.

3BK 25672 1

CA-RIMO1 Remote Inventory Multistandard Out cable.

RIMO1 transfers remote inventory data of MBO1modules to OUTC.

3BK 25822 1

CA-Ground CA-Ground is a cabinet ground cable. Itconnects LPFM to a ground bolt.

3BK 25182 1

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 473 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets



3BK 25245 1

CA-ABIS The CA-ABIS carries the Abis1 /2 Interfacesfrom the COAR (OUTC) to the SUM.

3BK 07922 1

CA-BTSCA The CA-BTSCA carries clock and control signalsbetween the COAR (OUTC) and the SUM.

3BK 07923 1

CMO1T CA-RIMO1 Remote Inventory Multistandard Out cable.

RIMO1 transfers remote inventory data of MBO1modules to OUTC.

3BK 25822 1

CA-Ground CA-Ground is a cabinet ground cable. Itconnects LPFM to a ground bolt.

3BK 25182 1


3BK 25245 1


3BK 07922 1


3BK 07923 1

CA-OSCP4 The CA-OSCP4 short circuits the Alarms BTS2connector on the OUTC. This suppresses theMBO2 HEX3 and door switch alarms.

3BK 272003 1

CM01E CA-RIC1 Remote Inventory Multistandard Evolution Outcable.

RIC1 transfers remote inventory data of MBO1Emodules to OUTC.

3BK 27319 1

CA-XBCBPS CA-XBCBPS carries alarm and RemoteInventory information from the PM18C to theOUTC.

3BK 27318 1


3BK 07922 1


3BK 07923 1

CM02 CA-PCOS Power cable outdoor for upper subracks (MBO2). 3BK 08809AA

2

CA-PCOS Power cable outdoor for bottom subrack (MBO2). 3BK 08809BA

1

CA-HOAP HEX outdoor alarm and power cable.

The CA-HOAP connects HEX3 and BOMUtransferring DC power and alarms.

3BK 25820 1

474 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets



CA-RIMO2 transfers remote inventory data ofMBO2 modules to OUTC.

3BK 25823 1

CM02E CA-PCOS Power cable outdoor for upper subracks(MBO2E).

3BK 08809BB

3

CA-HOAP HEX outdoor alarm and power cable.

The CA-HOAP connects HEX3 and BOMUtransferring DC power and alarms.

3BK 25820 1

CA-RIC2 Remote Inventory Multistandard Out Evolutioncable.

CA-RIC2 transfers remote inventory data ofMBO2E modules to OUTC.

3BK 27320 1

CMO11 BOMU Bus bar Outdoor Multistandard Unit.

BOBU carries DC power supplies to theSTASRs, XIOB, HEX3/ HEX4, HEATDC, servicelights, customer and microwave equipment.

BOBU transfers alarms from the HEX3/ HEX4,smoke detector, flood detector, and doorswitches to the OUTC.

3BK 25672 1


RIMO1 transfers remote inventory data ofMBO1DC modules to OUTC.

3BK 25822 1

CA-SENSP Temperature sensor plug. 3BK 26147 1


3BK 07922 1


3BK 07923 1

CS02 RXRC RXRC connects an ANY RX connector to anANX/ANC or another ANY RX connector.

3BK 07920 2

TXRC TXRC connects an ANY TX connector to anANX/ANC or another ANY TX connector.

3BK 07919 1

CS03 RXRC RXRC connects a TRE RX connector to an ANYor ANX/ANC RX connector.

3BK 07920 2

TXRC TXRC connects a TRE TX connector to an ANYor ANX/ANC TX connector.

3BK 07919 1

CS07 ANOC ANOC provides a duplex connection betweenthe ANX/ANC and a cabinet antenna connector.

3BK 07965 2

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 475 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets


CS08 VariantBA

CA-DFUX CA-DFUX carries the Abis1 /2 Interfaces to theSUM.

3BK 08503 1

CS08 VariantCA

CA-GCMW CA-GCMW is a cabinet ground cable. Itconnects the microwave equipment to ground.

3BK 07934 1

CA-MXBP CA-MXBP carries 0/ -48 VDC from the bus bar.The cable connects to the microwave equipmentin BTS compartment 1.

3BK 08886 1

CA-RFMW CA-RFMW carries the TX/RX to the bottomplate of the BTS.

3BK 07931 1

CS08 VariantBB

CA-2MMC2 CA-2MMC2 carries the Abis1 /2 Interfaces tothe SUM.

3BK 08289 1

CA-GCMW CA-GCMW is a cabinet ground cable. Itconnects the microwave equipment to ground.

3BK 07934 1

CA-MLBP CA-MLBP carries 0/ -48 VDC from the bus bar.The cable connects to the microwave equipmentin BTS compartment 1.

3BK 08887 1

CA-RFMW CA-RFMW carries the TX/RX to the bottomplate of the BTS.

3BK 07931 1

CS09 CA-ABIS CA-ABIS carries the Abis1 /2 Interfaces fromthe COAR to the SUM.

3BK 07922 1

CA-BTSCA CA-BTSCA carries clock and control signalsbetween the COAR and the SUM.

3BK 07923 1

CA-H2PC1 H2PC1 carries 0/ -48 VDC from the DCDP.The cable connects to the BTS compartment1 HEX2.

3BK 08077 1

CA-OSPC CA-OSPC carries 0/ -48 VDC from the DCDPto an STASR.

3BK 08079 2

CA-XBCBO CA-XBCBO carries alarm and Remote Inventoryinformation from the ACRI to the COAR.

3BK 08205 1

CA-XIOPC CA-XIOPC carries 0/ -48 VDC from the DCDPto the XIOB.

3BK 08087 1

CS10 CA-H2PC2 Cable Assembly - HEX2 Power Cable 2 carries0/ -48 VDC from the DCDP. The cable connectsto the COAR.

3BK 08092 1

CA-H2PC3 Cable Assembly - HEX2 Power Cable 3 carries0/ -48 VDC from the HEX Power connectoron the COAR. The cable connects to the sidecompartment HEX2.

3BK 08093 1

476 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets


CS11 VariantAA

CA12 Cable Assembly 12 is a flat cable thatinterconnects the BTS compartment 2 STASRbackplanes and the BTSRIOUT.

3BK 08086 1

CA-ACB2 Cable Assembly - Alarm Cable BTS2 gathersalarms from BTS compartment 2. This consistsof the door switch and HEX2 alarms. The cableconnects to the Alarms BTS2 connector on theCOAR.

3BK 08091 1

CA-H2PC1 CA-H2PC1 carries 0/ -48 VDC from the DCDP.The cable connects to the BTS compartment2 HEX2.

3BK 08077 1

CA-OSPC CA-OSPC carries 0/ -48 VDC from the DCDPto an STASR.

3BK 08079 1 of AA,2 of AB

CS11 VariantBA

CA12 CA12 is a flat cable that interconnects the BTScompartment 2 STASR backplanes and theBTSRIOUT.

3BK 08086 1

CA-OHAC CA-OHAC carries:

0/ -48 VDC from the BOBU

Alarms to the BOBU.

The cable connects to the BTS compartment2 HEX2.

3BK 08810 1

CA-PCOS Cable Assembly - Power Cable Outdoor Subrackcarries 0/ -48 VDC from the BOBU to theSTASR.

3BK 08809 3

RXRC The RXRC connects a TRE RX connector to anANY connector.

3BK 07920 2CS12

TXRC The TXRC connects a TRE TX connector to anANY connector.

3BK 07919 1

CS15 VariantCA

BOBU BOBU carries AC and DC power supplies tothe STASRs, XIOB, HEX2, HEAT, service lights,customer and microwave equipment.

BOBU transfers alarms from the HEX2, smokedetector, flood detector, and door switches tothe COAR.

3BK 08742 1

CA-ABIS The CA-ABIS carries the Abis1 /2 Interfacesfrom the COAR to the SUM.

3BK 07922 1

CA-BTSCA The CA-BTSCA carries clock and control signalsbetween the COAR and the SUM.

3BK 07923 1

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 477 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets




Alarms to the BOBU.


3BK 08810 1

CS15 VariantDA

BOBU BOBU carries AC and DC power supplies tothe STASRs, XIOB, HEX2, HEAT, service lights,customer and microwave equipment.

BOBU transfers alarms from the HEX2, smokedetector, flood detector, and door switches tothe OUTC.

3BK 08742 1

CA-RICPT2 The CA-RICPT2 is a flat cable which ispermanently attached to the OUTC board. Itinterconnects the BTS compartment 1 STASRbackplanes and the OUTC.

3BK 25538 1



Alarms to the BOBU.

The cable connects to the BTS compartment1 (CPT2) HEX2.

3BK 08810 1

CS16

Variant AA

BOSU BOSU carries AC and DC power supplies to theHEX2, HEAT, service lights, and ASCB/ACSU.

BOSU transfers alarms from the HEX2, key anddoor switch to the COAR.

3BK 08741 1

CA-Ground1 CA-Ground1 is a cabinet ground cable. Itconnects the ACSB to a ground bolt.

3BK 08118 1

CA-Ground2 CA-Ground2 is a cabinet ground cable. Itconnects between two ground bolts.

3BK 08117 1



Alarms to the BOBU.


3BK 08810 1

CA-XBCBO CA-XBCBO carries alarm and Remote Inventoryinformation from the BCU2 to the COAR.

3BK 08205 1

478 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets


CS16

Variant CA

BOSU BOSU carries AC and DC power supplies to theHEX2, HEAT, service lights, and ACSB/ACSU.

BOSU transfers alarms from the HEX2, key anddoor switch to the COAR.

3BK 08741 1

CA-CSTR CA-CSTR connects the COAR with RIBAT 1,RIBAT 2 and STASR7.

3BK 25178 1

CA-Ground CA-Ground is a cabinet ground cable. Itconnects the LPFU grounding bolt to the bottomplate.

3BK 25182 1



Alarms to the BOBU.


3BK 08810 1

CA-PDCM CA-PDCM carries -48 VDC from ADAM to theside wall interconnection area.

3BK 25232 1

CA-PDCP CA-PDCP carries 0 VDC from ADAM to the sidewall interconnection area.

3BK 25231 1

CA-ADACM CA-ADACM carries -48 VDC from ADAM to thebattery interconnection area.

3BK 25248 1

CA-ADACP CA-ADACP carries 0 VDC from ADAM to thebattery interconnection area.

3BK 25247 1

CS16

Variant DA

BOSU BOSU carries AC and DC power supplies to theHEX2, HEAT, service lights, and ACSU.

BOSU transfers alarms from the HEX2, key anddoor switch to the OUTC.

3BK 08741 1

CA-Ground CA-Ground is a cabinet ground cable. Itconnects the LPFU grounding bolt to the bottomplate.

3BK 25182 1

CA-RICPT1 The CA-RICPT1 is a flat cable which ispermanently attached to the OUTC board. Itinterconnects the side compartment STASRbackplanes and the OUTC.

3BK 25537 1



Alarms to the BOBU


3BK 08810 1

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 479 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets


CA-PDCM CA-PDCM carries -48 VDC from ADAM/ADAM2to the side wall interconnection area.

3BK 25232 1

CA-PDCP CA-PDCP carries 0 VDC from ADAM/ADAM2 tothe side wall interconnection area.

3BK 25231 1

CA-ADACM CA-ADACM carries -48 VDC from ADAM/ADAM2to the battery interconnection area.

3BK 25248 1

CA-ADACP CA-ADACP carries 0 VDC from ADAM/ADAM2to the battery interconnection area.

3BK 25247 1

CA-ABIS The CA-ABIS carries the Abis1 /2 Interfacesfrom the OUTC to the SUMA.

3BK 07922 1

CA-BTSCA The CA-BTSCA carries clock and control signalsbetween the OUTC and the SUMA.

3BK 07923 1

CS25 ANCO ANCO provides a duplex connection betweenthe ANX/ANC and a cabinet antenna connector.

3BK26151 2

CS26 ANLC ANLC provides a duplex connection betweenthe ANX/ANC and a cabinet antenna connector.

3BK 26349 2

CS27 ANCO ANCO provides a duplex connection betweenthe ANX/ANC and a cabinet antenna connector.

3BK26151 2

Table 46: BTS A9100 Outdoor Cable Sets

480 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.8.2 External Cables

The BTS A9100 outdoor external cables consist of the discrete cables listedin the following table. They belong to COME/COMI and CODE/CODI. Thereare no COEP external cables, because COEP is used to extend COMI toCOME and CODI to CODE.


AC Supply This cable can be made on-site to the desired length. The cable usedis a five-core, 6 mm sq. power cable.

1AC 00468 0003

AntennaJumper

Antenna jumpers, 1 m/ 2 m/ 3 m/ 5 m length, HCF1/ 2, 2 x 7/ 16 straightmale connectors. They connect the BTS to the main antenna cables.

3BK 05360

This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length.The cable used is L907, an 8-pair, shielded, 2 Mbit/s, 120 PCMcable.

1AC 01328 0004

This cable can be replaced by one made on site to the desired length.The cable used is Flex3, a multicoaxial, 2 Mbit/s, 75 PCM cable.

1AC 00110 0011

CA-CBTE CA-CBTE is the BTS Terminal cable. It connects the BTS Terminalto the BTS Terminal connector on the SUM.

3BK 07951

CA-GC35 CA-GC35 is the cabinet ground cable. It connects to the M8 groundbolt on the side compartment floor, and to the customer’s ground point.

3BK 08031

This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length.The cable used is a 50 mm sq. yellow/green power cable.

1AC 00465 0003

OCC23 OCC23 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a G2 BTS tothe BTS A9100.

3BK 08303

OCC33 OCC33 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a BTS A9100 toanother BTS A9100.

3BK 08304

Table 47: BTS A9100 Outdoor External Cables List

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 481 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.9 Outdoor Cabinet CablingThe various types of cabling used in outdoor cabinets is described in thefollowing sections. This includes DC power and alarm cabling, as well as dataand control cabling. The cabling descriptions are group by outdoor cabinettypes.

4.9.1 Outdoor Cabinet DC Power and Alarm Cabling

The DC power and alarm cabling for the COME/COMI/CODE/CODI, CPT2,MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO2/MBO2DC, and CBO cabinets are described separately.The descriptions are supported by diagrams.

4.9.1.1 COME/COMI/CODE/CODIThere are two variants of cable sets used to distribute DC power and alarmswithin the BTS A9100 outdoor cabinets:

One variant is used for COME/COMI AXXX

One variant is used for COME/COMI BXXX and CODE/CODI.

The following figure shows the cables that carry DC power and alarms withinthe COME/COMI AXXX.

CA−H2PC1 AB


DCDPXIOB

X1

Alarm

HEX2

Power

Door Switch

CA−ACSC

Key Switch

AlarmsSide Comp

Door Switch

Smoke Detector

Flood Detector

X7

CA−APC2

X9/X10

To STASRs

CA−OSPC

CA−XIOPC

CA−H2PC1 AA

AlarmsBTS1

AlarmsBTS2

CA−ADCO

Alarm

HEX2

Power

CA−H2PC3 HEX Power

HEX Power

BTS Compartment

Alarm

HEX2

Power

Door Switch

CA−H2PC2

X6 X8

CA−OSPCTo STASRsX12−X14

CA−ACB2 for COME

(COME only)

(COME only)

(COME only)

(COME only)

CA−OSCP2 for COMI

(COME only)

(optional)

COAR

Figure 254: COME/COMI AXXX, DC Power and Alarm Cabling

482 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

The following figure shows the cables and bus bars that carry DC power andalarms within the COME/COMI BXXX and CODE/CODI. Note that, althoughthe bus bars carry AC power, this is not shown in the following figure.


BOBU

XIOB

Alarm

HEX2

Power

Door Switch

Key Switch

AlarmsSide Comp

Door Switch

Smoke Detector

Flood Detector

STASR 1

AlarmsBTS

CA−ADCO

BOSU

STASR 3

STASR 2

−48 VDC

GND

0 VDC

Optional Power Supplies

−48 VDC

GND

0 VDC

BTS Compartment 2

Alarm

HEX2

Power

STASR 4

STASR 6

STASR 5

Door Switch

Alarm

HEX2

Power

(COME only)

Optional Power Supplies (CODE only)

STASR 7 (CODE only)

(optional)(CODE/COME only)

(CODE/COME only)

COAR

Figure 255: COME/COMI BXXX and CODE/CODI, DC Power and AlarmCabling

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 483 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.9.1.2 CPT2The following figure shows the cables and bus bars that carry DC power andalarms within the CPT2. Note that, although the bus bars carry AC power, thisis not shown in the figures.


BOBU

Alarm

HEX2

Power

Door Switch

Key Switch

AlarmsSide Comp

Door Switch

Smoke Detector

Flood Detector

STASR 4

AlarmsBTS

CA−ADCO

BOSU

STASR 6

STASR 5

−48 VDC

GND

0 VDC

−48 VDC

GND

0 VDC

Alarm

HEX2

Power

(optional)

OUTC

STASR 2

STASR 3

XIOBFunction

Figure 256: CPT2 DC Power and Alarm Cabling

484 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.9.1.3 MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO2/MBO2DCThe following figure show the cables and bus bars that carry DCpower and alarms within the MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO1E andMBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E.

Alarms

CA−ADCO

−48 VDC

GND

0 VDC

XIOBFunction

STASR 7

STASR 3

STASR 2

STASR 1

Door Switch

Key Switch

SmokeDetector

WaterDetector

HEX4

BOMU

X901

X910

OUTC

Figure 257: MBO1/MBO1DC DC Power and Alarm Cabling

Alarms

CA−ADCO

−48 VDC

GND

0 VDC

XIOBFunction

STASR 7

STASR 3

STASR 2

STASR 1

Door Switch

HEX4

BOMUT

X901

X910

OUTC

Figure 258: MBO1T DC Power and Alarm Cabling

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 485 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

Alarms

CA−ADCO

−48 VDC

GND

0 VDC

XIOBFunction

STASR 7

STASR 3

STASR 2

STASR 1

Door Switch

Key Switch

SmokeDetector

WaterDetector

HEX4

BOMU

X901

X910

OUTC

STASR 0 (not used)

STASR 6

STASR 5

STASR 4

Door Switch

HEX3

MBO1 MBOE

Figure 259: MBO2/MBO2DC DC Power and Alarm Cabling

4.9.1.4 MBO1E/MBO1EDC/MBO2E/MBO2EDCThe following figure show the cables and bus bars that carry DC power andalarms within the MBO1E/MBO1EDC and MBO2E/MBO2EDC.

Alarms

CA−ADCO

−48 VDC

GND

0 VDC

XIOBFunction

STASR 3

STASR 2

STASR 1

Door Switch

Key Switch

SmokeDetector

WaterDetector

HEX9

BOMUE

X901

X910

OUTC

Figure 260: MBO1E/MBO1EDC Power and Alarm Cabling

486 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

Alarms

CA−ADCO

−48 VDC

GND

0 VDC

XIOBFunction

STASR 3

STASR 2

STASR 1

Door Switch

Key Switch

SmokeDetector

WaterDetector

HEX9

BOMUE

X901

X910

OUTC

STASR 6

STASR 5

STASR 4

Door Switch

HEX8

MBO1E MBOEE

Figure 261: MBO2E/MBO2EDC Power and Alarm Cabling

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 487 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.9.1.5 CBO

CBO AC Variant The following figure shows the cables that carry DC power and alarms withinthe CBO AC variant. Note that, although the bus bars carry AC power, thisare not shown in the figures.

Alarms

CA−ADCO

−48 VDC

GND

0 VDC

XIOBFunction

STASR 2

STASR 1

Optional Equipment

HEX5

DCUC

X901

X910

OUTC

CBO

Figure 262: CBO DC Power and Alarm Cabling

CBO DC Variant The following figure shows the cables that carry DC power and alarms withinthe CBO AC variant.

Alarms

CA−ADCO

−48 VDC

GND

0 VDC

XIOBFunction

STASR 2

STASR 1

Optional Equipment

HEX5

DCDU

X901

X910

OUTC

CBO

HEAT4

Figure 263: CBO DC Power and Alarm Cabling

488 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.9.2 Outdoor Cabinet Data and Control Cabling

The following sections described the data and control cabling used in thedifferent types of outdoor cabinets.

4.9.2.1 COME/COMIThe following figure shows the logical interconnections provided by the dataand control cables for the COME/COMI.

STASR3 Backplane

STASR4 Backplane

STASR5 Backplane

STASR2 Backplane

STASR1 Backplane

BTSRI

BTSRIOUTCA12

COAR

SUM

OCC23/OCC33 CA−ABIS

COEP

Figure 264: COME/COMI Data and Control Cabling

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 489 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.9.2.2 CODE/CODIThe following figure shows the logical interconnections provided by the dataand control cables for the CODE/CODI.

STASR 4 Backplane

STASR 5 Backplane

STASR 6 Backplane

STASR 2 Backplane

STASR 1 Backplane

BTSRI

BTSRIOUTCA12

COAR

SUMA

OCC23/OCC33 CA−ABIS

COEP

STASR 7 Backplane

RIBAT 1

RIBAT 2

STASR 3 Backplane

Figure 265: CODE/CODI Data and Control Cabling

490 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.9.2.3 CPT2The following figures show the logical interconnections provided by the dataand control cables for the CPT2.

STASR 2 Backplane

STASR 3 Backplane

STASR 5 Backplane

STASR 4 Backplane

OUTCSUMA

CA−ABIS

CA−BTSCA

STASR 6 Backplane

Option:OCC23/OCC33

CA−RICPT1 CA−RICPT2

Figure 266: CPT2 Data and Control Cabling

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 491 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.9.2.4 MBO1/MBO2The following figures show the logical interconnections provided by the dataand control cables for the MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO2/MBO2DC. TheSTASR7 is equipped only in MBO1 and MBO2.

STASR 2 Backplane

STASR 1 Backplane

OUTC

SUMA

Option:OCC23/OCC33

CA−ABIS

CA−BTSCA

CA−RIMO1

STASR 3 Backplane

STASR 7 Backplane

Figure 267: MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T Data and Control Cabling

OUTC

SUMA

Option:OCC23/OCC33

CA−ABIS

CA−BTSCA

CA−RIMO1

STASR 2 Backplane

STASR 1 Backplane

STASR 3 Backplane

STASR 7 Backplane

STASR 5 Backplane

STASR 6 Backplane

STASR 0 Backplane(not equipped)

STASR 4 Backplane

CA−RIMO2

MBO1 MBOE

Figure 268: MBO2/MBO2DC Data and Control Cabling

492 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.9.2.5 MBO1E/MBO2EThe following figures show the logical interconnections provided by the dataand control cables for the MBO1E/MBO1EDC/MMBO2E/MBO2EDC. ThePM18SR is equipped only in MBO1E and MBO2E AC variants.

STASR 2 Backplane

STASR 1 Backplane

OUTC

SUMA

Option:OCC23/OCC33

CA−ABIS

CA−BTSCA

CA−RIC1

STASR 3 Backplane

PM18SR

PM18C

XBCBPS

Figure 269: MBO1E Data and Control Cabling

OUTC

SUMA

Option:OCC23/OCC33

CA−ABIS

CA−BTSCA

CA−RIC1

STASR 2 Backplane

STASR 1 Backplane

STASR 3 Backplane

STASR 5 Backplane

STASR 6 Backplane

STASR 4 Backplane

CA−RIC2

MBO1E MBOEE

PM18SR

PM18C

XBCBPS

Figure 270: MBO2E Data and Control Cabling

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 493 / 910

4 Outdoor Cabinets

4.9.2.6 CBOThe following figure shows the logical interconnections provided by the dataand control cables for the CBO.

STASR 2 Backplane

STASR 1 Backplane

OUTC

SUMA

Option:OCC23/OCC33

CA−ABIS

CA−BTSCA

CA−RIBCO

Figure 271: CBO Data and Control Cabling

494 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

5 External Battery Cabinets


The sections describe mechanical design of battery cabinets and cablingbetween the battery cabinets and the BTS.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 495 / 910


5.1 External Indoor Battery CabinetThe external indoor battery cabinet is used to house a large backup battery. Inthis case it is not allowed to use a BTS configuration with an internal batteryin parallel. As required up to three battery units (48 V) can be installedinside the cabinet.

The following figures show block diagrams illustrating the principle. If batteryunits are connected to different BTSs, each battery unit is connected withseparate DC connectors and can be switched on/off by a separate circuit switch(block diagram 1). Battery units can also be connected in parallel. Then DCoutput connectors of BTS1 are used. DC battery voltage can be switched on/offby using the common circuit switch.

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

Breaker F1

Breaker F2

Breaker F3

DC Output Connectors

BTS1 BTS2 BTS3

RIBAT 2

RIBAT 3

RIBAT 1

XBCB

3 2 1

Battery Unit 3

Battery Unit 2

Battery Unit 1

Temperature Sensor

Figure 272: External Indoor Battery Cabinet, Block Diagram 3x1 Battery Units

496 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

Breaker F1

Breaker F2

Breaker F3

DC Output Connectors

BTS1 BTS2 BTS3

CommonBreaker F4

RIBAT 2

RIBAT 3

RIBAT 1

XBCB

3 2 1

− +

12 V

Battery Unit 3

Battery Unit 2

Battery Unit 1

Temperature Sensor

Figure 273: External Indoor Battery Cabinet, Block Diagram 1x2 + 1x1Battery Units

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

Breaker F1

Breaker F2

Breaker F3

DC Output ConnectorsBTS1 BTS2 BTS3

CommonBreaker F4

Battery Unit 3

Battery Unit 2

Battery Unit 1

RIBAT 2

RIBAT 3

RIBAT 1

XBCB

3 2 1

Temperature Sensor

Figure 274: External Indoor Battery Cabinet, Block Diagram 1x3 Battery Units

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 497 / 910


5.1.1 Mechanical Design

The external indoor battery is built by using the housing of the MBI3 cabinet(see MBI Cabinet Access and Features (Section 3.3.3)). For environmentalconditions and electromagnetic compatibility, see Environment (Section 18).

The following figure shows that the battery units are mounted in three shelves,one unit per shelf. Each unit consists of four separate battery blocks (12 V)connected in line. Battery units can be connected to separate circuit switches(placed at the left side of each unit) and separate connectors (placed at theconnection area at the top) for different BTSs. Battery units can also beconnected in parallel with a common circuit switch (connection area at the top)and a common connector for one BTS.

Adjustable brackets are at both sides of each shelf for positioning of the batteryunit. The distance between battery blocks is maintained by means of spacerssupplied with the battery.

Battery units are covered with a small cover plate to secure the batteries.

Common Circuit Switch

Circuit Switchfor one Battery Unit

Different types ofBattery Units justshown fordemonstration(cabinet must beequipped withidentical batteries)

Circuit Switchfor one Battery Unit

DC Output Connectors(to BTS)

XBCB Connectors for RIBAT Cable

Cover Plate

Figure 275: External Indoor Battery Cabinet

498 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


One battery terminal of each unit is connected with a temperature sensor, whichmonitors the battery temperature. The output from the sensor is used by theSUMA to regulate the charging voltage and thus prevent battery overheating.First this sensor information is collected and stored in RIBAT boards, which areplaced behind each battery unit at the rear side of the shelves. RIBAT boardsare powered by a BTS via RIBAT cable(s).

RIBAT boards (for more information see RIBAT (Section 12.29) ) are connectedwith the XBCB connectors placed at the connection area on the top. Ifbattery units are connected in parallel, corresponding RIBAT boards are alsoconnected together producing a common result of monitoring.

RIBAT and DC battery cables are connected to the BTS(s) passing through thebattery cabinet on the top.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 499 / 910


5.1.2 External Battery

The battery type used in the external indoor battery cabinet is BU101. This typeis also used in indoor and outdoor BTSs and external outdoor battery cabinets.

A detailed description, including charging, discharging and storage parameters,is given in BU101 (Section 12.26). Battery blocks of one unit are installed in line(contrary to the installation in an MBO cabinet) as shown in the following figure.

Jumper

Top View

To BUS Bar viaCircuit Breaker

Battery Battery

Front View

Battery Battery

TemperatureSensor Cable(to RIBAT)

To BUS Bar

Figure 276: External Indoor Battery Unit

5.1.3 Battery Cabinet External Cabling

There are following cables used for connection of an external battery cabinetindoor with a BTS and ground:

CA-PCEBP, 3BK 25259 AAAA, Power Cable external Battery 0 V

CA-PCEBM, 3BK 25260 AAAA, Power Cable external Battery -48 V

CA-GND, 3BK 25349 AAAA, Ground Cable for external Battery

CA-RIBEB, 3BK 25258 AAAA, RIBAT Cable for external indoor Battery.

Mechanical design of cables can be found in External Cables (Section 17.2).

500 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


5.2 External Battery Cabinet OutdoorThe external battery cabinet outdoor battery cabinet is used to house a largebackup battery. In this case it is not allowed to use a BTS configuration withan internal battery in parallel. As required, up to three battery units (48 V)can be installed inside the cabinet.

The following figure shows a block diagram illustrating the principle. All batteryunits are connected in parallel via two bus bars. Each battery branch can beswitched on/off separately by a single pole circuit switch. Complete DC batteryvoltage can be switched on/off by using the common circuit switch. Connectionto the BTS is made via terminal blocks.

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

− +

12 V

Battery Unit 3

Battery Unit 2

Battery Unit 1

Single PoleCircuit Switch

BTS+VE BUS Bar

−VE BUS Bar

CommonCircuit Switch

Terminal Block



Figure 277: External Outdoor Battery Cabinet, Block Diagram

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 501 / 910


5.2.1 Mechanical Design

5.2.1.1 Dimensions and WeightThe external outdoor battery cabinet has the following dimensions and weight.

Cabinet Version 3BK 26004 AAAA 3BK 26004 AAAB

Total Height 1500 mm 1312 mm

Width 700 mm 680 mm

Depth 800 mm 830 mm

Table 48: Dimensions

Cabinet pre-equipped with ACU but without batteries. < 180 kg

Cabinet with three battery units. < 600 kg

Table 49: Weight

5.2.1.2 CabinetThe external outdoor battery cabinet consists of a box-shaped frame bolted to aplinth. Four clearance long holes in the bottom (one in each edge) allow to fixthe cabinet to the fundament using M12 anchor bolts. Other components areadded to this basic construction. The cabinet has foam-insulated walls and roof.

The following figures show the internal arrangement of the different variants ofcabinets. The battery units are mounted in three shelves, one unit per shelf.Each unit consists of four separate battery blocks (12 V) connected in line.The minus line of each battery unit is connected to a separate single-polecircuit switch placed at the DC breaker box above the battery floors in cabinetversion 3BK 26004 AAAA and at the AC/DC distribution box in cabinet verion3BK 26004 AAAB. From that circuit switch the minus line is connected to a busbar. Plus lines of all battery units are connected to another bus bar. Both busbars are connected with a double pole main circuit switch (placed at the DCbreaker box) and then with terminal blocks placed at the bottom of the right sidewall for further connection to BTS. An exhausting tube for each battery unit isconnected to the roof or bottom plate.

Adjustable brackets are at both sides of each shelf to position the battery unit.The distance between battery blocks is maintained by means of spacerssupplied with the battery.

502 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


Battery units are covered in front with a small cover plate to secure the batteries.

DC Breaker Box

Door Switch

Smoke Detector

Airconditionerwith integrated heater

RIBAT Plate

Battery Units

Front View

ExternalCable Entry

TransmissionBlocks

Top View A(Bottom Floor)

InternalCable Entry

InternalCable Entry

AC Box(behind frame)

A

Battery Unit

Jumper

Door SwitchSmoke Detector

Airconditionerwith integrated heater

RIBAT Plate

Battery Units

Front View

ExternalCable Entry

Top View A(Bottom Floor)

InternalCable Entry

AC/DC Box andTransmission Blocks

(behind frame)

A

Battery Unit

Jumper

ExhaustingHoles

Figure 278: External Battery Cabinet Outdoor Variant 3BK 26004 AAAA (Left) and 3BK 26004 AAAB (Right)

Main (+) battery terminal of each unit is connected to a temperature sensor,which monitors the battery temperature. The output from the sensor is usedby the SUMA to regulate the charging voltage and thus to prevent batteryoverheating. This sensor information is collected and stored in RIBAT boards,which are placed above the DC breaker box.

RIBAT boards (for more information see RIBAT (Section 12.29)) are poweredby the BTS via the CA-RIBEO cable.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 503 / 910


5.2.1.3 DoorAccess to the external outdoor battery cabinet is via a door at the front. Thedoor provides both an environmental seal and EMI protection when closed.Mounted on the inside of the door is an air conditioner with an integrated heater.

Above the air conditioner is a latch mechanism for keeping the door openduring maintenance. Restrainers allow fixing the door open at 90� and 135�.

The door has a 3-point latching system with a Eurocylinder barrel locatedcentrally, opened by a key.

The door presses an electronic switch. This switch causes an alarm, if the dooris open. The switch can be switched off during maintenance.

5.2.1.4 Cable Entry and TerminalsAC, DC, RIBAT (CA-RIBEO) and Alarm cables enter the cabinet via the cableentry plate at the bottom of back, the left or right side wall. Internally, cablesare passed through cable glands at the ground floor. For cabinet version 3BK26004 AAAA the cables are connected to the DC and alarm terminals (placedat the right inner side wall), the AC distribution box (placed at the left inner sidewall), or to the first RIBAT board. For cabinet version 3BK 26004 AAAB thecables are connected to the AC/DC power connection box (placed at the leftinner side wall) or to the first RIBAT board.

The AC distribution box is shown in the figure 279 for cabinet version 3BK26004 AAAA (left) and for cabinet version 3BK 26004 AAAB (right). It containsan 1-pole AC main switch (L), a residual current breaker (RCB) for the servicelight and socket, and a switch for the air conditioner and integrated heater.

Lightning protectors for AC leads (L, N) are placed at the right and wiredto the earthing strip.

AC Main EntryBottom Plate

ACDistributionBox

ToAirconditioner/Heater

ToService Light/Socket

Residual Current Breaker’Service Light/Socket’

Switch’Airconditioner/Heater’

SurgeProtections

ACMain Switch

Cable EntryBottom Plate

AC/DCDistributionBox

To Service Light/ SocketAir Conditioner/HeaterSmoke Detector

Residual Current Breaker’Service Light/Socket’

Switch’Air conditioner/Heater’

SurgeProtections

ACMain Switch

BatteryStrings 1,2,3

DC Disconnector

To BatteryStrings

Figure 279: AC Distribution Box for Cabinet Version 3BK 26004 AAAA (Left)and 3BK 26004 AAAB (Right)

504 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


5.2.1.5 Environmental ConditionsThe external battery cabinet equipment housings provide the necessaryenvironmental and safety protection according to the standard ETS 300 019-1-4 class 4.1, for outdoor equipment.

The minimum ambient temperature is -33� C, exceptional ambient temperatureis up to +50� C. Shock and vibration according to class 4M3; earthquakeaccording to Bellcore 3.

Storage conditions are according to ETS 300 019-1-1 class 1.2.

Transportation conditions (packed) are either according to ETS 300 019-1-2class 2.3 (public transportation, cabinet without batteries fitted) or to ETS 300019-1-2 class 2.2 (careful transportation, cabinet with battery fitted). Transportand crane lifting with batteries is possible.

5.2.1.6 Electromagnetic CompatibilityConducted emission on AC (air conditioner/heater) are according to EN55022 class B.

Harmonic current emissions on AC lines are according to EN 61000-3-2.

5.2.2 External Battery

The battery type used in the external outdoor battery cabinet is BU101. Thistype is also used in indoor and outdoor BTSs and internal indoor battery cabinet.

A detailed description, including charging, discharging and storage parameters,is given in BU101 (Section 12.26). Battery blocks of one unit are installed in line(contrary to the installation in the MBO cabinet) as shown in the following figure.

ExhaustingHoses

Jumper

Top View

To BUS Bar viaCircuit Breaker

Battery Battery

Front View

Battery Battery

TemperatureSensor Cable(to RIBAT)

To BUS Bar

Figure 280: External Outdoor Battery Unit

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 505 / 910


5.2.3 Auxiliary Equipment

The auxiliary equipment installed in the external battery cabinets is describedbelow.

5.2.3.1 Air ConditionerThe air conditioner is used to maintain the temperature of the battery in rangeof about 20 - 25� C at ambient temperature up to 45� C, solar load included.

The air conditioner is fixed to the door via 2x5 M5 studs placed on the door.The unit is supplied by 230 VAC; cooling capacity is 350 W.

The following figure shows the internal and external air paths.

Door Side

Door Side

Top

Rear Side

Rear Side

Air Inlet

Air Outlet

Air PathsSide View

InternalAir Path

ExternalAir Path

Figure 281: Air Conditioner Unit, Air Paths

The internal warmer air is taken into the internal fan at the top of the unit andis forced through the evaporator coil and supplied back to the bottom of thecabinet. The heater element is located in front of the fan intake area.

The external cooler air is taken into the external fan positioned in the bottomof the unit and is forced through the coil and exhausted back to the externalenvironment at the top.

Supervision of the air conditioner produces one sum alarm if the unit fails. Thealarm line is wired to signal terminals for further connection to BTS.

5.2.3.2 HeaterThe heater is used for a warm-up period from -33� C and to maintaintemperature inside the cabinet above 10� C. The heater is integrated in the airconditioner. The heater element (1 kW) is located in the upper internal part ofthe air conditioner just before the internal fan intake.

The heater is controlled by a control board and is supplied by 230 VDC. Forprotection, two thermal switches are placed close to the heater elements. Bothhave a setting of 40� C for cut off and 25� C for resetting.

506 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


5.2.3.3 Overcurrent ProtectionsThe breakers for the AC lines are fitted in a box in the left side wall of the cabinet:

Breaker Type Description

1x 1-pole C16 A MCB in L line Incoming mains line

1x 2-pole 6A/ 30 mA RCB in L and Nlines

Interior light and servicesocket

1x 1-pole C10 A MVB in L line Air conditioner and heater

Table 50: Overcurrent Protection AC Lines

The breakers for the DC lines are fitted in the distribution box at the topof the cabinet:

Breaker Type Description

1x 2-pole 80 A MCB fast acting in 0 Vand -48 V main DC lines

Main DC Outgoing

3x 1-pole 80 A MCB in -48 V line Separate battery branch

1x 1-pole 2 A fuse or MCB in 12 V line Smoke detector

Note: The 0 V lead (+ pole of battery) is connected to PE inside of BTS.

Note: The 0 V and -48 V main DC lines can also be switched off/on by a2-pole circuit switch inside the BTS.

Table 51: Overcurrent Protection DC Lines

5.2.3.4 Lightning ProtectionLightning protection is equipped for AC lines only. It is fitted in the left side wallof the cabinet close to cable entry and wired to the earthing strip. There aremedium stage protectors (category c) for L and N leads.

5.2.3.5 Door SwitchThe cabinet is equipped with an electromechanical door switch. If the door isopened, an alarm is raised and sent to the BTS. The alarm line is wired tosignal terminals. The alarm can be cancelled manually if an open door isrequired for maintenance operations etc...

5.2.3.6 Smoke DetectorAn optical smoke detector is fitted on the top of the right inner side wall of thecabinet. In case of smoke inside the cabinet, an alarm is raised and sent to theBTS. The smoke detector is powered by + 12 VDC provided from the BTS.Alarm and DC power lines are wired to signal terminals.

5.2.3.7 Service Light and AC Power SocketA service light and integral 230 VAC power socket are fitted at the top of thecabinet, both protected by one common 6 A MCB.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 507 / 910


5.2.3.8 RIBATThe RIBAT is a printed circuit board for remote inventory and temperaturesupervision of the battery. Up to three RIBAT boards (one for each battery unit)can be fitted in one cabinet. The boards are placed on a 19” panel and fittedabove the distribution box on the top. Each RIBAT reports the supervision resultat a dedicated address (for more information, see RIBAT (Section 12.29)).RIBAT boards are powered by + 5 VDC provided from the BTS. RIBATs areconnected to the XBCB bus in the BTS via the CA-RIBEO cable.

5.2.3.9 Document HolderThe document holder is attached to the inner side of the door or side wall tostore A4 documents.

5.2.4 External Battery Cabinet Outdoor Interfaces

5.2.4.1 A9100 MBS Outdoor InterfacesThe following intrerfaces are available for A9100 MBS Outdoor and olderBTS cabinets:

AC 230VTN-S, TN-C, TT power systems are used, 3- or 5-wire (L,N,PE). Voltagerange is -150 - 280 V AC and overvoltage protection class II installed ineach BTS cabinet

External DC 48V (charging voltage)AC/DC rectifiers PM12 are designed for permanent connection to DCload and backup battery (DC bus)

Nominal voltage: -48V DC (0V pole connected to PE in BTS cabinet)

Voltage range Ufloat: -52.5 to –57V temperature regulated

2-wire system (floating) connection to external battery.

Voltage setting

Cell voltage at 20�C (battery manufacturer’s recommendation) can be set bymeans of Local Terminal in a commissioning mode

Cell voltage range 2.20V to 2.35V in step 0.01V

Default setting 2.29 V/cell.

Charge current limitation

Maximum charge current can be set by means of Local Terminal in acommissioning mode:

Limitation range: 0A to 15.5A in step 0.5A

Default setting: 8A.

Boost chargeNot applicable.Temperature regulationSee XBCB Interface.Overvoltage protectionDC bus is not overvoltage protected. It is strongly requested to route DCwires between BTS cabinet and external battery in a metallic cable trayconnected to site common bonding network (CBN).DC wiring

508 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


Maximum length of wires 10 m Wire cross section must be chosen to be inline with (in general 16 or 25 mm2):

Maximum allowed DC voltage drop 2V

Used MCB 70A inside BTS cabinet

Wire load capability.

XBCBNeeded for temperature regulation of charging voltage. XBCB is an externalconnection to BTS Control Bus with BTS specific requirements. Next toexternal battery PBA RIBAT 3BK 25133 AAAA must be placed.

The RIBAT connections are:

Temperature sensor

XBCB cable to BTS

RIBAT termination.

AlarmOptional interface used when an external equipment has to be supervisedby BTS OMC (e.g. door of ext. enclosure, cooling equipment, smokedetector etc., if any).Up to three external alarm inputs can be connected using dedicatedovervoltage protected terminals inside of BTS.

External alarm interface characteristics:

Electromechanical contacts or optocoupler, floating

Normal closed - alarm loop conductive in normal status (no alarm).

GroundingAll collocated equipment, antenna pole and feeders, BTS cabinet, externalequipment, cable trays, must be properly connected to the site commonbonding network (CBN) in shortest possible way.

5.2.4.2 A9100 MBS Evolution Outdoor InterfacesThe following intrerfaces are available for A9100 MBS Evolution Outdoorcabinet:

AC 230VTN-S, TN-C, TT power systems are used, 3- or 5-wire (L,N,PE). Voltagerange is -150 - 280 V AC and overvoltage protection class II installed ineach BTS cabinet.

External DC 48V (charging voltage)AC/DC rectifiers PM18 used in MBO Evolution cabinet are designed forpermanent connection to DC load and backup battery.

Nominal voltage- 48V DC (0V pole connected to PE in BTS cabinet)

Voltage range Ufloat = -52.5 to -57V temperature regulated

2-wire system (floating) connection to external battery.

Voltage setting

Cell voltage at 20�C (battery manufacturer’s recommendation) can be set bymeans of Local Terminal in a commissioning mode.

Cell voltage range 2.20V to 2.35V in step 0.01V

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 509 / 910


Default setting 2.29 V/cell.

Charge current limitationMaximum charge current can be set by means of Local Terminal in acommissioning mode.Limitation range 1A to 31A in step of 1A.Default setting 8A.Boost chargeBoost charge mode (charging with elevated voltage) can be selected bymeans of Local Terminal in a commissioning mode. Boost charge returnsto float charge mode automatically after 5h time period or on demand byappropriate selection in Local Terminal in a commissioning mode.Temperature regulationPM18 temperture sensor must be connected to external battery. Connectionto PM18 is done by means of an extension cord. For routing the extensioncord same rules apply as for DC wires.Overvoltage protectionDC bus is not overvoltage protected. It is strongly requested to route DCwires between BTS cabinet and external battery in a metallic cable trayconnected to site common bonding network (CBN).DC wiring

Maximum length of wires 10 m. Wire cross section must be chosen to be inline with (in general 16 or 25 mm2):

Maximum allowed DC voltage drop 2V

Used MCB 80A inside PM18

Wire load capability.

XBCBNot applicable.

AlarmOptional interface used when an external equipment has to be supervisedby BTS OMC (e.g. door of ext. enclosure, cooling equipment, smokedetector etc., if any).Up to three external alarm inputs can be connected using dedicatedovervoltage protected terminals inside of BTS.

External alarm interface characteristics:

Electromechanical contacts or optocoupler, floating

Normal closed - alarm loop conductive in normal status (no alarm).

GroundingAll collocated equipment, antenna pole and feeders, BTS cabinet, externalequipment, cable trays, must be properly connected to the site commonbonding network (CBN) in shortest possible way.

510 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


5.2.4.3 External Battery Cabinet CablingThere following cables are used to connect an external outdoor battery cabinetwith a BTS and ground:

PC05B5, 3BK 25561 AAAA, AC Power Cable, 3x2.5 mm² in 100 m roll

PC25BL1D, 3BK 25995 AAAA, Power Cable (-48 V), 1x25 mm² bluein 100 m roll

PC25B1D, 3BK 08963 BAAA, Power Cable (0 V), 1x25 mm² black in 100

m roll

PC50YG1D, 3BK 08961 BAAA, Ground Cable, 50 mm² green/yellow

in 100 m roll

CA12058, 3BK 08965 AAAA, Alarm Cable, L907, 4 quads, 120 Ohmsin 100 m roll

CA-RIBEO, 3BK 26138 AAAA, RIBAT Cable external Battery outdoor.

All external cables listed above are fixed installation cables connected toterminals at both sides. Cable lengths depend on the local distance betweenthe battery cabinet and the BTS.

The CA-RIBEO cable is connected to the first RIBAT board at the batterycabinet side. At the BTS side, the cable is connected to the OUTC board via anXBCB connector. The mechanical design of the CA-RIBEO cable/connector isfound in External Cables (Section 17.2).

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 511 / 910


512 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

6 Standard Telecommunications Subrack


The sections are supported with diagrams and illustrations, where necessary.An illustration of the subrack is also included.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 513 / 910


6.1 STASR General InformationThe STASR is the standard telecommunications subrack for all BTS A9100configurations. The number of subracks used, and the types of plug-in modulesfitted into the subracks, is configuration dependent.

Each STASR plug-in module has a unique number which identifies its positionwithin the cabinet.

The number consists of:

Subrack number - coded on the subrack interconnecting ribbon cable

Slot position within subrack - coded on the subrack backplane PCB.

The possible plug-in modules can be:

TRE

SUMA/SUMP

Antenna Network modules: ANC, ANX, ANY

Power Supply equipment: ADAM, ADAM4, PM12

Microwave modules.

6.2 STASR Mechanical CharacteristicsThe following figure shows the STASR with no modules fitted.

Module Guide Rail

FANU Guide RailSubrack Fixing Lug

Hole for Camloc Fastener

Power Connector

Inter−subrack Connector

Backplane

Ground Connector

Module Connector

Module Connector

Figure 282: STASR Construction

For common information and dimensions refer to Subracks (Section 1.3).

The STASR has an integral backplane, which provides the electrical andsignaling interface for the modules. The backplane has nine connectors for theplug-in modules and three for the FANUs. An inter-subrack cable connector atthe top of the backplane is provided for multiple subrack configurations. Thepower connection consists of three FASTON connectors.

Refer to the STASR Electrical Description (Section 6.3) for a description of thesubrack backplane.

514 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


6.3 STASR Electrical DescriptionThe STASR is described below in terms of power supplies and grounding, thebackplane, and connectors and cables.

6.3.1 Power Supplies and Grounding

The STASR receives its -48/ -60 VDC supply from the cabinet DC distributionpanel, via the cabinet bus bar. Each module fitted within the STASR has its ownon-board DC/DC converter, except the ANY which is a passive RF module.

Ground continuity, between the subrack and the equipment rack, is ensured byusing earth linking straps. The straps are attached to the equipment rack busbar at one end and terminated on the subrack with a FASTON connector. Thesubrack is also fixed to the equipment rack with conductive self-tapping screws.

6.3.2 Backplane

The backplane is a multi-layer PCB. It distributes the -48/ -60 VDC, to powerthe subrack equipment, and the digital signals between the various plug-inmodules. The following figure shows a front view of the backplane and thepositions of the various connectors.

FANU Connectors

Module Connectors

Ribbon Cable Connector

Power Connectors

FACB Connectors

0 V −48 VGND

Equipment Label

FACB

X101 X102 X103 X104 X105 X106 X107 X108 X109

Connector Identity

X110 X111 X112

X116

X117

X113X100

Pin 1, Row A

Figure 283: STASR Backplane Connector Layout, Front View

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 515 / 910


6.3.3 Connectors and Cables

The following table lists and describes the STASR cables and connectors. Forconnector locations, see Figure 283.

Name Quantity Type and Description

ModuleConnectors

9 Millipacs Type 1.

FACBConnectors

2 2 x 6-pin male Header type connector.

2 x 16-pin male Header type connector.

The FACB connectors are linked to the FANU connectors via the backplaneprinted wiring.

FANUConnectors

3 Type R 1/3 30-M connectors.

Three FANU connectors are positioned at the bottom of the subrack backplane(see Figure 283).

Ribbon Cable 1 C 64 M (DIN 41612) connector.

The cable is used to interconnect multiple subracks (see Figure CIMI/CIDISubracks Interconnection Cable (184) and Figure 192). It is pre-equipped withthe correct number of connectors for the number of subracks deployed.

Power Cable 1 Three-core twin and earth, terminated with a three-in-one FASTON connector.

Table 52: STASR Connectors and Cables

The following table lists the module connectors and the associated modules.The symbol shows that the particular connector is a possible plug-in positionfor the associated module.

ConnectorSUMA SUMP ANC ANX ANY TRETREHP IDU

X101 - -

X102 - - - - - - -

X103 - - - - - -

X104 - - - - -

X105 - - - - - -

X106 - - -

X107 - - - - - -

X108 - - - - -

X109 - - - - - -

Table 53: STASR Module Connectors and Associated Modules

516 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

7 AC Power Subracks

7 AC Power Subracks

The sections are supported with diagrams and illustrations, where necessary.An illustration of each subrack is also included.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 517 / 910

7 AC Power Subracks

7.1 SRACDCThe SRACDC is the power subrack used for all BTS A9100 outdoorconfigurations with the PM08 power supply modules. It contains plug-inmodules which convert the AC mains supply into a 48 VDC supply. The plug-inmodules are fitted in predefined slots within the subrack.

SRACDC contains the following modules:

ACIB

ACRI

BACO

BCU1

Up to five PM08s

FANUs.

7.1.1 SRACDC Mechanical Characteristics

The following figure shows the SRACDC subrack with no modules fitted.

FANU Guide Rail

Subrack Fixing Lug


Backplane

FANU Connector

Module Connectors

Module Guide Rail

X106

X200 X201 X202

X100 X101 X102 X103 X104

Connector Identity

Pin 1, Row A

Figure 284: SRACDC Subrack Front View


The SRACDC has an integral backplane, which provides the electrical andsignaling interface for the modules. The backplane contains nine connectorsfor the plug-in modules and three for the FANUs.

518 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

7 AC Power Subracks

7.1.2 SRACDC Subrack Layout

Modules are fitted at the predefined positions shown in the following figure.

ACIBACRI

PM08/5

BACO

PM08/4 PM08/3 PM08/2 PM08/1 BCU1

Figure 285: SRACDC Module Positions

There are five PM08 slots. The PM08s are identified by numbers in the range 1to 5, as shown.

7.1.3 SRACDC Electrical Description

The SRACDC is described below in terms of power supplies and grounding, thebackplane, and connectors and cables.

7.1.3.1 Power Supplies and GroundingThe SRACDC power supply system subrack is fixed to the equipment rackwith conductive self-tapping screws. Ground continuity is maintained by themetal fittings and securing brackets.

The SRACDC is isolated from the AC supply voltage. The 230 VAC supplyfrom the ACSB connects directly to the AC IN connector on the front of ACIB(see the following figure). From there it connects to the front of the PM08swhere it is converted to 0/ -48 VDC.

The DC is connected to the SRACDC backplane for distribution to:

BACO for charging the optional batteries

DCDP for further distribution to the STASR subracks, XIOB and HEX2s.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 519 / 910

7 AC Power Subracks

7.1.3.2 BackplaneThe SRACDC backplane distributes the 0/ -48 VDC to the subrack equipmentthat requires it. Two power cables carry the DC power to the equipment externalto the SRACDC. The following figure shows a rear view of the backplane andthe positions of the various connectors.

FANU Connector

0/−48 VDC Power Out Connectors

Module Connector

X203

X204R

211

X203

−48V

0V

X204

R201

Figure 286: SRACDC Backplane Connector Layout Rear View

7.1.3.3 Connectors and CablesThe following table lists and describes the SRACDC subrack cables andconnectors. For connector locations, see Figures SRACDC Subrack Front View(284) and SRACDC Backplane Connector Layout Rear View (286).


Module Connectors 6 H15-F (DIN 41612).

The connectors are used by the PM08s and the BACO.

Module Connectors 3 R64-M-a-c (DIN 41612).

The connectors are used by the ACRI, BACO and BCU1.

FANU Connectors 3 Type R 1/3 30-M connectors.

Three FANU connectors are positioned at the bottom of the subrackbackplane (see Figure 286).


The cable is used to interconnect multiple subracks. It is pre-equippedwith the correct number of connectors for the number of subracksdeployed.

Power Cables 2 60 A power terminals M5 x 8.

The cables carry the 0/-48 VDC to the interconnection panel.

Table 54: SRACDC Connectors and Cables

520 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

7 AC Power Subracks

7.2 ACSRThe ACSR is the power subrack used for BTS A9100 outdoor configurationswith PM11 power supply modules. ACSR contains plug-in modules whichconvert the AC mains supply into a 48 VDC supply. The plug-in modules arefitted in predefined slots within the subrack.

ACSR contains the following modules:

BAC2

BCU2

Up to four PM11s

FANUs.

7.2.1 ACSR Mechanical Characteristics

The following figure shows the ACSR subrack with no modules fitted.

FANU Guide Rail


FANU Connector

Module Connectors

Subrack Fixing Lug

Backplane

Module Guide Rail

Pin 1, Row A

Figure 287: ACSR Subrack Front View


The ACSR has an integral backplane, which provides the electrical andsignaling interface for the modules. The backplane contains six connectors forthe plug-in modules and two for the FANUs.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 521 / 910

7 AC Power Subracks

7.2.2 ACSR Subrack Layout


PM11/1 BCU2BAC2 PM11/4 PM11/3 PM11/2

Figure 288: ACSR Module Positions

There are four PM11 slots. The PM11s are identified by numbers in the range 1to 4, as shown.

7.2.3 ACSR Electrical Description

The ACSR is described below in terms of power supplies and grounding, thebackplane, and connectors and cables.

7.2.3.1 Power Supplies and GroundingThe ACSR power supply system subrack is fixed to the equipment rack withconductive self-tapping screws. Ground continuity is maintained by the metalfittings and securing brackets.

The ACSR is connected to the AC supply voltage. The 230 VAC supply fromthe ACSB connects to the ACSR backplane. From there it connects to thePM11s where it is converted to 0/ -48 VDC.

The DC is connected to the ACSR backplane for distribution to:

BAC2 for charging the optional batteries

BOBU for further distribution to the STASR subracks, XIOB and HEX2s.

522 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

7 AC Power Subracks

7.2.3.2 BackplaneThe ACSR backplane distributes the 230 VAC supply from the ACSB tothe PM11s. The backplane also distributes the 0/ -48 VDC to the subrackequipment that requires it.

One five-wire power cable carries the AC power from the ACSB to thebackplane. Two power cables carry the DC power to the equipment external tothe ACSR. The following figure shows a rear view of the backplane and thepositions of the various connectors.

FANU Connector 0/−48 VDC Power Out Connectors

Module Connector

GND(M5 Bolt)

230 VACPower In

Connectors

L1 L3NL2

Figure 289: ACSR Backplane Connector Layout Rear View

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 523 / 910

7 AC Power Subracks

7.2.3.3 Connectors and CablesThe following table lists and describes the ACSR subrack cables andconnectors. For connector locations, see Figures ACSR Subrack Front View(287) and ACSR Backplane Connector Layout Rear View (289).



The connectors are used by the PM11s and BAC2.


The connector is used by BCU2.


Two FANU connectors are positioned at the bottom of thesubrack backplane (see Figure 289).


The cable is used to interconnect multiple subracks. It ispre-equipped with the correct number of connectors for thenumber of subracks deployed.

AC Power Cables 1 Four FASTON connectors and one M5 x 8 terminal.

The cables carry the 230 VAC (L1, L2, L3, N, and GND) fromthe ACSB.

DC Power Cables 2 60 A power terminals M5 x 8.

The cables carry the 0/ -48 VDC to the interconnection panel.

Table 55: ACSR Connectors and Cables

524 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

7 AC Power Subracks

7.3 ASIBThe ASIB is the power subrack for the BTS A9100 indoor configurationspowered from an AC mains supply. It contains plug-in modules which convertthe AC mains supply into a 48 VDC supply. The plug-in modules are fitted inpredefined slots within the subrack.

7.3.1 ASIB Mechanical Characteristics

The following figure shows the ASIB subrack with no modules fitted.

FANU Guide Rail

Subrack Fixing Lug


Backplane

FANU Connector

Module Connectors

Module Guide Rail

X106

X202X201 X250

X100 X101 X102 X103 X104

Connector Identity

Pin 1, Row A

X300

Figure 290: ASIB Front View

For common information and dimensions, refer to Subracks (Section 1.3).

The ASIB has an integral backplane, which provides the electrical and signalinginterface for the modules. The backplane has nine connectors for the plug-inmodules and three for the FANUs.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 525 / 910

7 AC Power Subracks

7.3.2 ASIB Layout


APOD ACRI

PM08/5

ABAC

PM08/4 PM08/3 PM08/2 PM08/1 BCU1

Figure 291: ASIB Module Positions

There are five PM08 slots. The PM08s are identified by numbers in the range 1to 5, as shown.

7.3.3 ASIB Electrical Description

The ASIB is described below in terms of power supplies and grounding, thebackplane, and connectors and cables.

7.3.3.1 Power Supplies and GroundingThe ASIB is isolated from the AC supply voltage. The 230 VAC supply from theAFIP connects via the backplane to the APOD. From there it connects to thefront of the PM08s where it is converted to 0/ -48 VDC.

The DC is connected to the ASIB backplane for distribution to:

ABAC for charging the optional batteries

Cabinet cable trunk for further distribution to the STASR subracks.

The subrack is fixed to the equipment rack with conductive M6 screws. Groundcontinuity is maintained by the metal fittings and securing brackets.

526 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

7 AC Power Subracks

7.3.3.2 BackplaneThe backplane distributes the 0/ -48 VDC to the subrack equipment thatrequires it. Four power cables carry DC power to the equipment external tothe ASIB. The following figure shows a rear view of the backplane and thepositions of the various connectors.

FANU Connector

Module Connector

Figure 292: ASIB Backplane Connector Layout Rear View

7.3.3.3 Connectors and CablesThe following table lists and describes the ASIB subrack cables and connectors.For connector locations, see Figures ASIB Front View (290) and ASIBBackplane Connector Layout Rear View (292).



The connectors are used by the PM08s and the ABAC.


The connectors are used by the ACRI, ABAC and BCU1.


Three FANU connectors are positioned at the bottom of the subrackbackplane (see Figure 292).


The cable is used to interconnect multiple subracks. It is pre-equippedwith the correct number of connectors for the number of subracksdeployed.

Power Cables 4 60 A power terminals M5 x 8.

The cables carry the 0/ -48 VDC to the interconnection panel.

Table 56: ASIB Connectors and Cables

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 527 / 910

7 AC Power Subracks

528 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

8 Station Unit Modules


The sections are supported with diagrams, where necessary, showing thefunctional blocks and their interfaces.

A drawing of the physical appearance of the module is also included, showingLED indicators, connectors and controls.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 529 / 910


8.1 Introduction to Station Unit ModulesThe SUMP/SUMA provides the central management and control of all theBTS A9100 modules.

It is responsible for the following functional areas:

Digital transmission

Timing and clock generation

Management of the BTS internal digital interfaces

O and M functions

RI

Control of the AC/DC converters and check of the batteries (SUMA only).

The following figure gives an overview of all the interfaces connected to theSUMP/SUMA.

Other Abis flows(6)

Qmux(4) SUMA/

OML(1)

CLKI (13)

TRE

FAN

:BTS Terminal

BCB(11)

RSLi(7), TCHi(8)

IOM(10), IOM−CONF(9)

Externaltool

XGPS (15)

RSL(2),TCH(3)

TSC

IOM(10), IOM_CONF(9)

RCB(5)

CA

REL_CON(18)

BSC

GPS

EBCB(12)

AC/DC

XCLK(14)

XBCB(12)

AN

Battery

MMI(17)

InternalGPS

receiver

IGPS (16)

Battery

BTSBTS

G1/G2/A9100EXT CLK ref

SUMP

BTS A9100

*)

*) for SUMA only

*)

Figure 293: The SUMP/SUMA in its Environment

The following table provides information relative to the links mentioned in thefigure above. All external links connected to the CA in Figure 293 are routedthrough the CA to the SUMA/SUMP.

Note: The AN, ANX, ANY, ANC modules are connected to the BCB, but only the ANXand ANC are connected to IOM and IOM_CONF.

530 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


Link 1 Comment

OML L The link carries O and M messages between the BSC and BTS. The link is routedby the SUMP/SUMA from/to Abis to/from BSII.

RSL L These links are transparently routed by the SUMP/SUMA from/to Abis

TCH L To/from the BSII.

Qmux L This link is used for the remote transmission O and M between the TSC and theTransmission part of the BTS.

RCB L This link is used to control the ring functions between the BIEs by managing F, S,R, FEA, AIS bits.

Other Abisflows

L All the other flows carried by the Abis are transparently routed in Abis ring or dropthrough the SUMP/SUMA.

RSLi L The Radio signaling Link is for TRE telecom function.

TCHi L The Traffic Channel is for TRE telecom function.

IOM_CONF L It is used to broadcast the IOM configuration by the SUMP/SUMA.

IOM L This link carries O and M messages exchanged between the SUMP/SUMA andother BTS modules connected on the IOM.

These links are used for BTS internal O and M between SUMP/SUMA and otherBTS equipment.

BCB P The link is connected to other BTS modules and allows the BTS Remote Inventorysupported by SUMP/SUMA.

XBCB(EBCB)

P The link is connected to the external tool for Remote Inventory. XBCB is changedinto EBCB in between SUMP/SUMA and CA.

When the SUMP/SUMA is powered off, the BTS module Remote Inventoryinformation is reported to the external tool through the EBCB. This feature is usedonly at factory level.

When the SUMP/SUMA is powered on, the alarms from XIOB are reported toSUMP/SUMA through the EBCB.

CLKI P This link distributes BTS internal synchronizing signals to TRE and AN.

XCLK P The link carries BTS external clock synchronization signals for either the masteror slave configuration.

XGPS P These flows are used in order to communicate with the GPS system.

It is External GPS when the GPS system is outside the BTS and Internal GPSwhen it is plugged inside the SUMP/SUMA.

These flows carry the supervision interface of the GPS system (Configuration,Fault).

IGPS P These flows carry the GPS CLK reference.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 531 / 910


Link 1 Comment

MMI L This link is connected to a PC used as a BTS Terminal which includes the localBTS O and M application. it includes:

The download of software for SUMP/SUMA and other BTS downloadable

modules

The BTS commissioning tests

The O and M commands for the Transmission part of the SUMP/SUMA

The O and M commands for the Clock part of the SUMP/SUMA (for OCXO

calibration and OCXO tuning).

REL_CON P This relay command flow is used to control Abis relays. This flow has its ownphysical interface.

Table 57: SUMP/SUMA Interfaces

1) This column indicates for each link if it is a logical link (L) or a physical link (P).

The following figure shows the functional block diagram of the SUMP/SUMA.

XCLK

Abis 1

Abis 2

BSII Switch

and Timing

Transmission & Clock

XGPS CLK CLKI

External Interfaces

System Master Clock, TDMA Frame Clock and Frame Number Distribution to TRE and AN

BSII 0

BSII 1

O&MXRT

MMI

XBCB BCB

2 Mbit/s

2 Mbit/s

XGPS

HFFI

RI

2 Mbit/s2 Mbit/s

Internal Interfaces

2 Mbit/s

HFFI Hook for Future Interface: It consists of 4 Lines which are in the backplane and

2 Mbit/sBSII 2

(SUMA only)

which are free for future evolution.

Figure 294: SUMP/SUMA Basic Architecture

532 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


The SUMP/SUMA provides a switchable 2 Mbit/s duplex connection betweenthe Abis Interface and the BSII. The BSII is used to transfer TCH information tothe TRE module, and O and M information to the OMU/SUM microprocessor.SUMA has an additional BSII 2 interface. This is used exclusively to carryTCH information.

The SUMP/SUMA comprises the following functional blocks:

Transmission and Clock

BSII

OMU

RI.

The SUMP uses two microprocessors, the SUMA only one to run thesoftware/firmware for the O and M and Transmission and Clock functions.

8.2 Transmission and Clock FunctionsThe SUMP/SUMA Transmission and Clock functions provide:

Clock selection and generation

Two 2 Mbit/s interfaces to the BSC, via a PCM link.

The following figure shows the Transmission and Clock architecture.

XCLK

Abis 1

Abis 2

CLK Framer

Time Slot Switch

CLK Framer

Abis 3

Abis 4

CLK

CLK

Optional with Piggy−back Board

XGPS CLK CGU

Time Slot Switch

2 Mbit/s

2 Mbit/s

Framer

Framer

XGPS

TMMI

2 Mbit/s

2 Mbit/s

Transmission & Clock Micropro−

cessor (*)

BSII 0

BSII 1

CLKI

BSII 2

(SUMAonly)(*) for SUMA part of the SUM processor

Figure 295: SUMP/SUMA Transmission and Clock Architecture

The principal functional components and interfaces of the Transmission andClock are as follows:

Abis Interface

Transmission and Clock microprocessor

CGU

Q1 link.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 533 / 910


8.2.1 Abis Interface

The Abis Interface is the digital interface to the BSC. The SUMP/SUMAprovides two G.703 Abis Interfaces.

They support the following communications links:

TCH, which carries speech and/or data

OML, which uses a LAPD protocol

RSL, which carries signaling data for the telecommunications functions

Q1 Link, which carries transmission management data.

Relays, mounted on the cabinet interconnection panel, are used to route theAbis links transparently if the SUMP/SUMA is switched off.

The Abis Interface consists of the functional entities shown in the following table.

Clock Recovery The Clock circuit recovers timing from the PCMlink.

Framer Device The Framer is responsible for:

Insertion of frame/multiframe synchronizationpatterns

Monitoring frame and multiframe

synchronization

HDB3 coding/decoding for PCM

AIS detection

Frame and CRC error detection.

The Framer can be configured for CRC by theTransmission and Clock/SUM microprocessor, viathe Time Slot Switch.

Time Slot Switch The Time Slot Switch is responsible for mappingthe 64 kbit/s time slots onto the TCH. The switchis configured by the Transmission and Clock/SUMmicroprocessor.

Loop-back Relays Relays on the SUMP/SUMA provide a loop-backon the Abis Interface for testing the Abis links.

Table 58: SUMP/SUMA, Abis Interface Functional Entities

Two additional Abis Interfaces can be implemented with a ’Piggy-back’ board(SUMA only). This is an optional feature of the BTS A9100.

534 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


8.2.2 Transmission and Clock Microprocessor

In case of SUMA the Transmission and Clock functions run on the only SUMmicroprocessor.

The Transmission and Clock microprocessor controls the transmission andclock functions on the SUMP/SUMA. It consists of a QUICC (SUMP) orPowerQUICC (SUMA), with access to the RAM and to the EEPROM.

The external signal connected to the microprocessor is the XGPS, forcontrolling a GPS receiver.

8.2.3 Station Unit Module Clock Generation Unit

The functions of the clock generation unit consist of the:

Generation of the GSM clock by an internal OCXO for TRE and ANmodules in the BTS

Possibility to synchronize the OCXO:

On an external clock reference coming from (Slave synchronization -

Slave BTS) another BTS (G1, G2, BTS A9100)

On the Abis clock (PCM synchronization - Master BTS)

On the GPS CLOCK receiver (GPS synchronization - Master BTS)

No synchronization (OCXO in free run mode) (OCXO free running -

Master BTS).

Generation of both frame clock and frame number for TRE and AN modules

in the BTS:

For the Master BTS, it is a local generation

For Slave BTS, both frame clock and frame number are aligned on

those provided by the Master BTS.

Distribution through the CLKI of GSM clock, frame clock and frame number

OCXO calibration (which is done on time in the factory and consists of the

measurement of the OCXO curve and is stored in the SUM EEPROM)

OCXO tuning (which consists of the change of the OCXO tuning value)

Possibility to synchronize other BTSs (G1 BTS, G2 BTS, BTS A9100).

In the case of ’OCXO free running’, an on-site periodic electronic tuning isnecessary. (For further information, refer to the Evolium BTS A9100/A9110Corrective Maintenance Handbook).Regarding ’GPS synchronization’, the SUMA hardware is ready to have aGPS receiver plugged in.’GPS synchronization’ concerns frequency synchronization and timesynchronization (so that all BTSs have the same Frame Number).

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 535 / 910


8.2.4 Q1 Link

The Q1 link is a logical link routed via the Abis Interface, the Time Slot Switch,the BSII switch and the BSII to the OandM functions. The OandM functionsare performed remotely by the BSC TSC, via the Q1 link, or locally via aBTS Terminal.

All BTS A9100 transmission equipment have Q1 addresses, which identifythem to the TSC. The transmission equipment is supervised by the TSCusing the Q1 protocol.

The TSC, or a local BTS Terminal, can interrogate the SUMP/SUMA for thefollowing data:

Performance measurement

Alarms

Abis clock source

Loop request

Firmware version

Hardware version.

The Q1 link is also used for software downloads, for configuration purposes.

536 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


8.3 Base Station Internal InterfaceThe BSII is an internal digital interface to the TRE module.

The BSII bus consists of three 2 Mbit/s full duplex links:

BSII 0

BSII 1

BSII 2.

The BSII basically consists of the following two functional components:

BSII PLLThe BSII PLL is logically a part of the CGU. It locks the BSII CLK to a fixedfrequency of 2.048 MHz. The clock is then distributed to the Transmissionand Clock/SUM microprocessor, and an NGISL device. Distribution isvia the SUMP/SUMA Glue Logic.The NGISL device is an ASIC, providing an internal serial link to the RemoteInventory EEPROM. It also performs serial-to-parallel conversion, to allowthe OMU microprocessor access to the EEPROM.

BSII Switch

The BSII switch performs the following functions:

Distribution of the system clock, TDMA frame clock and FN

64 kbit/s time slot mapping

Q1 message routing.

The BSII switch is implemented with a CPLD, which is a part of the GlueLogic. Its main function is to select between BSII 0, BSII 1 and BSII 2,which are the internal interfaces for O and M data distribution and uplinkand downlink TCH.The data is multiplexed, via line drivers, onto the internal interfaces undercontrol of the Transmission and Clock/SUM microprocessor. The Glue logicmonitors the status of the BSII PLL via a lock detect signal. The drivers aredisabled if the PLL is not locked to the BSII clock.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 537 / 910


8.4 Operations and Maintenance FunctionsThe O and M functions include:

Starting the BTS A9100

Configuring the BTS A9100, under control of the BSC

Executing maintenance commands

Filtering and correlating faults

Reporting, and acting on, the status of the modules

Controlling the PM12s, depending on the battery status (SUMA only).

The OMU/SUM microprocessor performs the following O and M functions:

Configuration management

Fault management

Performance management

Configuration and supervision of the BSII

Routing MMI messages to the Transmission and Clock microprocessor

(SUMP only)

Test facilities.

The O and M architecture is shown in the following figure. It consists of thefollowing functional entities:

OMU microprocessor for SUMP and for SUMA as part of the SUM processor

SDRAM

Flash EEPROM

NGISL ASIC

Glue logic.

MMI

Control Bus

XRT

Address & Data Bus

BSII

Reset

Flash EEPROM

SDRAM

NGISLGlue Logic

LEDs

External Interfaces

Remote Inventory

OMUMicroprocessor

(*)

BCB

(*) for SUMA part of the SUM processor

Figure 296: SUMP/SUMA, O and M Architecture

538 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


8.4.1 BTS Control Bus

Most of the internal control functions are managed via the BCB. The BCB alsointerfaces to an EEPROM which holds inventory information on the BTSA9100 modules.

The BCB is used for the following functions:

Accessing the RI

Detecting module insertion/extraction

Collecting alarm/data

Controlling the battery and PM12s (SUMA only).

The BCB is also used for:

Remote bit settingRemote bit setting consists of setting memory bits to control, disable orreset certain hardware. There are eight such BCB bits available, one ofwhich is reserved for power supply control

Boundary scanningBoundary scanning allows remote access to a particular module, via aboundary scan path. This facility can be used to reprogram the module’sinitialization sequence. For example, by downloading fresh data to anon-board Flash EEPROM.

8.4.2 OMU Microprocessor

In the SUMA, the O and M functions only run on the SUM processor.

The OMU microprocessor controls the O and M functions on the SUMP.

It is a Power QUICC device, with access to the following memory devices:

SDRAM, organized as 32 bits wide and accessible in 8, 16 or 32 bit words

Flash EPROM providing memory that is 32 bits wide.

The external signals connected to the microprocessor are:

MMI - for connecting a BTS terminal

XRT - for radio supervision and loop tests.

8.4.3 Glue Logic

Glue logic, implemented as a PLA, supports the CPU and connects the variousfunctional blocks together.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 539 / 910


8.5 Remote InventoryThe Remote Inventory is related to an Alcatel standard. It consists of storingin non-volatile memory the basic information related to a module from thehardware (and possibly software) point of view. This information is availableout of the module even for unpowered modules.

The range of information goes from module manufacturing (serial number,manufacturing and repair history, ...) to module design (part number, hardwarecapability, firmware release...).

One part of the Remote Inventory is mandatory, while another is optional.

Access to the inventory information is ’remote’ because it is managedexternally to the module.

However, this access can be requested from different levels:

Module accessInventory of the unplugged (and so unpowered) modules through adedicated module connector

Internal BTS accessInventory of all BTS modules from a central node internal to the BTS(SUMP/SUMA). Only the SUMP/SUMA has to be powered.

External BTS accessInventory of all BTS modules from a central node external to the BTS(XBCB-connected tool). It is used at factory level when the complete BTS isunpowered (including the SUMP/SUMA).

For both internal and external BTS accesses, the BCB is used.

540 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


8.6 Station Unit Module Power SupplyThe SUMP is powered by two identical DC/DC converters. The DC/DCconverters work in parallel to provide all the voltages required by the SUMPcircuitry. This parallel mode of operation provides redundancy. If one DC/DCconverter fails, the other is capable of supplying all the necessary SUMPvoltages.

The SUMA is powered by a single, highly reliable DC/DC converter.

The SUMP/SUMA DC/DC converters’ input/output voltages are shown inthe following table.

Voltage Value

V in -38.4 VDC min.

-72 VDC max.

-48 VDC to -60 VDC nom.

V out SUMP + 3.3 VDC ±3 %

+ 5.1 VDC ±3 %

+ 12 VDC ±10 %

V out SUMA + 3.3 VDC ±2 %

+ 5.1 VDC ±2 %

Table 59: SUMP/SUMA Input/Output Voltages

Normal operation of V out is unaffected by temperature fluctuations in therange -10o C to 70o C.

The power supply also has the elements described below.

Fuse The inputs of the power supply are protected by an on-boardfuse, located on the SUMP/SUMA board.

Protection The SUMP/SUMA power supply circuitry is protected againstshort circuit and accidental polarity inversion on its inputs.

Grounding Ground continuity for the module is achieved with groundpins on the subrack backplane which connect to the bus barground.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 541 / 910


8.7 Station Unit Module LEDsThere are eight LEDs on the SUMP front panel or six LEDs on the SUMAfront panel, which provide a visual indication of the operational status of theSUMP/SUMA module (see Figure 297). The following table describes eachLED and provides a definition of the various operational states.

LED Color Status Description SUMP SUMA

OML Yellow Status of the OML. X X

On Link connected.

Blinking Connecting link.

Off Link disconnected.

ABIS 1 Yellow Status of Abis1 forTransmission and Clock.

X X

On Abis 1 serviceable.

Blinking Failure detected on Abis1 .

Off Not configured or not used.

O and M Yellow O and M status for the OMU. X X

On Operational.

Blinking In a transient state, beforereaching the operationalstate.

Off Not used.

ABIS 2 Yellow Status of Abis2 forTransmission and Clock.

X X


Blinking Failure detected on Abis2 .


OMU (forSUMP)

Red OMU alarm status. X X

FAULT (forSUMA)

On Fatal alarm or module isunserviceable.

Blinking Non-fatal alarm.

Off No alarm.

542 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


LED Color Status Description SUMP SUMA

Transmission and Clockalarm status.

X -

On Fatal alarm or module isunserviceable.

Blinking Non-fatal alarm.

TransFAULT

Off No alarms.

PS1 (forSUMP)

Green Converter 1 status. X X

ON (forSUMA)

On Converter 1 serviceable.

Off Converter 1 faulty.

PS2 Green(SUMP only)

Converter 2 status. X -

On Converter 2 serviceable.

Off Converter 2 faulty.

ABIS 3 Yellow Status of Abis 3 forTransmission and Clock.

- (X)


Blinking Failure detected on Abis 3.


ABIS 4 Yellow Status of Abis 4 forTransmission and Clock.

- (X)


Blinking Failure detected on Abis 4.


Table 60: SUMP/SUMA LED Descriptions

(X) Optional, if piggy-back board is connected on the SUMA board.

Note: During a reset of the OMU microprocessor, all the red and yellow LEDs arelit for approximately 100 ms. This is a test of the LEDs to make sure theyare all working.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 543 / 910


8.8 Station Unit Module Front PanelThe following figure shows the SUMP and SUMA front panels.

ABIS1

ABIS2

Trans FAULT

PS2

OML

O&M

PS1

OMU

Abis 1/2Connector

BTS Connection Area Connector

BTS Terminal Connector

TestConnector

ModuleExtractors

Camloc Fasteners

LEDs

Equipment Label

Abis 3/4Connector

Optional Piggy−back Board

LEDs

GPSConnector

LEDs

SUMP SUMA

USB Connector

Figure 297: SUMP/SUMA Front Panel

544 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


The following table describes the SUMP/SUMA front panel connectors.

Connector Type Description SUMP SUMA

Abis 1/2 9-pinSub-Dfemale

Provides two Abis Interfaces. The connector ispre-equipped for both 75 and 120 impedancecables. The impedance is selected by the type of cableconnector used.

Two more Abis Interfaces are possible with a piggy-backboard.

X X

Abis 3/4 9-pinSub-Dfemale

Provides two Abis Interfaces on SUMA piggy-backboard. The connector is pre-equipped for both 75 and120 impedance cables. The impedance is selectedby the type of cable connector used.

- X

BTSConnectionArea

37-pinSub-Dfemale

Provides the following digital interfaces:

XBCB

XRT

XGPS

XGPS CLKX

CLK1

Abis relay control.

X X

BTSTerminal

9-pinSub-Dfemale

For connecting a computer terminal. It provides aV.24 asynchronous serial interface, which can be usedfor local maintenance and configuration purposes.Presence of a terminal is automatically detected.

X X

BTSTerminal

USBport

For connecting a computer terminal. It provides ahigh-speed serial interface, which can be used for localmaintenance and configuration purposes. Either theV.24 interface or the USB interface can be connected toa BTS Terminal, but not both. Presence of a terminalis automatically detected.

- X

Test 9-pinSub-Dmale

Provides remote access to the OMU and Transmissionand Clock microprocessors (in case of SUMP) and tothe SUM processor (in case of SUMA) for factory testpurposes.

X X

GPS SMAfemale

Provides a synchronization output from an optionalon-board GPS receiver.

- X

Table 61: SUMP/SUMA Front Panel Connectors

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 545 / 910


546 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

9 Transceiver Equipment


The sections are supported with diagrams showing the functional blocksand their interfaces.

A drawing of the physical appearance of the module is also included, showingLED indicators, connectors and controls.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 547 / 910


9.1 Single Transceiver Equipment

9.1.1 Introduction to Transceiver Equipment

The TRE combines digital baseband and analog RF functions in one module.

The architecture is split into three functional blocks:

Digital part TRED

Analog part TREA with the power amplifier TEPAxx (forTADH/TAGH/TRAD/TRADE/TRAG/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAP),

TEPADHE (for TADHE) or TREPAxx (for TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPM)

Power supply TREP (for TRDH, TRDM, TRGM,TRPM), TREPS (for TRAG/TRAD), or TREPSH (for

TADH/TRADE/TADHE/TAGH/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAP).

In the TADH/TRADE/TADHE/TAGH/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAD/TRAG/TRAL/TRAPTRE variants TRED and TREA are implemented in one submodule (TREDAx).

The TRE basic architecture is shown in the following figure.

TREA

TREPxx

TRED

T(R)EPAxx to

from

ANCx

TREDAx (for TADH/TRAD/TRAG/TRAL/TRAP)TREDAxE (for TRADE/TADHE/TRAGE/TAGHE)

Figure 298: TRE Basic Architecture

The TRE performs the digital functions interface to the SUM and the analogfunctions interface to the AN module. The TRE contains its own integratedpower supply.

548 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


The following types of TRE modules are available for the different BTS A9100variants:

TADH, TRE high power module for GSM 1800

TAGH, TRE high power module for GSM 900

TRAD, TRE medium power module for GSM 1800

TRADE, TRE module medium power for GSM 1800, enhanced 8-PSK power

TADHE, TRE high power module for GSM 1800 GMSK and 8-PSK

TRAG, TRE medium power module for GSM 900

TRAGE, TRE module medium power for GSM 900, enhanced 8-PSK power

TAGHE, TRE high power module for GSM 900 GMSK and 8-PSK

TRAL, TRE medium power module for GSM 850

TRAP, TRE medium power module for GSM 1900

TRDH, TRE high power module for GSM 1800

TRDM, TRE medium power module for GSM 1800

TRGM, TRE medium power module for GSM 900

TRPM, TRE medium power module for GSM 1900.


9.1.2 Digital Functions

The following figures show a block diagram of the TRED hardware architecture.They show the functional blocks, relative to each other, and the interfaces tothe TRED. The shaded areas identify separate functional blocks, which areimplemented on the same hardware device.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 549 / 910


9.1.2.1 TRED Architecture of TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPM

DEC

SCP

DEM

Debug 2

CLKI

BCBT

FHL

ECPL

BSII 0

ETIMMI/Debug 1

CGU

DEM

BED

TXP

MUX CUL

ENCT

MBED

ETA

RI

LEDs

CUI

I2C

RCD RPI Power Switch/Reset

ENC

BSII 1

HFFI

ADR

Figure 299: TRED Architecture (TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPM)

The TRED (TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPM) consists of the following functionalentities (refer to the figure above):

Entity Control Parallel Link (ECPL)

signaling and Control Processor (SCP)

Decoder (DEC)

Demodulator (DEM)

Multiplexer, Baseband, Encryption and Decryption (MBED)

Encoder and Transmitter Processor (ENCT)

Carrier Unit Logic (CUL)

Clock Generation Unit (CGU)

External Test Adapter (ETA)

Remote Inventory (RI).

550 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


9.1.2.2 TRED Architecture of TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRADE, TADHE, TRAG, TRAGE,TAGHE, TRAL, TRAP

DEC

ENC

IRDM

DCOP

ECPL

DRCS

SCP

BBTX

ASIC

on TREAENCT

HFFI

FHL

IRDMC

TXP

DEM

DEM

BCB

ADR

CLKI

BSII0BSII1BSII2

CGU

RI

RCD RPI Power USB : MMISwit/Reset

ET

Debug

LEDs

I2C

FromIFFilter

To

I/QModulator

MUX BED

MBEDUBEL

Figure 300: TRED Architecture (TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRADE, TADHE,TRAG, TRAGE, TAGHE, TRAL, TRAP)

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 551 / 910


The TRED (TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TADHE, TRADE, TRAG, TRAGE, TAGHE,TRAL, TRAP) consists of the following functional entities (refer to the figureabove):

ECPL

SCP

DEC

DEM

Incremental Redundancy Data Memory (IRDM)

MBED, part of the UBEL

Decoder Co-processor (DCOP), part of the UBEL

IRDM Controller (IRDMC), part of the UBEL

United Baseband Logic (UBEL), containing the MBED, DCOP, and IRDMC

ENCT

CGU

RI

Baseband ASIC for Transmitter (BBTX), located on the TREA

Diversity Receiver Chip Set (DRCS), located on the TREA.

9.1.2.3 TRED System InterfacesThe TRED provides a number of system interfaces. The following table brieflydescribes each of them (see also Figures 299 and 300).

ADR Module address: provides a unique address to each module in the BTS. Used to set BCB physicalBCB terminal address and BSII HDLC address.

BCB Base station control bus: used for Remote Inventory (RI) read write and for controlling andsupervision of the power supply.

CLKI Clock interface: used to distribute the Evolium BTS A9100 master clock and the frame clockmultiplexed on the same line with the frame number in a serial format.

BSII Base station internal interface: transfers all TCH-related data (traffic and signaling) and internalO and M data. TADH/TAGH/TRAD/TRADE/TADHE/TRAG/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAP: threelinks, TRDH/TRDM/TRGM/TRPM: two links.

HFFI Hook for future interface, is a spare interface and can be used for future extensions.

FHL Frequency hopping link: used for downlink baseband frequency hopping.

RCD Remote cabling detection: detects DC voltage variations on the TREA receiver inputs.

RPI Remote power interface: consists of:

Power lines for TRED and TREA DC supply

On/off control of the power supply

Alarm handling for the TREP/TREPS/TREPSH DC input and DC output signals.

552 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


MMI/Debug1

Debug interface: for TRE (development and validation only).

Debug2

Debug interface: for TRE (development and validation only).

PSwitch/Reset

Manual front panel power switch: disables the TREP/TREPS/TREPSH for TRE maintenance(security function for actions on RF cables). Also used to generate the push button reset(PB_SRST) with fast off/on sequence.

LEDs Front panel LED control.

ETI Used to trace the ECPL, or access it with a test tool.

I2C Interface to the TREA EEPROM which stores the calibration and adjustment data.

CUI Transfers uplink and downlink TCH data, and configuration/control data between TRED andTREA.

USB Universal serial bus as known from the personal computer domain. It is used to channel the toolinterfaces ET/ISA, MMI, ALFS and Debug which are all targets for communication with a PC.

Table 62: TRED Interface Descriptions

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 553 / 910


9.1.2.4 Entity Control Parallel LinkThe ECPL is the main internal control bus. It provides a parallel interfacebetween the SCP and the other functional blocks in the TRED.

9.1.2.5 Signaling and Control ProcessorThe SCP performs Layer 2 and Layer 3 central processing for signaling and Oand M functions. Layer 2 performs O and M functions using LAPD protocols.Layer 3 performs general traffic management functions for the Air Interface.

The SCP consists of a Power QUICC device, supported by SDRAM andFlash Memory. The following figure shows a block diagram of the SCP and itsperipheral memory and logic devices.

LEDs

TRED Glue Logic

Data Bus

ETI

Address & Control Bus

I2CA

BSII

ECPL

MMI

Chip Select

Only TRGM, TRDM, TRDH, TRPMPower Switch/Reset

(only TRAx/TADH)USB

SDRAMFlash

Memory

ETA

SCPMicroprocessor

RI

Figure 301: TRED, SCP Functional Blocks

9.1.2.6 DecoderThe decoder performs uplink channel decoding, and interfaces the TRAUframes to the BSII. The hardware consists of a DSP and an SRAM.

The functions performed by the decoder are:

Soft-decision bit combining for antenna diversity (TRDH, TRDM, TRGM,TRPM)

Decryption and decryption process control

On the terrestrial link side:

Rate adaptation

TRAU frame adaptation.

On the radio channel side:

Channel decoding

Speech, data and signal de-interleaving.

Measurements preprocessing

In-band control of the demodulator.

554 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


Block Diagram The following figure shows a functional block diagram of the decoder.

Coded Uplink Data

Interrupt/Reset

Decoded Uplink Data

ECPL

To/From MBED

ECPL

DCOP

IRDMC

UBEL

IRDM

only TRAx/TADH

DSP and Memory

Figure 302: TRED, Decoder

Decoder DSP The decoder consists of a DSP and its associated SRAM.

The input to the decoder consists of a serial interface. The interface carriesclock, frame signals and the demodulated data from eight RF time slots.The DSP decodes and transmits eight full-rate or enhanced full-rate (or 16half-rate) TCHs to the BSII, via the MBED. Each full-rate channel can bereplaced by a GPRS channel.

The ECPL interface is used mostly for booting code during resets. Theinterrupt/reset interface sets the boot mode, and later provides frame andtime slot interrupts.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 555 / 910


9.1.2.7 Incremental Redundancy Data MemoryThe IRDM is required by the EGPRS feature to store demodulated packet datablocks for incremental redundancy function.

9.1.2.8 IRDM ControllerHardware and access control function for the IRDM. The IRDMC function isimplemented in the UBEL FPGA.

9.1.2.9 Decoder Co-processorThe DCOP is a slave of the DEC used to enhance signal processing functionswhich are more efficiently implemented in a FPGA than in a DSP. Theintroduction of the DCOP is linked to the EGPRS feature. The DCOP function isimplemented in the UBEL FPGA.

9.1.2.10 DemodulatorThe demodulator demodulates the uplink channels.

The functions performed are:

Antenna diversity combining

(TADH/TAGH/TRAD/TRADE/TADHE/TRAG/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAP)

Radio link measurements on a burst basis

Using control information provided by the decoder:

Preprocessing

Channel demodulation

Equalization of the received signals.

DC offset compensation.

Block Diagram The following figure shows a functional block diagram of the demodulator.

DSP and Memory

DSP and Memory

Modulated Input from CUL/DRCS

Interrupt/Reset

Demodulated Output to MBED

ECPL

Figure 303: TRED Demodulator

Demodulator DSPs The demodulator consists of two DSPs, each of which has its own SRAM.

The inputs to the demodulator consist of two serial interfaces. The interfacescarry clock, frame signals and the data from eight RF time slots. Each DSPdemodulates eight full-rate or enhanced full-rate (or 16 half-rate) TCHs forone antenna path.

It demodulates either access or normal bursts (TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPM). Itcombines and demodulates either access or normal burst for both antenna paths(TADH/TAGH/TRAD/TRADE/TADHE/TRAG/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAP).

556 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


The ECPL interface is used almost exclusively for booting code during resets.The interrupt/reset interface sets the boot mode, and later provides frame andtime slot interrupts.

9.1.2.11 Multiplexer, Baseband, Encryption and DecryptionThe MBED functions are combined in a single FPGA.

The functions performed by the MBED are:

Multiplexing of baseband data

Baseband encryption

Baseband decryption

Interfacing digital processing functions on the TCH.

The following figure shows a functional block diagram of the MBED.

Timing Control

Frequency Hopping Link Block

BSII

Uplink and Downlink Multiplexer

Encoder Interface

Decoder Interface Demodulator

Interface

Ciphering

CLKI ECPL

FHLBSIIMultiplexer

To Encoder

To Decoder

To Demodulator

Figure 304: TRED, Multiplexer, Baseband, Encryption and Decryption

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 557 / 910


The following table gives a short description of each block.

Control The Control block is the main controlling function of the MBED. It contains several statusand control registers that are updated via the ECPL interface.

Timing The Timing block is connected to CLKI which carries the master clock, frame clock andframe number. The main role of the timing block is to:

Provide clocks for the DSPs

Retrieve the frame number and transfer it to the ECPL.

Ciphering The Ciphering block performs pattern generation according to the configurationinformation, that is:

A5 type

Encryption/decryption key

Frame number.

The configuration information is sent in band from the encoder/decoder. This means that itis possible to change the A5 algorithm and key on a call-by-call basis.

BSIIMultiplexer

The BSII Multiplexer selects between the BSII links for the uplink and downlink directions.The selection of the correct bits to be sent downlink, and the insertion of bits at the correctposition in uplink, is done by the DSPs.

Uplink andDownlinkMultiplexer

The Uplink Multiplexer handles two data flows:

Data from the decoder. Additionally, the uplink cipher key is forwarded to the cipheringblock

TCH data from the demodulator is forwarded to the decoder. The deciphering bits

coming from the ciphering block are added to this data stream.

The Downlink Multiplexer splits the data stream coming from the encoder:

In-band signaling from the TXP is forwarded to the demodulator, together with the

ARFCN

The downlink ciphering key is extracted and forwarded to the ciphering block. Theciphering bits from the ciphering block are sent back to the ENCT

The FHL data stream is forwarded to the FHL Interface.

FrequencyHoppingLink Block

The Frequency Hopping Link Block provides the interface to the FHL. If the FHL isconfigured and used, the data is sent to, and received from, the FHL. If the FHL is notconfigured, the downlink data is forwarded to the TXP.

DemodulatorInterface

The Demodulator Interface provides clock and frame signals for the demodulator DSPs.

DecoderInterface

The Decoder Interface provides the connection to and from the decoder. It also providesclock and frame signals to the decoder DSP.

EncoderInterface

The Encoder Interface provides the connection to and from the encoder and TXP. It alsoprovides clock and frame signals to the encoder DSP.

Table 63: TRE, MBED Functional Entities

558 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


9.1.2.12 Encoder and TransmitterThe ENCT receives the downlink TRAU frames from the BSII, performs channelencoding on them and transmits them to the TREA block. The hardwareconsists of a DSP and an SRAM.

The functions performed by the ENCT are:

On the terrestrial link side:

Rate adaptation

TRAU frames management

Transcoder time alignment.

On the radio channel side:

Channel coding

Speech, data and signaling interleaving.

Radio frequency hopping law computation for downlink and uplink

TREA control, including transmitter and receiver parts

FHL interface management if baseband hopping

Encryption and encryption process control.

The following figure shows a functional block diagram of the ENCT.

Encoder TXP

MBED CUL or BBTX

BSII MUX Uplink/Downlink MUX

DSP

Figure 305: TRED, ENCT Functional Block

Encoder The Encoder encodes the data for eight full-rate or enhanced full-rate (or 16half-rate) TCHs. Each full-rate channel can be replaced by a GPRS channel.This data is received from the MBED. The encoded data, ciphering configurationand the frequency number for the RF transmission, are sent to the MBED.

TXP The MBED sends the encoded data to the TXP for transmission on the AirInterface. It also sends the cipher bits coming from the ciphering block. TheTXP processes the data and extracts all additional information coming from theEncoder or FHL. The resulting data stream is sent to the CUL or BBTX.

9.1.2.13 Carrier Unit LogicFor TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPM only, the CUL adapts the ENCT DSP signalsto provide the various data and control lines required for the TREA. The CULconsists of an FPGA and some external drivers and registers.

9.1.2.14 Clock Generation UnitThe CGU consists of two PLLs: one for the BSII clock and one for the CLKIclock. It also provides an internal clock distribution function.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 559 / 910


9.1.2.15 External Test AdapterFor TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPM only, the ETA device contains its own internallogic and drivers which enables external test equipment to be connectedto the ECPL.

9.1.2.16 TRE Remote InventoryRemote Inventory is used to store information about the TRE module (partnumber, name, serial number, etc.). It consists of an EEPROM which isconnected to the BCB ASIC. The stored information is read via the BCB.

9.1.2.17 Baseband Transmitter ModuleFor TADH/TAGH/TRAD/TRADE/TADHE/TRAG/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAPonly, the BBTX adapts ENCT DSP signals to provide various data and controllines required for the TREA.

The BBTX consists of a mixed signal ASIC.

9.1.2.18 Diversity Receiver Chip SetFor TADH/TAGH/TRAD/TRADE/TADHE/TRAG/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAPonly: DRCS performs IF A/D conversion and digital filtering and decimation forboth antenna paths.

560 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


9.1.3 Analog Functions

The TRE analog part performs the analog functions within the TRE.

These functions are split between the two functional parts:

TRE analog part TREA

TRE power amplifier TREPAxx or TEPAxx.

For GSM 1900, the TRE analog part is called TREAP.

Depending on the frequency for the TRE power amplifier, there are differentvariants available:

TEPAD for GSM 1800, medium power

TEPADE for GSM 1800, medium power, enhanced 8-PSK power

TEPADH for GSM 1800, high power

TEPADHE for GSM 1800, high power GMSK and 8-PSK

TEPAG for GSM 900, medium power

TEPAGE for GSM 900, medium/high power, enhanced 8-PSK power

TEPAGH for GSM 900, high power

TEPAL for GSM 850, medium power

TEPAP for GSM 1900, medium power

TREPAGM for GSM 900, medium power

TREPADM for GSM 1800, medium power

TREPAPM for GSM 1900, medium power

TREPADH for GSM 1800, high power.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 561 / 910


9.1.3.1 Analog Architecture -TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPMThe following figure shows a block diagram of the TRE analog part hardwarearchitecture for the TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, and TRPM. It shows the functionalblocks and the interfaces to the TRED. The shaded areas define the TREAand TEPAxx (or TREPAxx) parts.

RF Loop

TXSynthesizer

1

TXSynthesizer

2

TX Power Regulation

Clean−up Oscillator

TX Power Amplifier

TX Driver Amplifier

FromENCTviaCUL(CUI)

To Combiner/Duplexer

TREA

TREPAxx

RX1

RX0

From Antenna Network

RF Mixer

RF Mixer

LNA

LNAIFFilter

Loop Coupling

To DEMon TRED

I/QDemodulator

I/QDemodulator

IFFilter

1ADC

BasebandFilter

BasebandFilter

ADC

RXSynthesizer

2

RXSynthesizer

TXMixer

Modulator&

Up−converter

IFFilter

BasebandModulator

I/Q

Q

I

viaCUL(CUI)

IFSynthesizer

Figure 306: TRE Analog Part Architecture (TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPM)

562 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


9.1.3.2 Analog Architecture -TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRAG, TRAL, TRAPThe following figure shows a block diagram of the TRE analog part hardwarearchitecture for the TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRAG, TRAL, and TRAP. It shows thefunctional blocks and the interfaces to the TRED. The shaded areas define theTREA and TEPAxx (or TREPAxx) parts.

LoopCoupling

RFLoop

Clean−upOscillator

RXSynth.

RXSynth.

RFMixer

IFFilter

IFFilter

Modulator&

Up−converter

IFSynthesizer

TX PowerRegulation

TX Synthesizer

2

TXSynthesizer

1

Mixer

LNA RX0

RFMixer

IFFilter

LNA RX1

TX DriverAmplifier

TX PowerAmplifier

BasebandModulator

DDC DRCS

BBTX

ADC

ADC

I

Q

To combiner

Duplexer

From AntennaNetwork

1

2

TEPAxx

To DEMon TRED

FromENCT

TREA

Digital part (positioned at analog module)

Transmitter part

Reveiver part

Figure 307: TRE Analog Part Architecture (TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRAG,TRAL, TRAP)

9.1.3.3 Analog Architecture - TRAGE, TAGHE, TRADE, TADHEThe following figure shows a block diagram of the TRE analog part hardwarearchitecture for the TRADE/TADHE/TRAGE/TAGHE. It shows the functionalblocks and the interfaces to the TRED. The shaded area defines the digital partpositioned on the analog module.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 563 / 910



RXSynth.

RXSynth.

RFMixer

IFFilter

Modulator&

Up−converter

TX PowerRegulation

TX Synthesizer

2

TXSynthesizer

1

LNA RX0

RFMixer

IFFilter

LNA RX1

TX DriverAmplifier

TX PowerAmplifier

BasebandModulator

DDC DRCS

BBTX

ADC

ADC

I

Q

To combiner

Duplexer

From AntennaNetwork

1

2

TEPAxx/TEPADHE

To DEMon TRED

FromENCT

TREA


Transmitter part

Reveiver part

Figure 308: TRE Analog Part Architecture (TRAGE/TAGHE/TRADE/TADHE)

564 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


9.1.3.4 TRE Analog Functional EntitiesThe following table gives a short description of each of the TRE analogfunctional entities.

Baseband Modulator The baseband modulator transforms the incoming digital data stream into twobaseband signals: I and Q. These baseband signals are fed to the up-converter.The modulation is GSMK modulation or EDGE*.

* for TADH/TAGH/TRAD/TRADE/TADHE/TRAG/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAP

I/Q Modulator andUp-converter

The I/Q baseband signals are fed to the up-converter. Then they aretransformed into the IF frequency band (211 MHz).

For TRAGE/TAGHE/TRADE/TADHE the I/Q baseband signals are directlytransformed into the RF frequency band.

Transmitter Amplifiers The TX amplification stages are physically split between the TREA and TEPAxx(or TREPAxx) sections (see Figure 306, Figure307 or Figure 308). The stagescomprise the following three components:

TX Driver AmplifierThe TX Driver Amplifier stage is located on the TREA. It consists of apreamplifier, power control circuitry, and a main amplifier. An isolatorprovides output impedance matching and protection for a low voltage FETon the output

Power RegulationThe Power Regulation stage is located on the TREA. It consists of a controlpath and a multiplexing detection path. An EEPROM is used to store datafor calibrating the transmitter output power.The control path consists of a 12-bit DAC. The detectionpath consists of a 12-bit ADC and a low-pass filter. (ForTADH/TAGH/TRAD/TRADE/TADHE/TRAG/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAP it isimplemented on the BBTX).

TX Power Amplifier.The TX Power Amplifier is located on the TEPAxx (or TREPAxx) part ofthe module. It provides the final amplification stage for the transmit RFsignal, from the TREA. It feeds the amplified RF signal to the AN module,as required.

Clean-up Oscillator The Clean-up Oscillator provides spectrally pure reference clocks required forsynchronization of the transmitters, receivers and synthesizers.

Transmitter HoppingSynthesizers

The Transmitter Hopping Synthesizers generate the RF frequencies for thetransmitter. There are two hopping synthesizers working in parallel. While onesynthesizer is active, the other selects the next transmission frequency.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 565 / 910


Receivers Two receivers are physically located on the TREA. The main functions of thereceivers for TRGM, TRDM, TRDH, TRPM are:

Low noise amplification

Down conversion

IF filtering

IQ demodulation

Baseband filtering

Baseband digitizing.

The main functions of the receivers for TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRADE, TADHE,TRAG, TRAGE, TAGHE, TRAL, TRAP are:


Down conversion

IF filtering

IF sampling

Digital I/Q demodulation

Digital Baseband filtering

Digital Decimation.

Receiver Synthesizers The Receiver Hopping Synthesizers generate the RF frequencies for thereceiver. There are two hopping synthesizers working in parallel. While onesynthesizer is active, the other selects the next receive frequency.

RF Loop The RF Loop provides an analog test loop between the transmitter andreceivers. It performs analog self-tests, mainly for start-up test purposes. TheRF Loop circuitry generates a frequency of 45 MHz (GSM 850/GSM 900), 95MHz (GSM 1800), or 80 MHz (GSM 1900) and converts the transmitter outputsignals to the receiver frequency.

The RF Loop functionality is physically split between the:

TREA, which contains the RF loop itself

TEPAxx (or TREPAxx), which contains the RF loop coupling function (see

Figure 306 and Figure 307).The RF Loop is removed in case of TRAGE/TAGHE/TRADE/TADHE (seeFigure 308).

Table 64: TRE Analog Part Functional Entities

566 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


9.1.4 TRE Power Supply

The TREP, TREPS, TREPSH are on-board power supplies, providing all thenecessary voltages and currents for the TRE analog and digital functions.

In the case of medium-power TREs, the power supply consists of one DC/DCconverter. For high-power TREs, the power supply contains an additionalDC/DC converter which provides a + 26 V supply for the high-power analogcircuits.

9.1.4.1 VoltagesFor normal operational requirements, the DC input voltage V in can be anyvalue between -38.4 VDC and -72 VDC. If the input is too low, the power supplyswitches off automatically. When the input voltage is restored, the power supplyswitches back on. If the input voltage falls below -38.4 VDC, the output ismaintained within the specified values, until the TRE power supply switches off.

The following table provides the TRE power supply output voltage parameters.

OutputVoltage Tolerance Min. Value Max. Value

TRE Version(1)

TRE Version(2)

TRE Version(3)

+ 3.3 V ±3 % 3.2 V 3.4 V X X X

+ 5.1 V ±3 % 4.95 V 5.25 V X -

-5.1 V ±3 % -4.95 V -5.25 V - X

+ 5.3 V ±3 % 5.14 V 5.46 V - X X

+ 12 V ±3 % 11.64 V 12.36 V X -

-12 V ±5 % -11.4 V -12.6 V X -

+ 26 V ±2 % 25.48 V 26.52 V X X X

(1): TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPM

(2): TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRAG, TRAL, TRAP

(3): TRAGE, TAGHE, TRADE, TADHE

Table 65: Output Voltage Parameters

9.1.4.2 FuseThe TRE power supply input is protected by a fuse with a high-breakingcapacity (15 A).

9.1.4.3 ON/OFF SwitchThe TRE module is equipped with an on/off power switch. It is a rocker typeswitch, fitted slightly below the front panel’s profile to prevent accidentalswitching.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 567 / 910


9.1.4.4 Remote SwitchingThe TREPS can be remotely switched on and off by the OMU, via the BCB. Thisfeature is implemented on the module with an optically isolated on/off switch.

9.1.4.5 Low Voltage AlarmsIf an output voltage falls below a preset threshold value, an alarm is raised. Thefollowing table gives the minimum and maximum threshold values. The valuesare measured across the output connector pins.

OutputVoltage Threshold Min. Threshold Max.

TRE Version(1)

TRE Version(2)

TRE Version(3)

+ 3.3 V 2.7 V 3.0 V X X X

+ 5.1 V 4.2 V 4.6 V X -

-5.1 V -4.2 V -4.6 V - X

+ 5.3 V 4.4 V 4.8 V - X X

+ 12 V 10.0 V 11.0 V X -

-12 V -10.0 V -11.0 V X -

+ 26 V 22.0 V 24.0 V X X X


(2): TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRAG, TRAL, TRAP

(3): TRAGE, TAGHE, TRADE, TADHE

Table 66: Low Voltage Alarm Thresholds

568 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


9.1.5 Transceiver Equipment LEDs

There are eight LEDs (TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPM) or six LEDs (TADH,TAGH, TRAD, TRADE, TADHE, TRAG, TRAGE, TAGHE, TRAL, TRAP) on thefront panel, which provide a visual indication of the operational status of theTRE module (see Figures 309 and 310). The following table describes eachLED their various operational states.

LED Color Status DescriptionTREVersion (1)

TREVersion (2)

RSL Yellow RSL connection status X X

On Link connected - -

Blinking Connecting link - -

Off Link disconnected - -

TX Yellow Transmission status (not BCCH) X X

On Transmitting on SDCCH, CBCH orTCH

- -

Blinking Emitting (normal operation) - -

Off Not transmitting - -

OP Yellow TRE operational status X X

On Fully operational - -

Blinking Initializing - -

Off Not operational - -

BCCH Yellow BCCH transmission status X X

On Transmitting - -

Off Not transmitting - -

FAULT Red Alarm status

(1): two LEDs connected in parallel

(2): one LED

X X

On Fatal alarm - -

Blinking Non-fatal alarm - -

Off No alarm - -

5 V POWER Green Status of the + 5 V power supply X

On + 5 V present - -

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 569 / 910


LED Color Status DescriptionTREVersion (1)

TREVersion (2)

Off + 5 V faulty - -

3.3 VPOWER

Green Status of the + 3.3 V power supply X -

On + 3.3 V present - -

Off + 3.3 V faulty - -

PWR Green Status of the TRE power supplyoutput voltages

- X

On Output voltages present - -

Off Output voltages faulty - -


(2): TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRADE, TADHE, TRAG, TRAGE, TAGHE, TRAL, TRAP

Table 67: TRE LED Descriptions

570 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


9.1.6 Transceiver Equipment Front Panel

The following figures show the TRE front panels.

9.1.6.1 Front Panel - TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, and TRPM

TX

BCCH

FAULT

3.3V POWER

TX

POWER

ENABLE

OFF

TEST

RX 0

RX 1

Transmitter Connector

On/OffRocker Switch

Module Extractor

Camloc Fasteners

TestConnector

LEDs

Receiver Connectors

Equipment Label

RSL

OP

5V

Figure 309: TRE Front Panel (TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPM)

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 571 / 910


9.1.6.2 Front Panel - TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRADE, TADHE, TRAG, TRAGE, TAGHE,TRAL, and TRAP

Camloc Fasteners

TransmitterConnector

On/OffRocker Switch

USB TestConnector

Module Extractor

ReceiverConnectors

LEDs

TX

BCCH

FAULT

RSL

0P

PWR

POWER

ENABLE

OFF

TESTEquipment

Labels

TX

RX0

RX1

Figure 310: TRE Front Panel (TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRADE, TADHE, TRAG,TRAGE, TAGHE, TRAL, TRAP)

9.1.6.3 ConnectorsThe following table describes the TRE front panel connectors.

Connector Description

Test Provides an interface to the TRE for factory test purposes.

572 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



TX Provides the transmit RF Interface to the AN module.

RX 0, RX 1 Provides two receive RF Interfaces from the AN module.

Table 68: TRE Front Panel Connectors

9.2 TWIN Transceiver Equipment

9.2.1 Introduction to TWIN TRA

The TWIN TRA combines digital baseband and analog RF functions in onemodule.

The architecture is split into three functional blocks:

Digital part TRA-D

Analog part TRA-A with two power amplifiers TGPA

Power supply TGPS.

The TRA-D and TRA-A are implemented in one submodule TGDA.

The TWIN TRA basic architecture is shown in the following figure.

TRA−A

TGPS

TRA−D

TGPAMx to

from

AGCx

TGDAx

TGPAMx

from

to

AGCx

TGTx

Figure 311: TWIN TRA Basic Architecture

The TWIN TRA performs the digital functions interface to the SUM and theanalog functions interface to the AN module. The TWIN TRA contains itsown integrated power supply.

The following types of TWIN TRA modules are available for the different BTSA9100 variants:

TGT09, TWIN TRA medium power module for GSM 900

TGT18, TWIN TRA medium power module for GSM 1800

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 573 / 910


9.2.2 Digital Functions

9.2.2.1 TRA-D Architecture

FLASH SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

FPGA

CPLD

FPGA

ECPL

SCP

DSP1

DSP2

IQMUX

RX Synth.

TX Synth.

TX DAC

Ramp DAC

BIAS DAC

DRC1

DRC2

ADC

DSA

CLKI

BSII

HFFI

FHL

To/from LALE

DEM ctrl.

Monitoring

Modulator/Filter / Bufferfor GSM, EDGE,enh. EDGE

Level & Bias

Ramping

TX Synth.Module

RX Synth.Module

SYS TXP

ENC

DEM

HPI

SYS

DEM

DEC

HPI

Figure 312: TRA-D Architecture

The TRA-D consists of the following functional entities:

Signalling and Control Processor (SCP)

Digital Signal Processor 1 (DSP1)

Digital Signal Processor 2 (DSP2)

Field Programable GateArray (FPGA)

Flash Memory

SDRAM

Glue Logic (CPLD)

Diversity Receiver Chip (DRC).

574 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


9.2.2.2 TRA-D System Interfaces

Interface Description

BCB Base station control bus: used for Remote Inventory (RI) read write and for controllingand supervision of the power supply.

ADR Module address: provides a unique address to each module in the BTS. Used to setBCB physical BCB terminal address and BSII HDLC address.

RCD Remote cabling detection: detects DC voltage variations on the TRA-A receiver inputs.

BSII Base station internal interface: transfers all TCH-related data (traffic and signaling)and internal O&M data.

FHL Frequency hopping link: used for downlink baseband frequency hopping.

HFFI Hook for future interface, is a spare interface and can be used for future extensions.

CLKI Clock interface: used to distribute the Evolium BTS A9100 master clock and the frameclock multiplexed on the same line with the frame number in a serial format.

TDTI Proprietary interface used as debug and test interface.

MMI Debug interface: for TGTx (development and validation only).

RPI Remote power interface: consists of:

Power lines for TGD-A DC supply TGPS

ON/OFF control of the power supply

Alarm handling for the TGPS DC input and DC output signals.

LEDs Front panel LED control.

PSwitch/ Reset Manual front panel power switch: disables the TGPS for TRA maintenance (securityfunction for actions on RF cables). Also used to generate the push button reset(PB_SRST) with fast OFF/ON sequence.

Table 69: TRED Interface Descriptions

9.2.2.3 Signalling and Control ProcessorThe SCP is responsible for the basic initialisation including the boot of theDSPs and signalling processing. It communicates with the O&M and performsthe needed actions.

9.2.2.4 Digital Signal Processor 1The DSP1 performs the telecom Layer 1 functions of the TXP, ENC and DEM.

9.2.2.5 Digital Signal Processor 2The DSP1 performs the telecom Layer 1 functions of the DEC and DEM.

9.2.2.6 Field Programable Gate ArrayThe FPGA integrates the following functions:

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 575 / 910


TX Data ModuleBuffer, modulator tables, filter, gain and offset adjust.

Ramping ModuleRamping control interface to ramping DAC.

Level and BIAS ModuleBIAC control interface to BIAS DAC.

Power Switch ModuleSwitches power supply with exact timing.

TX Synthesizer ModuleInterface to TX synthesizers.

RX Synthesizer ModuleInterface to RX synthesizers.

GTA ModuleInterface to GTA’s.

Monitoring ModuleReceives monitoring data. Perform demultiplexing and storing of themonitoring data in corresponding registers.

9.2.2.7 Flash MemoryFlash Memory is used to store the TWIN TRA origin software and the softwarepackages.

9.2.2.8 SDRAMSDRAM dedicated working memory for SCP and DSP.

9.2.2.9 CPLDContains the necessary glue logic for the SCP.

9.2.2.10 DRCDiversity Receiver Chip integrates the interface between the digital and analogbaseband part in receive direction.

576 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


9.2.3 Analog Functions

9.2.3.1 TGTx Analog Architecture


RXSynth.

RFMixer

IFFilter

Modulator&

Up−converter

TX PowerRegulation

TXSynthesizer

1

LNA RX1_0

RFMixer

IFFilter

LNA RX1_1

TX DriverAmplifier

TX PowerAmplifier

BasebandModulator

DDC

ADC

ADC

I

Q

To combiner

Duplexer

From Antenna

Network1

To DEMon TRED

FromENCT

Transmitter part

Reveiver part

Modulator&

Up−converter

TX PowerRegulation

TX Synthesizer

2

TX DriverAmplifier

TX PowerAmplifier

BasebandModulator

I

Q

To combiner

Duplexer

FromENCT

TX1

TX2

RXSynth.

RFMixer

IFFilter

LNA RX2_0

RFMixer

IFFilter

LNA RX2_1

DDC

ADC

ADC

From Antenna

Network2

To DEMon TRED

TGPAM1

TGPAM2

90

X

MUX

X

90

X

MUX

X

90

X

MUX

X

90

X

MUX

X

DRC

DRC

Figure 313: TGTx Analog Architecture

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 577 / 910


9.2.3.2 TGTx Analog Functional EntitiesThe following table gives a short description of each of the TWIN TRA analogfunctional entities.

Baseband Modulator The baseband modulator transforms the incoming digital data stream into twobaseband signals: I and Q. These baseband signals are fed to the up-converter.The modulation is GSMK modulation or EDGE.

I/Q Modulator andUp-converter

The I/Q baseband signals are fed to the up-converter. Then they aretransformed into the RF frequency band.

Transmitter Amplifiers The TX amplification stages are physically split between the TGDAx andTGPAMx sections (see Figure 313). The stages comprise the following threecomponents:

TX Driver AmplifierThe TX Driver Amplifier stage is located on the TGDAx. It consists of apreamplifier, power control circuitry, and a main amplifier.

Power RegulationThe Power Regulation stage is located on the TGDAx. It consists of acontrol path and a multiplexing detection path. An Flash is used to storedata for calibrating the transmitter output power.

TX Power Amplifier.The TX Power Amplifier is located on the TGPAMx part of the module. Itprovides the final amplification stage for the transmit RF signal, from theTGDAx. It feeds the amplified RF signal to the AN module, as required.

Clean-up Oscillator The Clean-up Oscillator provides spectrally pure reference clocks required forsynchronization of the transmitters, receivers and synthesizers.

Transmitter FastHopping Synthesizers

The Transmitter Fast Hopping Synthesizers generate the RF frequencies forthe transmitter.

578 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


Receivers The main functions of the receivers are:


Down conversion

IF filtering

BB sampling

Digital I/Q demodulation

Digital Baseband filtering

Digital Decimation.

Receiver Synthesizers The Receiver Fast Hopping Synthesizers generate the RF frequencies for thereceiver.

Table 70: TWIN TRA Analog Part Functional Entities

9.2.4 TWIN TRA Power Supply

The TGPS is an on-board power supply, providing all the necessary voltagesand currents for the TWIN TRA analog and digital functions.

9.2.4.1 VoltagesFor normal operational requirements, the DC input voltage V in can be anyvalue between -38.4 VDC and -72 VDC. If the input is too low, the power supplyswitches OFF automatically. When the input voltage is restored, the powersupply switches back ON. If the input voltage falls below -38.4 VDC, the output ismaintained within the specified values, until the TRA power supply switches off.

The following table provides the TRA power supply output voltage parameters.

Output Voltage Tolerance Min. Value Max. Value

+ 1.2 V ±3 % + 1.164 V + 1.236 V

+ 3.3 V ±3 % + 3.2 V + 3.4 V

+ 5.3 V ±3 % + 5.14 V + 5.46 V

+ 6.5 V ±2 % + 6.37 V + 6.63 V

+ 24 V ±2 % + 23.52 V + 24.48 V

+.30 V ±2 % + 29.4 V + 30.6 V

Table 71: Output Voltage Parameters

9.2.4.2 FuseThe TWIN TRA power supply input is protected by a fuse with a high-breakingcapacity (25 A).

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 579 / 910


9.2.4.3 ON/OFF SwitchThe TWIN TRA module is equipped with an ON/OFF power switch. It is arocker type switch, fitted slightly below the front panel’s profile to preventaccidental switching.

9.2.4.4 Remote SwitchingThe TGPS can be remotely switched ON and OFF by the OMU, via the BCB.This feature is implemented on the module with an optically isolated ON/OFFswitch.

9.2.4.5 Low Voltage AlarmsIf an output voltage falls below a preset threshold value, an alarm is raised. Thefollowing table gives the minimum and maximum threshold values. The valuesare measured across the output connector pins.

Output Voltage Treshold Min. Treshold Max.

+ 1.2 V + 0.984 V + 1.116 V

+ 3.3 V + 2.7 V + 3.0 V

+ 5.3 V + 4.4 V + 4.8 V

+ 6.5 V + 5.3 V + 6.0 V

+ 24 V + 20.4 V + 22.3 V

+30 V + 25.5 V + 27.9 V

Table 72: Low Voltage Alarm Thresholds

580 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


9.2.5 Transceiver Equipments Front Panel

The following figures show the TWIN TRA front panel.

Camloc Fasteners


ON/OFFRocker Switch

USB TestConnector

Module Extractor

ReceiverConnectors

LEDs

TX2

BCH2

OP2

TX1

BCH1

OP1

POWER

ENABLE

OFF

TEST

Equipment

Labels

TX1

RX20

RX21

RX10

RX11

FAULTPWR

TX2


Figure 314: TWIN TRA Front Panel

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 581 / 910


9.2.6 Transceiver Equipments LEDs

There are 8 LEDs on the front panel, which provide a visual indication of theoperational status of the TWIN TRA module (see Figure 314).

The green “Power” and the red “FAULT” LED are common for both TRX.

For the yellow LEDs, each column represents one TRX.

The following table describes the LEDs and their various operational states.

LED Color Status Description

TX1, TX2 Yellow Transmission status (not BCCH)

ON At least one dedicated channel is activated on the TRX (x)(CS-traffic onTCH or signalling on SDCCH)

Blinking No dedicated channel (TCH/SDCCH) is activated on theTRX (x), but the TRX (x) may be emitting Dummy Bursts orGPRS-bursts

OFF The TRX (x) is not emitting RF for TCH

OP1, OP2 Yellow TRE operational status

ON The TRX (x) is fully operational with telecom parameters

Blinking

Normal

The TRX (x) has received the Configure Request, configurationis ongoing

Blinking

Fast

The TRX (x) is O&M operational with RSL established, waitingfor Telecom-configuration

OFF Not operational

BCH1, BCH2 Yellow BCCH transmission status

ON The TRX (x) is configured as BCCH-TRX and emitting the BCCH

OFF The TRX (x) is configured as TCH-TRX

PWR Green Status of the TRE power supply output voltages

ON The module is powered ON

OFF The module is powered OFF

FAULT Red Alarm status

ON The TRA has entered the ‘Out-of-order’ state

Blinking At least one non-fatal alarm is active

OFF All alarms are ‘OFF’, the ‘Alarms-in-force-lists’ (AIFL) of bothTRX are empty

Table 73: TWIN TRA LED Descriptions

582 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


9.2.7 Transceiver Equipments Connectors

The following table describes the TWIN TRA front panel connectors.


Test Provides an interface to the TRE for factory test purposes.

TX1, TX2 Provide two transmit RF Interface to the AN module.

RX10, RX20 Provide two receive RF Interfaces from the AN modulevia the normal path.

RX11, RX21 Provide two receive RF Interfaces from the AN module viathe antenna diversity path.

Table 74: TWIN TRA Front Panel Connectors

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 583 / 910


584 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

10 Antenna Networks

The sections are supported with diagrams where necessary, showing thefunctional blocks and their interfaces.

Drawings of the physical appearance of the modules are also included, showingLED indicators, connectors and controls.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 585 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

10.1 ANXThe ANX provides the intermediate RF stage between the TREs and theantenna. The following figure shows the basic architecture.

Duplexer

Splitter

Duplexer

Splitter

ANT A

ANT B

TXA

TXB

RX0ARX1A

RX1BRX0B

Figure 315: ANX Basic Architecture

On the downlink, the ANX connects two TRE transmitters to two antennas. Onthe uplink, it splits the received signals and passes them to the TRE receivers.

The following types of ANX modules are available for the different BTSA9100 variants:

ANXG, ANX module for GSM 900

ANXD, ANX module for GSM 1800

ANXP, ANX module for GSM 1900.

The following figure shows the ANX in more detail. The shaded areas identifythe uplink functions.

Duplexer

ANMicroprocessor

BCBInterface

DC/DC Converter

Duplexer

FilterLNA

LNA

−48 VDC

BCB

ANT A

ANT B

Power Splitter A

Power Splitter B

BSII

TXA In

TXB In

RX1B Out

RX0B Out

LEDs

Rotary Switch

RX0A Out

RX1A Out

DC Feed

Gain Control VSWR Receiver

Directional Coupler

Directional Coupler

Remote Switching

Uplink Functions

Uplink Functions

TRE

TRE

Figure 316: ANX Architecture

The duplexers provide coupling of the transmitted and received signals,allowing a single antenna to be used for both downlink and uplink channels.

The ANX also allows the return loss of the transmitted signals to be measured,at the antenna connector, using VSWR techniques.

586 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

The uplink channel comprises amplifiers, with remotely-adjustable gain control,remote DC feed and power splitters.

10.1.1 AN Downlink Functions

The downlink functions are performed by the components shown in thefollowing table.

No. of ComponentsDownlinkComponent Description ANX ANC ANB AGC

Combiner The combiner is used to connect two TXinputs to the single antenna. Connectionbetween the combiner output TX..OUT andthe input to the duplexer TX..IN is made bya link on the front panel of the AN.

- 2 - 2

Duplexer The duplexer provides the coupling functionfor the transmitted and received RF signals.The duplexer provides a bi-directional signalpath. Thus a single antenna can be usedfor the transmission and reception of bothdownlink and uplink channels.

The downlink path functions of the duplexerare provided by a transmit filter, which:

Provides a transmitter path to the

antenna

Suppresses unwanted emissions outsidethe downlink band, especially emissions

that fall into the uplink band

Prevents downlink signals from blocking

the receiver

Prevents noise or spurious emissionsin the downlink signal from causing

interference in the receive band.

2 2 2 2

DirectionalCoupler

The antenna directional coupler comprisesa dual directional coupler. It monitors theVSWR forward and reflected power at theantenna connector. These values are usedto measure the return loss of the antenna(refer also to Antenna Network Controller(Section 10.1.4) for a description of theVSWR receiver).

2 2 2 2

Bias T The interface provides the DC supply for theoptional Tower Mounte Amplifier

- - - 2

Table 75: ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB, Downlink Components

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 587 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

10.1.2 AN Uplink Functions

The uplink functions are performed by the components shown in the followingtable.

No. of ComponentsUplinkComponent Description ANX ANC ANB AGC

Duplexer The duplexer provides the coupling functionfor the transmitted and received RF signals.The duplexer provides a bi-directional signalpath. Thus a single antenna can be usedfor the transmission and reception of bothdownlink and uplink channels. The uplinkpath functions of the duplexer are providedby a receive filter, which:

Provides an RF path from the antennato the receiver

Suppresses unwanted signals outside

the uplink band

Prevents downlink signals from entering

the receiver.

2 2 2 2

LNA The LNA amplifies the received RF signals.The LNA consists of a balanced amplifierconfiguration, designed to provide goodVSWR values, noise compression and goodreliability.

The LNA contains a digital step-attenuatorfor controlling the overall gain of the antennanetwork. The attenuator compensates forany losses in the connecting cables, forexample, when an ANY module is used.

2 2 2 2

Remote DC Feed The remote DC feed is used for feeding a +5 V TTL signal to the receiver output ports.This is used to provide an indication of thestatus of the antenna cable connections.

1 1 1 1

Power Splitter A power splitter distributes the receivedsignals to two separate outputs. It alsosupports the correct grouping of theconnectors, which simplifies the externalcable interconnections for the BTS A9100modules.

2 2 2 2

Table 76: ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB, Uplink Components

588 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

10.1.3 BTS Control Bus Interface

The BCB Interface is located on the backplane. It interfaces the data andcontrol signals to the BCB as listed in the following table.

Signal Description

RI The Remote Inventory stores data such asthe RIT name, module type, frequency band,diversity and duplexer type.

Power Supply Control The BCB Interface supports remote on/offswitching of the DC/DC converters. They areswitched with an optically-isolated switch on thepower supply.

DC Line Supervision The BCB Interface delivers a TTL level signalwhich is used by the remote DC feed. A circuitin the TRE detects the signal and feeds back astatus message to the BCB (refer to AN UplinkFunctions (Section 10.1.2) for information aboutthe remote DC feed).

Rotary Switch The BCB Interface is connected to a rotaryswitch on the ANX front panel. The switchposition is associated with the antenna sector,in sectorized configurations. The switch positionis read via coded address lines.

Table 77: ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB, BCB Interface

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 589 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

10.1.4 Antenna Network Controller

The ANCON is responsible for maintaining the operation of the ANX.

Its principal functions are:

Setting the LNA gain for the assigned TREA receiver

Supervising LNA alarms

Measuring antenna VSWR

Reporting VSWR alarms

Selecting the antenna sector

Detecting RF cabling status

RI, via the BCB Interface

Remote power on/off, via the BCB Interface

Status display, via front panel LEDs.

The following figure shows the ANCON architecture. The shaded areasrepresent hardware shared by different functions.

ANMicroprocessor

VSWR Receiver

BSII PLL

CLKII PLL

DC/DC Converter

BCB ASIC

FlashEEPROM

SRAM

Forward

Reverse

Forward

Reverse

TXA

TXB

LocalSynthesizer

Alarms

On/Off

DC Input

BSIIInterface

2048 MHz

CLKIInterface

BCBInterface

−48 VDC

LNA 1

LNA 2

DC Feed & Rotary Switch

To LNAs

LNA ControlSignals & Alarms

Backplane

Subrack Address

Control Signals

MixerBaseband

ADC

Glue Logic

Input MUX

RIEEPROM

RI

Figure 317: ANCON Architecture

The ANCON functional entities are described in the sections below.

590 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

10.1.4.1 VSWR ReceiverThe VSWR receiver is a selective VSWR meter which measures the forwardand reflected (reverse) power of the transmitters. The VSWR is measured atthe output of the duplexer couplers, and fed to an RF MUX in the receiver(see Figure 317).

The VSWR receiver consists of:

Local synthesizer

Input MUX.

A local synthesizer generates a signal which is used to compare the basebandfrequency with the ARFCN. The local synthesizer is set to the ARFCNfrequency by the AN microprocessor.

The input MUX provides the RF inputs to the VSWR receiver. It provides aselective input of the forward and reverse power from transmitters A and B. Theinput MUX operates under the control of the AN microprocessor.

10.1.4.2 BSII Frame Clock PLLThe BSII frame clock PLL recovers the BSII frame clock from the backplane.The clock outputs are used for BSII communications, the AN microprocessorand the PLL lock-detect signal.

PLL Switch

Loop Filter

Glue Logic

BSII Comms

BSII PLL Lock Detect

Microprocessor

BSII Frame CLK

Clock Edge Control Signal

VCXO

Figure 318: ANCON, BSII Frame Clock PLL

10.1.4.3 CLKII Clock PLLThe CLKII clock PLL recovers the BSII master clock from the backplane. Theclock outputs are used for the local synthesizer reference clock, the ’startconversion’ signal for the baseband ADC and the CLKII lock-detect signal.

PLL Switch

Loop Filter

Glue Logic

Local Synthesizer

CLKII Lock Detect

Start Conversion

BSII Master CLK


VCXO

Figure 319: ANCON, CLKII Clock PLL

10.1.4.4 AN MicroprocessorThe AN microprocessor performs LNA alarm supervision and gain setting, andcontrol of the status LEDs. It also provides an interface to the baseband ADC inthe VSWR receiver (see Figure 317).

The microprocessor compares the ADC output with known VSWR values. If theVSWR exceeds predefined thresholds, an alarm is raised (refer to Table ANXLED Descriptions (80)). If the reflected power is very high, the transmitters areshut down to avoid possible damage to equipment. High reflected power canbe caused by, for example, a break in the antenna coupling.

The AN microprocessor hardware consists of a QUICC microprocessorsupported by two memory devices, a Flash EEPROM and an SRAM.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 591 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

10.1.4.5 Glue LogicGlue logic consists of a number of registers, implemented on a single CPLDdevice. It also converts 5 V TTL signals to 3.3 V, required by the Power QUICCmicroprocessor.

The Glue logic maintains the following interfaces and/or functions:

AN microprocessor to the BSII

Board/module address register

Baseband ADC

LNA error register

LNA gain adjustment register.

The Glue logic also controls the BSII frame clock PLL and the CLKII masterclock PLL with a clock edge control signal (see Figure 318 and Figure 319).

10.1.4.6 Remote InventoryRemote Inventory is used to store information about the ANX module (partnumber, name, serial number, etc.). It consists of an EEPROM which isconnected to the BCB ASIC. The stored information is read via the BCBInterface.

10.1.5 AN Power Supply

The ANPS is a DC/DC converter, providing all the necessary voltages forthe ANX/ANC components.

10.1.5.1 VoltagesThe following table provides ANPS input/output voltage parameters.

Voltage Value

V in -38.4 VDC min.

-72 VDC max.


V out + 5.1 VDC ±3 %

+ 12 VDC ±3 %

Table 78: ANPS Input/Output Voltage Parameters

Normal operation of V out is unaffected by temperature fluctuations in therange -10o C to 70o C.

10.1.5.2 FuseThe input of the ANPS is protected by a fuse with a high-breaking capacity(15 A).

592 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

10.1.5.3 ProtectionThe ANPS circuitry is protected against short circuit and accidental polarityinversion on its inputs.

10.1.5.4 GroundingGround continuity for the module is achieved with ground pins on the subrackbackplane which connect to the bus bar ground.

10.1.5.5 Remote SwitchingThe ANPS can be remotely switched on and off by the OMU, via the BCB. Thisfeature is implemented on the module with an optically isolated on/off switch.

10.1.5.6 Low Voltage AlarmsAlarms are raised if the voltage level is too low. The following table provides thelow voltage threshold tolerances for ANPS alarms.

Voltage Threshold Min. Threshold Max.

Vin 30.4 V 38.4 V

5.1 V 4.2 V 4.6 V

12 V 10.0 V 11.0 V

Table 79: ANPS Alarm Thresholds

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 593 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

10.1.6 ANX LEDs and Alarms

This section provides information on the ANX’s LEDs and Alarms.

10.1.6.1 LEDsThere are eight LEDs on the front panel, which provide a visual indication of theoperational status of the ANX module. The following table describes each LEDand their various operational states.


VSWR A Yellow VSWR status of Antenna 1.

On Good VSWR.

Slow Blinking Threshold 1 reached.

Fast Blinking Threshold 2 reached.

Off VSWR not supervised.

VSWR B Yellow VSWR status of Antenna 2.

On Good VSWR.

Slow Blinking Threshold 1 reached.

Fast Blinking Threshold 2 reached.

Off VSWR not supervised.

O and M Yellow - O and M status.

On IOM link operational.

Off IOM link not established.

ALARM Red - Alarm status (both LEDs areconnected in parallel)

On IOM link operational

Blinking Non-urgent alarm.

Off IOM link not established.

5 V Green - Status of + 5 V power supply.

On + 5 V present.

Off + 5 V faulty.

12 V Green - Status of + 12 V power supply.

On + 12 V present.

Off + 12 V faulty.

Table 80: ANX LED Descriptions

594 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

10.1.6.2 AlarmsThe ANX detects the alarm conditions shown in the following table.

VSWR The AN microprocessor can raise four alarmswhen VSWR values exceed certain presetthresholds. The values are downloaded fromthe OMU software. There is a non-urgent andan urgent alarm for each antenna.

Amplifier There are two amplifier alarms for each LNA.One indicates degraded amplifier performance,and the other a total failure. A total failure isregarded as performance that is below a usableoutput.

DC line supervision The remote + 5 V TTL DC feed signal is usedfor supervision of the RF cabling continuity. Acircuit in the TREA receiver detects the signaland a message is fed back, via the BCB.

Table 81: ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB Alarm Conditions

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 595 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

10.1.7 ANX Performance Characteristics

The performance characteristics of the ANXs/ANCs are shown in the followingtable.

Parameter GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900

Transmit band. 925 - 960 MHz 1805 - 1880 MHz 1930 - 1990 MHz

Receive band. 880 - 915 MHz 1710 - 1785 MHz 1850 - 1910 MHz

Power for each transmitter channelinput.

45 W maximum 63 W maximum 45 W maximum

Number of channels. 174 374 299

Bandwidth for each channel. 200 kHz 200 kHz 200 kHz

Return loss at receive port. > 18 dB > 18 dB > 18 dB

Return loss at transmit port. > 18 dB > 18 dB > 18 dB

Return loss at antenna port. > 18 dB 1) > 18 dB > 18 dB

Return loss at coupler port. > 18 dB ≥ 18 dB ≥ 18 dB

Group delay distortion in transmitband.

≤100 ns ≤ 100 ns ≤ 100 ns

Isolation between receive port andantenna port.

>30 dB >30 dB > 30 dB

Isolation between receive ports. 22 dB 22 dB > 22 dB

Isolation between transmit ports (Ato B/ 1 to 2).

>50 dB/ 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB

Insertion loss in transmit pass band. 0.3 - 1.6 dB < 0.3 - 1.6 dB < 0.3 - 1.6 dB

Intermodulation products at antennaport with 2x 20 W signals at onetransmit port and 50 on receiveport in receive band.

<-103 dBm <-103 dBm <-103 dBm

Intermodulation products at antennaport with 2x 20 W signals at onetransmit port and 50 on receiveport in transmit band.

<-75 dBc <-75 dBc <-75 dBc

RF input impedance. 50 50 50

RF output impedance. 50 50 50

1) For ANX with bridge: >16 dB.

Table 82: ANX Performance Characteristics

596 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

10.1.8 ANX Front Panel

The following figure shows the layout and O and M features of the ANX’sfront panel.

VSWRA

VSWRB

ALARM

12V

O&M

ALARM

5V

RX1BOUT

RX0BOUT

RX0AOUT

RX1AOUT

TXBIN

ANTB

TXAIN

ANTA

Receiver Connectors

Transmitter Connectors

Antenna Connectors

LEDs

Camloc Fasteners

Rotary Switch

Module Extractors

Equipment Label

Figure 320: ANX Front Panel

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 597 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

The ANX has two transmitter input connectors and four receiver outputconnectors on its front panel. Therefore, one ANX module can be interfacedto two TRE modules, or an ANY module if used.

The following table describes the ANX front panel connectors.


TXAIN

TXBIN

Provides the RF transmitter interfaces from twoTRE modules, or an ANY module if used.

RX0AOUT

RX1AOUT

Provides the RF receiver interfaces betweenantenna A and the first TRE receiver connectorsRX0 and RX1, or an ANY module if used.

RX0BOUT

RX1BOUT

Provides the RF receiver interfaces betweenantenna B and the second TRE receiverconnectors RX0 and RX1, or an ANY moduleif used.

ANTA

ANTB

Provides the RF interface to/ from two antennas,A and B.

Table 83: ANX Front Panel Connectors

598 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

10.2 ANYThe ANY is a passive RF module, having neither a controller nor a powersupply. It is an optional RF distribution device, which is used to expand thecapacity of the ANX/ANC. Therefore, it is basically an extension unit to theANX/ANC module.

The following types of ANY modules are available for the different BTSA9100 variants:

ANYD, ANY module for GSM 1800

ANYDH, ANY module for GSM 1800 high power

ANYG, ANY module for GSM 900

ANYGH, ANY module for GSM 900 high power

ANYL, ANY module for GSM 850

ANYP, ANY module for GSM 1900.


The following figure shows the logical position of the ANY in relation to theTREs and the ANX. The signal paths are also indicated.

TRE

TRE

TRE

TRE

Antenna

TRE

TRE

TRE

TRE

ANYANX/ANC

Antenna

Downlink Path

Uplink Path

ANX/ANC

ANY

Figure 321: ANY Relationships

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 599 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

The ANY performs functions for both the:

Downlink pathThe RF signals coming from the TREs enter the ANY at four TX connectorson the front panel. They are combined in pairs by RF combiners and fed totwo TX output connectors. The ANY performs a 4:2 reduction of the TREtransmitter outputs. The two concentrated outputs are coupled to theANX/ANC inputs, via external RF cables.

Uplink path.Each of the four RF signals from the ANX/ANC passes through a 1:2RF splitter. These signals are distributed in four groups to the TREs, viaexternal RF cables. Each group provides a path for antenna diversityand non-diversity.

10.2.1 ANY Functions

The following figure shows the method of combining the transmitter outputsand distributing the receiver inputs.

TXA In1

RX0A Out1

RX1A Out1

TXA In2

RX0A Out2

RX1A Out2

TXB In1

RX0B Out1

RX1B Out1

TXB In2

RX0B Out2

RX1B Out2

TXA Out

RX0A In

RX1A In

TXB Out

RX0B In

RX1B In

BCB InterfaceRF Interfaces to/from Four TRE Modules

ANX/ANC

Combiner

Combiner

Power Divider

Power Divider

ANX/ANC

ANYRI

Figure 322: ANY Architecture

600 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

The ANY consists of the functional entities shown in the following table.

Combiner The Combiner consists of two hybrid devices.Each device concentrates two transmitteroutputs into one, thus halving the number ofantennas required. The combiner takes the TXoutputs from four TREs, via external cabling,and feeds them to the TXIN connectors on theANX/ANC.

Power Dividers The Power Dividers split and distribute thereceived RF signals, from the ANX module,to four outputs. The outputs are connected,via external cabling, to the inputs of the TREmodule. There are two Power Dividers in eachANY module, each consisting of two splitters,providing diversity and non-diversity paths.

BCB Interface The BCB interface is located on the subrackbackplane. It interfaces the following ANYRIdata to the BCB Bus:

Inventory

Subrack position of the ANY

Subrack number.

ANY Remote Inventory The ANYRI is specifically designed to holdRemote Inventory data for the ANY module. Itis functionally and physically separate from theRF part of the ANY.

The ANYRI consists of three components:

BCB Interface driver

BCB ASIC

Serial EEPROM.

The inventory data, which is held in a serialEEPROM, is transferred via the BCB ASIC andthe BCB Interface. The ANYRI components arepowered from a DC supply, which is present onthe backplane.

Table 84: ANY, Functional Entities

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 601 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

10.2.2 ANY Performance Characteristics

The performance characteristics of the ANY are shown in the following table.

Parameter GSM 850 GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900

Transmit band. 869 - 894 MHz 925 - 960 MHz 1805 - 1880MHz

1930 - 1990MHz

Receive band. 824 - 849 MHz 880 - 915 MHz 1710 - 1785MHz

1850 - 1910MHz

Power for each transmitterchannel input for:

Medium power ANY - ANYx.

45 W maximum 45 W maximum 45 W maximum 45 W maximum

High power ANY - ANYHx. - 63 W maximum 63 W maximum -

Number of channels. 124 174 374 299

Bandwidth for each channel. 200 kHz 200 kHz 200 kHz 200 kHz

Insertion loss at transmit band. 3.3 ± 0.2 dB 3.3 ± 0.2 dB 3.3 ± 0.2 dB 3.3 ± 0.2 dB

Insertion loss at receive band. 3.3 ± 0.2 dB 3.3 ± 0.2 dB 3.3 ± 0.2 dB 3.3 ± 0.2 dB

Return loss at receive port. > 21 dB > 21 dB > 21 dB > 21 dB

Return loss at transmit port. > 21 dB > 21 dB > 21 dB > 21 dB

Isolation between transmit andreceive ports.

> 85 dB > 90 dB ≤ 90 dB ≤ 90 dB

Isolation between receiveoutput ports of same coupler.

> 25 dB > 25 dB > 25 dB > 25 dB

Isolation between receive portsof different networks.

> 50 dB > 50 dB > 50 dB > 50 dB

Isolation between transmitinput ports of same network.

> 25 dB > 25 dB > 25 dB > 25 dB

Isolation between transmitinput ports of differentnetworks.

> 50 dB > 50 dB > 50 dB > 50 dB

Intermodulation products atantenna port with 2 x 40 W (2 x30 W for GSM 1800 and GSM1900) signals at one transmitport and 50 on receive portin receive band.

< -108 dBm < -108 dBm < -108 dBm < -108 dBm

602 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

Parameter GSM 850 GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900

Intermodulation products atantenna port with 2 x 40 W (2 x30 W for GSM 1800 and GSM1900) signals at one transmitport and 50 on receive portin transmit band.

< -75 dBc < -75 dBc < - 75 dBc < - 75 dBc

RF input impedance. 50 50 50 50

RF output impedance. 50 50 50 50

Table 85: ANY Performance Characteristics

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 603 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

10.2.3 ANY Front Panel

The following figure shows the layout of the ANY front panel.

RX0AIN

RX1AINTXAOUT

RX0AOUT1

RX1AOUT1TXAIN1

RX0AOUT2

RX1AOUT2TXAIN2

RX0BIN

RX1BINTXBOUT

RX0BOUT1

RX1BOUT1TXBIN1

RX0BOUT2

RX1BOUT2TXBIN2

Receiver Connectors

Transmitter Connectors

Camloc Fasteners

Module ExtractorMnemonic or

Serial NumberLabel

Module Extractor

Mnemonic orSerial NumberLabel

Figure 323: ANY Front Panel

604 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

10.2.3.1 Transmitter ConnectorsThe ANY has four transmitter input connectors and two transmitter outputconnectors on its front panel.

The following table describes the ANY transmitter connectors.


TXAOUT

TXBOUT

Provide two RF interfaces to the transmitterinputs of an ANX/ANC module.

TXAIN1, TXAIN2

TXBIN1, TXBIN2

Provide four RF interfaces from four TREtransmitter outputs.

Table 86: ANY Transmitter Connectors

10.2.3.2 Receiver ConnectorsThe ANY has four receiver input connectors and eight receiver outputconnectors on its front panel.

The following table describes the ANY receiver connectors.


RX0AIN

RX1AIN

Provide two RF receiver interfaces from theANX/ANC receiver outputs RX0AOUT andRX1AOUT.

RX0BIN

RX1BIN

Provide two RF receiver interfaces from theANX/ANC receiver outputs RX0BOUT andRX1BOUT.

RX0AOUT1, RX1AOUT1

RX0AOUT2, RX1AOUT2

RX0BOUT1, RX1BOUT1

RX0BOUT2, RX1BOUT2

Each pair of connectors provide two RF receiverinterfaces to the TRE receiver inputs RX0 andRX1.

Table 87: ANY Receiver Connectors

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 605 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

10.3 ANCThe ANC provides the intermediate RF stage between the TREs and theantenna.

Its tasks are to:

Combine the output signals of up to four transmitters and to connect them toup to two antennas

Feed the received signals from the antenna to the radio front end, where the

signals are amplified and distributed to up to eight receivers

Allow simultaneous transmission and receiving on antennas (duplexer)

Provide filtering for the TX- and RX-path

Supervise the VSWR of the antennas.

10.3.1 ANC Basic Architecture

The following figure shows the basic architecture.

Duplexer

Splitter

Duplexer

Splitter

ANT A

ANT B

TXAIN1

ANCC

Combiner

CombinerTXBIN1TXBIN2

TXAIN2

RX0AOUT1RX0AOUT2RX1AOUT1RX1AOUT2

RX0BOUT1RX0BOUT2RX1BOUT1RX1BOUT2

Figure 324: ANC Basic Architecture

606 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

10.3.2 ANC Detailed Architecture

The following figure shows the ANC in more detail.

Directional Coupler B

Duplexer B

ANMicroprocessor

BCBInterface

DC/DC Converter

Duplexer A

FilterLNA

LNA

−48 VDC

BCB

ANTA

ANTB

Power Splitter A

Power Splitter B

BSII

TXAIN

TXBIN

RX1BOUT1

RX0BOUT1

LEDs

RX0AOUT1

RX1AOUT1

DC Feed


Directional Coupler A

Remote Switching

Uplink Functions

Uplink Functions

TRE

TRE

ANCC

TX Combiner ALoad 60 W*)

TX Combiner BLoad 60 W*)

TXAIN1

TXAIN2

TXAOUT

External Bridge A

RX0AOUT2

RX1AOUT2

RX1BOUT2

RX0BOUT2

TXBOUT

TXBIN1

TXBIN2

External Bridge B

*) 150 W for ANCD/ANCP

Figure 325: ANC Architecture

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 607 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

10.3.3 ANC Description

On the downlink, the ANC connects two TRE transmitters to two antennas. Onthe uplink, it splits the received signals and passes them to the TRE receivers.

The following types of ANC modules are available for the different BTSA9100 variants:

ANCD, ANC module for GSM 1800

ANCG, ANC module for GSM 900

ANCGP, ANC module for PGSM 900

ANCL, ANC module for GSM 850

ANCP, ANC module for GSM 1900.


If one transmitter is used in each branch A and B, the RF signals pass theduplexers before feeding the antennas.

If two transmitters are used in a branch, the coupler will be used in front of theduplexer. This coupler is connected by an RF cable bridge.


The ANC also allows the return loss of the transmitted signals to be measured,at the antenna connector, using VSWR techniques.


The ANC functions; interface, controller and power supply are given below.

DownlinkFunctions

The downlink functions are performed by the componentsshown in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB, Downlink Components(75).

UplinkFunctions

The uplink functions are performed by the componentsshown in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB, Uplink Components(76).

BTS ControlBus Interface

The BCB Interface is located on the backplane. It interfacesthe data and control signals to the BCB as listed in TableANX/ANC/AGC/ANB, BCB Interface (77).

AntennaNetworkController

From a functional point of view the ANCC is the sameas the ANCON used in the ANX (but without the DC/DCconverter). Therefore for a description of the ANCC, seeAntenna Network Controller (Section 10.1.4).

Power Supply As part of the ANCC there is a DC/DC converter, providingall the necessary voltages for the ANC components. As theDC/DC is functionally the same as the one used in the ANX,refer to AN Power Supply (Section 10.1.5) for its description.

608 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

10.3.4 ANC LEDs and Alarms

This section provides information on the ANC’s LEDs and Alarms.

10.3.4.1 LEDsThere are four LEDs on the front panel, which provide a visual indication ofthe operational status of the ANC module. The following table describes eachLED and defines their various operational states.


VSWR A Yellow VSWR status of Antenna 2

On VSWR OK

Slow Blinking Low threshold reached

Fast Blinking High threshold reached

Off VSWR not supervised

VSWR B Yellow VSWR status of Antenna 1

On VSWR OK

Slow Blinking Low threshold reached

Fast Blinking High threshold reached

Off VSWR not supervised

O and M Yellow/Red

O and M status

Yellow On ANC is in O and M operational mode

Red On Not used. (Only active during startupLED test in case of LNA cablingerror)

Off ANC is not operational

ALARM Yellow/Red

Alarm status

Yellow On Normal situation (FS/SW running, noalarms present, module is powered)

Red Blinking Non-fatal alarm present

Off No Power presence or LED failure

Red On Fatal alarm for the module or modulein out-of-order state

Table 88: ANC/ANB LED Descriptions

10.3.4.2 AlarmsThe ANC detects the alarm conditions shown in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANBAlarm Conditions (81).

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 609 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

10.3.5 ANC Performance Characteristics

The performance characteristics of the ANCs are shown in the following table.

Parameter GSM 850 1) GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900

Transmit band. 869 - 894 MHz 925 - 960 MHz

935 - 960 MHz 4)

1805 - 1880 MHz 1930 - 1990 MHz

Receive band. 824 - 849 MHz 880 - 915 MHz

890 - 915 MHz 4)

1710 - 1785 MHz 1850 - 1910 MHz

Power for each transmitterchannel input.

63 W maximum 63 W maximum 63 W maximum 63 W maximum

Number of channels. 124 174 374 299

Bandwidth for each channel. 200 kHz 200 kHz 200 kHz 200 kHz

Return loss at receive port. > 16 dB > 16 dB > 16 dB > 16 dB

Return loss at transmit port. > 16 dB 2) > 16 dB > 16 dB > 16 dB

Return loss at antenna port. > 18 dB > 18 dB 3) > 18 dB > 18 dB

Return loss at coupler port. > 18 dB > 18 dB ≥ 18 dB ≥ 18 dB

Group delay distortion intransmit band.

≤100 ns ≤100 ns ≤ 100 ns ≤ 100 ns

Isolation between receive portand antenna port.

>30 dB >30 dB >30 dB > 30 dB

Isolation between receiveports.

>20 dB 22 dB 22 dB > 22 dB

Isolation between transmitports (A to B/ 1 to 2).

>50 dB/ 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB

Insertion loss in transmit passband without combiner.

0.3 - 1.6 dB 0.3 - 1.6 dB < 0.3 - 1.6 dB < 0.3 - 1.6 dB

Insertion loss in transmit passband with combiner.

3.4 - 5.3 dB 3.4 - 5.3 dB 3.4 - 5.2 dB 3.4 - 5.2 dB

Intermodulation products atantenna port with 2x 20 Wsignals at one transmit portand 50 on receive port inreceive band.

<-101 dBm <-103 dBm <-103 dBm <-103 dBm

Intermodulation products atantenna port with 2x 20 Wsignals at one transmit portand 50 on receive port intransmit band.

-75 dBc <-75 dBc <-75 dBc <-75 dBc

RF input impedance. 50 50 50 50

610 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

Parameter GSM 850 1) GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900

RF output impedance. 50 50 50 50

1) Valid for ANCL only.

2) For ANC with bridge: >18 dB.

3) For ANC with bridge: >16 dB.

4) For ANCGP

Table 89: ANC Performance Characteristics

10.3.6 ANC Front Panel

The following figures show the layout and O and M features of the threeversions of the ANC front panel.

10.3.6.1 ANC Front Panel - Version 1

RX1AOUT1

RX0AOUT1

RX1AOUT2

RX0AOUT2

VSWRB

ALARM

TXAIN1

TXAIN2

TXAIN

TXAOUTANTB

ANTA

TXBOUT

TXBIN

TXBIN2

TXBIN1

O&M

VSWRA

RX0BOUT2

RX1BOUT2

RX0BOUT1

RX1BOUT1

Receiver Connectors

LEDs

Module Extractor

Camloc Fasteners

TransmitterInput Connectors

AntennaConnector

CombinedTransmitterOutput Connector(TXAIN1 + TXAIN2)

RF bridge(if TXAIN1and/or TXAIN2 used)

High VoltageWarning

Figure 326: ANC Front Panel Version 1

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 611 / 910

10 Antenna Networks


RX1AOUT1

RX0AOUT1

RX1AOUT2

RX0AOUT2

VSWRB

ALARM

TXAIN1

TXAIN2

TXAIN

TXAOUT

ANTBANTA

TXBOUT

TXBIN

TXBIN2

TXBIN1

O&M

VSWRA

RX0BOUT2

RX1BOUT2

RX0BOUT1

RX1BOUT1

Receiver Connectors

LEDs

Module Extractor

Camloc Fasteners


AntennaConnector


RF bridge(if TXBIN1and/or TXBIN2 used)

High VoltageWarning


612 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks


RX1AOUT1

RX0AOUT1

RX1AOUT2

RX0AOUT2

VSWRB

ALARM

TXAIN1

TXAIN2

TXAIN

TXAOUT

ANTBANTA

TXBOUT

TXBIN

TXBIN2

TXBIN1

O&M

VSWRA

RX0BOUT2

RX1BOUT2

RX0BOUT1

RX1BOUT1

Receiver Connectors

LEDs

Module Extractor

Camloc Fasteners


AntennaConnector


RF bridge(if TXAIN1 and/orTXAIN2 used)

High VoltageWarning


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 613 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

10.3.6.4 ConnectorsThe ANC has four transmitter input connectors and eight receiver outputconnectors on its front panel. Therefore, one ANC module can be interfaced tofour TRE modules or two ANY modules, if used.

The following table describes the ANC front panel connectors.


TXAIN1,TXAIN2

TXBIN1,TXBIN2

Provide the RF transmitter interfaces from four TRE modules,or two ANY modules if used.

TXAIN,TXAOUT

A bridge between both connectors provides the interfacebetween two combined RF transmitter signals and theduplexer of branch A.

TXBIN,TXBOUT

A bridge between both connectors provides the interfacebetween two combined RF transmitter signals and theduplexer of branch B.

RX0AOUT1

RX1AOUT1

Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna A andthe first TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1, or a firstANY module if used.

RX0AOUT2

RX1AOUT2

Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna A andthe second TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1, or a firstANY module if used.

RX0BOUT1

RX1BOUT1

Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna Band the third TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1, or asecond ANY module if used.

RX0BOUT2

RX1BOUT2

Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna B andthe fourth TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1, or asecond ANY module if used.

ANTA

ANTB

Provide the RF interface to/ from two antennas, A and B.

Table 90: ANC Front Panel Connectors

The front panel connector types are described in the following table.

ANC Version 1 ANC Versions 2 and 3

ANTA, ANTB 7/ 16 7/ 16

TXAOUT, TXBOUT N female SMA female

All other TXnn N female N female

All RXnn SMB SMB

Table 91: ANC, Front Panel Connector Types

614 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

10.4 AGCThe AGC provides the intermediate RF stage between the TREs and theantenna.

Its functions are to:

Combine the output signals of up to four transmitters and to connect them toup to two antennas

Feed the received signals from the antenna to the radio front end, where the

signals are amplified and distributed to up to eight receivers




10.4.1 AGC Basic Architecture


ANT A

ANT B

TXAIN1

LNAVSWRMUXBiasT

UC

CombinerTXBIN1TXBIN2

TXAIN2



AGCC+AGCPS

Splitter

Splitter

Duplexer

DuplexerCombiner

Figure 329: AGC Basic Architecture

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 615 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

10.4.2 AGC Detailed Architecture

The following figure shows the AGC in more detail.


Duplexer B

ANMicroprocessor

BCBInterface

DC/DC Converter

Duplexer A

FilterLNA

LNA

−48 VDC

BCB

ANTA

ANTB

Power Splitter A

Power Splitter B

BSII

TXAIN

TXBIN

RX1BOUT1

RX0BOUT1

LEDs

RX0AOUT1

RX1AOUT1

DC Feed



Remote Switching

Uplink Functions

Uplink Functions

TRE

TRE

AGCC

TX Combiner ALoad 150 W

TX Combiner BLoad 150 W

TXAIN1

TXAIN2

TXAOUT

External Bridge A

RX0AOUT2

RX1AOUT2

RX1BOUT2

RX0BOUT2

TXBOUT

TXBIN1

TXBIN2

External Bridge B

Figure 330: AGC Architecture

616 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

10.4.3 AGC Description

On the downlink, the AGC connects four TRE transmitters to two antennas. Onthe uplink, it splits the received signals and passes them to the TRE receivers.

The following types of AGC modules are available for the different BTSA9100 variants:

AGC18, AGC module for GSM 1800

AGC9E, AGC module for GSM 900.

If one transmitter is used in each branch A and B, the RF signals pass theduplexers before feeding the antennas.

If two transmitters are used in a branch, the coupler will be used in front of theduplexer. This coupler is connected by an RF cable bridge.


The AGC also allows the return loss of the transmitted signals to be measured,at the antenna connector, using VSWR techniques.


The AGC functions, interface, controller and power supply are given below.

DownlinkFunctions

The downlink functions are performed by the componentsshown in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB, Downlink Components(75).

UplinkFunctions

The uplink functions are performed by the componentsshown in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB, Uplink Components(76).

BTS ControlBus Interface

The BCB Interface is located on the backplane. It interfacesthe data and control signals to the BCB as listed in TableANX/ANC/AGC/ANB, BCB Interface (77).

AntennaNetworkController

From a functional point of view the AGCC is the sameas the ANCON used in the ANX (but without the DC/DCconverter). Therefore for a description of the AGCC, seeAntenna Network Controller (Section 10.1.4).

Power Supply As part of the AGCC there is a DC/DC converter, providingall the necessary voltages for the AGC components. Referto AGC Power Supply (Section 10.4.5) for its description.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 617 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

10.4.4 Antenna Network Geran Combiner Controller

The AGCC is responsible for maintaining the operation of the AGC.

Its principal functions are:

Setting the LNA gain for the assigned TREA receiver

Supervising LNA alarms

Measuring antenna VSWR

Reporting VSWR alarms

Selecting the antenna sector

Detecting RF cabling status

RI, via the BCB Interface

Remote power on/off, via the BCB Interface

Status display, via front panel LEDs.

Measurement of the antenna output power

Reporting the antenna output power

Tower mounted amplifier (TMA) current supervision.

618 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

The following figure shows the AGCC architecture.

IO

I2C

SCP

HFFIHFFI

BSII0BSII1

12V

RF

ANLU

Power Module SDRAM FLASH

LNA/RXMUX

Receiver

X

Synthesizer

ADC

Current Sense+

SwitchRI

ADC

5V 3.3V

DEBUG1

DEBUG2

38−78V

BCB

DC Ant A

DC Ant B

ANT SEL

12V TMA A

12V TMA B

For RevRES

I2C

ACU

HDLCUBSIIMUX

Figure 331: AGCC Architecture

The AGCC interfaces provides the following interfaces:

On backpanel connector

BCB

BSII

CLKI

DEBUG1

DEBUG2.

On LNA/RXMUX connector

LNAC

RCD

RF

TMAFD.

The AGCC functional entities are described in the following sections.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 619 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

10.4.4.1 VSWR ReceiverThe VSWR receiver is a selective VSWR meter which measures the forwardand reflected (reverse) power of the transmitters. The VSWR is measured atthe output of the duplexer couplers, and fed to an RF MUX in the receiver(see Figure 331).

The VSWR receiver consists of:

Local synthesizer

Input MUX.

A local synthesizer generates a signal which is used to compare the basebandfrequency with the ARFCN. The local synthesizer is set to the ARFCNfrequency by the AN microprocessor.

The input MUX provides the RF inputs to the VSWR receiver. It provides aselective input of the forward and reverse power from transmitters A and B. Theinput MUX operates under the control of the AN microprocessor.

10.4.4.2 BSII Frame Clock PLLThe BSII frame clock PLL recovers the BSII frame clock from the backplane.The clock outputs are used for BSII communications, the AN microprocessorand the PLL lock-detect signal.

PLL Switch

Loop Filter

Glue Logic

BSII Comms

BSII PLL Lock Detect

Microprocessor

BSII Frame CLK


VCXO

Figure 332: AGCC, BSII Frame Clock PLL

10.4.4.3 CLKII Clock PLLThe CLKII clock PLL recovers the BSII master clock from the backplane. Theclock outputs are used for the local synthesizer reference clock, the ’startconversion’ signal for the baseband ADC and the CLKII lock-detect signal.

PLL Switch

Loop Filter

Glue Logic

Local Synthesizer

CLKII Lock Detect

Start Conversion

BSII Master CLK


VCXO

Figure 333: AGCC, CLKII Clock PLL

10.4.4.4 Signal Control ProcessorThe SCP performs LNA alarm supervision and gain setting, and control of thestatus LEDs. It also provides an interface to the baseband ADC in the VSWRreceiver (see Figure 331).

The microprocessor compares the ADC output with known VSWR values. Ifthe VSWR exceeds predefined thresholds, an alarm is raised (refer to TableAGC LEDs and Alarms (Section 10.4.6)). If the reflected power is very high,the transmitters are shut down to avoid possible damage to equipment. Highreflected power can be caused by, for example, a break in the antenna coupling.

The SCP hardware consists of a microprocessor supported by two memorydevices, a Flash EEPROM and an SDRAM.

620 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

10.4.4.5 Antenna Network Logic UnitThe Antenna Network Logic Unit (ANLU) contains the follwing blocks:

Clock and Reset Control Unit (CRCU)

MicroBlaze Systeem

HDLC Unit

BSII Multiplexer

HFFI Unit

Register Unit

I2C Unit

Analog Control CIrcuit (ACU).

ACU

IO

I2C

REGU

CRCU

MikroBlaze System

HDLCU

HFFI

BSIIMUX

HFFI

BSII0BSII1

IO

ACU

BSII_WIN_PLL

CLKII_WIN_PLL

UP

DOWN

CLK_SDRAM

CLK−CLK2x/Fx

CLK_SDRAMIN

CLKII_CLK26M

CLK25M6

BSII_CLK40M96

Figure 334: ANLU Architecture

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 621 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

10.4.4.6 ReceiverThe front-end receiver is realized by one device, which includes a directconversion QPSK demodulator, the PLL and synthesizer. The downconvertercan handle receive frequency in the GSM, DCS or PCS band. Control data willbe entered by means of an I2C interface.

The RF signal from the LNA board is fed directly into the downconverter. The I/Qbaseband output signal of the downconverter is sampled and converted using adual sigma-delta ADC. The data output is serial at a word rate of 270.83kHz foreach I and Q. The ADC is interfaced by the Analog Control Unit (ACU),

10.4.4.7 TMA Feeding and Current SupervisionThe power for the two TMA will be switched on and off by means of anANLU GPIO signal and a MOSFET. The current supervision is done withan Overcurrent Protection Circuit, which includes a current sense amplifier,a comparator and an internal voltage reference.

The current sense amplifier output is converted by a 10 bit ADC and the SCPcan read the actual current value via the I2C bus. Additional the current senseIC has a comparator with a latched output. It gives an over current alarm if thecurrent is higher than 300mA. This latched alarm signal is used to switch off the12V directly by hardware to prevent a DC/DC converter shot down.

10.4.4.8 BCB and RIThe main functions are:

ISL, provides access via BCN on the ISL interface to RI ASIC

RI EEPROM, is a serial EEPROM that stores information about AGCC

module

RPI, Remote Power Interface controls the AGCC power supply andsupervises the signals of input and output voltages

RCD, Radio Cabling Detection allows an automatic uplink RF cablingdetection and supervision

BCB_Vdd, BCB bus powered if DC/DC converter is off or self powered

if DC/DC converter is on

ADR, Physical address from backpanel for RI ASIC address setting and forSCP BSII address setting.

622 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

10.4.4.9 Glue LogicGlue logic consists of a number of registers, implemented on a single CPLDdevice. It also converts 5 V TTL signals to 3.3 V, required by the microprocessor.

The Glue logic maintains the following interfaces and/or functions:

AN microprocessor to the BSII

Board/module address register

Baseband ADC

LNA error register

LNA gain adjustment register.

The Glue logic also controls the BSII frame clock PLL and the CLKII masterclock PLL with a clock edge control signal (see Figure 332 and Figure 333).

10.4.4.10 Remote InventoryRemote Inventory is used to store information about the AGC module (partnumber, name, serial number, etc.). It consists of an EEPROM which isconnected to the BCB ASIC. The stored information is read via the BCBInterface.

10.4.5 AGC Power Supply

The AGCPS is a DC/DC converter, providing all the necessary voltages for theAGC components.

10.4.5.1 VoltagesThe following table provides AGCPS input/output voltage parameters.

Voltage Value

V in -38.4 VDC min.

-72 VDC max.


V out +3.3 VDC ±3 %

+ 5.1 VDC ±3 %

+ 12 VDC ±3 %

Table 92: AGCPS Input/Output Voltage Parameters

Normal operation of V out is unaffected by temperature fluctuations in therange 0o C to 70o C.

10.4.5.2 FuseThe input of the AGCPS is protected by a fuse with a high-breaking capacity.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 623 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

10.4.5.3 ProtectionThe AGCPS circuitry is protected against short circuit and accidental polarityinversion on its inputs.

10.4.5.4 GroundingGround continuity for the module is achieved with ground pins on the subrackbackplane which connect to the bus bar ground.

10.4.5.5 Remote SwitchingThe AGCPS can be remotely switched on and off by the OMU, via the BCB. Thisfeature is implemented on the module with an optically isolated on/off switch.

10.4.5.6 Low Voltage AlarmsAlarms are raised if the voltage level is too low. The following table provides thelow voltage threshold tolerances for AGCPS alarms.


Vin 30.4 V 38.4 V

3.3 V 2.7 V 3.0 V

5.1 V 4.2 V 4.6 V

12 V 10.0 V 11.0 V

Table 93: AGCPS Alarm Thresholds

624 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

10.4.6 AGC LEDs and Alarms

This section provides information on the AGC’s LEDs and Alarms.

10.4.6.1 LEDsThere are two LEDs on the front panel, which provide a visual indication ofthe operational status of the AGC module. The following table describes eachLED and defines their various operational states.


ON Green Power status

On Module is switched on

Off Module is switched off

OM /ALARM

Yellow/Red

Alarm status

Yellow On OM operational status (normaloperation)

Yellow Blinking Not defined

Red Blinking Not defined

Red On LNA, TMA or VSWR alarm on portA or B

Table 94: AGC LED Descriptions

10.4.6.2 AlarmsThe AGC detects the alarm conditions shown in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANBAlarm Conditions (81).

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 625 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

10.4.7 AGC Performance Characteristics

10.4.7.1 General Performance CharacteristicsThe performance characteristics of the AGCs are shown in the following table.

Parameter GSM 900 P GSM 900 E GSM 1800

Transmit band. 935 - 960 MHz 925 - 960 MHz 1805 - 1880 MHz

Receive band. 890 - 915 MHz 880 - 915 MHz 1710 - 1785 MHz

Power for each transmitter channelinput.

80 W maximum 80 W maximum 80 W maximum

Number of channels. 124 174 374

Bandwidth for each channel. 200 kHz 200 kHz 200 kHz

Return loss at receive port. > 16 dB > 16 dB > 16 dB

Return loss at transmit port. > 16 dB > 16 dB > 16 dB

Return loss at antenna port. > 18 dB > 18 dB > 18 dB

Group delay distortion in transmitband.

≤100 ns ≤100 ns ≤ 100 ns

Isolation between receive port andantenna port.

>30 dB >30 dB >30 dB

Isolation between receive ports. >20 dB >20 dB >20 dB

Isolation between transmit ports (A toB/ 1 to 2).

>50 dB/ 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB

Insertion loss in transmit pass bandwithout combiner.

0.3 - 1.6 dB 0.3 - 1.6 dB 0.3 - 1.6 dB

Insertion loss in transmit pass bandwith combiner.

3.4 - 5.3 dB 3.4 - 5.3 dB 3.4 - 5.2 dB

Intermodulation products at antennaport with 2x 28 W signals at onetransmit port and 50 on receiveport in receive band.

<-100 dBm <-100 dBm <-100 dBm

Intermodulation products at antennaport with 2x 28 W signals at onetransmit port and 50 on receiveport in transmit band.

<-36 dBm <-36 dBm <-36 dBm

RF input impedance. 50 50 50

RF output impedance. 50 50 50

Table 95: AGC Performance Characteristics

626 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

TX to RX isolation:

TXAIN -> RX1AOUT1 / RX1AOUT2 / RX1BOUT1 / RX1BOUT2

TXBIN -> RX0AOUT1 / RX0AOUT2 / RX0BOUT1 / RX0BOUT2

No. Start Freq (MHz) Stop Freq (MHz) Atten (dB) with RXgain

Atten (dB) withoutRX gain

A14 890 915 > 64 > 79

ANTA -> RX1AOUT1 / RX1AOUT2 / RX1BOUT1 / RX1BOUT2

ANTB -> RX0AOUT1 / RX0AOUT2 / RX0BOUT1 / RX0BOUT2

No. Start Freq (MHz) Stop Freq (MHz) Attenuation (dBc)

A20 (Out of bandrejection)

816 880 > 30

A21 (RX passband) 890 915 LNA Passband gain

10.4.7.2 Performance Characteristics with AGC GSM 900P Module Functional Variant’B’

Compared to general perfomrance characteristics, the variant ’B’ has thefollowing specific values:

TX to RX isolation:





A14 896 915 > 64 > 79





816 888 > 30


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 627 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

10.4.7.3 Performance Characteristics with AGC GSM 900P Module Functional Variant’C’

Compared to general perfomrance characteristics, the variant ’C’ has thefollowing specific values:

TX to RX isolation:





A14 902 915 > 64 > 79





816 888 > 50


628 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

10.4.8 AGC Front Panel

The following figures show the layout and O& M features of the three versionsof the AGC front panel.

10.4.8.1 AGC Front Panel - Version 1

RX1AOUT1

RX0AOUT1

RX1AOUT2

RX0AOUT2

OM/ALARM

ON

TXAIN

TXAOUT

ANTB

ANTA

TXBOUT

TXBIN

TXBIN2

TXBIN1

RX0BOUT2

RX1BOUT2

RX0BOUT1

RX1BOUT1

ReceiverConnectors

Module Extractor

Camloc Fasteners


TXAIN1

TXAIN2

AntennaConnector



High VoltageWarning

LEDs

Hot SurfaceWarning

Figure 335: AGC Front Panel - Version 1

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 629 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

10.4.8.2 AGC Front Panel - Version 2

RX1AOUT1

RX0AOUT1

RX1AOUT2

RX0AOUT2

OM/ALARM

ON

TXAIN

TXAOUT

ANTB

ANTA

TXBOUT

TXBIN

TXBIN2

TXBIN1

RX0BOUT2

RX1BOUT2

RX0BOUT1

RX1BOUT1

ReceiverConnectors

Module Extractor

Camloc Fasteners


TXAIN1

TXAIN2

AntennaConnector



High VoltageWarning

LEDs

Hot SurfaceWarning

Figure 336: AGC Front Panel - Version 2

630 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

10.4.8.3 ConnectorsThe AGC has four transmitter input connectors and eight receiver outputconnectors on its front panel. Therefore, one AGC module can be interfaced tofour TRE modules or two ANY modules, if used.

The following table describes the AGC front panel connectors.


TXAIN1,TXAIN2

TXBIN1,TXBIN2

Provide the RF transmitter interfaces from four TRE modules,or two ANY modules if used.

TXAIN,TXAOUT

A bridge between both connectors provides the interfacebetween two combined RF transmitter signals and theduplexer of branch A.

TXBIN,TXBOUT

A bridge between both connectors provides the interfacebetween two combined RF transmitter signals and theduplexer of branch B.

RX0AOUT1

RX1AOUT1

Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna A andthe first TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1, or a firstANY module if used.

RX0AOUT2

RX1AOUT2

Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna A andthe second TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1, or a firstANY module if used.

RX0BOUT1

RX1BOUT1

Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna Band the third TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1, or asecond ANY module if used.

RX0BOUT2

RX1BOUT2

Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna B andthe fourth TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1, or asecond ANY module if used.

ANTA

ANTB

Provide the RF interface to/ from two antennas, A and B.

Table 96: AGC Front Panel Connectors


Connector Type

ANTA, ANTB 7/ 16 female

TXAOUT, TXBOUT N female or SnapN

All other TXnn N female or SnapN

All RXnn SMB male

Table 97: AGC, Front Panel Connector Types

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 631 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

10.5 ANBThe ANB provides the intermediate RF stage between the TREs and theantenna.

Its tasks are to:

Combine the output signals of up to two transmitters and to connect them toup to two antennas

Feed the received signals from the antenna to the radio front end, where thesignals are amplified and distributed to up to eight receivers




10.5.1 ANB Basic Architecture


Duplexer

Splitter

Duplexer

Splitter

ANT A

ANT B

TXAIN

ANCC

TXBIN



Figure 337: ANB Basic Architecture

632 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

10.5.2 ANB Detailed Architecture

The following figure shows the ANB in more detail.


Duplexer B

ANMicroprocessor

BCBInterface

DC/DC Converter

Duplexer A

FilterLNA

LNA

−48 VDC

BCB

ANTA

ANTB

Power Splitter A

Power Splitter B

BSII

TXAIN

TXBIN

RX1BOUT1

RX0BOUT1

LEDs

RX0AOUT1

RX1AOUT1

DC Feed



Remote Switching

Uplink Functions

Uplink Functions

TRE

TRE

ANCC

RX0AOUT2

RX1AOUT2

RX1BOUT2

RX0BOUT2

Figure 338: ANB Architecture

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 633 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

10.5.3 ANB Description

On the downlink, the ANB connects two TRE transmitters to two antennas. Onthe uplink, it splits the received signals and passes them to the TRE receivers.

The following types of ANB modules are available for the different BTSA9100 variants:

ANBD, ANB module for GSM 1800

ANBG, ANB module for GSM 900.

In each branch A and B, the RF signals pass the duplexers before feedingthe antennas.


The ANB also allows the return loss of the transmitted signals to be measured,at the antenna connector, using VSWR techniques.


The table below describes the downlink and uplink functions, the interface,the controller and the power supply for the ANB.

Downlink Functions The downlink functions are performedby the components shown in TableANX/ANC/AGC/ANB, Downlink Components(75).

Uplink Functions The uplink functions are performedby the components shown in TableANX/ANC/AGC/ANB, Uplink Components (76).

BTS Control Bus Interface The BCB Interface is located on the backplane.It interfaces the data and control signals to theBCB as listed in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB,BCB Interface (77).

Antenna Network Controller From a functional point of view the ANCC isthe same as the ANCON used in the ANX(but without the DC/DC converter). There,forefor the description of the ANCC, see AntennaNetwork Controller (Section 10.1.4).

Power Supply As part of the ANCC there is a DC/DCconverter, providing all the necessary voltagesfor the ANB components. As the DC/DC isfunctionally the same as the one used in theANX refer to AN Power Supply (Section 10.1.5)for its description.

634 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

10.5.4 ANB LEDs and Alarms

This section provides information on the ANB’s LEDs and Alarms.

There are four LEDs on the front panel, which provide a visual indication of theoperational status of the ANB module. As the LEDs functionality is the same asin ANC refer to ANC/ANB LED Descriptions for its description.

The ANB detects the alarm conditions shown in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANBAlarm Conditions (81).

10.5.5 ANB Performance Characteristics

The performance characteristics of the ANBs are shown in the following table.

Parameter GSM 900 GSM 1800

Transmit band. 925 - 960 MHz 1805 - 1880 MHz

Receive band. 880 - 915 MHz 1710 - 1785 MHz

Power for each transmitter channel input. 63 W maximum 63 W maximum

Number of channels. 174 374

Bandwidth for each channel. 200 kHz 200 kHz

Return loss at receive port. > 16 dB > 16 dB

Return loss at transmit port. > 16 dB > 16 dB

Return loss at antenna port. > 16 dB 1) > 16 dB

Return loss at coupler port. > 18 dB ≥ 18 dB

Group delay distortion in transmit band. ≤100 ns ≤ 100 ns

Isolation between receive port and antenna port. >30 dB >30 dB

Isolation between receive ports. >20 dB >20 dB

Isolation between transmit ports (A to B/ 1 to 2). >50 dB/ 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB

Insertion loss in transmit pass band. 0.3 - 1.6 dB < 0.3 - 1.6 dB

Intermodulation products at antenna port with 2x 20 Wsignals at one transmit port and 50 on receive portin receive band.

<-101 dBm <-101 dBm

Intermodulation products at antenna port with 2x 20 Wsignals at one transmit port and 50 on receive portin transmit band.

<-75 dBc <-75 dBc

RF input impedance. 50 50

RF output impedance. 50 50

1) For ANB with bridge: >16 dB.

Table 98: ANB Performance Characteristics

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 635 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

10.5.6 ANB Front Panel

The following figures show the layout and O and M features of the two versionsof the ANB front panel.

10.5.6.1 ANB Front Panel - Version 1

RX1AOUT1

RX0AOUT1

VSWRB

ALARM

TXAIN

ANTB

ANTA

TXBIN

O&M

VSWRA

RX0BOUT1

RX1BOUT1

Receiver Connectors

LEDs

Module Extractor

Camloc Fasteners

TransmitterInput Connector

AntennaConnector

High VoltageWarning

Figure 339: ANB Front Panel Version 1

636 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

10.5.6.2 ANB Front Panel - Version 2

RX1AOUT1

RX0AOUT1

VSWRB

ALARM

TXAIN

ANTBANTA

TXBIN

O&M

VSWRA

RX0BOUT1

RX1BOUT1

Receiver Connectors

LEDs

Module Extractor

Camloc Fasteners


AntennaConnector

High VoltageWarning


Figure 340: ANB Front Panel Version 2

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 637 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

10.5.6.3 ConnectorsThe ANB has two transmitter input connectors and four receiver outputconnectors on its front panel. Therefore, one ANB module can be interfaced totwo TRE modules or two ANY modules, if used.

The following table describes the ANB front panel connectors.


TXAIN

TXBIN

Provide the RF transmitter interfaces from twoTRE modules or two ANY modules, if used.

RX0AOUT1

RX1AOUT1

Provide the RF receiver interfaces betweenantenna A and the first TRE receiver connectorsRX0 and RX1.

RX0AOUT2

RX1AOUT2

Provide the RF receiver interfaces betweenantenna A and the second TRE receiverconnectors RX0 and RX1.

RX0BOUT1

RX1BOUT1

Provide the RF receiver interfaces betweenantenna B and the third TRE receiverconnectors RX0 and RX1.

RX0BOUT2

RX1BOUT2

Provide the RF receiver interfaces betweenantenna B and the fourth TRE receiverconnectors RX0 and RX1.

ANTA

ANTB

Provide the RF interface to/ from two antennas,A and B.

Table 99: ANB Front Panel Connectors


ANTA, ANTB 7/ 16

TXAIN, TXBIN N female

All RXnnOUT SMB male

Table 100: ANB, Front Panel Connector Types

638 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

10.6 GSM/UMTS Co-SitingGSM cabinets and UMTS cabinets can be installed at the same site. Normallyall antenna feeder cables between antennas (A and B) and BTSs have to beinstalled separately for GSM and UMTS as shown in the following figure.

BTSGSM

850/900/1800

Node BUMTS

GSMAntennas

A + B

Separate Antenna Feeders A + Bfor GSM and UMTS

UMTSAntennas

A + B

ANCx ANRU

A B A B

Figure 341: GSM/UMTS Co-Siting

With the help of diplexer filters at both ends of the feeder cables, the GSM(850/900/1800) band and the UMTS band can be decoupled in order to use thesame feeder cable for both services. The following figure shows the principle.

BTS Node BGSM

850/900/1800UMTS

DiplexerDouble−Diplexer

Antennas A + BGSM

Antennas A + BUMTS

Common Antenna Feeders

Double−Diplexer

ANRUANCx

A B A B

Diplexer A

Diplexer B

Figure 342: GSM/UMTS Co-Siting with Diplexers and Common Feeders

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 639 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

10.6.1 Diplexer Functional Description

The following figure shows the block diagram of the diplexer. The base stationfeeder cable of the GSM and UMTS part is connected to the according BTSport of the diplexer. The signal passes the bandpath filter of the diplexer and isavailable at the antenna connector.

GSM BTS

GSMBandpath

UMTSBandpath

TMABIAS

Circuit

UMTS BTS

Antenna

Diplexer

Figure 343: Diplexer, Block Diagram

The insertion losses of the filters are as low as possible to achieve the bestnoise figures in the uplink and low attenuation in the TX downlink.

GSM and UMTS bandpath filters provide following features:

Suppression of spurious and noise signals from the transmitter(s) out of

band

Suppression of intermodulation product(s)

Rejection of harmonics of the transmitter(s)

Isolation of the UMTS branch (GSM part) or GSM branch (UMTS part).

The following table shows the out-of-band attenuations of the diplexer filters.

Filter Frequency (MHz) Attenuation Remark

GSM 850

GSM 900

GSM 1800

1920 - 2170 >60 dB UMTS Band

UMTS 824 - 960 >60 dB GSM 850 Band

GSM 900 Band

UMTS 1710 - 1880 >60 dB GSM 1800 Band

Table 101: Diplexer Filters Out-of-Band Attenuations

640 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

10 Antenna Networks

The UMTS branch is additionally equipped with a Tower Mounted Amplifier(TMA) BIAS circuit. This BIAS circuit allows the DC power supply (12 VDC)of a TMA using the RF feeder cable. The appropriate power distribution unit(PDU) is part of the ANRU module.

The GSM part of the diplexer is decoupled from the UMTS BIAS circuit part. Ifboth branches (GSM and UMTS) are equipped with a tower mounted amplifier,this external diplexer cannot be used. Then all necessary equipment of a TMA(inclusive of feeders) has to be installed twice.

10.6.2 Diplexer Mechanical Design

The external diplexers are designed for indoor and outdoor applications. Theyare fully purchased items. Therefore mechanical design, dimensions andweight depend on the selected manufacturer and cannot be described herein detail. Moreover there are additional differences in dimensions betweenGSM 850/900/UMTS and GSM 1800/UMTS diplexers, depending on thefrequencies used.

The following figure shows a GSM 1800 (DCS)/UMTS double-diplexer (forantennas A and B) as an example.

DCS ANT UMTS

DCS

ANT

UMTS

Bottom View

Side View

RF Connector

Ground Connector

Mounting Flanges(with holes)

Figure 344: Diplexer, Mechanical Design (Example)

The diplexer has six RF connectors (7/16 female) for connecting GSM BTS,UMTS BTS and antennas. A ground connector is available to connect thediplexer to ground. Two mounting flanges are used to fix the diplexer toimmobile equipment near the BTSs.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 641 / 910

10 Antenna Networks

10.6.3 Environmental Conditions

The external diplexer housings provide the necessary environmental and safetyprotection according to the standard ETS 300 019 -1-4 class 4.1E.

The minimum ambient temperature is -45� C, humidity up to 100 % at + 38� C.Earthquake is according to ETS 300 019 -2-3.

10.6.4 EMC Requirements

The EMC requirements are derived from ETS 300 342-3/phase 2, TS 25.104and EN 55022.

642 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

11 Temperature Control


The sections are supported with diagrams, if necessary. Illustrations of theFANU and FACB are also included.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 643 / 910


11.1 Cooling SystemThe BTS A9100 is equipped with a forced-air cooling system. Depending onthe BTS A9100 variant the cooling system may consist of up to three RITs; seethe following figure.

The three RITs are:

FANU

FACB

TFBP.

FANU

FANU

TFBP

FACB

Subrack Backplane

FACB

Ribbon Cable Connectors

Figure 345: Cooling System Components

A FANU consists of a moulded-plastic frame containing two fan blowers (seeFigure 347). The FANU is connected to the TFBP or subrack backplane.

Three FANUs are controlled by one FACB. The FACB monitors the fans andprovides power and digital speed control of the FANUs. The FACB is fittedon a TFBP or a subrack backplane, as required.

A special case exists where two FANUs are fitted as a pair below the ACSRused in BTS A9100 outdoor configurations. These two FANUs are controlled bythe BCU2 contained in the ACSR. The BCU2 monitors the fans and providespower and digital speed control of the FANUs.

A feature of the cooling system is its ability to control the front and back rowsof fans, independently of each other (see Figure 348). This enables thetemperature inside the cabinet to be regulated more precisely. It also extendsthe life of the fans and keeps noise levels to a minimum.

644 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


11.1.1 Fan Units

The FANUs are usually installed in groups of three. The exception is wherethey are fitted as a pair below the ACSR used in variant 2 of the BTS A9100outdoor configurations.

The FANUs are normally situated below the subracks containing TREs.Additional FANUs can be installed at the top of the equipment rack; see thefollowing figure.

TEMP. SENSOR

ABIS 2ABIS 1

RIBATPort

Abis

Interface

Group

External

Input/

Output

Interface

Group

External

Input/

Output

Interface

Group

External

Clock

Interface

Group

FLAT CABLE COMPARTMENT 1

FLAT CABLE SIDE COMPARTMENT

ABIS1

ABIS2

ABIS3

ABIS4

AB

IS 1

&2

KR

ON

E C

ON

NE

CT

AB

IS 3

&4

XGPS

XBCB

XRT

XCLK 1 OUT

XCLK 1 IN

XCLK 2 IN/ OUT

ALARMSCOMPARTMENT 1

ALARMSSIDE COMPARTMENT

Remote

Inventory

Part

Abis

Interface

Group

EXT − ALARMS

SU

N C

ON

NE

CT

ION

ALA

RM

OU

TP

UT

S

ALA

RM

INP

UT

S

DC IN

EBCB (optional)

Figure 346: Subrack Air Circulation

The fan blowers are driven by electronically-commutated motors. Theseare protected against reverse polarity and blocking due to an obstruction inthe fan blades.

Air is taken from the front of the cabinet and forced through the subracks. Thefans force the air in an upwards direction to dissipate the heat generated bythe subrack modules (mainly the TREs). The FANUs at the top of the rackassist air flow by pulling the air through the rack and expelling it throughgrills at the top of the cabinet.

Dummy panels are used to fill the FANU positions that are not equipped (indoorracks). These provide an air outlet at the back of the subrack.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 645 / 910


11.1.1.1 FANU AppearanceThe FANU consists of a moulded-plastic frame for mounting the two fanblowers. The fan blowers are manufactured from fiberglass reinforced plastic.They are fixed in the moulded-plastic frame with a simple snap-in mechanism.

The FANUs are inserted in guide rails, at the bottom of the subrack, and lockedin position with a latch. The electrical connection is achieved with a connector,fitted to the rear of the FANU, which plugs-in to the subrack backplane. Thefollowing figure shows a three-dimensional image of the FANU.

Blowers

Handle

Latch

Guide Rails

Power Connector

Figure 347: FANU

11.1.1.2 Fan Blower Operational ParametersThe following table lists the operational parameters for the fan blowers.

Parameter Description

Type: PAPST 4318/2, version 113

Max. air flow: 170 m3/ h

Acoustic noise: <45 dB

Operating voltage: 20 VDC to 40 VDC

Table 102: Fan Blower Unit Operating Parameters

646 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


11.1.2 Fan Control

The principal function of the FACB is to control the fan speed of the frontand back rows of fans, independently of each other. Each FACB controlsthree FANUs.

The BCU2 performs the functions of the FACB in the special case of a pairof FANUs fitted below the ACSR used in variant 2 of the BTS A9100 outdoorconfigurations.

The FACB has the following functionality:

Performs control and supervision of the fans

Detects the fan module and its date of manufacture

Supplies power to the fans

Provides an interface to the BCB.

The following figure shows the FACB architecture in block diagram form.

FANUs

Filtering and Surge

Limiting

Fuse−38 VDC to −72 VDC

DC/DC Converter (Front Row)

20 VDC to 40 VDC

DC/DC Converter (Back Row)

20 VDC to 40 VDC

FACB Controller

BackplaneAddress

BCBInterface

RIEEPROM

InputVoltage

Monitoring

Regulator

Regulator

Voltage Monitor and

Limiter

Fan Speed

Front Row Fans

Back Row Fans

Figure 348: FACB Architecture

The FACB activates the fans within the temperature range: -40� C to + 70�

C. However, at very low temperatures, in the range -40� C to -10� C, the fansoperate without digital speed control.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 647 / 910


11.1.2.1 FACE Functional EntitiesThe FACB consists of the functional entities described in the following table.

FACB Controller The controller is responsible for the followinginterfaces:

I/O for the BCB

Backplane address

Date of FANU manufacture

Fan speed control output

Remote on/off switching

RI EEPROM.

BCB Interface All OMU messages, such as fan alarms, arecommunicated via the BCB interface. TheBCB also provides an interface to the RemoteInventory EEPROM, via the FACB controller.

RI EEPROM The Remote Inventory EEPROM storesinformation about the FACB.

Power Supply The FANU power supply consist of two on-boardDC/DC converters. These provide powerindependently for the front and back rows offans. The DC/DC converters operate on aninput voltage in the range -38 VDC to -72 VDC.This is converted to a variable output in therange + 20 VDC to + 40 VDC.

The input to the FACB DC/DC converters isprotected from accidental reverse polarity,transient voltages and surges.

Fan Speed Control The output of the DC/DC converters ismonitored and dynamically regulated by theFACB controller PWM techniques. A squarewave output signal from the fans indicatesrotational speed of the fans. The PWM signal isused to control the fan speed.

Table 103: FACB Functional Entities

11.1.2.2 FuseThe input of the FACB is protected by a fuse with a high breaking capacity(3.5 A).

11.1.2.3 Date CodingThree pins on the FANU connector are hard-wired to provide a fixed code forthe year of manufacture. The code is read from the FACB controller.

648 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


11.1.2.4 Remote SwitchingThe front and back row DC/DC converters can be remotely switched on and off,independently of each other. The fan speeds for each row can also be adjusted.This function is implemented by the OMU, via the BCB Interface to the FACB.

11.1.2.5 FACB AppearanceThe FACB is a small PCB which is fitted to the STASR backplane between thethird and fourth module connectors (see Figure 283).

The following figure shows the layout of the FACB; only the principlecomponents are marked. The layout is shown so that the FACB can be easilyidentified.

Controller

Connector

Connector

Figure 349: FACB Component Layout

11.1.2.6 AlarmsTwo independent fan alarms, for the front and back rows, can be raised underthe control of the FACB. An alarm is raised when a fan-related output voltageis out of tolerance. The following table lists the voltage threshold-tolerancesbefore an alarm is raised.


U Front 13 V 20 V

U Back 13 V 20 V

Table 104: Alarm Threshold Voltages

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 649 / 910


11.1.3 Top Fan Unit

In some BTS A9100 variants, additional FANUs at the top of the cabinetassist the air circulation. They are connected to the TFBP, which provides theelectrical and signaling interface between the FANUs and the FACB. The TFBPis mounted at the top of the cabinet, on the rear wall. It is powered from a -48/-60 VDC external power source, via the cabinet bus bar.

The following figure shows the TFBP connector layout.

FANU Connectors

FACB

Ribbon Cable ConnectorGround

0 V

−48 VDC

X110 X111 X112

X117X116

X113

Equipment Label

Connector Identity

X100

Pin 1, Row A

Figure 350: TFBP Connector Layout

The following table lists and describes the TFBP connectors.

Connector Type Description

X110, X111,X112

R 1/3, male FANU Connectors

X116

X117

2 x 6-pin Header, male

2 x 16-pin Header, male

The FACB connectorsare linked to the FANUconnectors via the TFBPprinted wiring.

X100 C 64 M DIN 41612, male Ribbon Cable

X113 3 x FASTON Power

Table 105: TFBP Connectors

650 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


11.2 HEX2HEX2 is used in outdoor BTS A9100 versions. It maintains the correct airenvironment within the cabinets. The airflow within the cabinets is isolated fromthe outside environment.

HEX2 is mounted on the inside of the compartment door. It cools the internalair by transferring heat to the outside environment. The following figure showsthe main components of HEX2.

Cool Air Outlet

Warm Air Inlet

HEX2

Air Outlet

Door

Air Inlet

Inner Fans

Subrack

HEX2 Control Box

Outer FansFANU

Heat Sink Cassette

Outer Compartment

Inner Compartment

Temperature Sensor

Cool Air Outlet

Warm Air Inlet

HEX2

Air Outlet

Air Inlet

Subrack

FANU

HEX2 Mounting on Alternative Cabinet Door

Figure 351: HEX2 Main Components

HEX2 is a box which is divided into inner and outer compartments by aheat sink cassette. Warm air from inside the cabinet is drawn into the innercompartment by the inner fans. It is then blown past the heat sink cassette andreturned to the cabinet as cool air.

The heat gathered in the heat sink cassette is transferred to the outsideenvironment by the air stream in the outer compartment. The outside air isdrawn into the outer compartment by the outer fans.

The fan controller is contained in a control box. When the internal temperaturereaches 20� C, the inner fans switch on and operate at minimum speed.When the internal temperature reaches 30� C, the outer fans switch on andalso operate at minimum speed. As the temperature rises further, fan speedincreases for both the inner and outer fans.

If the temperature sensor fails or is disconnected, all fans operate at maximumspeed and an alarm is raised.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 651 / 910


11.2.1 LED(s)

There are three versions of HEX2, two with only one LED and another onewith four LEDs, where the reason for the alarm is shown in more detail (butonly on the module itself):

Versions with one LED (versions ADAC, ADCA)There is one LED on the front of the control box. It illuminates whenthere is an alarm

Version with four LEDs (version ADBA)

There are the following four LEDs on the module:

High/Low Temp: Temperature sensor failure, inside temperature above

70� C or below -60� C

Heater: Heater failure (not used; not correlated to HEAT2)

Ext. Fan: External fan failure

Int. Fan: Internal fan failure.

But the alarm raised by HEX2 is only an accumulative alarm.

11.2.2 Alarms

HEX2 raises an alarm when:

A fan fails

The temperature sensor is disconnected

The controller is faulty

The internal temperature reaches 70� C.

652 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


11.2.3 Appearance

The following figure shows the front and the two possible rear views of HEX2.

Door Side Rear Side (Version ADCA) *)

Air Outlet

Fan

Equipment Labels

Control Box

Fan Cables

DC Connector

Alarm Connector

LED

TemperatureSensor Connector

High/Low Temp

Heater

Int. Fan

Ext. Fan

Rear Side (Version ADBA)

LEDs:

*) Version ADCA has only the left fan and internal cabling

Figure 352: HEX2 Appearance

11.2.4 Connectors

The following table describes the HEX2 control box connectors.


DC Connector 9-pin Sub-D male 48 VDC power in.

Alarm Connector 9-pin Sub-D female Alarm out.

Table 106: HEX2 Front Panel Connectors

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 653 / 910


11.3 HEX3/HEX4HEX3 and HEX4 are used in Multistandard BTS outdoor versions. Theymaintain the correct air environment within the cabinets. Fresh air cooling isnot allowed in the outdoor BTSs. Therefore the airflow within the cabinets isisolated from the outside environment.

HEX4 is mounted on the inside of the MBO1 door, HEX3 is mounted on theinside of the MBOE door. They cool the internal air by transferring heat tothe outside environment. The following figure shows the main componentsof HEX3 and HEX4.

Cool Air Outlet

Warm Air Inlet

HEX2

Air Outlet

Air Inlet

Subrack

FANU

HEX3/4

Door

Inner Fan

Outer Fan

Heat Sink Cassette

Outer Compartment

Inner Compartment

Temperature Sensor

Figure 353: HEX3/HEX4 Main Components

HEX3 and HEX4 are boxes which are divided into inner and outer circuits by aheat sink cassette (core). The core consists of thermal conductive materialallowing heat exchange between both circuits. The air is circulated by oneblower in each circuit. Warm air from inside the cabinet is drawn into the innercompartment by the inner fan. It is then blown past the heat sink cassette andreturned to the cabinet as cool air.

The heat gathered in the heat sink cassette is transferred to the outsideenvironment by the air stream in the outer compartment. The outside air isdrawn into the outer compartment by the outer fan.

654 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


11.3.1 Blower Rotation Control

The temperature-controlled regulation of blower rotation is contained in acontrol unit which is assembled inside an inner circuit. The inner and outerblower are independent of each other. The control of blowers is an internalfunction of the heat exchanger.

When the internal temperature reaches 20� C, the inner fans switch on andoperate at minimum speed. When the internal temperature reaches 30� C, theouter fans switch on and also operate at minimum speed. As the temperaturerises further, fan speed increases for both the inner and outer fans.

After switch-on, the blower speed accelerates continuously up to the maximumspecified rotation. Then the speed is regulated down to the specified ramp.

11.3.2 Temperature Sensor

The temperature sensor is mounted in the heat exchanger at the air inletof the inner circuit.

Failure of the temperature sensor (e.g., sensor disconnected or short circuited)causes the following response:

All blowers are rotating at full specified speed

Alarm occurs, red LED is lit.

The response can be delayed up to 5 seconds after the failure occurs.

11.3.3 Alarm

There is one alarm output per heat exchanger. An alarm is raised when:

At least one blower fails

Temperature sensor/plug disconnected or short circuited


Temperature exceeds 70� C

Temperature drops below -60� C (sensor failure).


11.3.4 LED

An alarm indication is implemented by means of a visible red LED located onthe lid (inner circuit side).

The red LED is lit in case of an alarm.

11.3.5 Test Port

The test port allows the connection of an external temperature simulator(variable resistor) setting a temperature value to check the blower operationdepending on the temperature.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 655 / 910


11.3.6 Appearance

The following figure shows the front and the rear views of the HEX3/HEX4.Note that the HEX3 and HEX4 only differ in width and weight.

Door Side

Air Outlet*

Fan

Equipment Labels

DCand AlarmConnector

LED

WaterOutlet

Air Inlet*

* Grid not necessary

Fan

Air Inlet(Protected with grid)

Test Connector

Front Side

Air Outlet(Protected with gridif necessary)

Guiding tubesfor fixing bolts

Figure 354: HEX3/HEX4 Appearance

11.3.7 Connectors

The following table describes the HEX3/HEX4 connectors.


DC and AlarmConnector

9-pin Sub-D male 48 VDC power in (fuse T6.3 A)Alarm out.

Test Connector 9-pin Sub-D female Connection of externaltemperature simulator.

Table 107: HEX3/HEX4 Connectors

656 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


11.3.8 Mechanical Parameters

The following table lists the mechanical parameters of the HEX3/HEX4.

Parameter HEX3 HEX4

Height (mm) 1150 1150

Width (mm) 450 600

Depth (mm) 150 150

Weight (kg) 24 28

Table 108: HEX3/HEX4 Mechanical Parameters

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 657 / 910


11.4 HEX5HEX5 is used in Compact BTS Outdoor (CBO) versions. It maintains thecorrect air environment within the cabinets. Fresh air cooling is not allowed inthe outdoor BTSs. Therefore the air flow within the cabinets is isolated fromthe outside environment.

HEX5 is mounted on the inside of the CBO door. It cools the internal air bytransferring heat to the outside environment. The following figure shows themain components of HEX5.

Cool Air Outlet

Warm Air Inlet

HEX2

Air Outlet

Air Inlet

Subrack

FANU

HEX5

Door

Inner Fan

Outer Fan

Cooling Core

Outer Compartment

Inner Compartment

Temperature Sensor

1234123412341234123412341234123412341234

Figure 355: HEX5 Main Components

HEX5 is a box which is divided into inner and outer circuits by a heat sinkcassette (core). The core consists of thermal conductive material allowing heatexchange between both circuits. The air is circulated by one blower in eachcircuit. Warm air from inside the cabinet is drawn into the inner compartmentby the inner fan. It is then blown past the heat sink cassette and returnedto the cabinet as cool air.


658 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



The temperature-controlled regulation of blower rotation is contained within acontrol unit which is assembled inside the inner circuit. The inner and outerblower are independent of each other. The control of the blowers is an internalfunction of the heat exchanger.




The temperature sensor is mounted in the heat exchanger at the air inletof inner circuit.



Alarm occurs, red LED is lit flashing.

The response can be delayed up to 15 seconds. after the failure occurs.

11.4.3 Alarm







The response can be delayed up to 15 seconds. after the failure occurs.

11.4.4 LED

An alarm indication is implemented by means of a visible red LED located onthe lid (inner circuit side):

The red LED is lit flashing in case of a temperature/temperature sensor

alarm

The red LED is lit continuously in case of a fan alarm.

11.4.5 Test Port


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 659 / 910


11.4.6 Appearance

The following figure shows the front and the rear views of HEX5.

Air Outlet

Air Intlet

Water Outlet

Door Side


Test Connector

EquipmentLabels

Grill Guard

Rear Side

Air Outlet

Air Intlet

Figure 356: HEX5 Appearance

11.4.7 Connectors

The following table describes the HEX5 connectors.



9-pin Sub-Dmale

48 VDC power in (fuse T6.3 A) Alarmout.

Test Connector 9-pin Sub-Dfemale

Connection of external temperaturesimulator.

Table 109: HEX5 Connectors

660 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



The following table lists the mechanical parameters of the HEX5.

Parameter HEX5

Height (mm) 800

Width (mm) 450

Depth (mm) 130

Weight (kg) 13

Table 110: HEX5 Mechanical Parameters

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 661 / 910


11.5 HEX8/HEX9HEX8 and HEX9 are used in Multistandard BTS Evolution outdoor versions.They maintain the correct air environment within the cabinets. Fresh air coolingis not allowed in the outdoor BTSs. Therefore the airflow within the cabinets isisolated from the outside environment.

HEX9 is mounted on the inside of the MBO1E door, HEX8 is mounted on theinside of the MBOEE door. They cool the internal air by transferring heat tothe outside environment. The following figure shows the main componentsof HEX8 and HEX9.

Cool Air Outlet

Warm Air Inlet

HEX2

Air Outlet

Air Inlet

Subrack

FANU

HEX8/9

Door

Inner Fan

Outer Fan

Heat Sink Cassette

Outer Compartment

Inner Compartment

Temperature Sensor

Figure 357: HEX8/HEX9 Main Components

HEX8 and HEX9 are boxes which are divided into inner and outer circuits by aheat sink cassette (core). The core consists of thermal conductive materialallowing heat exchange between both circuits. The air is circulated by oneblower in each circuit. Warm air from inside the cabinet is drawn into the innercompartment by the inner fan. It is then blown past the heat sink cassette andreturned to the cabinet as cool air.


662 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



The temperature-controlled regulation of blower rotation is contained in acontrol unit which is assembled inside an inner circuit. The inner and outerblower are independent of each other. The control of blowers is an internalfunction of the heat exchanger.




The temperature sensor is mounted in the heat exchanger at the air inletof the inner circuit.





11.5.3 Alarm








11.5.4 LED



11.5.5 Test Port


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 663 / 910


11.5.6 Appearance

The following figure shows the front and the rear views of the HEX8/HEX9.Note that the HEX8 and HEX9 only differ in width and weight.

Door Side

Air Outlet*

Fan

Equipment Labels

DCand AlarmConnector

LED

WaterOutlet

Air Inlet*

* Grid not necessary

Fan

Air Inlet(Protected with grid)

Test Connector

Front Side

Air Outlet(Protected with gridif necessary)

Guiding tubesfor fixing bolts

Figure 358: HEX8/HEX9 Appearance

11.5.7 Connectors

The following table describes the HEX8/HEX9 connectors.




Test Connector 9-pin Sub-D female Connection of externaltemperature simulator.

Table 111: HEX8/HEX9 Connectors

664 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



The following table lists the mechanical parameters of the HEX3/HEX4.

Parameter HEX8 HEX9

Height (mm) 1250 1250

Width (mm) 450 600

Depth (mm) 150 150

Weight (kg) 24 28

Table 112: HEX8/HEX9 Mechanical Parameters

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 665 / 910


11.6 DAC8/DAC9DAC8 and DAC9 are used in Multistandard BTS Evolution outdoor versions.They maintain the correct air environment within the cabinets using freshair cooling.

DAC9 is mounted on the inside of the MBO1E door, DAC8 is mounted on theinside of the MBOEE door. They cool the internal air by transferring heat tothe outside environment. The following figure shows the main componentsof DAC8 and DAC9.

Air Outlet

Air Inlet

DAC8/9

Door

Fan

Fan

Subrack

FANU FANU

Subrack

FANU

Subrack

FANU FANU

FANU

Air Outlet with Filter Matand Grid

Air Inlet withFilter Mat

Fresh AirChannel

Figure 359: DAC8/DAC9 Main Components

The DAC8 and DAC9 consists of metal boxes with an air inlet and an air outlet inthe front side as shown in Figure 359. In these cut-outs filter mats are mounted.

Compared to HEX system, where the air inside of the cabinet is separatedfrom ambient air, the DAC system uses fresh air to cool the equipment insideof the cabinet.

The ambient air is drawn by fans through the hydrophobic filter mat and blowninto the BTS through cut-outs directly below the subracks. There it arises to thetop of the BTS and leaves it by the air outlet. The air outlet is protected againstintrusion of water and insects by a filter mat and an additional fly screen.

666 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



The temperature-controlled regulation of blower rotation is contained in acontrol unit which is assembled inside an inner circuit. The control of blowers isan internal function of the direct air cooling module.

When the internal temperature reaches 30� C, the fans switch ON and operateat 1500 rpm speed. When the internal temperature reaches 35� C and is below55 � C the fan speed increases linearly up to 2500 rpm. As the temperaturerises further, fan speed increases up to maximum speed of 2900 rpm.


The temperature sensor is mounted on the controller PBA.





11.6.3 Filter Mats

The inlet filter is a cassette consisting of a frame mounted on the door containinga filter mat. The filter mat is made of hydrophobic material but not gas proof.

The outlet fleece filter mat is additional protected by a fly screen.

11.6.4 Alarm

There is one alarm output per cooling unit. An alarm is raised when:







11.6.5 LED



11.6.6 Test Port


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 667 / 910


11.6.7 RS232

The RS232 port allows the connection of an external terminal to readoutthe fan speed..

11.6.8 Appearance

The following figure shows the front and the rear views of the DAC8/DAC9.Note that the DAC8 and HEX9 only differ in width and weight.

Door Side Front Side

Fan

Fan

Air Outlet

Air Barrier

Air Outlet

Air Outlet

Air Outlet

Air Outlet with Filter Matand Grid

Air Inlet withFilter Mat

Equipment Labels

LED

DC and Alarm Connector

Test Connector

RS232

Figure 360: DAC8/DAC9 Appearance

668 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


11.6.9 Connectors

The following table describes the DAC8/DAC9 connectors.




Temperature andTest Connector

9-pin Sub-D female Connection of externaltemperature simulator.

RS232 RJ45 For readout the fan speed.

Table 113: DAC8/DAC9 Connectors


The following table lists the mechanical parameters of the DAC8/DAC9.

Parameter DAC8 DAC9

Height (mm) 1229 1229

Width (mm) 449 600

Depth (mm) 150 150

Weight (kg) 18 22

Table 114: DAC8/DAC9 Mechanical Parameters

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 669 / 910


11.7 HEAT2HEAT2 is an electrical air heater used in outdoor BTS A9100 versions. Itswitches on automatically when the internal air temperature falls belowa predefined value.

HEAT2 is an electro-mechanical assembly fitted to the floor, the side wall orbeneath the HEX4 (MBO1) of each compartment in the outdoor BTS A9100.The following figure shows the circuit schematic.

X1 X2 (Variant AA only)

10

External Thermostat

Heater

Fan

Internal Thermostat

AA Variant: 600 W

CA Variant: 950 W

Figure 361: HEAT2 Circuit Schematic

The 230 VAC supply enters HEAT2 at connector X1. From there it is routedto the heater and fan (via connector X2 in case of variant AA). If, in case ofvariant AA, another HEAT2 is fitted, its AC supply is provided by the socketwhich is part of connector X2.

The external thermostat closes a switch when the temperature is below 10� C.The switch completes the circuit for the AC supply to the heater and fan. Thefan blows air through the heating elements of the heater.

The heater is protected by an internal thermostat. If the temperature of theheater assembly exceeds 90� C, the thermostat within the heater assemblyopens a switch. This breaks the AC circuit to the heater elements.

670 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


11.7.1 Appearance

The HEAT2 has two variants: variant AA and variant CA. Each variant isshown separately.

11.7.1.1 Variant AAThe following figure shows the side and top views of HEAT2 variant AA.

Heater Assembly

Fan

Temperature Adjuster

External Thermostat

Connector X2

Connector X1

Side View

Top View

Grille

Screw

Figure 362: HEAT2 Variant AA Appearance

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 671 / 910


11.7.1.2 Variant CAThe following figure shows the side and top view of HEAT2 variant CA.

Thermostat

GridConnector X1

Heater

Fan

(Thermostat fixed at 10 oC with safety varnish)

Angle

Connection Area

Label High Voltage DIN/ISO 3864 (Size 20 mm)

Equipment Labels

Connection Cable L = 800 m

Side View

Top View

Figure 363: HEAT2 Variant CA

11.7.2 Connectors

The following table describes the HEAT2 connectors.


X1 Provides the 230 VAC input.

X2 (Variant AAonly)

Provides the 230 VAC source for a second, optionalHEAT2.

Table 115: HEAT2 Connectors

672 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


11.8 HEAT3HEAT3 is an electrical air heater used in outdoor BTS Compact versions.It switches on automatically when the internal air temperature falls belowa predefined value.

HEAT3 is an electrical assembly fitted between the bottom plate of theCompact BTS Outdoor and the lowest subrack. The following figure showsthe circuit schematic.

X1

10 °C

External Thermostat

Heater

Integral TemperatureLimiter

500 W

L

PE

N


The 230 VAC supply enters HEAT3 at connector X1.

The external thermostat closes a switch when the temperature is below 10� C.The switch completes the circuit for the AC supply to the heater.

The heater is protected by an internal thermostat. If the temperature of theheater assembly exceeds 70� C, the thermostat within the heater assemblyopens a switch. This breaks the AC circuit to the heater elements.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 673 / 910


11.8.1 Appearance

The following figure shows the side and top views of HEAT3.

Connector X1

Labels

Heating Mat

Heater Plate

Figure 365: HEAT3 Appearance

11.8.2 Connectors



X1 Provides the 230 VAC input.


674 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


11.9 HEAT4HEAT4 is an electrical air heater used in outdoor BTS Compact versions.It switches on automatically when the internal air temperature falls belowa predefined value.

HEAT4 is an electrical assembly fitted between the bottom plate of theCompact BTS Outdoor and the lowest subrack. The following figure showsthe circuit schematic.


The -48 VDC supply enters HEAT4 at power connector.

The external thermostat closes a switch when the temperature is below 10� C.The switch completes the circuit for the DC supply to the heater.

The heater is protected by an internal thermostat. If the temperature of theheater assembly exceeds 70� C, the thermostat within the heater assemblyopens a switch. This breaks the DC circuit to the heater elements.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 675 / 910


11.9.1 Appearance

The following figure shows the side and top views of HEAT4.

Heater Plate

Heating Mat

Labels

PowerConnector

Figure 367: HEAT4 Appearance

11.9.2 Connectors



Power connector Provides the -48 VDC input.


676 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


11.10 HEATDCHEAT DC is an electrical air heater used in DC A9100 MBS GSM outdoorversions. It switches on automatically when the internal air temperature fallsbelow + 10� C.

HEAT DC is an electro-mechanical assembly fitted to the side wall or beneaththe HEX4 (MBO1) of each compartment in the DC A9100 MBS GSM outdoor.The following figure shows the circuit schematic.

Figure 368: HEAT DC Circuit Schematic

The - 48 VDC supply enters HEAT2 at connector X1. From there it is routed tothe heater and fan.

The external thermostat closes a switch when the temperature is below 10� C.The switch completes the circuit for the DC supply to the heater and fan. Thefan blows air through the heating elements of the heater.

The heater is protected by an internal temperature limiter in case of fan failure.If the temperature of the heater assembly exceeds 110� C, the temperaturelimiter opens a switch. This breaks the DC circuit to the heater elements.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 677 / 910


11.10.1 Appearance

The following figure shows the side and top views of HEATDC.

Grid

Heater

Air

flow

Fan

Angle

Label Hot SurfaceDIN/ISO 3864(Size 20 mm)

Connector X1

Side View

Top View

Figure 369: HEATDC Appearance

11.10.2 Connectors

The following table describes the HEATDC connectors.


X1 Provides the - 48 VDC input.

Table 118: HEATDC Connectors

678 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

12 Power Supplies and Distribution



A drawing of the physical appearance of the module is also included, showingthe connectors and controls.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 679 / 910


12.1 ACIBThe ACIB is used in outdoor BTS A9100 versions. It distributes its AC inputto five output connectors. The five output connectors provide the AC powersource for the PM08s.

The ACIB is housed in the SRACDC. It distributes 230 VAC to the five PM08s.If the temperature in the ACIB falls below a predefined level, the AC supplyto the PM08s is automatically switched off. The following figure shows thecircuit schematic.

PE

N

L1/L3

PE

N

L1/L3

PE

N

L1/L2

PE

N

L1/L2

PE

N

L1/L1

Relay

L1/L1

L1/L2

L1/L3

N

PE

Temperature Sensor

Input1 /3

−20

Output1 /3

PM08/1

PM08/2

PM08/3

PM08/4

PM08/5

PE = Permanent Earth

Figure 370: ACIB Circuit Schematic

The ACIB input connector is connected to the ACSB where provision is madefor 1Ø or 3Ø operation.

If the cabinet AC supply is:

230 VAC 1Ø - each of the three live wires in the input connector receives thesame, single phase L1. The PM08s connected to the output connectors

also receive the phase L1.

400 VAC 3Ø - each of the three live wires in the input connector receivesa different phase, L1, L2 or L3. The PM08s connected to the output

connectors share the L1, L2 and L3 phases, as shown in the above figure.

The AC input is connected to the five AC outputs via a relay which is controlledby a temperature sensor. When the temperature is above -20� C, the AC inputis connected to the five AC output connectors.

If the temperature is below -20� C when the BTS A9100 is first switched on,there is no AC supply to the PM08s. This means that the 0/ -48 VDC supplyis not available and the BTS A9100 cannot operate. However, AC poweris available to the HEAT2s.

When the HEAT2s raise the internal cabinet temperature above -20� C, therelay is activated and the DC supplies are produced. The HEAT2s prevent theinternal cabinet temperature from falling to -20� C thereafter.

When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0� C, the SUMP switches onthe telecommunications modules and the BTS A9100 becomes operational.

680 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.1.1 Front Panel

The following figure shows the front panel of the ACIB.

AC In

AC Out

5

4

3

2 1

Equipment Labels

Warning Label

Camloc Fastener

Figure 371: ACIB Front Panel

12.1.2 Connectors

The following table describes the ACIB front panel connectors.


AC In Provides a 230 VAC 1Ø or 400 VAC 3Ø input.

AC Out 1- 5 Provides 230 VAC 1Ø outputs for the five PM08s.

Table 119: ACIB Front Panel Connectors

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 681 / 910


12.2 LPFCThe LPFC is used in Compact BTS Outdoor cabinets.

Its functions are:

Connection of AC mains to the BTS

Lightning protection of the AC mains In

Line filtering.

The following figure shows the block diagram of the LPFC.

Lightning Protectors

AC Line Filter

L

N

PE

L

N

PE

AC in Terminals

Metal Box

Bolt M6

Figure 372: LPFC Block Diagram

The multistandard BTS outdoor cabinet is supplied with 230 VAC 1 Ø.

The LPFC is mounted above the cables entry compartment. The cover of theLPFC has a window which allows checking the lightning protection moduleswithout removing the cover.

682 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


The following figure shows the LPFC top view.

AC Out to ACUC

AC Mains In

Bolt M8for GND

Handle

Recess in cover

EquipmentLabels

LPFC Cover

Figure 373: LPFC Top View

12.3 LPFMTThe LPFMT is used in multistandard BTS outdoor tropical cabinets.

Its functions are:



Line filtering.

The following figure shows the block diagram of the LPFMT.


AC Line Filter

L

N

PE

L

N

PE

AC in Terminals

Metal Box

Bolt M6

Figure 374: LPFMT Block Diagram

The multistandard BTS outdoor cabinet is supplied with 230 VAC 1phase.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 683 / 910


The LPFMT is mounted on the left upper side of the MBO1T cabinet. The coverof the LPFMT has a window which allows checking the lightning protectionmodules without removing the cover.

The following figure shows the LPFMT top view.

Bolt M6for GND

LIN

DIC

AT

ION

LIG

HT

N. P

RO

TE

CT

.

ACout to ACMUTLPFCTCover

Recessin cover

Information,Equipmentand WarningLables

Figure 375: LPFMT Top View

12.4 LPFMThe LPFM is used in multistandard BTS outdoor cabinets.

Its functions are:



Line filtering.

The following figure shows the block diagram of the LPFM.


AC Line Filter

L3

L2

L1

N

PE

L3

L2

L1

N

PE

AC in Terminals

Metal Box

Bolt M6

Figure 376: LPFM Block Diagram

The multistandard BTS outdoor cabinet can be supplied with 230 VAC 1Ø or 400 VAC 3Ø.


230 VAC 1 Ø - the three AC In terminals are connected by a bridge, i.e.,each of the three live wires receives the same, single phase L1.

684 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


400 VAC 3 Ø - each of the three live wires at the AC In terminals receives adifferent phase, L1, L2 or L3.

The LPFM is mounted on the left upper side of the MBO1 cabinet. The coverof the LPFM has a window which allows checking the lightning protectionmodules without removing the cover.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 685 / 910


The following figure shows the LPFM top view.

Bolt M6for GND

L1

L2

L3

IND

ICA

TIO

N L

IGH

TN

. PR

OT

EC

T.

ACout to ACMULPFMCover

Recessin cover

Information,Equipmentand WarningLables

Figure 377: LPFM Top View

12.5 LPFUThe LPFU is used in outdoor BTS A9100 configurations.

Its functions are:



Line filtering.

The following figure shows the block diagram of version AA (three phases).


AC Line Filter

L3

L2

L1

N

PE

L3

L2

L1

N

PE

AC in Terminals

Metal Box

Bolt M6

Figure 378: LPFU Version AA, Block Diagram

The outdoor BTS can be supplied with 230 VAC 1 Ø or 400 VAC 3Ø.


230 VAC 1 Ø - the three AC In terminals are connected by a bridge, i.e.,

each of the three live wires receives the same, single phase L1

400 VAC 3 Ø - each of the three live wires at the AC In terminals receives a

different phase, L1, L2 or L3.

686 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


The following figure shows the LPFU top view with its cover removed.

AC Filter3 phases

Glands

PG29 PG16

AC in Terminals


Bolt M6

L1

L2

L3

N

3

2

1

N

PE

Figure 379: LPFU Version AA, Top View (with Cover Removed)

12.6 ACDUEThe AC Distribution Unit is used for MBO1E cabinets.

The ACDUE contains:

AC cable access in bottom inside the Filter/OVP part

3-phase input (L1, L2, L3, N, PE)

AC line filtering

Surge protectors

Overcurrent protection devices

Thermostat.

The ACDUE box is divided in two parts:

Filter and OVP function in bottom

AC-distribution and MCB above.

12.6.1 Technical Charateristics

Parameter ACDUE

Line filtering, rated current 3 x 12 A

Line filtering, leakage current Max. 4 mA/phase at 230 V

Line filteri damping 30 db at 1 MHz, 70 dB at 10 MHz to1 GHz

Overcurrent protection devices 4 x 16 A (3 for rectifiers, 1 for heaters)

1 x 10 A (for light and service socket)

AC power switch thermostat Closed at temperature above -20� C,open below -20� C, hysteresis max.10 K

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 687 / 910


12.6.2 ACDUE Views

Figure 380: ACDUE Views

12.7 ACMUThe ACMU is used in multistandard BTS outdoor configurations.

Its functions are:

Distribution of the AC input to AC/DC converters, heaters/air conditioning

and Service Lights (with AC power sockets)

Switching the AC lines to the connected modules by using circuit breakers.

The following figure shows the block diagram.

L1

L2

L3

L2

L3

to PM12/1

to PM12/2

to PM12/3

to Heat2/Airc.

to Service Light and AC Power Socket

PE

Circuit Breakers

Temperature Sensor

N

L1

L2

L3

−20

distributed toall modules

N


F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

N

PE

AC Mains In

3 PhaseAC−Mains−Connection

K1

Figure 381: ACMU Block Diagram

688 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


The AC input controlled by circuit breakers is connected to the three AC/DCconverters via a relay which is controlled by a temperature sensor. Whenthe temperature is above -20� C, the AC input is connected to the three ACoutput connectors.

If the temperature is below -20� C when the BTS A9100 is first switched on,there is no AC Supply to the PM12s. This means that the 0/ -48 V supplyis not available and the BTS A9100 cannot operate. However, AC poweris available to the HEAT2.


When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0� C, the SUMA switches onthe telecommunications modules and the BTS A9100 become operational.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 689 / 910


The following figure shows the ACMU front panel.

Warning Label

F4F5 F3 F2 F1

BTS HEATING SERVICE + LIGHTL2 L3L1

Warning Label

Equipment Label

Figure 382: ACMU Front Panel

12.8 ACMUTThe ACMUT is used in multistandard BTS outdoor tropical configurations.

Its functions are:

Distribution of the AC input to AC/DC converters and air conditioning

Switching the AC line to the connected modules by using circuit breakers.


Lup to three PM12/1

PE

Circuit Breaker

N

L



F5

N

PE

AC Mains In


Figure 383: ACMUT Block Diagram

The AC input controlled by circuit breakers is connected to the three AC/DCconverters.

The following figure shows the ACMUT front panel.

L1

F5

WARNING: TO ISOLATE THE COMPLETE SYSTEM SWITCH OFF THE AC MAINS

AND BATTERY BREAKER

Figure 384: ACMUT Front Panel

12.9 ACSUThe ACSU is used in outdoor BTS A9100 configurations.

Its functions are:

690 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


Distribution of the AC input to AC/DC converters, heaters/air conditioningand Service Lights (with AC power sockets)


The following figure shows the block diagram for CODI/CODE/CPT2.

L1

L2

L3

L1

L2

L3

L1

to PM12/1

to PM12/2

to PM12/3

to Heat2/Airc.

to Heat2/Airc.

to Heat2/Airc.

to Service Light and AC Power Socket

PE

Circuit Breakers

Temperature Sensor

N

L1

L2

L3

−20

distributed to all modules

distributed to all modules

AC Mains In


PE

N

Figure 385: CODI/CODE/CPT2, ASCU Block Diagram

The AC input controlled by circuit breakers is connected to the three AC/DCconverters via a relay which is controlled by a temperature sensor. When thetemperature is above -20� C, the AC input is connected to the two or three ACoutput connectors.

If the temperature is below -20� C when the BTS A9100 is first switched on,there is no AC Supply to the PM12s. This means that the 0/ -48 V supplyis not available and the BTS A9100 cannot operate. However, AC poweris available to the HEAT2.


When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0� C, the SUMA switches onthe telecommunications modules and the BTS A9100 become operational.

The following figure shows the ACSU front panel of CODI/CODE/CPT2.

F6F7 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1

L2L1 L3 L1 L2 L3

BTS HEATING SERVICE + LIGHTWarning Label

Figure 386: ACSU Front Panel CODI/CODE/CPT2

12.10 ACUCThe ACUC is used in Compact BTS Outdoor (CBO) configurations.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 691 / 910


Its functions are:

Distribution of the AC input to AC/DC converters, heaters/air conditioning

and AC power socket



1

X1

2

X2

3

X3

7

X7

8

X8

9

X9

4

X4

5

X5

6

X6

L PE N L PEN

X21

1

2

F4

PE

N L

LNPE F1 F2 F3

L

L

N

N

V=10 C

LPEN LPEN

TO PM12

LPEN

TO HEAT3

PE

N

L

AC Mains In1 PhaseAC MainsConnection

Figure 387: ACUC Block Diagram

The AC input controlled by circuit breakers is connected to the two AC/DCconverters. From -33� C the AC power is applied to the PM12 modules, FANunits and to HEAT3.

When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0� C, the SUMA switches onthe telecommunications modules and the CBO become operational.

When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 10� C, the HEAT3 isswitched off.

692 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


The following figure shows the ACUC front panel.

WARNING: TO ISOLATE THE COPMPLETESYSTEM SWITCH OFF THE AC−MAINS AND BATTERY BREAKER

HEATINGF2

BTSF1

RCB SERVICEF3

SERVICE SOCKETS1

Figure 388: ACUC Front Panel

12.11 APODThe APOD is used in indoor BTS A9100 versions that use an AC power supply.It distributes its AC input to five output connectors. The five output connectorsprovide the AC power source for the PM08s. The DC output from the PM08s isthen distributed to the subracks and other equipment by the APOD.

The APOD is housed in the ASIB. It distributes 230 VAC to the five PM08s. TheDC supply produced by the PM08s is connected to the remaining modulesin the cabinet via the circuit breakers located on the APOD, as shown inthe following figure.

APOD

PM08/5 PM08/4 PM08/3 PM08/2 PM08/1

DC Bus

DC Circuit Breakers

6

5

4

3

2

1

L

N

PE

Input 1

AC Circuit Breaker

INT

Subrack 3

Subrack 4

Subrack 2

EXT

Subrack 1

PE

−48 VDC

0 VDC

Figure 389: APOD Circuit Schematic

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 693 / 910


12.11.1 Front Panel

The following figure shows the front panel of the APOD.

AC Output Cables to PM08s

5

4

3

2

1

Equipment Labels

Warning Label

Camloc Fastener

DC Output Circuit Breakers AC Input

Circuit Breaker

Figure 390: APOD Front Panel

12.11.2 Connectors

The following table describes the APOD front panel connectors.


AC Input AC Input Circuit Breaker.

INT, SR1, SR2, SR3, SR4, EXT DC Output Circuit Breakers.

AC Out 1- 5 Provides 230 VAC 1Ø outputs for the fivePM08s.

Table 120: APOD Front Panel Connectors

694 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.12 PM08PM08 is used in outdoor BTS A9100 versions. It converts the AC input voltageto provide DC power for the cabinet equipment.

12.12.1 PM08 Functional Description

PM08 is housed in the SRACDC. It is an 800 W AC/DC power supply modulewhich converts 230 VAC to 0/ -48 VDC nom. Five PM08s (PM08/1 - PM08/5) arefitted in parallel to provide n + 1 redundancy, with load sharing. The followingfigure shows the arrangement.

ACIB

PM08/5 PM08/4 PM08/3 PM08/2 PM08/1 BCU1

DC Bus

Control

Alarms

AC Input

−48 VDC

0 VDC

Figure 391: PM08 Load-Sharing

The BCU1 performs the functions listed in the following table for the PM08s.

Control PM08 outputs are connected to the SRACDCbackplane DC Bus and monitored by BCU1. Whenthe output voltage changes because of a changedload, the PM08s automatically compensate for thechange.

BCU1 controls the overall output voltage of thePM08s. The nominal -48 V output is typically-54.5 V at 20� C. During battery charging, BCU1changes the output voltage within the range -52 Vto -57 V. During battery testing, the output voltagecan be reduced to -44 V.

The DC Bus provides DC power to the DCDP andthe BU41, via the BACO.

Alarm Collection The PM08 raises alarms for both Mains powerfailure and power module failure.

The alarm is collected by the BCU1. For moreinformation on alarms, refer to PM08 ElectricalCharacteristics (Section 12.12.2).

Table 121: BCU1 Functions for PM08

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 695 / 910


12.12.2 PM08 Electrical Characteristics

The electrical characteristics for the PM08 are described in terms of input andoutput voltages, fuses, output current and protection and alarms.

12.12.2.1 Input VoltageThe following table shows the PM08 input voltage parameters.

Input Parameter

Input voltage 220 VAC to 230 VAC (±15 %)

Frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz

Number of phases Single phase

Table 122: PM08 Input Voltage Parameters

Note: The PM08 can be operated at 110 VAC if the output power is limited to 500 W.

12.12.2.2 FusesBoth the live and neutral inputs of the PM08 are protected by fast acting10 A fuses. The fuses are accessed by removing protective caps on themodule’s front panel.

12.12.2.3 Output VoltageThe following table shows the PM08 output voltage parameters.

Output Parameter

Nominal output voltage at 20o C. -54.5 VDC

Output voltage range. -50 VDC to -58 VDC

Line regulation. U in ±15 %

Dynamic load regulation. 5 % of output voltage

Static load regulation. 0.2 %

Dynamic response. 2 ms

Voltage ripple. < 400 mV p-p

Table 123: PM08 Output Voltage Parameters

Note: If the BCU1 fails or is not fitted, the PM08 produces an output of -52 VDC(±0.25 V). If batteries are not fitted, the default voltage is produced at all times.

696 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.12.2.4 Output CurrentThe following table shows the PM08 output current parameters.

Output Parameter

Nominal I out at -54.6 VDC 15 A

Minimum I out 0 A

Maximum I out 19 A

Current limitation (I max). 16 A to 19 A

Derating. 3 % of I out (at > 60 oC)

Shared load current. <10 % of I out (of single module).

Table 124: PM08 Output Current Parameters

12.12.2.5 Protection and AlarmsThe PM08’s internal protection feature raises an alarm and shuts down thePM08 for:

Mains power failure

Under voltage: output voltage below -40.5 VDC

Over voltage: output voltage exceeds -60 VDC

Over current: output voltage at 0 V (short circuit)

Over temperature: PM08 heat sink temperature in range + 85� C to + 100� C.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 697 / 910


12.12.3 PM08 Front Panel

The following figure shows the front panel of the PM08.

Handle

Status LED

AC In Connector

Camloc Fastener

Fuses

Labels

Figure 392: PM08 Front Panel

12.12.3.1 PM08 LEDsThe PM08 has a single LED on its front panel. The type of LED fitted dependson the part number of the PM08. The following table shows the PM08 partnumbers and associated LED states.

PM08 Part Number LED State Description

3BK 06783 BAAA Green Normal operating conditions.

Off Fault.

3BK 06783 BBAA Green Normal operating conditions.

Orange Power limitation mode (maximum powerof 800 W reached).

Red Fault.

Table 125: PM08 LED States

12.12.3.2 ConnectorsThe only PM08 front panel connector is AC In, an IEC 320 connector for codedconditions, where the 230 VAC input cable from the ACIB is plugged in.

698 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.13 PM11The PM11 is used in outdoor BTS A9100 versions where the ACSR isemployed. PM11 converts the AC input voltage to provide DC power for thecabinet equipment.


The PM11 is housed in the ACSR. It is an 1100 W AC/DC power supplymodule which converts 230 VAC to 0/ -48 VDC nom. Four PM11s (PM11/1 -PM11/4) are fitted in parallel to provide n + 1 redundancy, with load sharing.The following figure shows the arrangement.

ACSBAC Input

PM11/4 PM11/3 PM11/2 PM11/1 BCU2

DC Bus

AlarmsControl

−48 VDC

0 VDC

Figure 393: PM11 Load-Sharing

The BCU2 performs the functions listed in the following table for the PM11s.

Control PM11 outputs are connected to the ACSR backplane DC Bus andmonitored by the BCU2. When the output voltage changes because ofa changed load, the PM11s automatically compensate for the change.

The BCU2 controls the overall output voltage of the PM11s. Thenominal -48 V output is typically -54.5 V at 20� C. During batterycharging, the BCU2 changes the output voltage within the range -52V to -57 V. During battery testing, the output voltage can be reducedto -44 V.

The DC Bus provides DC power to the BOBU and the BU41 or BU100,via the BAC2.

Alarm Collection The PM11 raises alarms for both Mains power failure and powermodule failure. The alarm is collected by the BCU2.

For more information on alarms, refer to PM11 Electrical Characteristics(Section 12.13.2).

Table 126: BCU2 Functions for PM11

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 699 / 910



The electrical characteristics of the PM11 are described in terms of input andoutput voltages, fuses, output current, and protection and alarms.


Input Parameter

Input voltage 220 VAC to 230 VAC (±15 %)




Note: The PM11 can be operated at 110 VAC if the output power is limited to 500 W.

12.13.2.2 FusesBoth the live and neutral inputs of the PM11 are protected by fast acting10 A fuses. The fuses are accessed by removing protective caps on themodule’s front panel.


Output Parameter

Nominal output voltage at 20o C. -54.6 VDC

Output voltage range. -50 VDC to -57 VDC

Line regulation. U in ±15 %

Dynamic load regulation. 5 % of output voltage

Static load regulation. 0.2 %

Dynamic response. 2 ms

Voltage ripple. < 400 mV p-p


Note: If the BCU2 fails or is not fitted, the PM11 produces an output of -52 VDC(±0.25 V). If batteries are not fitted, the default voltage is produced at all times.

700 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



Output Parameter


Minimum I out 0 A

Maximum I out 24 A

Current limitation (I max) 21 A to 24 A

Derating 3 % of I out (at > 60 oC)

Shared load current <10 % of I out (of single module)



Mains power failure





3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 701 / 910




Handle

Status LED

Camloc Fastener

Fuses

Labels


12.13.4 PM11 LED

The PM11 has a single LED on its front panel. The following table showsthe LED states.

LEDState Description

Green Normal operating conditions.

Off Fault.


702 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.14 PM12The PM12 converts the AC input voltage to provide DC power for the cabinetequipment. The PM12 is used in indoor and outdoor BTS A9100 versionswhere the SUMA is employed.


Up to three PM12s and an ADAM or up to four PM12s and an ADAM4 areput together in one-half or two-thirds of a STASR (see Figure 408 or 414).The ADAM/ADAM4 is connected to the DC distribution of the BTS. EachPM12 is controlled from the OMU (part of SUMA) via the BCB. Batteriesfitted to a BTS have a temperature sensor which is controlled by the RIBAT(see RIBAT (Section 12.29)) or the OUTC (see Outdoor Control BoardCPT2/MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2DC/ MBO2E/CBO(Section 4.5). The OMU reads the stored battery size/charge current and thetemperature out of the RIBAT or OUTC and sets the PM12s according tothese values.

PM12 is an AC/DC power supply module which converts 230 VAC to 0/-48 VDCnom. The output power of the PM12 module depends on the input voltagerange and temperature range as listed in the following table.

Output Power Input Voltage Temperature

900W* 150V...187V -25�C...70�C

1200W 187V...264V -25�C...70�C

900W* 264V...280V -25�C...70�C

100W 150V...280V -40�C...-25�C

* : Available only on PM12 module version 3BK25024 ABxx

Table 131: PM12 Output Power Values

Two to four PM12s (PM12/1 - PM12/4) are fitted in parallel with load sharing(see Figure 246 or MBO1/MBO2 AC/DC Power Supply System (247))controlled by a local sharing bus.

The OMU performs the functions listed in the following table for the PM12s.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 703 / 910


Control PM12 outputs are connected via ADAM/ADAM4 to the STASRbackplane DC Bus and monitored by the OMU. When the outputvoltage changes because of a changed load, the PM12s automaticallycompensate for the change.

OMU controls the overall output voltage of the PM12s. Default outputvoltage without OMU control is 52.2V. Depending on battery cellvoltage set in RIBAT/OUTC, OMU sets the output voltage of PM12in range 52.2-57V.

The DC Bus provides DC power to the:

BOBU/BOMU/BOSU

BU41, BU100 or BU101, via the ADAM/ADAM4.

Alarm Collection The PM12 raises alarms for both Mains power failure and powermodule failure. The alarm is collected by the OMU.

For more information on alarms, refer to PM12 Electrical Characteristics(Section 12.14.2).

Table 132: OMU Functions for PM12

704 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



The electrical characteristics of the PM12 are described in terms of input andoutput voltage, fuses, output current, and protections and alarms.


Input Parameter

Nominal input voltage 230/ 240 VAC

Input voltage range 187 VAC to 264 VAC




12.14.2.2 FusesBoth the live and neutral inputs of the PM12 are protected by fast acting 10 Afuses. The fuses are accessed by removing the cover of the module.


Output Parameter

Nominal output voltage at 20o C -54.5 VDC (in case of Ucell=2.27V)

Output voltage range -50 VDC to -57 VDC

Line regulation U in ±15 %

Dynamic load regulation 5 % of output voltage

Static load regulation 0.2 %

Dynamic response 2 ms

Voltage ripple < 400 mV p-p


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 705 / 910



Output Parameter


Minimum I out 0 A

Maximum I out 24 A

Current limitation (I max) 21 A to 24 A

Derating 3 % of I out (at > 60� C)

Shared load current <10 % of I out (of single module)



Mains power failure





706 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13




Handle

Status LED

AC In Connector

Camloc Fastener

Equipment Labels

ON


12.14.4 PM12 LED

The PM12 has a single LED on its front panel. The following table showsthe LED states.

LEDState Description

Green Normal operating conditions.

Off Fault.


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 707 / 910


12.15 PM18The PM18 converts the AC input voltage to provide DC power for the cabinetequipment. PM18 are used in outdoor BTS or MBS.

The consists of the subrack PM18SR which contains a control unit PM18C, upto 3 rectifier PM18R and a temperature sensor.

Each rectifier has an output power of 1800 W. The PM18C controls the thepower modules and handles the alarm reporting to the SUMU via XBCB andRS232. The battery management is done by the PM18C internally of the powersupply without any control functions of the SUMA.

12.15.1 Performance Characteristics

12.15.1.1 Input Voltage ParametersThe following table shows the PM18 input voltage parameters.

Input PM18

Nominal input voltage 230 VAC

Input voltage range 150 VAC to 280 VAC


Number of phases Single or three phase

12.15.1.2 Output Voltage ParametersThe following table shows the PM18 output voltage parameters.

Output PM18

Nominal output voltage at 20o C -52.5 VDC … -54VDC

Output voltage range -42 … -57 VDC

Line regulation +/-10 %

Dynamic load regulation +/-10 %

Dynamic response 50 ms

Voltage ripple < 200 mV p-p

708 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.15.1.3 Output Power ParametersThe following table shows the PM18 output power parameters.

Output PM18 per module

Nominal output voltage UN 52.5 - 54 V

Output voltage range UR 48 - 57 V

Nominal power at UR 1800 W

Maximum I out 40 A (limitation mode)

Output power de-rating 2 % of I out/ K (at > 55�C)

12.15.2 LEDs

12.15.2.1 PM18SRThe PM18SR from Cherokee has a single LED on it.

LED Color State Description

ON Battery connectedLVD (Low VoltageDisconnection)

Green

OFF Battery not connected

12.15.2.2 PM18C LEDsThe PM18C from Cherokee has a single LED on its front panel.

The following table shows the LED states for the Cherokee PM18C.


ON Normal operational conditions.Monitoring OK

Blinking Monitoring start-up

ON Green

OFF Monitoring fail

The PM18C from H+S has two LEDs on its front panel.

The following table shows the LED states for the H+S PM18C.


ON Normal operational conditionsON Green

OFF Module not operational

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 709 / 910



ON FaultAlarm Red

OFF Normal operational conditions

12.15.2.3 PM18R LEDsThe Cherokee PM18R has four LEDs on its front panel.

The following table shows the LED states.


ON AC voltage OKAC OK Green


ON DC voltage OKDC OK Green


ON Output overvoltageOVP Red


ON Excessive temperatureOTP Red


The H+S PM18R has two LEDs on its front panel.

The following table shows the LED states.


ON Normal operational conditionsON Green


ON FaultFault Red


710 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.15.3 Fuses

Both the live and neutral inputs of the PM18 are protected by fuses.

PM Fuses

PM18 12.5 A, medium delay

The fuses are accessed by removing the protective caps on the module’sfront panel.

12.15.4 Protection and Alarms

The PM’s internal protection feature raises an alarm and shuts down the PMfor the following reasons:

Mains power failure

Under-voltage: Output voltage below -40.5 VDC

Over-voltage: Output voltage exceeds -60 VDC

Over-current: Output voltage at 0 V (short circuit)

Over-temperature: PM12 heat sink temperature in the range of +85�C to

+100�C.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 711 / 910


12.15.5 PM18 Front View

The PM18 consists of the subrack PM18SR, which contains a control unitPM18C, up to 3 rectifiers PM18R and a temperature sensor.

Ala

rmO

N

Fault ON

Fault ON

Fault ON

XB

CB

RS

232

+T

emp.

Sen

sor

BatteryConnectors

LoadConnectors

MainsConnectors

Battery Breaker

Figure 396: PM18 H+S Front View

Battery Breaker

Batt −

Batt +

OUT −

OUT −

MainsConnectors

ON

AC DC OVP OTP AC DC OVP OTP AC DC OVP OTP

LVD

Figure 397: PM18 Cherokee Front View

712 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.15.6 Weight

PM Weight

PM18 Rectifier 3 kg / module

PM18 Subrack H+S 5 kg

PM18 Subrack Cherokee 7,5 kg

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 713 / 910


12.16 BCU1The BCU1 is used in outdoor BTS A9100 versions. It controls the DC outputvoltage and battery operation.

12.16.1 BCU1 Functional Description

The BCU1 is housed in the SRACDC. It performs control functions for thebatteries and some of the modules within the SRACDC. The following figureshows the arrangement. For simplicity, only two of the five PM08s are shown.

PM08/2 PM08/1 BCU1

ACRI

BACO

DC Bus

Shunt

AlarmsControl

Shunt

XBCB

BU41

−48 VDC

0 VDC

SRACDC

V

V

Figure 398: BCU1 Interconnections

The BCU1 connects to the PM08s, ACRI and BACO via the SRACDCbackplane. The voltages across the shunt resistors provide the BCU1 with ameasurement of the currents drawn. BU41 contains up to two battery groupswhich are referred to as branches. Each branch provides -48 VDC.


PM08 control

Alarm supervision

Battery management.

12.16.1.1 PM08 ControlThe BCU1 controls the PM08 output voltage and collects any alarms that areproduced. For more information on the PM08, refer to PM08 (Section 12.12).

714 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.16.1.2 Alarm SupervisionThe BCU1 collects alarms and reports them to the ACRI.

The alarms are:

AC power failure

PM08 failure

Battery malfunction

BCU1 fault.

For more details of the alarm information, refer to BCU1 LEDs, LCD, Alarmsand Buttons (Section 12.16.2).

12.16.1.3 Battery ManagementThe BCU1 provides the battery management functions described in thefollowing table.

Deep DischargeProtection

During normal operation, a trickle charge currentensures that the batteries remain fully charged. Whenan AC mains failure occurs, the batteries supply DCpower to the BTS A9100. This discharges the batteriescausing their output voltage to fall.

If the output voltage falls below -42 VDC (±0.5 V), theBCU1/BCU2 disconnects the batteries by deactivatingrelays in the BACO/BAC2. This prevents deepdischarge of the batteries which shortens their life.

Charging CurrentRegulation

When charging the batteries, BCU1/BCU2 regulatesthe charging current so that battery life is notshortened. Charging current is adjusted by changingthe PM08/PM11 output voltages.

Charging current regulation:

Limits the maximum charging current, depending

on battery type and the number of battery branches.For more details of the charging current limits,

refer to BU41 (Section 12.24) and BU100 (Section12.25).

Adjusts the charging current to avoid overheating

the batteries. A temperature sensor, fitted to onebattery branch, is connected to BCU1 via the BACO.

The charging voltage, at an ambient temperature of20o C, is typically -54.6 VDC. If the temperature sensorfails, or is not fitted, the PM08/PM11 output voltage isset to -52 VDC.

Table 137: BCU1/BCU2 Battery Management Functions

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 715 / 910


12.16.2 BCU1 LEDs, LCD, Alarms and Buttons

The different LEDs, the LCD, alarms, buttons and the special menu for theBCU1 are described separately below.

12.16.2.1 LEDsThe following table describes the front panel LEDs.


On Green On Normal state - BCU1 internal referencevoltage is available.

Off BCU1 faulty.

Bat. Red On Battery backup in operation (batterydischarging) or battery malfunction.

Off Normal state.

Test Yellow On n/a

Off Normal state.

Table 138: BCU1 LED Descriptions

12.16.2.2 LCDThe BCU1 has an LCD on its front panel (see Figure 399). Information isviewed using the front panel Function and Status buttons to scroll throughseveral display options.

The LCD provides two rows of alphanumeric information where each rowconsists of eight characters. The first row displays a message and the secondrow displays associated parameters or choices.

12.16.2.3 AlarmsThe BCU1 collects alarms and reports them to the ACRI. The alarms aredescribed in the following table.

Alarm Type Description

BCU1 Fault The internal reference voltage used by the BCU1 hasfailed.

PM08 Failure The alarm information specifies the identity number ofthe failed module and the number of modules fitted.

AC Failure The AC mains supply has failed or been switched off.

Battery Malfunction The identity number of the battery branch that failed isreported. A battery malfunction occurs if:

The battery was automatically disconnectedbecause of a malfunction during charging

Deep discharge protection occurred.

Table 139: BCU1 Alarms

716 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.16.2.4 Function ButtonUsing the Function button, the following information can be displayed:

PM08s output voltage (Uload)

Battery voltage (Ubatt)

Output current (Iload)

Battery current (Ibatt), where:

+ = charging

- = discharging.

Battery temperature.

12.16.2.5 Status ButtonUsing the Status button, the following information can be displayed:

Alarm type, where the character:

V represents BCU1 failure

R represents a rectifier (PM08) failure

M represents an AC mains failure

B represents a battery malfunction.

Status of the PM08s, represented by a five-character sequence. Eachcharacter position represents a physical PM08 slot position, where:

N - slot not occupied

F - PM08 failed

Y - PM08 serviceable.

Battery type and number of battery branches.

12.16.2.6 Special MenuThe special menu is activated by pressing the Function and Status buttonssimultaneously, for five seconds. Selections in the special menu are then madeusing the Function and Status buttons individually.

Using the special menu, the following tasks can be performed:

Set battery type

Set number of branches in use.

Refer to the Evolium BTS A9100/A9110 Corrective Maintenance Handbookfor details of how to use the special menu facility.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 717 / 910


12.16.3 BCU1 Front Panel

The following figure shows the front panel of the BCU1.

Test

Function

Bat.

Control Buttons

LCD Display

Status LEDs

On

Camloc Fastener

Connector RS−232 (For factory service and test only.)

Handle

Status

RS−232

Labels

Figure 399: BCU1 Front Panel

12.17 BCU2The BCU2 is used in outdoor BTS A9100 versions where the ACSR isemployed. It:

Controls the DC output voltage and battery operation

Collects alarms from the ACSR modules

Controls the ACSR FANUs

Provides the interface to the BTS Remote Inventory function.

12.17.1 BCU2 Functional Description

The BCU2 is housed in the ACSR. It performs control functions for the batteriesand some of the modules within the ACSR. The following figure shows thearrangement. For simplicity, only two of the four PM11s are shown.

ACSR

PM11/2 PM11/1 BCU2

BAC2

DC Bus

Shunt

AlarmsControl

Shunt

BU41 or BU100

−48 VDC

0 VDC

XBCB

V

V

Figure 400: BCU2 Interconnections

718 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


BCU2 connects to the PM11s and BAC2 via the ACSR backplane. Thevoltages across the shunt resistors provide BCU2 with a measurement of thecurrents drawn. BU41 contains up to two battery groups and BU100 containsone battery group. These battery groups are referred to as branches. Eachbranch provides -48 VDC.


PM11 control

Alarm supervision

Battery management

ACRI system functions.

12.17.1.1 PM11 ControlThe BCU2 controls the PM11 output voltage and collects any alarms that areproduced. For more information on the PM11, refer to PM11 (Section 12.13).

12.17.1.2 Alarm SupervisionThe BCU2 collects alarms and reports them to the OMU on the SUMP.

The alarms are:

AC power failure

PM11 failure

Battery malfunction

BCU2 fault.

For more details of the alarm information, refer to BCU2 LEDs, LCD, Alarmsand Buttons (Section 12.17.2).

12.17.1.3 Battery ManagementThe BCU2 provides the battery management functions described in TableBCU1/BCU2 Battery Management Functions (137).

12.17.1.4 ACRI System FunctionsThe ACRI system implemented on the BCU2 consists of the functions listed inthe following table.

ANPS The BCU2 contains an ANPS which converts the -48VDC input supply to the DC voltages required by theother components. For more information on the ANPS,refer to AN Power Supply (Section 10.1.5).

Modified FACB The BCU2 contains a modified FACB which reportsfan faults and controls the two FANUs that cool theACSR modules. For more information on the FACBand FANUs, refer to Fan Control (Section 11.1.2).

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 719 / 910


XBCB The BCU2 contains a BCB ASIC that transfersinformation to the OMU in the SUMP via the XBCB.This consists of:

Alarms from modified FACB

Alarms internal to the BCU2

Alarms from the battery and PM11s

Remote Inventory information.

RI The BCU2 contains a Remote Inventory that is usedto store information about the module (part number,name, serial number, etc.). It consists of an EEPROMwhich is connected to the BCB ASIC.

Table 140: BCU2, ACRI System Functions

720 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.17.2 BCU2 LEDs, LCD, Alarms and Buttons

The different LEDs, the LCD, alarms, buttons and the special menu for theBCU2 are described separately below.

12.17.2.1 LEDsThe following table describes the front panel LEDs.


On Green ON Normal state - BCU2 internal referencevoltage is available.

OFF BCU2 faulty.

Bat. Red ON Battery backup in operation (batterydischarging) or battery malfunction.

OFF Normal state.

Test Yellow ON n/a

OFF Normal state.

Power ON ON When XBCB bus is connected andOK and internal power supply (48V/5Vconverter) is operational.

OFF Otherwise.

Table 141: BCU2 LED Description

12.17.2.2 LCDThe BCU2 has an LCD on its front panel (see Figure 401). Information isviewed using the front panel Function and Status buttons to scroll throughseveral display options.

The LCD provides one row of alphanumeric information where the row consistsof eight characters.

12.17.2.3 AlarmsThe BCU2 collects alarms and reports them to the OMU on the SUMP. Thealarms are described in the following table.


BCU2 Fault The internal reference voltage used by the BCU2 hasfailed.

PM11 Failure The alarm information specifies the identity number ofthe failed module and the number of modules fitted.

AC Failure The AC mains supply has failed or been switched off.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 721 / 910



Fan Status The status of the two FANUs located below the ACSR.

Battery Malfunction The identity number of the battery branch that failed isreported. A battery malfunction occurs if:

The battery was automatically disconnected

because of a malfunction during charging

Deep discharge protection occurred.

Table 142: BCU2 Alarms

12.17.2.4 Function ButtonUsing the Function button, the following information can be displayed:

PM11s output voltage (Uload)

Battery voltage (Ubatt)

Output current (Iload)

Battery current (Ibatt), where:

+ = charging

- = discharging.

Battery temperature.

722 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.17.2.5 Status ButtonUsing the Status button, the following information can be displayed:

Alarm type, where the character:

V represents BCU2 failure

R represents a rectifier (PM11) failure

M represents an AC mains failure

B represents a battery malfunction.

Status of the PM11s, represented by a four-character sequence. Each

character position represents a physical PM11 slot position, where:

N - slot not occupied

F - PM11 failed.

Y - PM11 serviceable.

Battery type and number of battery branches.

12.17.2.6 Special MenuThe special menu is activated by pressing the Function and Status buttonssimultaneously, for five seconds. Selections in the special menu are then madeusing the Function and Status buttons individually.

Using the special menu, the following tasks can be performed:

Set battery type

Set number of branches in use.

Refer to the Evolium BTS A9100/A9110 Corrective Maintenance Handbookfor details of how to use the special menu facility.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 723 / 910


12.17.3 BCU2 Front Panel

The following figure shows the front panel of the BCU2.

Test

Function

Bat.

Control Buttons

LCD Display

Status LEDs

On

Camloc Fastener

XBCB Connector

Handle

Status

RS−232

Labels

Temperature Connector

Power ON

Figure 401: BCU2 Front Panel

12.17.4 Connectors

The following table describes the BCU2 front panel connectors.


Temperature For connection of temperature sensor fromBU41 or BU100.

XBCB Provides a:

+ 5 VDC signal to enable ANPS

Serial interface for the transfer of alarms and

Remote Inventory information to the OMU.

Table 143: BCU2 Front Panel Connectors

724 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.18 BACOThe BACO is used in outdoor BTS A9100 versions. It interconnects thebatteries and the DC outputs of the PM08s.

The BACO contains:

Circuit breakers for manual isolation of the batteries

Relays for automatic isolation of the batteries, controlled by the BCU1.

The BACO is housed in the SRACDC. It interconnects up to two batterybranches to the SRACDC backplane DC bus. The battery branches must be ofthe same type and capacity. The following figure shows the circuit schematic.

Temperature Sensor

Circuit Breakers

BU41 BACO SRACDC Backplane

ShuntDC Bus

K1

K2

Branch 1

Branch 2

BATOUT+

BATOUT−

UBATT−

RELBATT1

RELBATT2

Sensor Signals

To BCU1

48 VDC nom.

48 VDC nom.

Figure 402: BACO Circuit Schematic

Circuit breakers are provided for manual isolation of the batteries during batterymaintenance. When in use, the circuit breakers trip automatically when thecurrent drawn exceeds 60 A.

During an AC mains failure, BU41 provides battery power to the DC bus viarelays K1 and K2, and a shunt resistor. If the battery discharge becomesexcessive, BCU1 deactivates the relays to isolate the batteries. Relays K1and K2 are controlled by the signals RELBATT1 and RELBATT2, respectively.During battery charging and discharging, the relays operate simultaneously.During battery testing, they operate independently.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 725 / 910


12.18.1 Front Panel

The following figure shows the front panel of the BACO.

Camloc Fastener

Equipment Labels

Battery Connection Cables

Warning Label

Figure 403: BACO Front Panel

12.18.2 Connectors

The following table describes the BACO connectors.


X200 Connects battery temperature sensor signals toSRACDC backplane.

Battery Connectors Connects to battery terminals. There are twocables for each branch.

Table 144: BACO Front Panel Connectors

726 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.19 BAC2The BAC2 is used in outdoor BTS A9100 versions. It interconnects thebatteries and the DC outputs of the PM08s or PM11s.

The BAC2 contains:

Circuit breakers for manual isolation of the batteries

Relays for automatic isolation of the batteries, controlled by the BCU2.

The BAC2 is housed in the ACSR. It interconnects up to two battery branchesto the ACSR backplane DC bus. The battery branches must be of the sametype and capacity. The following figure shows the circuit schematic.

Temperature Sensor

Circuit Breakers

BU41 or BU100

BAC2 ACSR Backplane

ShuntDC Bus

K1

K2

Branch 1

Branch 2 (BU41 only)

BATOUT+

BATOUT−

UBATT−

RELBATT1

RELBATT2

Sensor Signals

To BCU2

48 VDC nom.

48 VDC nom.

Figure 404: BAC2 Circuit Schematic

Circuit breakers are provided for manual isolation of the batteries during batterymaintenance. When in use, the circuit breakers trip automatically when thecurrent drawn exceeds 60 A.

During an AC mains failure, BU41 or BU100 provides battery power to theDC bus via relays K1 and K2, and a shunt resistor. If the battery dischargebecomes excessive, BCU2 deactivates the relays to isolate the batteries.Relays K1 and K2 are controlled by the signals RELBATT1 and RELBATT2,respectively. During battery charging and discharging, the relays operatesimultaneously. During battery testing, they operate independently.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 727 / 910


12.19.1 Front Panel

The following figure shows the front panel of the BAC2.

Camloc Fastener

Equipment Labels


AC Mains and Battery Breakers

Figure 405: BAC2 Front Panel

12.19.2 Connectors

The following table describes the BAC2 connectors.


Battery Connectors Connects to battery terminals. There are twocables for each branch.

Table 145: BAC2 Front Panel Connectors

728 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.20 ABACThe ABAC is used in indoor BTS A9100 versions that use an AC power supply.It interconnects the batteries and the DC outputs of the PM08s.

The ABAC contains:

Circuit breakers for manual isolation of the battery

Relays for automatic isolation of the battery, controlled by the BCU1.

The ABAC is housed in the ASIB. It interconnects a maximum of one batterybranch to the ASIB backplane DC bus. The battery branch can be BU41 orBU100. The following figure shows the circuit schematic.

Temperature Sensor

Circuit Breakers

BU41 or BU100

ABAC ASIB Backplane

ShuntDC Bus

K1

Branch 1

BATOUT+

BATOUT−

UBATT−

RELBATT1

Sensor Signals

To BCU1

48 VDC nom.

Figure 406: ABAC Circuit Schematic

Circuit breakers are provided for manual isolation of the battery branch duringbattery maintenance. When in use, the circuit breakers trip automaticallywhen the current drawn exceeds 60 A.

During an AC mains failure, BU41 or BU100 provides battery power to the DCbus via relay K1, and a shunt resistor. If the battery discharge becomesexcessive, the BCU1 deactivates the relay to isolate the battery branch. RelayK1 is controlled by the signal RELBATT1.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 729 / 910


12.20.1 Front Panel

The following figure shows the front panel of the ABAC.

Camloc Fastener

Equipment Labels


+

−

Figure 407: ABAC Front Panel

12.20.2 Connectors

The following table describes the ABAC connectors.


X200 Connects battery temperature sensor signalsto the ASIB backplane.

Battery Connectors Connects to battery terminals. There are twocables only (one branch).

Table 146: ABAC Front Panel Connectors

730 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.21 ADAMADAM is used in the AC/DC power supply of BTS A9100 configurations asthe interface between the PM12s, the batteries and the power distributioninside the BTS.

ADAM consists of:

An air permeable metal frame, mounted in one-half of a STASR above the

PM12s (see the following figure)

A small backpanel with the connectors for three PM12s and a terminalfor the wiring of the BTS.

In addition, the ADAM contains on its backpanel:

The relay for battery protection

The relay control

A shunt for measuring the battery current.

The following figure shows the position of ADAM in the STASR.

ADAM

PM12

Figure 408: ADAM, Position in the STASR

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 731 / 910


12.21.1 Block Diagram

The following figure shows the block diagram.ADAM

Backpanel Frontpanel

0VDC

−48 VDC Battery

OMU (SUMA)

Battery Shunt

Signals

Relay Control

PM12/1

PM12/2

PM12/3

−48 VDC Subracks

0VDC

−48 VDC Battery

−48 VDC Subracks

Figure 409: ADAM Block Diagram

The relay protects the battery in case of discharging. If the voltage reaches thelower limit, the relay separates the -48 VDC line of the battery. The relay has itsown control circuit, so it works independently of the OMU.

732 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.21.2 Appearance

The following figure shows the front side view of ADAM.

Figure 410: ADAM Front Side View

12.21.3 Connectors

On the backpanel there are three connectors for the PM12s. Each of themcontains two blocks with 4x2 high current contacts (one block for 0 VDC andone for -48 VDC) and a 24-pin block for the control signals.

On the front panel there are the terminals for the DC supply of the subracks(via BOBU/BOMU/BOSU) and the back-up battery.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 733 / 910


12.22 ADAM2ADAM2 is used in the AC/DC power supply of Compact BTS Outdoorconfigurations as the interface between the PM12s, the batteries and thepower distribution inside the BTS.

ADAM2 consists of:

An air permeable metal frame, mounted in one-third of a STASR above the


A small backpanel with the connectors for two PM12s and terminal for thewiring of the BTS.

In addition, the ADAM2 contains on its backpanel:


The relay control


The following figure shows the position of ADAM2 in the STASR.

ADAM2

PM12

Figure 411: ADAM2, Position in the STASR

734 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



The following figure shows the block diagram.ADAM


0VDC

−48 VDC Battery

OMU (SUMA)

Battery Shunt

Signals

Relay Control

PM12/1

PM12/2

−48 VDC Subracks

0VDC

−48 VDC Battery

−48 VDC Subracks

Figure 412: ADAM2 Block Diagram

The relay protects the battery in case of discharging. If the voltage reaches thelower limit (42 V), the relay separates the DC line of the battery. The relay hasits own control circuit, so it works independently of the OMU.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 735 / 910


12.22.2 Appearance

The following figure shows the front side view of ADAM2.

BATT. − 48V

− 48V

0V

Figure 413: ADAM2 Front Side View

12.22.3 Connectors

On the backpanel there are two connectors for the PM12s. Each of themcontains two blocks with 4x2 high current contacts (one block for 0 VDC andone for -48 VDC) and a 24-pin block for the control signals.

On the front panel there are the terminals for the DC supply of the subracks(via DCUC) and the back-up battery.

736 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.23 ADAM4ADAM4 is used in the AC/DC power supply of BTS A9100 MBO1/MBO2configurations as the interface between the PM12s, the batteries and thepower distribution inside the BTS. ADAM4 is installed in combination with twoto four PM12s. If less than four PM12s are installed, the empty PM12 slot iscovered by a dummy panel.

ADAM4 consists of:

An air permeable metal frame, mounted in two third of a STASR above the


A small backpanel with the connectors for four PM12s and terminal for thewiring of the BTS.

In addition, ADAM4 contains on its backpanel:


The relay control


The following figure shows the position of ADAM4 in the STASR.

ADAM4

PM12

Figure 414: ADAM4 Position in the STASR

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 737 / 910




ADAM4


0VDC

−48 VDC Battery

OMU (SUMA)

Battery Shunt

Signals

Relay Control

PM12/1

PM12/2

PM12/3

−48 VDC Subracks

0VDC

−48 VDC Battery

−48 VDC Subracks

0VDC 0VDC

PM12/4

Figure 415: ADAM4 Block Diagram

The relay protects the battery in case of discharging. If the voltage reaches thelower limit, the relay separates the -48 VDC line of the battery. The relay has itsown control circuit, so it works independently of the OMU.

738 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.23.2 Appearance

The following figure shows the front side view of ADAM4.

Figure 416: ADAM4 Front Side View

12.23.3 Connectors

On the backpanel there are two connectors for the PM12s. Each of themcontains two blocks with 4x2 high current contacts (one block for 0 VDC andone for -48 VDC) and a 24-pin block for the control signals.

On the front panel there are the terminals for the DC supply of the subracks(via BOMU) and the back-up battery.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 739 / 910


12.24 BU41The BU41 is an optional feature used in outdoor BTS A9100 versions. Itprovides an emergency DC power source for use in the event of a mainssupply failure.

The principal components of BU41 are four high performance, sealed, lead-acidbatteries that conform to the DIN 43539 standard. They connect in series toprovide a 48 VDC nom. power source, referred to as a branch. Optionally, asecond branch of four sealed lead-acid batteries can be fitted to double thebackup period. Each battery branch is independently connected to the BACOor BAC2. Note however, that only one battery branch can be connected toan ABAC or ADAM.

When two battery branches are used, both branches must consist of batteriesof the same type and capacity. This is required because the charging andtesting circuits assume both branches are the same.

Connected to one of the battery terminals is a temperature sensor. Thismonitors the battery temperature. The output from the sensor is used bythe BCU1/SUMA to regulate the charging voltage and thus prevent batteryoverheating.

Each battery branch is fitted with venting tubes. The venting tubes discharge tothe external environment the gasses produced during battery charging.

740 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.24.1 Charging

The BU41 charging characteristics conform to the DIN 41773 (float charging)standard.

The following table shows the battery type and the charging current limit for thenumber of battery branches in use.

Battery Type One Branch Two Branches

40 Ah 6 A 12 A

Table 147: BU41 Battery Type and Charging Current Limit

The following table shows the recommended charging voltage versus batterytemperature.

Temperature Voltage Per Cell Total Voltage (± 1%)

0� C 2.3773 57.05

5� C 2.3484 56.36

10� C 2.3215 55.72

15� C 2.2966 55.12

20� C 2.2737 54.57

25� C 2.2528 54.07

30� C 2.2339 53.61

35� C 2.2170 53.21

40� C 2.2021 52.85

45� C 2.1892 52.54

50� C 2.1783 52.29

Table 148: BU41 Charging Voltage Versus Battery Temperature

Note: Avoid excessive battery gas leakage by not exceeding a charging voltage of2.35 V per cell (56.40 V total) at 20� C.

12.24.2 Discharging and Storage

Discharging below 1.75 V per cell (42 V total) can damage the batteries.

Batteries may be stored without recharging only for a restricted time. Thereforemanufacturers instructions (delivered with the product) must be followed.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 741 / 910


12.24.3 Front and Top View

The following figure shows the front and top views of BU41.

Equipment Labels

Supplier’s Information Label

Front View

Top View

Vent Tube

Figure 417: BU41 Front and Top Views

742 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.24.4 BU41 Mounted in MBO

The MBO offers a specific battery box. The batteries are arranged as shownin the following figure. The battery box is covered with a plate to secure thebatteries.

Battery Box(Part of BTS)

Upper Block

Lower Block

ExhaustingNipple

ExhaustingTube

Warning Lables

SupplierInformationLable

Front View

InternalBatteryCable

− −

+ +

+ +

− −

EquipmentLables

Figure 418: BU41 in MBO - Front View

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 743 / 910


12.25 BU100The BU100 is an optional feature used in all outdoor BTS A9100 versions andin indoor versions that use an AC power supply. It provides an emergency DCpower source for use in the event of a mains supply failure.

The principal components of the BU100 are four high performance, sealed,lead-acid batteries that conform to the DIN 43539 standard. They connectin series to provide a 48 VDC nom. power source, referred to as a branch.The battery branch is connected to the BACO, BAC2, ABAC or ADAM asappropriate.

Connected to one of the battery terminals is a temperature sensor. Thismonitors the battery temperature. The output from the sensor is used by theBCU1, BCU2 or SUMA to regulate the charging voltage and thus preventbattery overheating.

The battery branch is fitted with venting tubes. The venting tubes discharge thegasses produced during battery charging to the external environment.

744 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.25.1 Charging

The BU100 charging characteristics conform to the DIN 41773 (float charging)standard.

The following table shows the battery type and the charging current limit.

Battery Type Limit

100 Ah 12 A




0� C 2.3773 57.05

5� C 2.3484 56.36

10� C 2.3215 55.72

15� C 2.2966 55.12

20� C 2.2737 54.57

25� C 2.2528 54.07

30� C 2.2339 53.61

35� C 2.2170 53.21

40� C 2.2021 52.85

45� C 2.1892 52.54

50� C 2.1783 52.29



3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 745 / 910






The following figure shows the front and top views of BU100.

Front View

Top View

Vent Tube

Battery Retainer

Figure 419: BU100 Front and Top Views

746 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.26 BU101The BU101 is an optional feature used in Multistandard Outdoor BTS Cabinets.It provides an emergency DC power source for use in the event of a mainssupply failure.

The principal components of the BU101 are four high performance, sealed,lead-acid batteries that conform to the DIN 43539 standard. They areconnected in series to provide a 48 VDC nom. power source, referred to as abranch. The battery branch is connected to ADAM or ADAM4.

Connected to one of the battery terminals is a temperature sensor. Thismonitors the battery temperature. The output from the sensor is used by theSUMA to regulate the charging voltage and thus prevent battery overheating.

The battery branch is fitted with venting tubes. The venting tubes discharge thegases produced during battery charging to the external environment.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 747 / 910


12.26.1 Charging

The BU101 charging characteristics conform to the IEC 896-2 standard.


Battery Type Limit

100 Ah 12 A




0� C 2.3773 57.05

5� C 2.3484 56.36

10� C 2.3215 55.72

15� C 2.2966 55.12

20� C 2.2737 54.57

25� C 2.2528 54.07

30� C 2.2339 53.61

35� C 2.2170 53.21

40� C 2.2021 52.85

45� C 2.1892 52.54

50� C 2.1783 52.29



748 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13






The following figure shows the front and top view of the BU101. The batterybox is covered with a plate to secure the batteries.

To Circuit Breaker

To Circuit Breaker

Battery Box(Part of BTS)

Battery Battery

Battery Battery

Upper Block

Lower Block

Connection Cable

ExhaustingNipple

ExhaustingTube

Warning Lables

SupplierInformationLable

ExhaustingTube

Jumper

Front View Top View

EquipmentLables

TemperatureSensor

Jumper

Figure 420: BU101 Front and Top View

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 749 / 910


12.27 BU102The BU102 is an optional feature used in External Battery Cabinets Outdoor.It provides an emergency DC power source for use in the event of a mainssupply failure.

The principal components of the BU102 are four high performance, sealed,gel batteries. They are connected in series to provide a 48 VDC nom. powersource, referred to as a branch. The battery branch is connected to ADAM4 ina BTS cabinet.

A temperature sensor is connected to one of the 0 V battery terminal. Thismonitors the battery temperature. The output from the sensor is used by theSUMA to regulate the charging voltage and thus prevent battery overheating.

The battery branch is fitted with venting tubes. The venting tubes divert thegases produced during battery charging to the external environment.

12.27.1 Charging

The BU102 charging characteristics conform to the IEC 896-2 standard.


Battery Type Limit

90 Ah 8 A for one battery branch

16 A for more than one battery branch


The following table shows the charging voltage versus battery temperature incase of default setting 2.29 V/ cell.


0� C 2.38 57.125

5� C 2.3587 56.616

10� C 2.3370 56.1

15� C 2.3162 55.59

20� C 2.295 55.08

25� C 2.2737 54.57

30� C 2.2525 54.06

35� C 2.2312 53.55

40� C 2.21 53.04


750 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



Discharging is interrupted at 1.75 V per cell (42 V total) in order to avoiddamaging the batteries.



The following figure shows the front and top view of BU102. The battery box iscovered with a plate to secure the batteries.


RXSynth.

RXSynth.

RFMixer

IFFilter

Modulator&

Up−converter

TX PowerRegulation

TX Synthesizer

2

TXSynthesizer

1

LNA RX0

RFMixer

IFFilter

LNA RX1

TX DriverAmplifier

TX PowerAmplifier

BasebandModulator

DDC DRCS

BBTX

ADC

ADC

I

Q

To combiner

Duplexer

From AntennaNetwork

1

2

TEPAxx/TEPADHE

To DEMon TRED

FromENCT

TREA


Transmitter part

Reveiver part

Figure 421: BU102 Front and Top View

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 751 / 910


12.28 BATSThe small battery BATS is a plug-in unit for the subrack STASR with a width of28 TE. It is used in indoor cabinets. It provides an emergency DC power sourcefor use in the event of a mains supply failure. It contains:

A block of four batteries

Printed board RIBATs

Temperature sensor

Battery breaker.


SBS8 SBS8SBS8

++++ − −−−

SBS8

Batteries

Temperature SensorCircuitBreaker

FeedThroughClamps

− +48 V

to ADAM

to BCB

RIBATS

Figure 422: BATS Block Diagram

12.28.1 Batteries

The batteries are connected in series and have nominal 48 V and a capacity of8 Ah. A BATS can be plugged in any unused subrack position.

The principal components of BATS are four high performance, sealed, lead-acidbatteries that conform to the IEC 896-2 standard. They are connected in seriesto provide a 48 VDC nom. power source, referred to as a branch. The DC clampsof the module are connected to the battery clamps on the front side of ADAM.

752 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.28.2 Charging

The BATS charging characteristics conform to the DIN 41773 (float charging)standard.


Battery Type Charging Current Limit

8 Ah 2 A

Table 155: BATS Battery Type and Charging Current Limit



0� C 2.3773 57.05

5� C 2.3484 56.36

10� C 2.3215 55.72

15� C 2.2966 55.12

20� C 2.2737 54.57

25� C 2.2528 54.07

30� C 2.2339 53.61

35� C 2.2170 53.21

40� C 2.2021 52.85

45� C 2.1892 52.54

50� C 2.1783 52.29

Table 156: BATS Charging Voltage Versus Battery Temperature

Note: In order to avoid excessive battery gas leakage from the battery, the chargingvoltage must not exceed 2.35 V per cell (56.40 V total) at 20� C.



Batteries may be stored without recharging only for a restricted time. Thereforemanufacturers instructions (delivered with the product) must be followed.Storage of discharged batteries is not allowed.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 753 / 910


12.28.4 RIBATS

The RIBATS is a small PCB mounted on the BATS frame. It collects the value ofthe temperature sensor and transfers this information to the OMU via the BCB.It is directly connected to a backplane connector of the STASR. The RIBATS issupplied from the BTS via the BCB, not from the batteries.


Connected to one of the battery terminals is a temperature sensor. Thismonitors the battery temperature. The output from the sensor is used by theSUMA to regulate the charging voltage and thus prevent battery overheating.

12.28.6 Battery Breaker

A battery breaker is mounted on the front side of BATS: 2 x 60 A, 80 V. Thebattery breaker disconnects the connection between the batteries and ADAM.


The following figure shows the front view of the BATS.

CicuitBreaker

ModuleExtractor

DC Clamps

AlcatelProductIdentification

SerialNumberIdentification

Figure 423: BATS Front View

754 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.29 RIBATThe RIBAT board is part of the battery. Its task is to measure the batterytemperature and to provide the OMU with the temperature value and thebattery Remote Inventory information which includes the information for thebattery type. Knowledge of the temperature value is necessary for charging.The board contains a BCB interface to transfer the information. Dependentingon the configuration, different interfaces are used: the BCB/EBCB, XBCB.

The RIBAT is supplied from the BTS, not from the batteries. The powerconsumption is about 100 mA.


The connection and addressing differs for different configurations. The followingfigure shows the RIBAT block diagram.Remote Supply Voltage Input

detect BCB/ EBCB Connection

NGTSL

Internal Addressing

External Addressing

D

A

BCB/EBCB

Control Logic

Line term.

XBCB Out

Loop BCB IF to cascaded RIBAT

RI EEPROM

Temperature Sensor

RS 485

TTL

XBCB IN

Figure 424: RIBAT Block Diagram

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 755 / 910


12.29.2 Functional Description

The board consists of:

An NGTSL; which is the terminal for the ISL data link

The Remote Inventory EEPROM including the Remote Inventory information

The analog part for temperature measuring

Address switching

the BCB/EBCB, XBCB interfaces.

In order to differ between internal or external addressing and internal orexternal connection, the BCB/EBCB connection is detected. The BCB/EBCBconnection is true if the battery is located inside the BTS cabinet. In this case,addressing is switched to internal and the XBCB interface is disabled by thecontrol logic. If the addressing is switched to external, the XBCB interface isactive. If there is no other terminal or RIBAT connected to XBCB Out, it has tobe terminated with a line termination plug.

The analog part includes signal conditioning and an ADC to digitize thetemperature value. An external PT100 temperature sensor is connectedto the analog part. The ADC outputs are connected directly to the NGTSLalarm inputs.

Power supply is provided remotely either from inside the BTS or via theXBCB connection.

The internal battery of the outdoor BTS is located inside a side compartment.For this, the EBCB is fed to the side compartment. The RIBAT is connected tothe EBCB via a flat band cable like it is done with a backplane. In this caseaddressing is switched to internal and the battery gets subrack number 0 (dueto wire cutting on the flat band cable). Two cascaded batteries are possibleby using different slot numbers (slot 1, slot 2) to address them. One wire ofthe flat band cable is used for this.

The battery temperature range which can be measured is between -10� C and70� C. This range is extended against the operating temperature range of thebatteries (0� C to 50� C) and the minimum operating temperature range of theRIBAT to submit high or low temperature alarms. The measurement resolutionis 0.5� C. Values below -10� C mean a short cut at the temperature sensor.Values above 70� C mean a not-connected or interrupted sensor.

756 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.29.3 Appearance

The RIBAT is a small board with a C96 connector for the flat band cable, aSub-D 9 connector for the temperature sensor and two Sub-D 15 connectorsfor the XBCB input and output. The top view is shown in the following figure.

The temperature sensor is mounted on one pole of the batteries to give agood thermal contact.

EBCB Connector used in case of internal batteries

XBCB Connectors used in case of external batteries

Connector for Temperature Sensor

Figure 425: RIBAT Top View

12.29.4 XBCB Bus Termination

Because the XBCB is an RS-485 bus, it has to be terminated at the end of theline. At the BTS side this is already done on the COAR. At the RIBAT side,this is done by a termination plug. The termination plug consists of an 15-pinSub-D male connector and a small PCB (50 mm x 30 mm) with terminationand pull up/pull down resistors on it.

The plug is connected to the XBCB Out at the RIBAT. In case of cascadedRIBATs, the plug is connected to the remaining XBCB Out.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 757 / 910


12.30 DCDPThe DCDP is used in outdoor BTS A9100 versions. It distributes -48 VDC tothe equipment modules. Each DC output is over-current protected by its owncircuit breaker. The circuit breakers are reset manually.

The DCDP is housed in BTS compartment 1 above the top STASR. Thefollowing figure shows the circuit schematic.

−48V Input

F3 25 A

F4 25 A

F6 25 A

F7 25 A

F8 25 A

F2 15 A

F5 25 A

X1

6

6

6

6

6

1

1

1

1

1

Line Load

X5

X4

X3

X1

X2

X6

X7

X9

X8

X10

X11

X12

X13

X14

XIOB

Optional Equipment

Spare

Heat Exchanger 1

Heat Exchanger 2

Heat Exchanger 3

Subrack 1/1

Subrack 1/2

Spare or Subrack 1/3

Subrack 2/1

Subrack 2/2

Subrack 2/3

0 V Input

Optional Equipment

Optional Equipment

F1 15 A

Figure 426: DCDP Circuit Schematic

758 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


The DCDP 0/ -48 VDC input supply is distributed to the front panel outputconnectors, via six circuit breakers.

The circuit breaker trip currents are:

15 A for F1, which supplies the connectors for the XIOB and optionalequipment (such as microwave or termination of network line equipment)

15 A for F2, which supplies the connectors for the heat exchangers

25 A for F3 - F8, which supply the connectors for the STASRs.

The 0 VDC input is grounded in the DCDP and connected to each outputconnector.


The following figure shows the front and top views of the DCDP.

X2 X5

X7

X3X1

X9

X6 X8

X4

X10 X11 X13X12 X14F6 F7F5F4 F8F3F2F1

Front View

Top View

Red 0 V

Blue −48 V

Equipment Labels

Figure 427: DCDP Front and Top View

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 759 / 910


12.30.2 Front Panel Connectors

The following table describes the DCDP front panel connectors.


X1 Provides 0/ -48 VDC for the XIOB.

X2 - X4 Provides 0/ -48 VDC for the microwaveequipment, if fitted.

X5 Spare.

X6 - X8 Provides 0/ -48 VDC for the heat exchangercontrollers.

X9 - X14 Provides 0/ -48 VDC for the STASRs.

Table 157: DCDP Front Panel Connectors

12.30.3 Rear Panel Connectors

The following table describes the DCDP rear panel connectors.


-48 V IN Provides the -48 VDC input.

0 V IN Provides the 0 VDC input.

Ground Provides the ground connection for the unit.

Table 158: DCDP Rear Panel Connectors

760 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.31 DCDUThe DCDU is used in Compact BTS Outdoor DC versions. It distributes -48VDC to the equipment modules. Each DC output is over-current protected byits own circuit breaker. The circuit breakers are reset manually.

The DCUC is housed in the BTS compartment above the cable entry. Thefollowing figure shows the circuit schematic.

0V Rail

−48V Rail

Figure 428: DCDU Circuit Schematic

The DCDU 0/ -48 VDC input supply is distributed to the front panel outputconnectors, via six circuit breakers.


70 A for F1, which supplies the complete BTS and is the main breaker

25 A for F2 and F3, which supply the connectors for the STASRs.

15 A for F4, which supplies the connectors for the XIOB and optionalequipment (such as microwave or termination of network lines equipment)


15 A for F6, which supplies the connectors for the heater.

The 0 VDC input is grounded in the DCUC and connected to each outputconnector.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 761 / 910


12.31.1 Front and Side View

The following figures show the front and side views of the DCDU.

0V −48V 0V 0V−48V −48V

X1 X10X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9

OPTIONS HEX XIOB

SR1 SR2 OPT HEX HEAT

BTS

70 A

Equipment Labels

Figure 429: DCDU Front View

Figure 430: DCDU Side View

762 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



The following table describes the DCDU front panel connectors.


X1 - X3 Provides 0 VDC for the optional equipment.

X4 - X6 Provides -48 VDC for the optional equipment.

X7, X8 Provides 0/ -48 VDC for the Heat Exchanger.

X9, X10 Provides 0/ -48 VDC for the XIOB.

Table 159: DCDU Front Panel Connectors

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 763 / 910


12.32 DCDUEThe DCDUE is used in DC A9100 MBS GSM Evolution Outdoor versions. Itdistributes -48 VDC to the equipment modules. Each DC output is over-currentprotected by its own circuit breaker. The circuit breakers are reset manually.

The DCDUE is housed in the left side of the BTS compartment. The followingfigure shows the circuit schematic.

Figure 431: DCDUE Circuit Schematic

The DCDUE 0/ -48 VDC input supply is distributed to the front panel outputconnectors, via four circuit breakers.


100 A for F1, which supplies the complete BTS

15 A for F2, which supplies the Service Light

15 A for F3 and F4, which supply the heaters.

764 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


The following figure shows the front and side views of the DCDUE.

Figure 432: DCDUE Front and Side View

12.33 DCMUThe DCMU is used in DC A9100 MBS GSM Outdoor versions. It distributes -48VDC to the equipment modules. Each DC output is over-current protected byits own circuit breaker. The circuit breakers are reset manually.

The DCMU is housed in the left side of the BTS compartment. The followingfigure shows the circuit schematic.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 765 / 910


F1 F2 F3 F4

70A

15A

−48V

−48V

−48V 0V 0V0V

X20 X21

DC

OU

T /

48V

DC

IN /

48V

K1 K2

_ + 1 2 _ +

F5

_ + 1 2 _ +

DC

OU

T /

48V

DC

IN /

48V

15A

15A

Main ground

X1 X2

X3

X4

X5

X6

X7

X8

2

1

−48V −48V0V 0V −48V −48V0V 0V

LIGHT 1 LIGHT 2 HEATDC 1 HEATDC 2

X9

BUSBAR CONNECTION

MBO ROOF

0V BOLT 0V BOLT

EXTERNAL DC IN−48V 0V

C1

−48V

0V

Figure 433: DCMU Circuit Schematic

The DCMU 0/ -48 VDC input supply is distributed to the front panel outputconnectors, via four circuit breakers.


75 A for F1, which supplies the complete BTS

15 A for F2, which supplies the Service Light

15 A for F3 and F4, which supply the heat exchangers.

766 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


The following figure shows the front and side views of the DCMU.

70A 15A 15A 15A

SERVICE LIGHT

HEATING 1 HEATING 2BTS

F1 F2 F3 F4

Front View

Side View

Equipment Labels

Figure 434: DCMU Front and Side View

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 767 / 910


12.34 DCUCThe DCUC is used in Compact BTS Outdoor versions. It distributes -48 VDC tothe equipment modules. Each DC output is over-current protected by its owncircuit breaker. The circuit breakers are reset manually.

The DCUC is housed in the BTS compartment above the ACUC. The followingfigure shows the circuit schematic.

0V NU GND −48V0V NU GND −48V

X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10

0V Rail

− 48 V Rail

SR 1 SR 2 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT HEX 5 XIOB

X20 X21

0V

0V

0V−48V

−48V

−48V

F1SR1

F2SR2

F3OPT

F4HEX

25A 25A 15A 15A

0V Input

−48V Input

Figure 435: DCUC Circuit Schematic

The DCUC 0/ -48 VDC input supply is distributed to the front panel outputconnectors, via four circuit breakers.


25 A for F1 and F2, which supply the connectors for the STASRs.

15 A for F3, which supplies the connectors for the XIOB and optionalequipment (such as microwave or termination of network lines equipment)


The 0 VDC input is grounded in the DCUC and connected to each outputconnector.

768 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


12.34.1 Front and Side View

The following figure shows the front and side views of the DCUC.

−48V

X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10

OPTIONS HEX XIOB

0V

−48V −48V0V 0V

−48V

0V

SR1 SR2 OPT HEX

Equipment labelsFront View

Blue − 48V

Black 0V

GND

Side View

Figure 436: DCUC Front and Side View

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 769 / 910



The following table describes the DCUC front panel connectors.


X1 - X3 Provides 0 VDC for the optional equipment.

X4 - X6 Provides -48 VDC for the optional equipment.

X7, X8 Provides 0/ -48 VDC for the Heat Exchanger.

X9, X10 Provides 0/ -48 VDC for the XIOB.

Table 160: DCUC Front Panel Connectors

770 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

13 ACRI

13 ACRI


A drawing of the physical appearance of the module is also included, showingthe connectors and controls.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 771 / 910

13 ACRI

13.1 ACRI Functional DescriptionThe ACRI is used in indoor and outdoor BTS A9100 versions. There are twofunctionally identical variants. The sole difference is that the indoor variant hasthe BCB interface available on the backplane connector.

The ACRI:

Collects alarms from the SRACDC modules

Controls the SRACDC FANUs.

The ACRI is housed in the SRACDC. The following figure shows the functionalblock diagram.

Power Alarms

ANPS

FACB

DC/DC Converter

XBCB

−48 VDC Input Supply

RIEEPROM

BCB ASIC

FANUs

Output Voltages

Fan Alarms

Figure 437: ACRI Block Diagram

772 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

13 ACRI

The ACRI consists of the functional entities described in the following table.

ANPS The ANPS which the -48 VDC input supply to the DC voltagesrequired by the other components. For more information on theANPS, refer to AN Power Supply (Section 10.1.5).

FACB The FACB reports fan faults and controls the FANUs that coolthe SRACDC modules. For more information on the FANUsand FACB, refer to Fan Units (Section 11.1.1) and Fan Control(Section 11.1.2), respectively.

XBCB The way in which the BCB ASIC transfers information to theOMU in the SUMP depends on the ACRI variant. For the indoorvariant, the information is transferred via the BCB, availableon the backplane. For the outdoor variant, the information istransferred via the XBCB connector on the front panel.

This information consists of:

Alarms from the FACB

Alarms from the battery, PM08s and BCU1

Remote Inventory information.

RI The Remote Inventory is used to store information about themodule (part number, name, serial number, etc.). It consists ofan EEPROM which is connected to the BCB ASIC.

Table 161: ACRI Functional Entities

13.2 ACRI LEDs and AlarmsThe two LEDs on the front panel are connected in parallel. They indicate thestate of the + 5 VDC output of the ANPS.

The alarm information consists of:

Fan status

Number of PM08s fitted

Number of PM08s that are serviceable

Battery malfunction

BCU1 failure.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 773 / 910

13 ACRI

13.3 ACRI Front PanelThe following figure shows the front panel of the ACRI.

POWER ON

Handle

Camloc Fastener

LEDs

Connector

Figure 438: ACRI Front Panel

The ACRI XBCB connector provides a:

+ 5 VDC signal to enable ANPS

Serial interface for the transfer of alarms and Remote Inventory information

to the OMU.

774 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

14 Antenna Connector Lightning Protectors



A drawing of the physical appearance of the modules is also included whichshows the connectors.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 775 / 910


14.1 Lightning Protector Functional DescriptionAntenna connector lightning protectors are used in outdoor BTS A9100versions. They protect the RF inputs and outputs from the effects of nearbyor direct lightning strikes.

The lightning protectors are described in the sections:

Operating principles

Types.

14.1.1 Operating Principles

Lightning strikes and induced pulses have characteristics which are verydifferent from the desired RF signals transmitted and received by the BTSA9100. These differences allow a lightning strike to be suppressed.

The BTS A9100 lightning protectors are based on a ’quarter-wavelengthshorting stub’. This has the effect of passing all operational RF signals, buteffectively shorting any lightning voltage spikes to the cabinet’s chassis ground.

The protectors can be used in both the transmit and receive signal paths. Theyare installed to form part of the cabinet’s external RF connections.

14.1.2 Types

Even though the LPQG, LPQD, LPQP, and LPQM types can have differentsuppliers, the product numbers are always identical. The following table liststhe product numbers.

Type Variant Product Numbers

LPQG 3BK 05817 AAAA

LPQD 3BK 05818 AAAA

LPQP 3BK 08691 AAAA

LPQM 3BK 25444 AAAA

Table 162: Antenna Connector Lightning Protector Types and Variants

The AAAA variants are functionally identical, differing only in dimensionsand appearance.

776 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


14.1.3 Lightning Power Spectrum

Quarter-wave stub lightning protectors remove lightning current on a frequencyselection basis.

The following figure shows the power spectrum of a typical lightning strike.

Amplitude Density(V/m/Hz)

Frequency (kHz)

2 1000

Figure 439: Lightning Strike Power Spectrum

As lightning has a power spectrum with very little energy above 100 kHz, aband-pass protection filter can be used. This passes the frequencies of interest(which are much above 100 kHz), yet rejects the low frequencies generated bylightning. The antenna connector lightning protectors perform this functionusing the quarter-wavelength shorting stub.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 777 / 910


14.1.4 Quar ter-Wave Stub

The quarter-wave stub is a coaxial line exactly one quarter-wavelength long.One end is connected to the through path and the other end is simply shorted.

The following figure shows the equivalent circuit of the antenna connectorlightning protectors.

Signal Path

Signal Conductor

Shield/ Chassis Ground

(180Delay)

100 % Reflection

Short Circuit

Shorting Stub = l /4 (+ 90Delay for Signals of F = 1/l)

Signal

Split

Signal Summed

Figure 440: Antenna Connector Lightning Protectors Equivalent Circuit

During normal operation, the RF transmission signal arrives at the input ofthe shorting stub, where it is split.

One part travels along the matched quarter-wavelength stub, thus changingits phase by 90�. At the short, the signal is reflected and hence shifted by afurther 180�. It then travels back along the stub and is again shifted by 90�

by the time it reaches the junction.

The other part continues along the straight-through path. The reflected andstraight-through signals are therefore exactly one cycle out of phase at thejunction.

The signals are summed at the junction. Apart from negligible jitter, theresulting signal is identical to the original signal.

In contrast to the high frequency transmission signals, the much lower frequencylightning spectrum is not matched to the stub. Its components are, effectively,shorted to ground (as they are shifted completely out of phase by the short). Atthe same time, they have a negligible shift when travelling down the stub.

778 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


14.2 Lightning Protector Electrical CharacteristicsThe following table shows the electrical characteristics. The lightning protectorshave little effect on system performance during normal operation.

Characteristic LPQG LPQD LPQP LPQM

Usablefrequencyrange:

870 - 970MHz

1700 - 1900MHz

1800 - 2000MHz

870 - 970MHz and

1700 - 2200MHz

Insertion loss: ≤ 0.1 dB ≤0.1 dB ≤0.1 dB ≤0.1 dB

VSWR: ≤ 1.1 ≤1.1 ≤1.1 ≤1.1

Impedance: 50 50 50 50

Table 163: Lightning Protector Electrical Characteristics

14.3 Lightning Protector AppearanceLightning protectors can be designed with an internal filter or with a shortingstub (depending on the manufacturer). The following figure shows theappearance of the antenna connector lightning protector with shorting stub.

Quarter Wavelength Shorting Stub

7/16 female coaxial RF Cable Connector

V−ShapedGrounding Washers

Sealing Washers

Plinth

7/16 female coaxial RF Cable Connector

Figure 441: Lightning Protector Appearance with Shorting Stub

The protectors are mounted in the plinth at the bottom of the cabinet. Eachprotector consists of a coaxial through-connection with the protectionmechanism located below the plinth.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 779 / 910


780 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

15 Range Extension Kit


This chapter describes the range extension kit (REK) which is aimed atenhancing the capabilities of the Evolium BTS A9100 in terms of coverage.

The REK is designed to compensate the feeder losses which significantlyimpact the density of sites to be implemented over the service area of GSMnetworks.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 781 / 910


15.1 Introduction to REKThe basic advantage of the REK is to enhance the capabilities of the EvoliumBTS A9100 in terms of coverage by increasing the size of the cell, whichsignificantly impacts the density of sites to be implemented over the servicearea of GSM networks. Other advantages are range extension of road cell,compensation of the eventual error of site location by radio network planningand compensation of RF performance impairment due to antenna feederand ANx losses.

The REK can be used with a wide variety of Evolium BTS A9100 indoor andoutdoor configurations in GSM 900 with a coupling constraint of maximumone TRX/TRE to each antenna. Cross-polarized antennas can still be usedrespecting this constraint. For practical reasons, configurations are limited to amaximum of six TREs per BTS site, assuming a 3x2 configuration.

The REK is designed to minimize BTS and system impacts. The BTS has noknowledge of the REK’s presence and is not involved in its configuration.Configuration of the REK is reduced to manual attenuator setting at installation.Supervision is minimal. It only involves external alarms to the BTS and there isno recovery mechanism. The system impact concerns the handling of thesenew external alarms at the OMC-R level.

The REK is composed of two modules:

A Masthead Amplification Box, to be installed close to the antenna, featuring

power amplification downlink and low noise amplification uplink, along withproper supervision means

A Power Distribution Unit, to be installed in the BTS cabinet or close to

the BTS, providing DC power for the purpose of remotely feeding themasthead amplification module through the antenna feeder and collecting

the alarm signals.

782 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


15.2 Overall Description

15.2.1 Architecture

The following figure shows a two TRX configuration.

The equipment has three sections:

The Masthead Amplification Box. Each MAB provides bi-directionalamplification for one antenna port. The antennas are not part of the MAB.

The use of two separate antennas or one cross-polar antenna (decoupling

>25 dB) is possible

The feeder cables. Up to 11 dB of loss is supported allowing 1/2” cables

with up to 100 m length if used as an extension for a standard EvoliumBTS A9100. The DC feed and supervision of the masthead equipment is

also done via the feeder cables

The Power Distribution Unit. This module provides the interface towards theBTS. The power supply for the masthead equipment and the alarm handling

is provided by this module. This module is located beside the BTS rack forindoor applications and inside the cabinet for outdoor configurations.

PDU

BTS

MAB

SV

B

B

Antenna Port 2

MAB

SV

B

B

Antenna Port 1 Legend:

MAB Masthead Amplification Box

Bias and Lightning Protection

B

SV Supervision Circuit

PDU Power Distribution Unit

PS MAB Power Supply

AL Alarm Interface

ANx Antenna Network

BTS Base Transceiver Station

PS

AL

ANx

RF feeder cables

Figure 442: REK Architecture

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 783 / 910


15.2.2 Configurations

The REK is usable in site configurations featuring one antenna per TRX, andtherefore well adapted for the implementation of air combining.

The technical constraints are: no TX coupling in the BTS (no ANY in theconfiguration), respectively the sectors, which means only one TRE transmittingon each antenna. (On the ANC, the included combiner will be disabled byremoval of the two bridges and the TREs connected directly to the duplexers).

The different possible site configurations are shown separately below.

15.2.2.1 With One TREThe following figure shows a one-cell configuration using the REK.

MAB MAB

PDU

ANXA B

TRE 1 nc

MAB MAB

PDU

ANCA B

TRE 1 ncnc nc

On the ANC,the two bridgesare removed

− If RX antenna dive rsity is absolutely required, a second MAB must be installed on the path B

or

Legend:MAB Mast Amplification BoardPDU Power Distribution Unit

Figure 443: Cell with One TRE

If RX antenna diversity is absolutely required, a second MAB must be installedon path B.

784 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


15.2.2.2 With Two TREs and RX Antenna DiversityThe figure below shows the configuration for one cell with two TREs andRX antenna diversity.

MAB MAB

PDU

ANXA B

TRE 1 TRE 2

MAB MAB

PDU

ANCA B

TRE 1 TRE 2

nc nc

On the ANC, the twobridges are removed

or


Figure 444: Cell with two TREs and RX Antenna Diversity Active

15.2.2.3 3x1 without RX Antenna Diversity, with ANXAs shown in Figures443 and 444 above, one MAB is required per TRE.However, one PDU can supply two MABs (two TREs connected) These twoTREs do not need to belong to the same sector. Thus a 3x1 configurationrequires only two PDUs if there is no RX antenna diversity.

MAB

PDU1

ANXA B

TRE 1 nc TRE 1 nc

MAB

PDU2

ANCA B

Sector 2 Sector 3

MAB

ANXA B

TRE 1 nc

Sector 1


Figure 445: 3x1 Configuration without RX Antenna Diversity - ANX Variant

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 785 / 910


15.2.2.4 3x1 without RX Antenna Diversity, with ANCA 3x1 configuration without RX antenna diversity using the ANC is shown inthe following figure.

MAB

PDU1

ANCA B

nc

MAB

PDU2

ANCA B

Sector 2 Sector 3

MAB

ANCA B

TRE 1nc nc

TRE 1nc

nc ncncnc

TRE 1nc

Sector 1

On each ANC, the two bridges are removedLegend:MAB Mast Amplification BoardPDU Power Distribution Unit

Figure 446: 3x1 Configuration without RX Antenna Diversity - ANC Variant

15.2.2.5 3x2 with ANXThe following figure shows a 3x2 configuration using the ANX.

MAB MAB

PDU 1

ANXA B

TRE 1 TRE 2

Sector 1

MAB MAB

PDU 2

ANXA B

TRE 1 TRE 2

Sector 2

MAB MAB

PDU 3

ANXA B

TRE 1 TRE 2

Sector 3


Figure 447: 3x2 Configuration - ANX Variant

786 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


15.2.2.6 3x2 with ANCThe figure below shows a 3x2 configuration using the ANC.

MAB MAB

PDU 1

ANCA B

TRE 1nc

TRE 2nc

TRE 1nc

TRE 2nc

TRE 1nc

TRE 2nc

Sector 1

MAB MAB

PDU 2

ANCA B

Sector 2

MAB MAB

PDU 3

ANCA B

Sector 3

On each ANC, the two bridges are removedLegend:MAB Mast Amplification BoardPDU Power Distribution Unit

Figure 448: 3x2 Configuration - ANC Variant

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 787 / 910


15.2.2.7 Extended Cell ConfigurationThe extended cell configuration is composed of one Inner Cell with up tofour TREs, and one Outer Cell with up to four TREs. The REK is used inthe Outer Cell.

ANCA B

TRE 1 TRE 3TRE 4TRE 2

TRE 1nc

TRE 2nc

TRE 3nc

TRE 4nc

Sector 1

MAB MAB

PDU 1

ANCA B

Sector 2

MAB MAB

PDU 2

ANCA B

Sector 2

In the Outer Cell, the bridges are removed on each ANC

OUTER CELL INNER CELL


Figure 449: Extended Cell Based on ANC (and SUMA) Installation

In case of an Evolium BTS 9100 equipped with ANX and SUMP, the SUMP hasto be replaced by a SUMA.

OUTER CELL INNER CELL

ANX

ANY

A B

TRE 1 TRE 3TRE 4TRE 2

TRE 1 TRE 2 TRE 3 TRE 4

Sector 1

MAB MAB

PDU

ANXA B

Sector 2

MAB MAB

PDU

ANXA B

Sector 2


Figure 450: Extended Cell Based on ANX (and SUMA) Installation

788 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


15.2.2.8 BTS ConfigurationsDue to limited DC power distribution in outdoor cabinets which can accept nomore than three PDUs and external alarm limitation, the configurations arelimited to a maximum of six TREs per BTS.

In addition, no multiband configuration is foreseen.

Considering these limitations, the following configurations are possible.

RackConfigurationType Indoor Outdoor ANX ANC

RackLayoutType Notes

MINI 1x1...2 X X X X 1x1...4 (1)

MINI 2x1 X X X X 2x1...2

MINI 2x2 X X X X 2x1...2

MINI 3x1 X X X X 3x1

MEDI 1x4 Low Loss X X X X 2x1...4Low Loss

(1)

MEDI 3x.2 X X X X 3x1...4 (1)

MEDI Extended Cell1x1...4, 1x1...4Low Loss

X X X 1x1...4+ 1x1...4Low Loss

(2)

Table 164: BTS Configurations with REK

(1) These BTS configurations are without TX coupling: no ANY.

(2) In the 1x1...4 Low Loss part, the two bridges of each ANC are removed.

For rack layouts see Configurations - Rack Layouts (Section 2).

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 789 / 910


15.3 Masthead Amplification BoxThe Masthead Amplification Box for GSM 900 (part number 3BK 08848 AAAA)is a bi-directional amplifier for one antenna port. It is designed for outdoorinstallation on a tubular mounted support below the antenna.

The Masthead Amplification Box architecture is shown in the following figure.

To/FromPDU

Bias &Alarm

DetTo/FromAntenna

DUPLEXER

Legend:PDU Power Distribution Unit

Figure 451: Block Diagram of the Bi-directional Amplifier

The bi-directional amplifier is composed of:

A circulator at the BTS input

A power amplifier in the Tx path

A low noise amplifier in the Rx path

A duplexer at the antenna output

A reflected power detector at the output of the power amplifier

A Bias T and a lightning protection module

A power regulation (DC voltage regulators for the Tx and Rx amplifiers),not represented in figure above

Alarm circuitry, collecting alarms (from DC regulators, Tx and Rx amplifiers),

not represented in figure above

Two switches for adjusting the gains of the Tx and Rx paths (independent

from each other), not represented in figure above.

790 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


15.3.1 Transmit Power Amplifier and Required Attenuators

The required output power (transmit) of the masthead equipment (includingoutput filter) is 44.5 dBm (28 W). To adapt the amplifier to the different BTStypes and antenna cable losses, an attenuator in front of the amplifier is needed.

Because of the high input power in the standard Evolium BTS A9100, thisattenuator is split into a fixed part (8 dB) and a variable part (range 0...15.5 dB).

The fixed attenuator is built to limit the signal level at the output of the variableattenuator to maximum 2.5 W (34 dBm). The variable attenuator is digital andcan be manually adjusted in steps of 0.5 dB depending on BTS type and cablelosses (see the following figure). The variable attenuator supports an inputpower in the range of 21.65 to 32.75 dBm and is dimensioned for up to 34 dBm(i.e., 2.5 W) to allow some margin.

Figure 452: RX and TX Attenuation Setting

The amplifier itself is composed of one class A and two class AB stages. Theoutput stage is a quadrature to improve the reliability and manufacturabilityof the design.

An isolator is added on the output for protection from operation in a highoutput VSWR as well as reverse intermodulation performance. The insertionloss is 0.35 dB.

The gain is maintained within ±1.5 dB tolerance by employing passivetemperature compensation on the amplifier input. This maintains the gainwithin the required tolerance over the whole range of frequency, temperature,power supply and input power variations, so there is no control loop on theamplifier gain.

The amplifier can be damaged, if the maximum input power is >41 dBm. Athermal protection/shut-down circuitry is incorporated in order to prevent theamplifier from damage in case of a too high temperature inside the MastheadAmplification Box enclosure.

A DC regulator is introduced to avoid gain fluctuations of the power amplifier,because the amplifier is DC-fed via the feeder cable which introduces up to 3 Vof voltage drop (depending on the cable length and DC current).

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 791 / 910


15.3.2 Receive Amplifier

As shown in Figure 451, the receiver amplifier is a balanced two-stage design.Each arm of the balanced amplifier contains two standard LNAs (the firststage is GaAs and the second stage is bipolar for GSM 900). The maximumoverall gain measured from the antenna input to the output of the MastheadAmplification Box is 16 dB for GSM 900. The noise figure remains below 2.5dB (for temperatures up to 50� C.

Temperature compensation is provided through a passive temperature variableattenuator on the amplifier output. Its insertion loss is 2 dB. A DC voltageregulator is also included to minimize the LNA gain variations due to inputvoltage fluctuations.

The receive amplifier includes a manually settable attenuator at its output,which allows decreasing the gain by 10 dB in steps of 1 dB in order to adapt forthe different cable lengths (see Figure 452). It is a digital attenuator, controlledby a manual rotary switch. Its insertion loss is 2 dB in GSM 900. A bandpassfilter is added to ensure adequate rejection of the transmit band signal cominginto the receive amplifier input. Its insertion loss is 1.5 dB.

Since the receive amplifier involves two low noise amplifiers in parallel, anysingle LNA failure will only produce a 6 dB decrease of the amplifier gain.

15.3.3 Output Duplexer

The masthead output duplexer is located at the antenna port of the mastheadbox. It has to prevent the Rx path from being interfered by the own Tx signalsand to suppress the Tx noise in the Rx band. A further function is theattenuation of Tx harmonics if necessary.

In order to achieve a low level of intermodulation (-110 dB) at the output of thelow noise amplifier, the Tx/Rx isolation is 80 dB. The duplexer has a Tx insertionloss of 1.1 dB for GSM 900. The Rx insertion loss is 1.2 dB for GSM 900.

15.3.4 Input Splitter

The masthead input splitter routes the Tx signal coming from the antenna cableto the Tx power amplifier and the output signal of the LNA to the antennacable. As shown in Figure 451 it is implemented with a circulator. Togetherwith the Masthead Amplification Box output duplexer, it prevents the mastheadequipment from self-oscillating.

Another function of the input splitter is to prevent the Masthead AmplificationBox receive amplifier from generating intermodulation by reversely injected Txsignals. Its insertion loss in Tx is 0.35 dB and in Rx is 0.3 dB.

792 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


15.3.5 RF Specifications

The RF specifications of the Masthead Amplification Box are summarized inthe following table.

Parameter Requirement

Transmit Path

Frequency range 925 - 960 MHz

Impedance 50

Input VSWR <1.5 at the input of the mastheadamplification box

Output power 44.5 dBm ±1.5 dB

Gain variation Max ± 1.5 dB versus frequency,temperature and input power ranges

Variable attenuator Tunable from 0...15.5 dB in steps of0.5 dB

Max input level for attenuator setting0 dB

≤41 dBm

Receive Path

Frequency range 880 - 915 MHz

Impedance 50

Input, Output VSWR <1.5

Gain in Rx path 16 dB ±1 dB for -10 to + 40� C

16 dB ±1.5 dB for -40 to + 60� C

Attenuator setting at output 0...10 dB in steps of 1 dB

Output duplexer

Tx bandpass 925 - 960 MHz

Rx Bandpass 880 - 915 MHz

Tx/Rx isolation in Tx and Rx band 70 dB minimum

Table 165: RF Specifications of the Masthead Amplification Box

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 793 / 910


15.3.6 Supervision Circuits and Alarm Interface

Two alarms per TRX function are provided by the Masthead Amplification Box,one fatal and one non fatal. The fatal alarm is raised in case of a fatal failure(e.g., power amplifier out of order). The non-fatal alarm is raised in case of anon-fatal failure (e.g., acceptable performance degradation). The signaling ofthe alarms from the MAB to the PDU is done via the corresponding antennacable, using low frequency signals that are coupled onto the RF coaxial linesvia the Bias tee and lightning protection module. An alarm is active if itscorresponding frequency is present.

The fatal alarm is activated by:

High reflected power at the power amplifier output

High current draw by the power amplifier

Low input voltage to the power amplifier

High temperature.

The non-fatal alarm is activated by:

Low bias current on the transistors in the receive amplifier (in one or botharms of the balanced amplifier)

High bias current on the transistors in the receive amplifier (in one or botharms of the balanced amplifier).

15.3.7 Bias Circuit and Lightning Protection

For each antenna cable this circuit is located at both ends, i.e., inside theMAB and inside the PDU. The bias circuit is used for remote DC feeding andalarm signaling of the masthead box. It is the first circuit at the input of theMAB on the feeder cable side, so that the DC signal is extracted before any RFfunction is performed in the MAB.

Its insertion loss in Tx is 0.5 dB and includes a lightning protector.

794 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


15.3.8 Mechanical Characteristics

The overall dimensions of the MAB are 38 x 32 x 27 cm (see the followingfigure). The weight is maximum 19 kg.

M6

7/16 female

Alcatel serial no.

label

Alcatel ID no. label

Figure 453: Masthead Amplification Box

The enclosure is constructed from aluminium pieces. The back side is soformed that it can be easily mounted onto the tower. The front side is coveredwith fins which provide cooling.

The receive components are mounted in the back half since they do notdissipate much heat. The transmit amplifier and DC power regulation aremounted in the front half.

The two halves of the enclosure are bolted together with an environmentalseal between them. All RF connectors are placed on the bottom side of theenclosure. Access for gain adjustment is provided on the bottom side viaa removable cover.

The RF connector type is 7/ 16 female on both sides of the MAB (towards thePDU and towards the antenna). The MAB is fitted with a M6 threaded rod forgrounding via a yellow/green 16 mm 2 ground cable (in the installation kit).

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 795 / 910


15.4 Power Distribution UnitThe Power Distribution Unit (part number 3BK 08850 ABAA) provides powersupply and alarm interface for two Masthead Amplification Boxes. It is locatedat the BTS site, either wall-mounted close to the BTS in the case of an indoorsite or integrated inside the BTS cabinet in the case of an outdoor BTS.

The primary voltage of the Power Distribution Unit is -48 VDC. The secondaryvoltages are 33.7 VDC and are fed to the two Masthead Amplification Boxes viaBias tees which are integrated parts of the module. The Bias tees also providethe lightning protection at the BTS end of the feeder cable.

The Power Distribution Unit includes two separate DC/DC converters, eachproviding one Masthead Amplification Box with DC power. The powerconsumption for the Power Distribution Unit is 600 W at a power dissipationof 115 W.

The Power Distribution Unit architecture is shown in the following figure.

Power supply

DC/DCconverter

DC/DCconverter

BIAS TBIAS T

interfaceDC filter

TRX 1 −48 V DCAlarm 1 Alarm 2 TRX2

Feeder cable Feeder cable

PDU

supervisioncontrol &

Alarminterface

Alarm

Legend:PDU Power Distribution Unit

Figure 454: Power Distribution Unit Block Diagram

796 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


15.4.1 Supervision and Alarm Interfaces

The two alarm interfaces located in the Power Distribution Unit collect thealarms corresponding to each TRX and coming from the correspondingMasthead Amplification Box (extraction in the Bias T, DC reject filtering anddetection of the alarm low frequency) or from the corresponding DC/DCconverter through the power supply control and supervision circuit.

The Masthead Amplification Box alarm signals consist of low frequency signalsthat are extracted from the feeder cables via the Bias T and after DC cutfiltering. An alarm is active if its corresponding frequency is present. The PowerDistribution Unit itself has only one alarm corresponding to a DC/DC converterfailure, which is fatal. The list of alarm causes and corresponding actions issummarized in the following table.

Alarm Cause FatalNonFatal Action

High reflected powerat the power amplifieroutput.

X - DC power shut down in PowerDistribution Unit.

High current draw bythe power amplifier.

X - DC power shut down in PowerDistribution Unit.

Low input voltage tothe power amplifier.

X - None.

High temperature inthe power amplifier.

X - Power shut down in PA atMasthead Amplification Boxlevel, no action on the LNA.Automatic recovery for bothpower and alarm signal below adefined temperature level.

High and low biascurrent on thetransistors in thereceive amplifier.

- X None.

DC/DC converterfailure.

X - None.

Table 166: List of Alarms

The alarm interfaces provide an external alarm interface towards the BTS (onelogical signal per alarm).

The Power Distribution Unit collects the fatal and non-fatal alarms for each TRXand groups the two non-fatal alarms together using an OR function, resulting inthree external alarms at the output of the alarm interfaces:

Fatal alarm TRX1

Fatal alarm TRX2

Non-fatal alarm TRX1 or TRX2.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 797 / 910


When several PDUs are used in the same BTS, the non-fatal alarms of thedifferent PDUs are grouped in a single alarm in order to reduce the number ofalarms. This is accomplished by alarm circuitry in the PDU which allows theconnection of those alarms in parallel by an alarm combining cable.

15.4.2 LEDs

LEDs are provided on the front panel of the Power Distribution Unit to indicatethe status and the alarms. The following table describes each LED andprovides a definition of their various operational states.

LED Meaning Color LED On LED OffLEDFlashing

TRX 1 MAB Fatal alarm Red Alarm on Alarm off -

TRX 1 MAB Non-fatalalarm

Red - Alarm off Alarm on

TRX 2 MAB Fatal alarm Red Alarm on Alarm off -

TRX 2 MAB Non-fatalalarm

Red - Alarm off Alarm on

TRX 1 DCDC DC/DCConverterfailure

Red Alarm on Alarm off -

TRX 2 DCDC DC/DCConverterfailure

Red Alarm on Alarm off -

DC INPUTSTATUS

DC Inputstatus

Green DC inputOK

No DCinput

-

Table 167: LEDs of Power Distribution Unit

15.4.3 Reset Buttons

If the power cable is connected to the PDU before complete installation hasbeen carried out, one or more red LEDs can be activated. In this case, resettingthe PDU is required. Resetting is carried out by pressing the ’TRX 1 RESET’and ’TRX 2 RESET’ buttons.

15.4.4 Bias Circuit and Lightning Protection

There is one Bias T per feeder cable. It is used to DC feed the correspondingMasthead Amplification Box and to extract the alarms from the MastheadAmplification Box. It includes a lightning protector which performances areas specified in IEC 1000-4-5 level 4. This lightning protector is sufficient toprotect the BTS. No other lightning protector can be installed between the PDUand the MAB, in order to avoid cutting the DC feed.

798 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



The dimensions of the Power Distribution Unit are a height of 3U, a depth of280 mm and a width of 28 TE (see the following figure).

Front view Rear view Side view

Top view CelwaveSerial no. label

Alcatel IDno. label

Figure 455: Drawing of Power Distribution Unit

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 799 / 910


All connections are located on the front panel (see the following figure).

TRX 1 MAB TRX 1 MAB

TRX 1 DCDC

TRX 1 BTS

TRX 2 MABTRX 2 MAB

TRX 2 DCDC

DC INPUT STATUS

STS INTERFACE

TRX 2 RESETTRX 1 RESET

DC POWER

TRX 2 BTS

B

G

C

D

G

E

F

H

Legend:

A − ground rod, diam 8 mm

B − TRX 1 MAB female 7/16 connector

C − TRX 1 BTS female 7/16 connector

D − T RX 2 MAB female 7/16 connector

E − TRX 2 BTS female 7/16 connector

F − alarm SubD male 9 pin connector

G − reset button

H − DC status LED − green

I − DC supply SubD male 3 pin high power connector

A I

Figure 456: Power Distribution Unit Front Panel

The RF connectors are of 7/ 16 female type on ANx and feeder sides of thePDU. The PDU is fitted with a M6 threaded rod for grounding via a yellow/green16 mm 2 ground cable (in the installation kit).

800 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


15.5 REK Installation

15.5.1 Masthead Amplification Box Installation

The MAB is fixed on the same vertical tubular support (∅ 40 to ∅ 200 mm)as the antenna using mounting hardware (two hose clamp steel bands andtwo hose clamp lock sets) as close as possible to the antenna. The MAB ismounted vertically on the pole with the connectors pointing downwards. Thefollowing figure shows the installation of MAB on the pole.

MastMAB

70mm70mm

Legend:MAB Mast Amplification Board

Figure 457: MAB Installation on the Pole

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 801 / 910


15.5.2 Power Distribution Unit Installation

The PDUs are fitted in a subrack and the subrack is fixed on the wall or in a 19”rack. This is a standard 3U high, 19” subrack with front fixation which can carryup to three PDUs. The following figure shows the installation of a PDU insidean Evolium BTS A9100 outdoor or in a 19” rack for an indoor site. Figure 459shows the installation of a PDU for an indoor site on the wall (with brackets).The first PDU is to the left in the PDU subrack.

Figure 458: Installation of PDU in an Evolium BTS A9100 Outdoor or in 19”Rack for Indoor

Blind plate

x 2

Bracket

Figure 459: Wall Installation of PDU for Indoor Site

802 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


15.6 REK Cabling

15.6.1 Cabling Overview

Depending on the installation, the distance between the BTS, PDU, and MABcan be variable. Thus RF jumper cables have been defined to cover thisflexibility.

15.6.1.1 Indoor Cabling OverviewThe following figure shows an indoor cabling overview of the Evolium BTSA9100.

GRD connection

GRD connection

Ground bar

RF jumper

RF jumper

RF jumper

RF jumper

FEEDER

MAB

ANT BTS

AN

TE

NN

A

Installation on wall or 19" rack

Alarmcombining cableDC cable

to power supply

3x2,5mm

PDU

towardsecond

PDU

towardthird PDU

Alarmextensioncable

BTS indoor


Figure 460: Evolium BTS A9100 Indoor Cabling Overview

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 803 / 910


15.6.1.2 Outdoor Cabling OverviewThe following figure shows an outdoor cabling overview of the Evolium BTSA9100.

RF jumper RF jumper

MAB

ANT BTS

AN

TE

NN

A

GRD connection

Ground bar

FEEDER

cablecombining

Alarm

GRD connection

extension cableAlarm ANx

DC cableto power supply

Options panel19" rack

PDU

BTS outdoor

DCDP

Jumper set foroutdoor BTSRF jumper

Cable gland


Figure 461: Evolium BTS A9100 Outdoor Cabling Overview

The following sections describe the cabling of the MAB and PDU for indoorand outdoor versions in more details.

804 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


15.6.2 Masthead Amplification Box Cabling

The following figure shows the cabling of the MAB in detail. There are two 7/ 16female connectors marked BTS and ANT on the lower side downward. The ANTconnector is connected to the antenna by an RF jumper. The BTS connector isconnected to the transmission/reception coaxial cable going down to the BTS(Power Distribution Unit) by an RF jumper. The connectors on the jumpers aresealed at both ends. The ground cable is connected to the M6 rod of MastheadAmplification Box and to the ground or copper bar on the other side.

antenna

pole fixation

pole fixation

insulation4x

Jumper cable

Ground bar Copper bar

Feeder

OR

MAB

Ground cable

Legend:MAB Mast Amplification Board

Figure 462: Cabling of Masthead Amplification Box

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 805 / 910


15.6.3 PDU Cabling in Indoor BTS

The following figure shows the cabling of the PDU in an indoor Evolium BTSA9100 in detail. Between the PDU and MABs, classical RF jumpers are usedwithout lightning protectors in the form of quarter wave stubs or attenuators.Lightning protectors at the feeder entry in the shelter (necessary for operationwithout the REK) are suppressed, because they cut the DC power supply to theMAB. The PDU itself contains lightning protectors.

The ’TRX 1 MAB’ 7/ 16 female connector is connected to the antenna feederline with an RF jumper. The ’TRX 1 BTS’ 7/ 16 female connector is connectedto the antenna output of the Evolium BTS A9100 with an RF jumper.

When a second MAB is connected to the same PDU, these connections aredone to ’TRX 2 MAB’ and ’TRX 2 BTS’.

The ground cable is connected to the M6 rod of the MAB and to the ground orcopper bar on the other side.

The alarm cable has two parts. The alarm combining cable can be connectedto three PDUs with three Sub-D 9 pin female connectors at the ’BTS Interface’.The 15-pin connector on the other end is connected to the alarm extensioncable. The other end of the alarm extension cable is connected to the alarminterface of the Evolium BTS A9100.

Connection to a DC power supply is via a 10 m cable 3x2.5 mm 2 with tipson one end and a Sub-D connector 3-pin (high current) at the PDU end. Theoutput of the -48 VDC power supply is protected by a 15 A fuse.

MAB

Feeder

Jumper cable

Jumper cable

PDU

DC POWER

BTS INTERFACE

TRX MAB

TRX BTS

BlueYellow/GreenBrown (black)

−48V

GND

0V

DC Power supply cable

to second

and third PDU

BTS Indoor

cable

combining

Alarm

cable

Ground

Cooper bar

Alarm extension

cable


Figure 463: PDU Cabling for Indoor Evolium BTS A9100

806 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


15.6.4 PDU Cabling in Outdoor BTS

The following figures show the cabling of the PDU in the outdoor Evolium BTSA9100 in detail. The versions just differ in connecting the DC power supply.

Lightning protectors at the feeder entry in the shelter (necessary for operationwithout the REK) are removed, because they cut the DC power supply to theMAB. The PDU itself contains lightning protectors.

The ’TRX 1 MAB’ 7/ 16 female connector is connected to an RF jumper. TheRF jumper is connected to the 7/ 16 coaxial socket fitted at the bottom of theEvolium BTS A9100. The ’TRX 1 BTS’ 7/ 16 female connector is connectedwith the ANx of the Evolium BTS A9100 with an RF jumper.

When a second MAB is connected to the same PDU, these connections aredone to the ’TRX 2 MAB’ and ’TRX 2 BTS’.

The ground cable is connected to the M6 rod of the PDU and the FASTONconnector in the middle compartment.

The alarm cable has two parts. The alarm combining cable can be connectedto three PDUs with three Sub-D 9-pin female connectors at the ’BTS Interface’.The 15-pin connector on the other end is connected to the alarm extensioncable. The other end of the alarm extension cable is connected to the alarminterface of the Evolium BTS A9100. For outdoor BTS, the alarm cable hasto go to the left compartment, crossing two times the bottom of the BTS bycable glands.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 807 / 910


For outdoor Evolium BTS A9100 equipped with a DC bus bar, the DC powersupply cable is connected to this bus bar (see the following figure). If thereis no bus bar, the PDU is connected to the DCDP panel at the high currentoutputs via a specific DC cable (see Figure 465). This cable has two branchesto supply the racks with the TREs and the relevant PDU. In this way, PDU1 isconnected with DCDP X9, PDU2 with DCDP X12, and PDU3 with DCDP X14.

DC POWERBTS INTERFACE

TRX MAB

TRX BTS

MAB

Feeder

Jumper cable

Cable gland

PDU


ANx

to second and third PDU

EVOLIUM BTS A9100

BUS

RF 7/16

extension

Jumper cable

Jumper cable

combining

Alarm

Alarm

Ground

BAR

Coaxial socket

cable

PDU − ANx

PDU − Feeder

cable

cable

BTS Bottom Plate

GND

Fastion connector


Figure 464: PDU Cabling for Outdoor Evolium BTS A9100 with DC Bus Bar

808 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


DC POWERBTS INTERFACE

TRX MAB

TRX BTS

MAB

Feeder

Jumper cable

Cable gland

PDU


ANx

to second and third PDU

EVOLIUM BTS A9100

RF 7/16

extension

Jumper cable

Jumper cable

combining

Alarm

Alarm

Ground

Coaxial socket

cable

PDU − ANx

PDU − Feeder

cable

cable

BTS Bottom Plate

Middle compartment

to

rack

supply

DCDP

GND

Fastion connector


Figure 465: PDU Cabling for Outdoor Evolium BTS A9100 without DC Bus Bar

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 809 / 910


15.7 REK Cables

15.7.1 Ground Cable

The ground cables for the MAB and the indoor PDU (part number 3BK 08824AAAA) and the outdoor PDU (part number 3BK 07934 AAAA) installationare shown in the following figures.

Shrinkable tubeShrinkable tube

10000 mm

Lug 5 8 Lug 5 6

Figure 466: Ground Cable for MAB and Indoor PDU

Faston connectorThermo−retractable label with marking

10000 mm

Lug 6

Figure 467: Ground Cable for Outdoor PDU

810 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


15.7.2 Alarm Cable

The alarm cable has two parts: the alarm combining cable, 0.6 m (part number3BK 08819 AAAA) and the alarm extension cable indoor, 8 m (part number3BK 08818 AAAA) or the alarm extension cable outdoor, 2 m (part number3BK 08915 AAAA) as shown in the following figure.

SubD 15 pinfemale

3x SubD 9 pin female

SubD 15 pin male

2000 mm (outdoor)

8000 mm (indoor)

Alarm Combining Cable

Alarm Extension Cable

Figure 468: Alarm Combining/Extension Cable

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 811 / 910


15.7.3 DC Power Supply Cable

The DC power supply cable for indoor Power Distribution Unit installation (partnumber 3BK 08916 AAAA) is shown in the following figure.

(10000 100 mm

−48 V blueGND ye−green

0 V brownSubD 3 pin female

high current

Figure 469: DC Power Supply Cable for Indoor Power Distribution Unit

The DC power supply cable for PDU installation in outdoor Evolium BTS A9100with a DC power supply bus bar (part number 3BK 08919 AAAA) is shown inthe following figure. The DC power supply cable for PDU installation in outdoorEvolium BTS A9100 without a DC power supply bus bar (part number 3BK08918 AAAA) is shown in Figure 471.

A3 (0V)

A2 (GND)

A1 (−48V)

SubD 3 HP female Mate N lock 3 male

700 mm

0VGND−48V

Figure 470: DC Power Supply Cable for PDU in Outdoor Evolium BTS A9100with Power Supply Bus Bar

SubD 3 HP female

SubD 3 HP male700 mm1300 mm

Faston, female

BROWN

YE−GR

BLUE

0VNot usedGND−48V

A3A2A1

A3 A2 A1

Figure 471: DC Power Supply Cable for PDU in Outdoor Evolium BTS A9100without Power Supply Bus Bar

812 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


15.7.4 Jumper Cable

For indoor installation of the REK, there are four jumper cables (MAB/PowerDistribution Unit) available with a length of 1 m (part number 3BK 05360BAAA), 2 m (part number 3BK 05360 CAAA), 3 m (part number 3BK 05360DAAA), and 5 m (part number 3BK 05360 ELAA).

MAB jumper cables are identical for indoor and outdoor Evolium BTS A9100.For outdoor installation of the REK, there are two different jumper cables for thePDU: RF cable PDU - ANx (part number 3BK 07965 AAAA) and RF cable PDU- feeder (part number 3BK 07965 ABAA).

The following figure shows the jumper cable.

Figure 472: Jumper Cable

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 813 / 910


814 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

16 Tower-Mounted Amplifier


The TMA is designed to compensate the feeder losses which significantlyimpact the density of sites to be implemented over the service area of GSMnetworks.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 815 / 910


16.1 Introduction to TMAA significant part of the benefits brought by the outstanding sensitivity of theEvolium BTS A9100 can be lost if the losses incurred by signals along thefeeder cable between the receiving antenna and the antenna coupling module(ANxx) are too high. In fact, the noise factor of the system is degraded by anamount depending on the feeder loss.

The basic idea of tower-mounted amplification is to implement a low-noiseamplifier as close as possible to the antenna (see figure below), so as tocompensate for all losses incurred by received signals. The TMA solution canbe used in GSM 900 or GSM 1800 indoor and outdoor configurations.

Antennas

TMAs

Feeders

TRE TRE

Antenna Networkcombining: ANCx

Mobile Unit

BTS

Duplexer Duplexer

Duplexer Duplexer

Figure 473: Principles of Tower-Mounted Amplification

Tower-mounted amplification appears as an efficient sensitivity enhancementtechnique. However, both uplink and downlink power budgets must beconsidered for the calculation of the coverage ranges. The smallest availablepath loss determines the range. In that respect, tower-mounted amplificationcan be beneficial in those cases where system performance is limited by aweaker uplink budget.

On the other hand, in a balanced uplink/downlink situation, the introduction oftower-mounted amplification can be an efficient means to reduce the outputpower level of all mobile stations. The uplink power control mechanism providedat each base station will force all mobiles to reduce their emission level.

Two benefits can be obtained in that case:

Lower output favorably impacts the standby time of every mobile station

Lower output power contributes to minimizing the electromagnetic pollution

within the service area.

816 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


In summary, the decision to exploit tower-mounted amplification can beinfluenced by system design considerations but also result from the applicationof the Operator’s internal policy.

The counterpart of getting better sensitivity by means of a tower-mountedamplifier is the risk of degrading the blocking and intermodulationcharacteristics of the base station if the value of the amplification gain greatlyexceeds the value of the feeder losses. The attention of Operators is drawn tothe fact that, in such a case, the site equipment might not fully comply withETSI requirements settled in GSM rec 05.05.

The TMA can be used with a wide variety of Evolium BTS A9100 indoor andoutdoor configurations in GSM 900, GSM 1800 or GSM 1900 with a couplingconstraint of a of one TRX/TRE maximum to each antenna. Cross-polarizedantennas can still be used respecting this constraint. For practical reasons,configurations are limited to a maximum of six TREs per BTS site assuminga 3x2 configuration.

The TMA is designed to minimize BTS and system impacts. The BTS hasno knowledge of the TMA presence and is not involved in its configuration.Supervision is minimal. It only involves external alarms to the BTS and there isno recovery mechanism. The system impact concerns the handling of thesenew external alarms at the OMC-R level.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 817 / 910


16.2 ArchitectureFor TMA usage two solutions are available:

Tower Mounted Amplifier with external solution

Tower Mounted Amplifier with AGC support.

16.2.1 Tower Mounted Amplifier with External Solution

The TMA with external solution is basically composed of three modules (seefigure below):

A Tower-Mounted Amplifier (TMA), installed close to the antenna, featuring

the transmit signal bypassed to the antenna and the receive signal amplifiedby a low-noise amplifier

A Bias T module, used to insert the DC voltage in the RF antenna cableto feed the TMA. The Bias T module is suited for GSM 900, GSM 1800,

and GSM 1900

A Power Distribution Unit (PDU), installed in the BTS cabinet or close tothe BTS, providing DC power to remotely feed the masthead amplification

module through the antenna feeder and collect the alarm signals.

Antennas

TowerMounted

Amplifiers

Feeders

. . .Duplexer

. . .

.

.

.

Bias T

Bias T

Power Distribution UnitExternal Alarms 48 V DC

BTS

Duplexer

Duplexer Duplexer

Figure 474: TMA with External Solution Architecture

The PDU is designed to supply and to monitor up to six TMAs (typical BTSconfiguration of 3x2 TRXs/TREs), independently of their frequency band (i.e.,the same PDU equipment can be used with the TMA of GSM 900, GSM 1800,and GSM 1900. In fact, the PDU has no frequency notation).

For indoor BTS installations, the PDU can be installed on the wall or in aseparate transmission cabinet (if available) and be powered by the BTS powersupply. For outdoor BTS configurations, it is possible to install the PDU insidethe BTS cabinet. The PDU is also powered by the BTS power supply.

818 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


16.2.2 Tower Mounted Amplifier with AGC Support

The TMA withAGC support is basically composed of two modules (seefigure below):

A Tower-Mounted Amplifier (TMA), installed close to the antenna, featuringthe transmit signal bypassed to the antenna and the receive signal amplified

by a low-noise amplifier

An Antenna Network module (AGC) containing the Bias T module used toinsert the DC voltage in the RF antenna cable to feed the TMA and the

power supply providing the DC power to remotely feed the mastheadamplification module through the antenna feeder.

TRE

TRE

AGC

BTS

Duplexer

Duplexer

TMA

AGC Power Supply, Switching andSupervision

Bias

Bias

AdjustableAGC Rx Gain

Feeder Cable Loss

FixedTMA Rx Gain

Bias

Duplexer

Duplexer

TMA

Bias

Figure 475: TMA with AGC Support Architecture

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 819 / 910


16.3 Tower-Mounted AmplifierThe tower-mounted amplifier is available for GSM 900, GSM 1800 and GSM1900, as shown in the following table.

Part number

GSM 900 3BK 08451 AAAA

GSM 1800 3BK 08497 AAAA

3BK 08497 BAAA

3BK 08497 CAAA

3BK 08497 DAAB

GSM 1900 3BK 08498 AAAA

3BK 08498 BAAA

Table 168: TMA Part Numbers

820 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


16.3.1 Appearance

The tower-mounted amplifier includes a low noise amplifier for the receive pathand a double duplexer TX/RX for one antenna port. It is designed for outdoorinstallation on a tubular mounted support below the antenna. Amplifiers forGSM 900 and GSM 1800/ GSM 1900 are offered by different manufacturers.Therefore, the appearance of TMAs can differ, as shown in the followingfigures as an example.

Connectors 7/16 female onthe bottom face of the box

Ground terminalscrew M6

Front View

Top View Side View

BTS ANT

Figure 476: Tower-Mounted Amplifier for GSM 900

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 821 / 910


BTSANTConnectors 7/16 female onthe bottom face of the box

Ground terminalscrew M6

Front View

Bottom View

Side View

Stainless steelattachment collar

Antenna Mast

Figure 477: Tower-Mounted Amplifier for GSM 1800/ GSM 1900

16.3.2 Frequency Range

The RX and TX frequency ranges of the tower-mounted amplifiers aresummarized in the following table.


Frequency rangeRX

925 - 960 MHz 1710 - 1785 MHz 1850 - 1910 MHz

Frequency rangeTX

880 - 915 MHz 1805 - 1880 MHz 1930 - 1990 MHz

Table 169: Frequency Ranges of the Tower-Mounted Amplifiers

Other RF specifications depend on which TMA version of a specificmanufacturer is used, the current position of the BTS, the TMA, and theantenna on site and the corresponding cable lengths.

822 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



The overall dimensions and weights of the examples shown above are listed inthe following table.


Dimensions 357.5 x 168 x 112mm

265 x 158 x 95mm

265 x 158 x 95mm

Weight 6 kg 2.5 kg 2.5 kg

Table 170: Tower-Mounted Amplifiers, Weight and Dimensions

The back side of the tower-mounted amplifier is so formed that it can be easilyattached on the same vertical tubular support as the antenna using one (GSM1800/ GSM 1900) or two (GSM 900) stainless steel attachment collars providedas close as possible to the antenna.

The equipment is guaranteed to be watertight when the equipment is installedwith the connectors downwards and the two coaxial cables (jumpers) connectedto the equipment. The connectors on the jumpers are insulated at both ends,i.e., one at the antenna connector, two at the tower-mounted amplifier, and oneat the feeder head.

There are two 7/ 16 female connectors marked BTS and ANT on the front(lower side down). The antenna connector is connected to the antenna by anRF jumper. The BTS connector is connected to the transmission/receptioncoaxial cable going down to the BTS by an RF jumper.

The tower-mounted amplifier is fitted with an M6 threaded rod for grounding viaa black 16 mm² ground cable (in the installation kit) connected to the pylonor building ground, depending on the installation.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 823 / 910


16.4 Power Distribution UnitThe Power Distribution Unit (wall installation: part number 3BK 08456 AAAA,19” installation: part number 3BK 08456 ABAA) provides power supply and analarm interface for up to six tower-mounted amplifiers. It is located at the BTSsite, either wall-mounted close to the BTS in an indoor site or integrated insidethe BTS cabinet in an outdoor BTS.

The primary voltage of the Power Distribution Unit is -48 VDC. The secondaryvoltages are + 12 VDC and are fed to the six tower-mounted amplifiers viaBias tees which are not integrated parts of the module. The BTS is informedby an alarm indication if there is a defective DC/DC converter, a malfunctionof the tower-mounted amplifier, or an connection error of the various partsof cables and equipment.

The Power Distribution Unit includes three separate DC/DC converterseach providing two tower-mounted amplifiers with DC power. The powerconsumption for the Power Distribution Unit is 30 W.

16.4.1 Appearance

The Power Distribution Units are shown in the following figures.

1 21 21 21 21 21 21 2 1 14

Main powersupply cable

Top View Side View

Ground braid collars

Serial no. label

Fixing hole

LEDs

Reset button

Power switch

Terminal blocks(secondary powerconnection)

Ground connector (M6)Terminal block(for alarm cable)

Figure 478: Power Distribution Unit, Wall Version for BTS Indoor

824 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


Power supplycable

Top View Front View

Ground braid collars

Ground connector (M6)

1 2

1 2

1 2

1 2

1 2

1 2

1

21

14

Figure 479: Power Distribution Unit, 19” Version for BTS Outdoor

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 825 / 910


16.4.2 Switches and LEDs

There is a main power switch used to switch the main power on or off. Thecorresponding orange LED indicates the presence of -48 V primary voltage.Three green LEDs indicate the presence of the secondary voltage for twochannels each (1 + 2, 3 + 4, 5 + 6). The output channels can be separatelyswitched on/off. A corresponding red LED indicates the presence of + 12 VDCsecondary voltage.

16.4.3 Reset Button

Each channel has a separate reset button. If pressed for at least two seconds,the concerned red LED goes out. The PDU is also fitted with a main resetbutton to reset all channels used in a single action.

16.4.4 Switching On

Before switching on the power supply at the PDU input, all switches have tobe in the OFF position (all LEDs are also OFF). When the main power isswitched on, the orange LED ’main power’ indicates the presence of primaryvoltage, while the three green LEDs indicate that the secondary power forall separate channels is available.

The six red LEDs (for channel 1 to channel 6) indicate when the tower-mountedamplifier alarms come on. After switching on the separate channel switchesand pressing the reset buttons, the corresponding tower-mounted amplifiersare supplied and the red LEDs are OFF.

16.4.5 PDU LEDs

LEDs are provided on the top (wall installation) or on the side (19” installation) ofthe Power Distribution Unit to indicate the status and the alarms. The followingtable describes each LED and provides a definition of their operational states.

LED Color LED On LED Off

-48 VDC Orange Main poweravailable

No main poweravailable

POWER TMA 1 and 2 Green Secondary poweravailable

DC/DC converteris faulty (alarm)





TMA 1 to TMA 6 Red TMA malfunctionor connectionerrors (alarm)

No fault

Table 171: Power Distribution Unit LEDs

826 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


16.5 Bias TThe Bias T unit (part number 3BK 08453 ABAA or 3BK 08454 ABAA) is apower supply injector to transport the + 12 VDC power supply energy tothe tower-mounted amplifier through the coaxial cable between the antennaand the BTS.

The injector is designed for indoor and outdoor installation between the BTSand the coaxial transmission-reception cable.

Two Bias T versions are available:

Bias T for indoor BTS-RF connectors 7/ 16 male/ side TMA; female/ side

BTS

Bias T for outdoor BTS-RF connectors 7/ 16 female/ side TMA; male/side BTS.

The outdoor version is normally combined with a 90� bend. Both indoor andoutdoor versions are combined with a surge arrestor.

The Bias T units are shown in the following figures.

7/16 Male connectorto TMA

7/16 Female connectorto BTS

Ground TerminalScrew M6

Male Connectorto PDU

ANT

BTS

Figure 480: Bias T, Indoor Version

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 827 / 910


7/16 Female connectorto TMA

7/16 Male connectorto BTS

Ground TerminalScrew M6

Male Connectorto PDU

ANT

BTS

Figure 481: Bias T, Outdoor Version

Figure 482: Surge Arrestor

828 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


16.6 Installation

16.6.1 Indoor Installation

Depending on the installation, the distance between the BTS, the PowerDistribution Unit, and the Tower-Mounted Amplifier can be variable. Thus RFjumper cables have been defined to cover this flexibility. The PDU and Bias Tare installed outside the BTS.

The following figure shows an indoor installation.

GND connection

Ground bar

RF jumper

Wall Installation

RF jumper

Feeder

TMA

ANT BTS

AN

TE

NN

A

DC cableto power supply

Alarmcable

Surge Arrestor

PDU

BTS indoor

GND connection

Bias T for BTS Indoor

Bias T Injector Cable

RF jumper

Figure 483: Indoor Installation

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 829 / 910


16.6.2 Outdoor Installation

Contrary to indoor installation, in an outdoor installation the PDU and Bias Tare installed inside the BTS. The PDU has a 19” version which is installed ina subrack. The Bias T, including 90� bend and surge arrestor, are installedin the bottom or top of the cabinet.

The following figures show the principle outdoor installations for BTS versionswith a Bias T installation on the bottom.

GND connection

Ground bar

RF jumper

RF jumper

RF jumper

Feeder

TMA

ANT BTS

AN

TE

NN

A

DC cable topower supply

Bias T with 90

Surge Arrestor

ANx

PDU 19" subrack

Bus bar

Ground cable

19’’ subrack

Alarm cable

COAR

’Octopus’ cablefitted with 6 cables

BTS Outdoor

Cable gland

Figure 484: Principle Outdoor Installation for Evolium A9100 BTS

830 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


GND connection

Ground bar

RF jumper

RF jumper

RF jumper

Feeder

TMA

ANT BTS

AN

TE

NN

A

DC cable topower supply

Bias T with 90

Surge Arrestor

ANxPDU 19" subrack

Bus bar

Ground cable

19’’ subrack

Alarm cable

OUTC

’Octopus’ cablefitted with 6 cables

BTS Outdoor

Figure 485: Principle Outdoor Installation for Evolium A9100 BTS Evolution

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 831 / 910


16.7 TMA Cables

16.7.1 Indoor/Outdoor BTS Cables

Cables for both indoor and outdoor BTS installation of the TMA are described.

16.7.1.1 TMA Ground CableThe TMA ground cable (part number 3BK 08452 ABAA) is shown in thefollowing figure.

Shrink sheath Ring tongue M6 Ring tongue M8

Figure 486: Ground Cable for Tower-Mounted Amplifier

16.7.1.2 Jumper CableFor indoor and outdoor installation of the tower-mounted amplifier, there areseveral jumper cables with different cable lengths (part numbers 3BK 05360xxxx or 3BK 07965 xxxx). Variant ’xxxx’ represents cable lengths.

The following figure shows the jumper cable.

Figure 487: Jumper Cable

832 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


16.7.2 Indoor BTS Cables

The Bias T cable and the cable set used for indoor BTS installations aredescribed in the following sections.

16.7.2.1 Bias T CableThe Bias T cable (part number 3BK 25482 AAAA) is shown in the followingfigure.

Bias T side PDU side

Figure 488: Bias T Cable

16.7.2.2 Indoor Cable SetFor indoor installation there is a specific cable set (part number 3BK 25484AAAA) containing a ground cable, a DC power supply cable, and an alarmcable. All cables are shown in the following figures.

braid overturned

Figure 489: Indoor DC Cable

30 mm shrink sheath

Lug M6

Figure 490: Indoor Ground Cable

FM2A armored cable

Figure 491: Indoor Alarm Cable

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 833 / 910


16.7.3 Outdoor BTS Cables

The cable and cable set used for outdoor BTS installations are described in thefollowing sections.

16.7.3.1 Octopus CableThe ’Octopus’ cable (part number 3BK 25483 AAAA) is fitted with six cablesand is shown in the following figure.

Straight cable plug

Bulkhead feedthroughcable jack

Spacer Female connectors

Figure 492: ’Octopus’ Cable

16.7.3.2 Outdoor Cable SetFor outdoor installation there is a specific cable set (part number 3BK 25485AAAA) containing a ground cable, a DC power supply cable, and an alarmcable. All cables are shown in the following figures.

Mate N lock 3 male

0 VNot used−48 V

braid overturned

Figure 493: Outdoor DC Cable

30 mm shrink sheath

Figure 494: Outdoor Ground Cable

Figure 495: Outdoor Alarm Cable

834 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

17 Cable Descriptions


This chapter describes the internal and external cables.

Where appropriate, the pin-to-pin interconnections between cable connectorsare illustrated in diagrams.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 835 / 910


17.1 Internal CablesThe physical and electrical characteristics for the indoor and outdoor internalcables are given in the following sections.

17.1.1 ANCO

The ANCO (part number 3BK 26151) connections are shown in the followingfigure.

Shield

Lightning Protector AN

Type 7/16, straight, male Type 7/16, right angle, male

Figure 496: ANCO Connections

17.1.2 ANIC

The ANIC (part number 3BK 07921) connections are shown in the followingfigure.

Shield

ANANT Cabinet Connector

M3 Thread

Type 7/16, straight, female Type 7/16, right angle, male

Figure 497: ANIC Connections

836 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.1.3 ANLC

The ANLC (part number 3BK 26349) connections are shown in the followingfigure.

Shield


Type 7/16, Straight, Male Type 7/16, Right Angle, Male

Figure 498: ANLC Connections

17.1.4 ANOC

The ANOC (part number 3BK 07965) connections are shown in the followingfigure.

Shield


Type 7/16, right angle, male Type 7/16, right angle, male

Figure 499: ANOC Connections

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 837 / 910


17.1.5 BOBU

Both Variant AA and Variant CA of the BOBU are described.

17.1.5.1 Variant AA AppearanceThe front and side views of the BOBU (part number 3BK08742) Variant AAare shown in the following figure.

P1

P2

P3

P4

P5P6

P7

P8

P9

P10

P11

P12

P19

P20

P21

P22

P13

P23P24P25

P26

P27

P14

P15

P16

P17

P18 P28

Figure 500: BOBU Variant AA Appearance

838 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.1.5.2 Variant AA Circuit SchematicThe BOBU Variant AA connections are shown in the following figure.

PDU3 (STASR 6)

PDU2 (STASR 4)

XIOB Supply

Service Light

Smoke Alarm, +24 V / 0 V

654321

Layer:123

Signal:WATERHEX2−1HEX2−2

121110987

654321 121110987

PDU1 (STASR 1)

Light Filter

Heater Filter

COAR Alarms

−48 V Filter

0 V Bolt

Ground Bolt

STASR 2

Door 1 and 2 Switches

HEAT

Supply Option X3

Supply Option X1

Supply Option X2

Supply Option X4

STASR 6

STASR 3

STASR 1

STASR 5

STASR 4

HEX2 (BTS 1)

Water

STASR 4

HEX2

STASR 6

STASR 5

STASR 1

STASR 2

STASR 3

XIOB and Options

or Loop

Bottom

Top

Layer:78 T / B9

Signal:−48VG−48V0 / −48VGGND−0V

Layer:4 T / B5 T / B6

Signal:SMOKE / DOOR124V / DOOR2XGND

Layer:101112 T / B

Signal:GND−0VNF1LIF1 / LIF2

P1

P2

P3

P4

P5

P6

P7

P8

P9

P10

P11

P12

P13

P14

P15

P16

P17

P18

P19

P20

P21

P22

P23

P24

P25

P26

P27

P28

HEX2 (BTS 2)

Figure 501: BOBU Variant AA Circuit Schematic

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 839 / 910


17.1.5.3 Variant AA ConnectorsThe connectors of the BOBU are shown in the following table.

Connector Type

P1, P12 Wieland GST 1813 S, male with female contacts.

P2, P3, P4 Mate-N-Lock, female with female contacts.

P5, P6, P7, P8, P11 Mate-N-Lock, female with female contacts.

P9, P14, P15, P16 Anderson Powerpole, unisex.

P10, P17 Mate-N-Lock, female with female contacts.

P13 9-pin Sub-D, female.

P18 Mate-N-Lock, male with male contacts.

P19 DIN wire ferrules 2.5 mm 2

P20, P28 Mate-N-Lock, male with female contacts.

P21, P22 FASTON 6.3, female contacts.

P23, P24 Lug, ring, crimp, 6 mm.

P25 Lug, ring, crimp, 8 mm.

P26 Triple FASTON, male with female contacts.

P27 Triple FASTON, female with female contacts.

Table 172: BOBU Variant AA Connectors

840 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.1.5.4 Variant CA AppearanceThe front and side views of the BOBU (part number 3BK 08742) Variant CAare shown in the following figure.

Figure 502: BOBU Variant CA Appearance

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 841 / 910


17.1.5.5 Variant CA Circuit SchematicThe BOBU Variant CA connections are shown in the following figure.

ELECTRICAL GENERAL SCHEME CONNECTORS TECHNOLOGIES

Figure 503: BOBU Variant CA Circuit Schematic

842 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.1.6 BOMU

Diagrams illustrate both the BOMU’s appearance and its circuit schematics.

17.1.6.1 AppearanceThe front and side views of the BOMU (part number 3BK 25672) are shown inthe following figure.

Figure 504: BOMU Appearance

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 843 / 910


17.1.6.2 Circuit SchematicThe BOMU connections are shown in the following figure.

Figure 505: BOMU Circuit Schematic

844 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.1.7 BOMUE

Diagrams illustrate both the BOMU’s appearance and its circuit schematics.

17.1.7.1 AppearanceThe front and side views of the BOMUE (part number 3BK 27262) are shown inthe following figure.

Figure 506: BOMUE Appearance

17.1.7.2 Circuit SchematicThe BOMUE connections are shown in the following figure.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 845 / 910


Figure 507: BOMUE Circuit Schematic

846 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.1.8 BOMUT

Diagrams illustrate both the BOMUT’s appearance and its circuit schematics.

17.1.8.1 AppearanceThe front and side views of the BOMUT (part number 3BK 27143) are shown inthe following figure.

Figure 508: BOMUT Appearance

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 847 / 910


17.1.8.2 Circuit SchematicThe BOMUT connections are shown in the following figure.

Figure 509: BOMUT Circuit Schematic

848 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.1.9 BOSU

The BOSU variants, AA and CA, are described in terms of appearance andconnections.

17.1.9.1 Variant AA AppearanceThe front and side views of the BOSU (part number 3BK 08741) Variant AAare shown in the following figure.

P3

P1

P2

P4

P6

P5

P7

P8

P9

P10

P11

P12

Figure 510: BOSU Variant AA Appearance

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 849 / 910


17.1.9.2 Variant AA Circuit SchematicThe BOSU Variant AA connections are shown in the following figure.

Service Filter

Service Light

ACSB/ASCU

−48 VDC Input

654321

Heater Filter

COAR Alarms

Keyswitch

Ground Bolt

Door Switch

Heater Module HEAT2

HEX2 Alarm

Layer:123456 T / B

Signal:XGNDDOORHEX2GNDNF1LIF1 / LIF2

654321

Top

Bottom

P1

P2

P4

P6

P5

P7

P8

P9

P10

P11

P12

P3

(or loop)

Wieland GST 1813 S, male with female contactsTripple Faston, female with female contactsAnderson Powerpole, unisexDIN wire ferrules 2.5 mm9−pin Sub−D femaleLug, ring, crimp, 8 mmLug, ring, crimp, 6 mmMatenlock, male with male contacts

P1, P3:P2:P4:, P6:P5, P11:P7:P8:P9, P10:P12:

0 VDC Input

Figure 511: BOSU Variant AA Circuit Schematic

850 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.1.9.3 Variant CA AppearanceThe front and side views of the BOSU (part number 3BK 08741) Variant CAare in the following figure.

Figure 512: BOSU Variant CA Appearance

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 851 / 910


17.1.9.4 Variant CA Circuit SchematicThe BOSU Variant CA connections are shown in the following figure.

ELECTRICAL GENERAL SCHEME CONNECTORS TECHNOLOGIES

Figure 513: BOSU Variant CA Circuit Schematic

852 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.1.10 BTSRI3

The connections for the BTSRI3I (part number 3BK 25973) are shown inthe following figure.

P1

1

P2 P3 P4 P5

BTSRISTASR 1

Break in wire for coding purposes

Non−removable, self cutting, 50 pinsDIN 41612, 64 pins, rows A and C only, femaleFlat cable connector, 50 pins, female

P1:P2 − P4:P5:

STASR 2 STASR 3

44 45

1

TFBP

Figure 514: BTSRI3 Connections

17.1.11 BTSRI5

The connections for the BTSRI5 (part number 3BK 25974) are shown inthe following figure.

P1

1

P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7

1BTSRI

STASR 1



P1:P2 − P6:P7:

STASR 2 STASR 3 STASR 4 STASR 5 TFBP

44 45 46 47

Figure 515: BTSRI5 Connections

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 853 / 910


17.1.12 BTSRIMA

The connections for the BTSRIMA (part number 3BK 07720) are shown inthe following figure.

P1

1

P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7

1BTSRI

STASR 1



P1:P2 − P6:P7:

STASR 2 STASR 3 STASR 4 STASR 5 TFBP

44 45 46 47

Figure 516: BTSRIMA Connections

17.1.13 BTSRIMI

The connections for the BTSRIMI (part number 3BK 07720) are shown inthe following figure.

P1

1

P2 P3 P4

1BTSRI

STASR 1 STASR 2 TFBP



P1:P2, P3:P4:

44

Figure 517: BTSRIMI Connections

854 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.1.14 BTSRIOUT

The connections for the BTSRIOUT (part number 3BK 08126) are shown inthe following figure.

P1

1

P2 P3

1BTSRI

STASR 1 STASR 2


44

Non−removable, self cutting, 50 pinsDIN 41612, 64 pins, rows A and C only, female

P1:P2, P3, P4:

Variant AA

P4

1

STASR 3

Variant CA

Figure 518: BTSRIOUT Connections

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 855 / 910


17.1.15 BUMA

The BUMA (part number 3BK 07762) cableform connections are shown inthe following figure.

P4

XIOB

1

3

2

13 14

134

GND

Filter

Breakers

XIOB

Top Fan Backplane

Subrack 5

Subrack 4

Subrack 3

Subrack 2

Subrack 1

Subrack 1 − 5 and Top Fan BackplaneGND Bolt Filter Breakers

−48 V GND 0 V−48 VGND 0 V

0 V

GND

−48 V

x3 (Red, Blue, Black)

x7 (Red)

x7 (Blue)

x7 (Black)







x7

P4

P5

P6

P7

P8

P9

P10

P3

P2

P1

P1 P2 P3

P5 to P10

Spade, male, M8 holeSpade, male, M6 holeSpade, male, open tongue, M5Matenlock, femaleTriple Faston, female

P1:P2:P3:P4:P5 − P10:

Figure 519: BUMA Connections

856 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.1.16 BUMI

The BUMI (part number 3BK 07763) cableform connections are shown inthe following figure.

P4

XIOB

1

3

2

134

GND

Filter

Breakers

XIOB

Top Fan Backplane

Subrack 2

Subrack 1

Subrack 1, 2 and Top Fan BackplaneGND Bolt Filter Breakers


0 V

GND

−48 V


x4 (Red)

x4 (Blue)

x4 (Black)




x4

P4

P5

P6

P7

P3

P2

P1

P1 P2 P3

P5 to P713 14

Spade, male, M8 holeSpade, male, M6 holeSpade, male, open tongue, M5Matenlock, femaleTriple Faston, female

P1:P2:P3:P4:P5 − P7:

Figure 520: BUMI Connections

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 857 / 910


17.1.17 CA12

The connections for the CA12 (part number 3BK 08086) are shown in thefollowing figure.

1

P1 P2 P3 P4

1

BTSRIOUT Connector

STASR 3 STASR 4 STASR5


45 46 47

Flat cable connector, 50 pins, femaleDIN 41612, 64 pins, row A and C only, female

P1:P2 − P4:

Figure 521: CA12 Connections

17.1.18 CA-2MMC2

The CA-2MMC2 (part number 3BK 08289) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.

Black

6

5

9

7

9−pin Sub−D female

1

9−pin Sub−D male

Microwave UL

5

4

2

1

3

6

7

8

1

9

9

COAR

6

5

9

1

Transparent

Screen

Black

Transparent

Screen

Figure 522: CA-2MMC2 Connections

858 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.1.19 CA-ABIS

The CA-ABIS (part number 3BK 07922) connections are shown in the followingfigure.

1

Shield


4

3

2

7

6

5

8

9

51

96

SUM side BTSCA

9

1

6

1

4

3

2

7

6

5

8

9

5


Figure 523: CA-ABIS Connections

17.1.20 CA-ACB2

The CA-ACB2 (part number 3BK 08091) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.

P3P1

1

5

4

2

5

9

1

6

1

6

5

9

BTS Compartment 2 COAR

6

5

P1

P2

9−pin Sub−D maleReceptacle Faston 4.8 x 0.59−pin Sub−D female

P1:P2:P3:

Figure 524: CA-ACB2 Connections

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 859 / 910


17.1.21 CA-ACSC

The CA-ACSC (part number 3BK 08078) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.

1

P4P1

4

2

7

6

5

1

6

Side Compartment COAR

5

9

6

5

P1

P3

P2

1

6

5

9

9−pin Sub−D maleReceptacle Faston 4.8 x 0.5DIN wire ferrules

P1 − P4:P2:P3:

Figure 525: CA-ACSC Connections

17.1.22 CA-ADABM, CA-ADABP

The CA-ADABM (part number 3BK 25139) connections and the CA-ADABP(part number 3BK 25138) connections are shown in the following figure.

DIN wire ferrule

ADAMBattery Breaker

Lug, ring crimp, M6

CA−ADABM:

CA−ADABP:

Blue

Black

Figure 526: CA-ADABM, CA-ADABP Connections

860 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.1.23 CA-ADACM, CA-ADACP

The CA-ADACM (part number 3BK 25248) connections and the CA -ADACP(part number 3BK 25247) connections are shown in the following figure.

DIN wire ferrule

Battery Interconnection

CA−ADACP:

Blue

Black

ADAM CA−ADACM:

DIN wire ferrule

Figure 527: CA-ADACM, CA-ADACP Connections

17.1.24 CA-ADCO

The CA-ADCO (part number 3BK 07953) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.

Clamp strip, Phoenix FK−MPC 1,5/16−STF−3,81

1

3

4

5

8

9

2

7

6

10

1112

13

14

15

16

Figure 528: CA-ADCO Connections

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 861 / 910


17.1.25 CA-ALPC

The CA-ALPC (part number 3BK 26348) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.

9−Pin Sub−D Male 9−Pin Sub−D Female

Figure 529: CA-ALPC Appearance

Alarm −

Alarm −

Alarm +

Alarm +

To Door Switch

To DCUC X8

To DCUC X7

− 48 V

0 V

− 48 V

0 VOUTC

HEX5

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

2

5

6

7

P3

P1

P2

P4

P5

9

P1 9−Pin Sub−D FemaleP2 Wire FerrulesP3 9−Pin Sub−D MaleP4, P5 Twin Wire Ferrules

Figure 530: CA-ALPC Circuit Schematic

862 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.1.26 CA-APC2

The CA-APC2 (part number 3BK 08215) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.

6

P5P1

11

7

15

14

12

1

15

BTS Compartment 1 COAR

8

9

6

5

P1

P2

P3

1

6

5

9

3

4

1

2P4

9−pin Sub−D maleDIN wire ferrulesReceptagle Faston 4.8x0.59−pin Sub−D female

P1:P2, P4:P3:P5:

Figure 531: CA-APC2 Connections

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 863 / 910


17.1.27 CA-ASMC

The CA-ASMC (part number 3BK 08807) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.

P1

4

3

1

Brown

Blue

P3

Black 2

ACSBACIB

14

2 Black 1

Yellow/Green

P2

P2P1

Quardruple Faston, female, 6.3x0.8Lug, ring, crimp, 5 mmDIN wire ferrules 2.5 mm 2

P1:P2:P3:

Figure 532: CA-ASMC Connections

17.1.28 CA-BABRM, CA-BABRP

The CA-BABRM (part number 3BK 25141) connections and the CA-BABRP(part number 2BK 25140) connections are shown in the following figure.

Interconnection AreaBattery Breaker

Lug, ring crimp, M6

CA−BABRM:

CA−BABRP:

Blue

Black

Lug, ring crimp, M6

Figure 533: CA-BABRM, CA-BABRP Connections

17.1.29 CA-BRCM, CA-BRCP

The CA-BRCM (part number 3BK 25246) connections and the CA-BRCP (partnumber 3BK 25245) connections are shown in the following figure.

DIN wire ferruleAngled Crimp Connector for M6

CA−BRCM:

CA−BRCP:

Blue

Black

Battery Battery Breaker

Figure 534: CA-BRCM, CA-BRCP Connections

864 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.1.30 CA-BTSCA

The CA-BTSCA (part number 3BK 07923) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.

SUM side BTSCA

37−pin Sub−D female37−pin Sub−D male

11

Figure 535: CA-BTSCA Connections

17.1.31 CA-CSTR

The connections for the CA-CSTR (part number 3BK 25178) are shown inthe following figure.

1

P1 P2 P3 P4

1

BTSRIOUT Connector

STASR 7 RIBAT2 RIBAT1


45 50

Flat cable connector, 50 pins, femaleDIN 41612, 64 pins, row A and C only, femaleP1 − P3:

P4:

COAR

Figure 536: CA-CSTR Connections

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 865 / 910


17.1.32 CA-DFUX

The CA-DFUX (part number 3BK 08503) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.

P31

20

19

37

Pair 1

Pair 4

Pair 3

Pair 2

Pair 7

Pair 6

Pair 5

Pair 8

P1

1

4

3

2

7

6

5

8

9

20

23

22

21

26

25

24

27

28

10

13

12

11

16

15

14

17

18

29

32

31

30

35

34

33

36

37

Microwave UX

P2

TX Red

Pair 1

Pair 4

Pair 3

Pair 2

Pair 7

Pair 6

Pair 5

Pair 8

Rx Blue

SUM

P8 P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1

Pouyet, P44920−CA blue

Pouyet, P44920−CA red


P1:

P2:

P3:

Figure 537: CA-DFUX Connections

866 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.1.33 CA-GCMW

The CA-GCMW (part number 3BK 07934) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.

Yellow/Green

Lug, ring, crimp

Ground Microwave Equipment

Receptacle, Faston 5.3 x 0.8

Figure 538: CA-GCMW Connections

17.1.34 CA-Ground

The CA-Ground (part number 3BK 25182) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.

Bottom PlateLPFU

Lug, ring crimp, M6

CA−BABRM:

CA−BABRP:

Blue

Black

Lug, ring crimp, M8

Figure 539: CA-Ground Connections

17.1.35 CA-Ground1

The CA-Ground1 (part number 3BK 08118) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.

DIN wire ferrule

ACSBSRACDC

Yellow/Green

Lug, ring crimp, 8 mm

Figure 540: CA-Ground1 Connections

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 867 / 910


17.1.36 CA-Ground2

The CA-Ground2 (part number 3BK 08177) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.

Lug, ring, crimp, 8 mm

ACSBSRACDC

Yellow/Green


Figure 541: CA-Ground2 Connections

17.1.37 CA-H2PC1

The CA-H2PC1 (part number 3BK 08077) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.

1

4

3

2

7

6

5

8

9

5 1

9 6

HEX2 DCDP

5

9

1

6

1

4

3

2

7

6

5

8

9

9−pin Sub−D female 9−pin Sub−D male

Figure 542: CA-H2PC1 Connections

868 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.1.38 CA-H2PC2

The CA-H2PC2 (part number 08092) connections are shown in the followingfigure.

1


4

3

2

7

6

5

8

9

COAR DCDP

1

4

3

2

7

6

5

8

9

1

6

5

9

1

6

5

9



3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 869 / 910


17.1.39 CA-H2PC3

The CA-H2PC3 (part number 3BK 08093) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.

1


4

3

2

7

6

5

8

9

5

9

HEX2 COAR

1

6

1

4

3

2

7

6

5

8

9

5

9

1

6



17.1.40 CA-HOAP

The CA-HOAP (part number 3BK 25820) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.

7

6

5

Matenlock, male

3

2

1

6

BOMUHEX3

5

9

3

1

2

14

9

4


Figure 545: CA-HOAP Connections

870 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.1.41 CA-MLBP

The CA-MLBP (part number 3BK 08886) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.

Plug for three female contacts

5 1

Microwave UL

1

5

3

Matenlock, male

BOBU

2

1

12

Figure 546: CA-MLBP Connections

17.1.42 CA-MXBP

The CA-MXBP (part number 3BK 08886) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.

Sub−D size A for three HP contacts, male and female

3 1

Microwave UX

1

3

2

Matenlock, male

BOBU

1

2

12

Figure 547: CA-MXBP Connections

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 871 / 910


17.1.43 CA-OHAC

The CA-OHAC (part number 3BK 08810) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.

7

6

1

Matenlock, male

3

2

1

6

BOSU or BOBUHEX2

5

9

2

4

3

14


9

1

HEX2


Figure 548: CA-OHAC Connections

872 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.1.44 CA-ONCCx

The CA-ONCCx cable has three connection types. Each type is illustrated in aseparate diagram.

17.1.44.1 Type 1 ConnectionsThe CA-ONCCx type 1 connections are shown in the following figure.

1

2

P5

BOBU

1

2

Customer Equipment

P1

BOBU

12

6

COAR/ABIS2

5

9

7

3

6

P2, P3, P4

1

P1, P5

9

8

P2SUM

5

4

2

1

9

8

7

6

P3COAR/ABIS1

7

6

9

8

P4

Matenlock, male


Figure 549: CA-ONCCx Type 1 Connections

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 873 / 910



6

1

P5

DCDP

6

1

Customer Equipment

P1

DCDP

6

COAR/ABIS2

5

9

7

3

6

P1 to P5

1

9

8

P2SUM

5

4

2

1

9

8

7

6

P3COAR/ABIS1

7

6

9

8

P4



874 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13



Customer Equipment

6

COAR/ABIS2

5

9

7

3

6

P1, P2, P3

1

9

8

P1SUM

5

4

2

1

9

8

7

6

P2COAR/ABIS1

7

6

9

8

P3



3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 875 / 910


17.1.45 CA-OSCP1

The CA-OSCP1 (part number 3BK 08095) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.

9−pin Sub−D female1

6

Side Compartment

1

4

3

2

7

6

5

8

9

5

9

Figure 552: CA-OSCP1 Connections

876 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.1.46 CA-OSCP2


9−pin Sub−D female1

6

BTS Compartment 1

1

4

3

2

7

6

5

8

9

5

9


17.1.47 CA-OSCP3


15− Pin Sub−D Female

CBO


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 877 / 910


17.1.48 CA-OSPC

The CA-OSPC (part number 3BK 08079) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.

Sub−D size A for three HP contactsThree Faston 6.8x0.8, female

3 1

STASR DCDP

1

3

2

0 V

GND

−48 V

Figure 555: CA-OSPC Connections

17.1.49 CA-PCAN, CA-PCAP

The CA-PCAN (part number 3BK 25115) and the CA-PCAP (part number 3BK25114) connections are shown in the following figure.

DIN wire ferrule

ADAMDCBREAK

Lug, ring crimp, M6

CA−PCAN: Blue

CA−PCAP: Black

Figure 556: CA-PCAN, CA-PCAP Connections

17.1.50 CA-PCOS

The CA-PCOS (part number 3BK 08809) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.

Triple Faston, female

4

3

1

13

1

2

Triple Faston, male

3

BOBUSTASR

14

Figure 557: CA-PCOS Connections

878 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.1.51 CA-PDCM, CA-PDCP

The CA-PDCM (part number 3BK 25232) connections and the CA-PDCP (partnumber 3BK 25231) connections are shown in the following figure.

DIN wire ferrule

Battery Interconnection

CA−PDCP:

Blue

Black

ADAM CA−PDCM:

DIN wire ferrule

Figure 558: CA-PDCM, CA-PDCP Connections

17.1.52 CA-RFMW

The CA-RFMW (part number 3BK 07931) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.

Shield

Microwave EquipmentConnection Area

N type, male N type, female

Figure 559: CA-RFMW Connections

17.1.53 CA-RIBCO

The connections for the CA-RIBCO (part number 3BK 26347) are shown inthe following figure.

P1

P1 :P2/P3 :

P2

STASR 1

P3

STASR 2

OUTCFlatCableConnectorSideCompart−ment

Break wire for coding purposesFlat cable connector, 50 pins, femaleDIN 41612, 64 pins, row A and only, female

44*

* :

Figure 560: CA-RIBCO Connections

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 879 / 910


17.1.54 CA-RICPT1

The connections for the CA-RICPT1 (part number 3BK 25537) are shown inthe following figure.

P1

P1 :P2/P3 :

P2

STASR 2

P3

STASR 3


44

Break wire for coding purposes

45

Flat cable connector, 50 pins, femaleDIN 41612, 64 pins, row A and C only, female

1

Figure 561: CA-RICPT1 Connections

17.1.55 CA-RICPT2

The connections for the CA-RICPT2 (part number 3BK 25538) are shown inthe following figure.

P1

P1 :P2/P4 :

P2

STASR 4

P3

STASR 5

OUTCFlatCableConnectorSideCompart−ment 1

464544


47

P4

STASR 6

48

Flat cable connector, 50 pins, femaleDIN 41612, 64 pins, row A and only, female

1 1

Figure 562: CA-RICPT2 Connections

880 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.1.56 CA-RIMO1

The connections for the CA-RIMO1 (part number 3BK 25822) are shown inthe following figure.

P1

P1 :P2/P5 :

P2

STASR 1

P3

STASR 2



P4

STASR 3


P5

STASR 7

44* 45* 44, 45,46, 47,48*

* :

Figure 563: CA-RIMO1 Connections

17.1.57 CA-RIMO2

The connections for the CA-RIMO2 (part number 3BK 25823) are shown inthe following figure.

P1

P1 :P2/P5 :

P2

STASR 4

P3

STASR 5

OUTCFlatCableConnectorBTSCompart−ment 1


P4

STASR 6


P5

STASR 0

48*47* 44, 45*

* :

44, 45,46*

Figure 564: CA-RIMO2 Connections

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 881 / 910


17.1.58 CA-SENSP

The CA-SENSP (part number 3BK 26147) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.

9−Pin Sub−D Female

1

4

3

2

7

6

5

8

9

Resistor 105 Ohm 1%

Figure 565: CA-SENSP Connections

17.1.59 CA-XBCBO

The CA-XBCBO (part number 3BK 08205) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.

ACRI COAR

15−pin Sub−D male15−pin Sub−D male

1515

Figure 566: CA-XBCBO Connections

882 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.1.60 CA-XIOC

The CA-XIOC (part number 3BK 26353) connections are shown in the followingfigure.

XIOB

Mate−N Lock, MaleDIN Wire Ferrules

To DCUC X9

To DCUC X10 1 − 48V (Blue)

2 Not Used

3 0V (Black)

13

Figure 567: CA-XIOC Connections

17.1.61 CA-XIOPC

The CA-XIOPC (part number 3BK 08087) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.

1

9−pin Sub−D maleMatenlock, female

4

3

2

7

6

5

8

9

1

6

XIOB

DCDP

5

9

1

3

2

13

Figure 568: CA-XIOPC Connections

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 883 / 910


17.1.62 CIMA Bus Bar

The CIMA (part number 3BK 07762) bus bar connections are shown in thefollowing figure.

Top FanBackplane

Subrack 5

Subrack 4

Subrack 3

Subrack 2

Subrack 1

P4

XIOB

1

3

2

13 14

134

Subrack 1 − 5 and Top Fan BackplaneGND Bolt Filter Breakers


0 V

GND

−48 V


x7 (Red)

x7 (Blue)

x7 (Black)

x7

P4

P5

P6

P7

P8

P9

P10

P3

P2

P1

P1 P2 P3

P5 − P10

Circuit Breakers

Ground (M8 bolt)

0 VDC Filter

XIOB

Fixing Rail

Fixing Holes

Bus Bar







Spade, made, M8 holeSpade, male, M6 holeSpade, male, open tongue, M5Matenlock, femaleTriple Faston, female

P1:P2:P3:P4:P5 − P10:

Figure 569: CIMA Bus Bar Connections

884 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.1.63 CIMI Bus Bar

The CIMI (part number 3BK 07763) bus bar connections are shown in thefollowing figure.

P4

XIOB

1

3

2

134

Subrack 1, 2 and Top Fan BackplaneGND Bolt Filter Breakers


0 V

GND

−48 V

x4

P1 P2 P3

P5 − P713 14

Fixing Holes

Bus Bar

Fixing Rail

x4 (Red)

x4 (Blue)

x4 (Black)

P4

P3

P2

P1

Circuit Breakers

Ground (M8 bolt)

0 VDC Filter

XIOBx3 (Red, Blue, Black)

Top FanBackplane

x3 (Red, Blue, Black)P5

Subrack 2

Subrack 1

P6

P7x3 (Red, Blue, Black)


Spade, made, M8 holeSpade, male, M6 holeSpade, male, open tongue, M5Matenlock, femaleTriple Faston, female

P1:P2:P3:P4:P5 − P7:

Figure 570: CIMI Bus Bar Connections

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 885 / 910


17.1.64 RXRC

The RXRC (part number 3BK 07920) connections are shown in the followingfigure.

ShieldANTRE/AN

P1 P2

AlignmentHole

Note: For ANS modules only one RXRC line is fitted

Subminiature connectors, 50 series SMB, straight, femaleP1, P2:

Figure 571: RXRC Connections

17.1.65 TXRC

The TXRC (part number 3BK 07919) connections are shown in the followingfigure.

Shield

ANTRE/AN

Coaxial connector, 50 series N Coaxial connector, 50 series N

Figure 572: TXRC Connections

886 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.2 External CablesThe physical and electrical characteristics for the indoor and outdoor externalcables are given in the following sections.

17.2.1 CA01

The CA01 (part number 3BK 07594) Abis cable connections are shown inthe following figure.

Shield

Customer dependent9−pin Sub−D male

4

3

2

1

7

6

5

8

9

1

6

BTS A9100 side Customer’s Distribution Board

5

9


3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 887 / 910


17.2.2 CA02


Shield

4

3

2

1

7

6

5

8

9

1

6

BTS A9100 side Customer’s Distribution Board

5

9

Customer dependent9−pin Sub−D male


17.2.3 CA03


Shield

TX

RX


888 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.2.4 CA04


Shield


17.2.5 CA-CBTE

The CA-CBTE (part number 3BK 07951) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.

Shield

9−pin Sub−D male1

6

SUM BTS Terminal

5

9

1

6

5

9


4

3

2

1

7

6

5

8

9

4

3

2

1

7

6

5

8

9

Figure 577: CA-CBTE Connections

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 889 / 910


17.2.6 CA-GC35

The CA-GC35 (part number 3BK 08031) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.

BTS A9100 Customer’s Ground Point


Figure 578: CA-GC35 Connections

17.2.7 CA-GND

The CA-GND (part number 3BK 25349) cable connection is shown in thefollowing figure.

Lug, Ring M8 Lug, Ring M8

Figure 579: CA-GND Connection

17.2.8 CA-PC2W16

The CA-PC2W16 (part number 3BK 08029) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.

BTS A9100 Customer’s −48/0 VDC Source

1

2

3

4

1 2 3 4

Black Wire 0 V Black Wire 0 V

Blue Wire −48 V Blue Wire −48 V

Lug, ring, crimp, 5.8 mm Lug, ring, crimp, 5.8 mm

Figure 580: CA-PC2W16 Connections

890 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.2.9 CA-PC35BK

The CA-PC35BL (part number 3BK 08032) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.

Customer’s 0 VDC Source

Black Wire 0 V Black Wire 0 V


BTS A9100

Figure 581: CA-PC35BK Connections

17.2.10 CA-PC35BL

The CA-PC35BL (part number 3BK 08032) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.

BTS A9100 Customer’s −48 VDC Source

Blue Wire −48 V Blue Wire −48 V


Figure 582: CA-PC35BL Connections

17.2.11 CA-PCEBM

The CA-PCEBM (part number 3BK 25260) cable connection is shown inthe following figure.

Shrinking Sleeve Lug, Ring M6

Lug, Pin

Figure 583: CA-PCEBM Connection

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 891 / 910


17.2.12 CA-PCEBP

The CA-PCEBP (part number 3BK 25259) cable connection is shown inthe following figure.

Shrinking Sleeve Lug, Ring M6

Lug, Pin

Figure 584: CA-PCEBP Connection

17.2.13 CA-RIBEB

The CA-RIBEB (part number 3BK 25258) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.

15 pin male connector

123123123

123123123

15 pin female connector

1

8

9

15Wiring list

COAR/OUTC SideP1/male

1/9, 2/104/12, 6/145/13, 83/11, 7/15

External Battery SideP2/female

1/9, 2/104/12, 6/145/13, 83/11, 7/15

Quad Number

IIIIIIiV 1

8

9

15

Figure 585: CA-RIBEB Connections

892 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.2.14 CA-RIBEO

The CA-RIBEO (part number 3BK 26138) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.

15 pin male connector(to OUTC at BTS )

123412341234

123412341234

15 pin female connector(to first RIBAT at externalBattery Cabinet outdoor;assembling on site afterguiding through cable gland)

1

8

9

15Wiring list

COAR/OUTC SideP1/male

1/9, 2/104/12, 6/145/13, 83/11, 7/15

External Battery SideP2/female

1/9, 2/104/12, 6/145/13, 83/11, 7/15

Quad Number

IIIIIIiV

1

8

9

15

Figure 586: CA-RIBEO Connections

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 893 / 910


17.2.15 OCC23

The OCC23 (part number 3BK 08303) cable connections are shown in thefollowing figure.

1Shield

3

4

5

8

9

2

7

6

G2 BTSBTS A9100

1

3

4

5

8

9

2

7

6

1

6

5

9

Shield Solder Point1

6

5

9

9−pin Sub−D male 9−pin Sub−D male

Figure 587: OCC23 Connections

894 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.2.16 OCC33

The OCC33 (part number 3BK 08304) cable connections are shown in thefollowing figure.

1Shield

3

4

5

8

9

2

7

6

BTS A9100

1

3

4

5

8

9

2

7

6

1

6

5

9

Shield Solder Point1

6

5

9


BTS A9100

Figure 588: OCC33 Connections

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 895 / 910


17.2.17 SCG2/3

The SCG2/3 (part number 3BK 08101) cable connections are shown in thefollowing figure.

1Shield


3

4

5

8

9

2

7

6

1

6

G2 BTS BTS A9100

5

9

1

3

4

5

8

9

2

7

6

1

6

5

9

Shield Solder Point


Figure 589: SCG2/3 Connections

896 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.2.18 SCG3

The SCG3 (part number 3BK 07950) cable connections are shown in thefollowing figure.

1Shield

4

3

2

7

6

5

8

9

1

6

COAR of First BTS A9100 COAR of Second BTS A9100

5

9

1

4

3

2

7

6

5

8

9

1

6

5

9


Figure 590: SCG3 Connections

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 897 / 910


17.2.19 SCM1/3

The SCM1/3 (part number 3BK 08102) cable connections are shown in thefollowing figure.

1Shield

P1

7

6

9

2

5

8

3

4

1

6

BTS A9100 G1 BTS Mark1

5

9

1

3

4

5

8

9

2

7

6

1

6

5

9

P2

Shield Solder Point

P3

1

6

5

9

P1

P3

P2

9−pin Sub−D maleP1, P2, P3:

Figure 591: SCM1/3 Connections

898 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13


17.2.20 SCM2/3

The SCM2/3 (part number 3BK 08103) cable connections are shown in thefollowing figure.

1Shield


3

4

5

8

9

2

7

6

1

6

G1 BTS Mark2 BTS A9100

5

9

1

3

4

5

8

9

2

7

6

1

6

5

9

Shield Solder Point


Figure 592: SCM2/3 Connections

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 899 / 910


900 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

18 Environment

18 Environment

The sections are supported with data tables, where necessary. Referencesto the relevant European and International standards are also given, whenappropriate.

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 901 / 910

18 Environment

18.1 Indoor Climatic and Mechanical ConditionsThis section describes the climatic and mechanical conditions required for thesafe and efficient operation of indoor BTS A9100 equipment.

It includes information on the following:

Environmental requirements

Operational conditions

Transportation conditions

Storage conditions.

18.1.1 Environmental Requirements

The BTS A9100 equipment housings provide the necessary environmental andsafety protection according to the standard ETS 300 019, for indoor equipment.

18.1.2 Operational Conditions

Operational conditions are specified in accordance with Class 3.1E, ETS 300019-1-3, as shown in the following table.

Type Condition Limit

Low temperature -5� CClimatic

High temperature +45� C

Low relative humidity 5 %

High relative humidity 90 %

Low absolute humidity 1 g/ m3

High absolute humidity 25 g/ m3

Rate of change of temperature 0.5� C/ min

Low air pressure 70 kPa

High air pressure 106 kPa

Mechanical Displacement amplitude in Frequency Range 2-9 Hz 0.3 mm p-p

(Vibration) Acceleration amplitude in Frequency Range 9-200 Hz 0.1 m/ s2

Shock - 40 m/ s2

Table 173: Environmental Conditions for Indoor Operation

902 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

18 Environment

18.1.3 Transportation Conditions

Transportation conditions are specified in accordance with Class2.2, ETS 300019 -1-2, as shown in the following table.


Low temperature -40� C




Climatic


Displacement amplitude (frequency 2- 9 Hz) 3.5 mm

Acceleration amplitude (frequency 9-200 Hz) 10 m/ s2


Free Fall 100 mm

Steady State Acceleration 20 m/ s2

Mechanical

Static Load 5 kPa

Table 174: Environmental Conditions for Transportation

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 903 / 910

18 Environment

18.1.4 Storage Conditions

Storage conditions are specified in accordance with Class 1.2, ETS 300 019-1-1, as shown in the following table.






Low absolute humidity 0.5 g/ m3



Climatic


Displacement amplitude (frequency 2 - 9 Hz) 1.5 mm

Acceleration amplitude (frequency 9 - 200 Hz) 5 m/ s2


Mechanical

Static Load 5 kPa

Table 175: Environmental Conditions for Storage

904 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

18 Environment

18.2 Outdoor Climatic and Mechanical ConditionsThis section describes the climatic and mechanical conditions required for thesafe and efficient operation of outdoor BTS A9100 equipment.

It includes information on the following:

Environmental requirements

Operational conditions

Transportation conditions

Storage conditions.

18.2.1 Environmental Requirements

The BTS A9100 equipment housings provide the necessary environmentaland safety protection according to the standard ETS 300 019, for outdoorequipment.

18.2.2 Operational Conditions

Operational conditions are specified in accordance with Class 4.1E, ETS 300019-1 -4, as shown in the following table.


Low temperature -45� CClimatic






Rate of change of temperature 0.5� C/ min



Mechanical Displacement amplitude in Frequency Range 2-9 Hz 1.5 mm p-p

(Vibration) Acceleration amplitude in Frequency Range 9-200 Hz 5 m/ s2

Shock - 70 m/ s2

Table 176: Environmental Conditions for Outdoor Operation

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 905 / 910

18 Environment

18.2.3 Transportation Conditions

Transportation conditions are specified in accordance with Class2.2, ETS 300019 -1-2, as shown in the following table.






Climatic





Free Fall 100 mm


Mechanical

Static Load 5 kPa

Table 177: Environmental Conditions for Transportation

906 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

18 Environment

18.2.4 Storage Conditions

Storage conditions are specified in accordance with Class 1.2, ETS 300 019-1-1, as shown in the following table.









Climatic



Acceleration amplitude (frequency 9 - 200 Hz) 5 m/ s2


Mechanical

Static Load 5 kPa

Table 178: Environmental Conditions for Storage

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 907 / 910

18 Environment

18.3 Electromagnetic CompatibilityThis section describes the EMC compatibility of BTS A9100 equipment.

It provides information on the following:

EMC immunity

Transient bursts

Spurious emissions.

BTS A9100 equipment complies with the following EMC standards:

European Directive 89/336/EEC

ETS 300 342 Part 2, and Draft ETSI EN 300 342 Part 2.

18.3.1 EMC Immunity

This section contains information on EMC immunity. EMC immunity ensures thenormal operation of BTS A9100 equipment when subjected to the conditionsspecified in the following table.

Parameter Standard

Electrostatic Discharge IEC 1000-4-2: Levels 2 and 3.

RF Common Mode IEC 1000-4-6: 3 Vrms 150 kHz to 80 MHz.

Radiated Fields IEC 1000-4-3: 3 V/ m, 80 MHz to 1 GHz (+ 1.8 GHz excepted reception band).

Transient Pulse Immunity IEC 1000-4-4: Levels 2 and 3 (see Table Permitted Transient Bursts (180)).

ETS 300 342-2.

Surges (on AC lines) IEC 1000-4-5: level 500 V at differential mode; level 1 kV at common mode.

Note that all outdoor Evolium™ BTS A9100 external lines have better surgeprotection characteristics than that defined in IEC 1000-4-5.

Table 179: EMC Immunity

908 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

18 Environment

18.3.2 Transient Bursts

The following table shows the IEC 1000-4-4 Levels 2 and 3 transient voltagebursts. These are the voltage bursts that the different types of lines canwithstand without causing permanent defects to the equipment.

Peak Amplitude Level Line Type

±2000 V 3 AC power lines

±1000 V 2 DC power lines

±500 V 2 Signal lines (including RF)

Table 180: Permitted Transient Bursts

Note: The amplitudes shown in the above table must not exceed 50 ns duration orhave a rise time of less than 5 ns.

18.3.3 Spurious Emissions

Potential EMC emissions of BTS A9100 equipment (unintentionally produced)are shown in the following table.

Type Standard Frequency Range

Conducted Emissions onPower Lines:

EN 55022 Class B (AC powered BTS)

EN 55022 Class A (DC powered BTS)

150 kHz - 30 MHz

Radiated Emissions fromEnclosure:

GSM 11.21 30 MHz - 4 GHz

Table 181: EMC Emissions

3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 909 / 910

18 Environment

18.4 Acoustic NoiseThis section describes the acoustic noise parameters which apply to BTSA9100 equipment. The acoustic noise generated by the equipment is measuredaccording to ISO 7779 and ISO 9296. Noise limits for the measurements are inaccordance with GSM 11.22 and ETS 300 753, respectively.

18.5 Safety RequirementsSafety standards cover protection against:

Electric shock

Skin burns

Radio frequency radiation hazards

Fire hazards

Mechanical hazards

Energy hazards

Chemical hazards.

The indoor and outdoor BTS are compliant with the following safety standards:

Indoor BTSEN60215 - Safety Requirements for Radio Transmitting EquipmentEN60950 - Safety of Information Technology Equipment.

Outdoor BTSEN60215 - Safety Requirements for Radio Transmitting EquipmentEN60950 - Safety of Information Technology EquipmentEN41003 - Safety Requirements for Apparatus for Connection toTelecommunications NetworksISO 3864 - Safety Colors and Safety Signs.

910 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13

Documents

Alcatel BTS Hardware Description